JP7833752B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that can execute display effects using a display device when a game ball enters the starting slot (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

These types of gaming machines can display and show visuals using character images and symbols.

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-202930 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the aforementioned gaming machines, there was still room for improvement in terms of technology to enhance the enjoyment of the games.

This invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems and aims to improve the enjoyment of games.

This invention was made to solve at least some of the above-mentioned problems and can be realized in the following application examples. The reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section are for the purpose of aiding understanding of the invention and indicate correspondences with the embodiments described later; they do not limit the invention in any way.

[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect is an effect in which a first timer display in which a numerical value is displayed in a first manner,
The second display effect is an effect in which a second timer display is shown in which a numerical value is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner ,
The first display effect and the second display effect are performed during the same variation effect.
The update rate of the smallest digit of the number displayed in the first timer display is different from the update rate of the smallest digit of the number displayed in the second timer display.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

According to this invention, the enjoyment of games can be enhanced.

This is a front view of the gaming machine. This is a magnified view of the display units. This block diagram shows the electrical configuration of the main control board side of a gaming machine. This block diagram shows the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of a gaming machine. This is a diagram illustrating the main ROM and main RAM. This is a diagram illustrating sub-ROM and sub-RAM. This diagram illustrates the various types of random numbers used in gaming machines. This is a diagram illustrating the judgment tables T1 to T4. This is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 when the time is not shortened. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during the time-saving state. This is an explanatory diagram of the electric reel opening pattern determination table T7. This is an explanatory diagram of the T8 table for determining the pattern of opening the grand prize slot. This is an explanatory diagram of the V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. This is a flowchart of the main control process. This is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt processing. This is a flowchart of the starter sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the pre-determination process shown in Figure 2. Figure 1 is a flowchart of the pre-determination process. This is a flowchart of the normal operation process. This is a flowchart for special operation processing. This is a flowchart for the special symbol waiting process. This is a flowchart for the process of determining a jackpot. This is the first flowchart for the variable pattern selection process. This is the second flowchart for the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of the processing during special symbol changes. This is a flowchart for the process of determining special symbols. This is a flowchart for managing the game state. This is a flowchart for the game state reset process. This is a flowchart for the special electric mechanism processing. This is a flowchart of the V-shaped opening/closing mechanism operation process. This is a flowchart for the game state setting process. This is a flowchart of the V-region sensor detection process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of balls held in reserve. This is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. This is a flowchart for the sub-system timer interrupt processing. This is a flowchart of the received command parsing process. This is a flowchart for the process of determining the pre-announced animation. This is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the pre-determined information storage area. This is an explanatory diagram of the pre-announcement effect pattern determination table T51. This is a flowchart for the process of initiating the variable animation. This is an explanatory diagram of the core performance pattern determination table T52. This is an explanatory diagram of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. This is a flowchart of the processing during the variation animation. This is a flowchart of the display control process. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable component 14. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second embodiment of the first movable component 14. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second embodiment of the second movable component 15. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second embodiment of the movable frame component 69. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screen 64. This is a diagram to explain the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect A. This is a diagram to explain the B-stage display of the remaining confirmed stop symbols. This is a diagram to explain the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect C. This is a diagram illustrating the variable display area change effect A. This is a diagram illustrating the variable display area change effect B. This is a diagram illustrating the variable display area change effect C. This is a diagram illustrating the overlapping display area effect A. This is a diagram to explain the overlapping display area effect B. This is a diagram illustrating the overlapping effect C of the variable display area. This is a diagram illustrating the effect A where the stop position of the decorative pattern is unpredictable. This is a diagram to explain the effect B where the stop position of the decorative pattern is unpredictable. This is a diagram illustrating the effect C where the stopping position of the decorative pattern is unpredictable. This is a diagram to explain the sudden confirmation and stop effect A of the decorative pattern. This is a diagram to explain the sudden confirmation and stop effect B for the decorative pattern. This is a diagram to explain the sudden confirmation and stop effect C of the decorative pattern. This is a diagram to explain the interactive effect A. This is a diagram to explain the interactive effect B. This is a diagram to explain the interactive effect C. This is a diagram to explain the scrolling effect A. This is a diagram to explain the scrolling effect B. This is a diagram to explain the scrolling effect C. This is a diagram to explain the special variation effect A of the decorative pattern. This is a diagram to explain the special variation effect B of the decorative pattern. This is a diagram to explain the special variation effect C of the decorative pattern. This is a diagram illustrating the missing decorative pattern in demonstration A. This is a diagram to explain the missing decorative pattern in demonstration B. This is a diagram illustrating the missing decorative pattern C. This is a diagram to explain the "Hill-Reaching Indication" effect A. This is a diagram to explain the "Hill-Reaching Indication B" effect. This is a diagram to explain the ceiling-reach indication effect C. This is a diagram illustrating the mode indication image display effect A. This diagram illustrates the mode indication image display effect B. This diagram illustrates the mode indication image display effect C. This diagram illustrates the continuation of the mode-indicating image sequence A. This diagram explains the continuation of the mode-indicating image sequence B. This diagram illustrates the continuation of the mode-indicating image sequence C. This is a diagram illustrating the multi-section display effect A. This is a diagram to explain the multi-section display effect B. This is a diagram illustrating the multi-section display effect C. This is a diagram illustrating the timer display animation A for each function. This is a diagram illustrating the timer display animation B for each function. This is a diagram illustrating the timer display animation C for each function. This is a diagram illustrating specific image transition effect A. This is a diagram to explain the specific image transition effect B. This is a diagram illustrating the specific image transition effect C. This is a diagram illustrating the specific image absorption effect A. This is a diagram illustrating the specific image absorption effect B. This is a diagram illustrating the specific image absorption effect C. This is a diagram to explain the string decomposition effect A. This is a diagram to explain the string decomposition effect B. This is a diagram to explain the string decomposition effect C. This is a diagram to explain the display animation A for the jackpot game count. This is a diagram to explain the display animation B for the jackpot game count. This is a diagram illustrating the display animation C for the jackpot game count. This is a diagram to explain the double timer display effect A. This is a diagram to explain the double timer display effect B. This is a diagram to explain the double timer display effect C. This is a diagram illustrating the final screen display effect A. This is a diagram to explain the final screen display effect B. This is a diagram illustrating the final screen display effect C. This is a diagram to explain the promotion/hold consecutive effect A. This is a diagram to explain the promotion/hold consecutive effect B. This is a diagram to explain the promotion/hold consecutive effect C. This is a diagram illustrating the operation instruction display effect A. This is a diagram illustrating the operation instruction display effect B. This is a diagram illustrating the operation instruction display effect C. This is a diagram to explain the special button display effect A. This is a diagram to explain the special button display effect B. This is a diagram to explain the special button display effect C. This is a diagram illustrating the effect A, which shows whether the effect button is enabled or disabled. This is a diagram to explain the effect B, which displays whether the effect button is enabled or disabled. This is a diagram illustrating the effect C, which shows whether the effect button is enabled or disabled. This is a diagram illustrating automated operation animation A. This is a diagram to explain the automated operation effect B. This is a diagram illustrating the automated operation and effect C. This diagram illustrates the relationship between the first movable component and the frame-movable component. This is a diagram to explain the double-feature effect A. This is a diagram to explain the double special effect B. This is a diagram illustrating the movable member contact effect A. This is a diagram illustrating the movable member contact effect B. This is a diagram illustrating the movable member contact effect C.

<First Embodiment>
1. Structure of the Gaming Machine Figure 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen from the perspective of a player facing the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that launches game balls based on the player's launching operation, and when a game ball enters a specific prize-winning device, it pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on that win. The game machine 1 comprises a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, with the game board 2 mounted inside the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 comprises a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer casing of the game machine, and an inner frame inside the outer frame to which the game board 2 is mounted. The front frame (front frame section) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit positioned in front of the outer and inner frames, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, a performance button 63, sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), a sword member 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 69. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, allowing the game area 3 of the game board 2 to be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is positioned at the lower right end of the front frame 53 and launches the game balls with a launching force corresponding to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60 are movable frame movable parts 69 (also called frame movable components 69), which are so-called gimmicks. The frame movable parts 69 are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, with two members positioned on each side of the handle 60. Each of the two members is made of a flexible, flat plate-like material, and its main surface is configured to move closer to or further away from the handle 60. Normally, the frame movable parts 69 are stationary in retracted positions (Figure 1), away from the handle 60, on the left and right sides respectively. They can move (advance) from the retracted position toward the handle 60, approaching each other and stopping in a position where they touch the handle 60. When in the advanced position, the frame movable parts 69 touch the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60.

The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is located below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The excess ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operating part located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is located inside the effect button 63 and is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right in response to effects, etc. The sword member 65 is an operating part modeled after the shape of a sword and can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is the screen of a liquid crystal display device and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is located on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is located on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is located above the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are positioned in pairs via the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is located above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or it may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix display device. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and is positioned above the front frame 53 to provide illumination during gameplay. The right frame lamp is a diagonally shaped light-emitting section positioned between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonally shaped light-emitting section positioned between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speaker 67 is positioned above and to the left of the front frame 53 to provide sound effects during gameplay.

The game board 2 comprises a game area 3, rail members 4, board lamps 5, image display device 7, a first movable board body 14, a second movable board body 15, a fixed prize winning device (center hole) 19, a regular variable prize winning device (electric chute) 22, a gate (through checker) 28, a first major prize winning device (first attacker) 31, a second major prize winning device (second attacker) 36, a major prize winning opening start opening 17, a general prize winning opening 27 (regular prize winning opening 27), an out opening 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is the area through which the game balls launched by the operation of the handle 60 flow, and is equipped with multiple game pins to guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is positioned at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game balls launched by the operation of the handle 60 upwards within the game area 3. The board lamps 5 are positioned on the rear side of the game area 3 and emit light from the rear side of the game area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamps and the left frame lamps, configured to have a continuous shape and light emission.

The image display device 7 is located near the center of the game area 3 and is equipped with a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or other image display devices such as an organic EL display device, plasma display, projector, or dot matrix display device. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a performance symbol display area where performance symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display), a hold image display area where hold images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a hold digestion image display area (the hold display area) where the hold digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing holds, and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the said hold, and is also called the said hold image 9C, the said hold icon 9C, the said variable icon 9C, or the variable icon 9C. The said hold icon 9C is sometimes simply called the hold icon.

The display area for the performance symbols includes three symbol display areas: "left," "center," and "right." The left symbol display area displays the left performance symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L. The center symbol display area displays the center performance symbol (center decorative symbol) 8C. The right symbol display area displays the right performance symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R. Performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of multiple symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9," for example. The variable display of performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first and second special symbols, described later. The image display device 7 can clearly display to the player the results of the variable display of the first and second special symbols (jackpot lottery results) displayed by the first and second special symbol displayers 41a and 41b, described later, based on the combination of performance symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas.

For example, if a jackpot is won, the display will stop on a set of matching numbers such as "777". If the result is a loss, the display will stop on a set of scattered numbers such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game. The player can understand the jackpot lottery result from the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Also, the mode of display of the changing display of the display symbols may be a vertical scrolling mode or other mode. The combination of display symbols that stops to be displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereafter, the display of the display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be called the "display of display symbols," the "display of decorative symbols," or simply the "display of display" or "display of display." Furthermore, the variation in the decorative symbols is counted as one variation (one cycle of variation) for the period from when the special symbols start to change until they stop (also called the special symbol variation period). Therefore, even if the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to change until they stop, the effect of that temporary stop is included in the variation of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on its display screen 7a, various elements including the changing symbols in the game, jackpot sequences performed in parallel with jackpot games (an example of a special game), and demo sequences for when customers are waiting. In the changing symbols sequence, in addition to the symbols themselves, background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 7 may display an identification indicator (fourth symbol, not shown) on its display screen 7a that suggests, in addition to the symbols, that a special symbol is changing or indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. The identification indicator (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED located in the game area 3.

The hold image display area includes a first hold display area that displays hold image 9A according to the number of first special symbol hold items (described later), and a second hold display area that displays hold image 9B according to the number of second special symbol hold items (described later). The display of hold images 9A and 9B clearly shows the player the number of first special symbol hold items displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 43a and the number of second special symbol hold items displayed on the second special symbol hold indicator 43b. The hold consumption image display area includes a hold consumption display area that displays hold consumption image 9C. Hold consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) on display screen 7a or display screen 7b. The display of hold consumption image 9C clearly shows the player that the first or second special symbol hold items are being consumed (described later as "consumption of special symbol hold items").

On the left side of the image display device 7 is a movable mechanism, specifically a first movable panel 14 (also called the first movable component 14). The first movable component 14 is a vertically elongated rod-shaped member that is movable horizontally in front of the image display device 7. Normally, the first movable component 14 is stationary in a retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7 (Figure 1). It can move (advance) from this position towards the right edge of the display screen 7a and stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable component 14 is formed to be approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and in its advanced position, it covers a portion of the image display device 7 from top to bottom.

Above the image display device 7 is a movable mechanism, specifically a second movable panel 15 (also called the second movable component 15). The second movable component 15 consists of a rectangular component (decorative part) inscribed with "OARO," which is configured to move vertically. Normally, the second movable component 15 is stationary in a retracted position above the image display device 7 (Figure 1). From this position, it can move downward (advance) towards the center of the display screen 7a and stop in an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. When stopped in the advanced position, the second movable component 15 covers a portion of the image display device 7.

A stage section 11 is formed at the lower part of the image display device 7. The stage section 11 has a shape that allows game balls rolling on its upper surface to be guided to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 has an inlet for game balls to enter and an outlet for game balls to exit, and the game balls that enter from the inlet are directed out of the outlet to the stage section 11.

The fixed prize entry device (center hole) 19 is positioned below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 and is equipped with a first start opening (first start prize entry opening, first ball entry opening, fixed start opening) 20 that ensures consistent ease of entry for the game ball. The entry of a game ball into the first start opening 20 triggers the lottery for the first special symbol (jackpot lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 20 triggers the acquisition of jackpot random numbers and jackpot determination.

The standard variable prize entry device (electric chute) 22 is positioned below the first start opening 20 in the game area 3 and is equipped with a second start opening (second start prize entry opening, second ball entry opening, variable start opening) 21. The entry of a game ball into the second start opening 21 triggers the drawing of the second special symbol (jackpot drawing). The electric chute 22 is equipped with a movable member 23 in front of the second start opening 21, and the operation of the movable member 23 opens and closes the second start opening 21. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (Figure 3). The second start opening 21 allows game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is open. Note that the electric chute 22 only needs to allow easier entry of balls into the second start opening 21 when the movable member 23 is open than when it is closed; it is also acceptable for balls to enter the second start opening 21 when it is closed.

The gate (through checker) 28 is positioned above the first major prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. The passage of a game ball through gate 28 triggers a regular symbol lottery that determines whether or not to open the electric chute 22. In other words, the passage of a game ball through gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a regular symbol random number (winning random number) and the determination of a win.

Here, "special symbol lottery" refers to the process of determining whether a jackpot has been won by obtaining a random number for special symbol determination when a game ball enters the first start opening 20 or the second start opening 21, and comparing this obtained random number with a predetermined value corresponding to a "jackpot." The result of this "jackpot" lottery is not immediately communicated to the player. Instead, the special symbol is displayed in a variable state on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b (described later). After a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as stopped (confirmed), and the result is communicated to the player. The image display device 7 performs a symbol matching game, which displays a variable effect symbol in synchronization with the variable special symbol display. This symbol matching game more effectively communicates the jackpot lottery result to the player.

Furthermore, "the drawing of a regular symbol" refers to the process of determining whether a player has won or lost by obtaining a random number for regular symbol determination when the game ball passes through gate 28 and comparing this obtained random number with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win." The result of this regular symbol drawing is not immediately announced when the game ball passes through gate 28. Instead, the regular symbol display unit 42 (described later) displays the changing regular symbols, and after a predetermined changing time has elapsed, the regular symbol corresponding to the drawing result is displayed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the drawing result.

The first major prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is positioned to the upper right of the first start opening 20 in the game area 3 and comprises the first major prize winning opening (first special prize winning opening) 30, a V-area 39, a non-V-area 70, and a V-opening/closing member 71. The first major prize winning opening 30 is equipped with an opening/closing member (first special prize winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls through a swing-type opening and closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first major prize winning opening solenoid 33 (Figure 3). When the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state, game balls can enter the first major prize winning opening 30.

The first large prize winning device 31 includes, internally, a V-region (specific region) 39, a V-region sensor 39a (Figure 3), a non-V-region (non-specific region) 70, a non-V-region sensor 70a (Figure 3), a first large prize opening sensor 30a (Figure 3), a V-opening/closing member 71, and a V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 (Figure 3). The V-region (specific region) 39 and the non-V-region (non-specific region) 70 are configured within the first large prize winning device 31 as regions through which game balls that have passed through the first large prize opening 30 can pass. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is positioned upstream of the V-region 39 and the non-V-region 70 and detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 30. The V-region sensor 39a is positioned in the V-region 39 and detects the passage of a game ball into the V-region 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is positioned in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of game balls into the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes game balls that have passed through the first large prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise relative to the game board 2). When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to a first state (rotating state) that distributes game balls to the V area 39. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is positioned at the origin and enters a second state (stopped state) that distributes game balls to the non-V area 70. The V-opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement; it only needs to have the function of distributing game balls that have passed through the first large prize opening 30 to either the V-region 39 or the non-V-region 70. For example, it may be configured to move in the left-right direction relative to the game board 2. That is, when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it may be configured to be in a retracted state (first state) that distributes game balls to the V-region 39, and when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it may be configured to be in an advanced state (second state) that distributes game balls to the non-V-region 70. In the game machine 1, the passage of game balls into the V-region 39 is the trigger for transitioning to the high-probability state described later. In other words, the V-region 39 is the probability variation activation opening. On the other hand, the non-V-region 70 is not the probability variation activation opening. The first large prize device 31 of this embodiment is further equipped with a first large prize device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first large prize device 31. The first prize-winning device discharge sensor is located at the point where the V-region 39 and the non-V-region 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V-region sensor 39a or the non-V-region sensor 70a.

The second major prize-winning device (second attacker, second special variable prize-winning device) 36 is positioned to the upper right of the first major prize-winning opening 30 in the game area 3 and includes a second major prize-winning opening (second special prize-winning opening) 35. The second major prize-winning opening 35 is equipped with an opening/closing member (second special prize-winning opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows the acceptance of game balls through a swing-type opening and closing motion. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second major prize-winning opening solenoid 38 (Figure 3). When the opening/closing member 37 is in the open position, game balls can enter the second major prize-winning opening 35.

The large prize opening starter 17 is positioned above the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large prize opening 30 opens when a game ball passes through. However, the game machine 1 does not necessarily have to be equipped with the large prize opening starter 17.

The general prize entry point 27 is located at the bottom of the game area 3. The out entry point 16 is also located at the bottom of the game area 3 and discharges game balls that do not enter any of the prize entry points to the outside of the game area 3. The display units 40 are located near the center right of the game board 2. Details of the display units 40 will be described later. The general prize entry point 29 is located in the lower right of the game area 3, adjacent to the right of the first major prize entry point 30.

The game area 3 is divided into a left game area 3A, located to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 3B, located to the right. The method of shooting the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed shooting." Conversely, the method of shooting the game ball so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed shooting." In the game machine 1, left-handed shooting allows players to aim for entry into the first starting opening 20. On the other hand, right-handed shooting allows players to aim for entry into the gate 28, the second starting opening 21, the first large prize opening 30, and the second large prize opening 35.

Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the display unit 40. The display unit 40 includes a first special symbol display unit 41a, a second special symbol display unit 41b, a normal symbol display unit 42, a first special symbol hold display unit 43a, a second special symbol hold display unit 43b, and a normal symbol hold display unit 44. The first special symbol display unit 41a displays the first special symbol in a variable manner. The second special symbol display unit 41b displays the second special symbol in a variable manner. The normal symbol display unit 42 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner. The first special symbol hold display unit 43a displays the number of reserved functions (first special symbol hold) stored for the first special symbol display unit 41a. The second special symbol hold display unit 43b displays the number of reserved functions (second special symbol hold) stored for the second special symbol display unit 41b. The regular symbol hold indicator 44 displays the number of regular symbol hold indicators (regular symbol hold) stored in the regular symbol indicator 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by a game ball entering the second start opening 21. Hereafter, the first and second special symbols will be collectively referred to as "special symbols." The first special symbol indicator 41a and the second special symbol indicator 41b will also be collectively referred to as "special symbol indicator 41." Furthermore, the first special symbol hold indicator 43a and the second special symbol hold indicator 43b will also be collectively referred to as "special symbol hold indicator 43."

The special symbol display unit 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display), and then displays a stopped display to announce the result of the lottery (special symbol winning lottery, jackpot lottery) based on entry into the first start opening 20 or the second start opening 21. The special symbol displayed as stopped (stopped symbol, special symbol displayed as a result of the variable display) is one special symbol selected from multiple types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, a special game (jackpot game) is performed in which the first large prize opening 30 or the second large prize opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol displayed as stopped (type of jackpot won). The opening patterns of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 30 and second large prize opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display unit 41 consists of eight LEDs arranged horizontally, and the way they light up indicates the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol winning lottery. For example, if a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later) is won, the jackpot symbol is displayed with the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left lit up, such as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). If it is a loss, the losing symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off may also be adopted for the losing symbol. Before the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the special symbol is displayed in a variable state for a predetermined period of time. The mode of the variable display may be, for example, each LED lighting up so that the light flows repeatedly from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode is possible as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted in a specific mode). For example, the mode of the variable display may be all LEDs flashing simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers, such as the jackpot random number, acquired for that entry are temporarily stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 85 (Figure 5). Specifically, if the ball enters the first start port 20, it is stored as the first special symbol reserve in the first special symbol reserve storage area 85a (Figure 5), and if the ball enters the second start port 21, it is stored as the second special symbol reserve in the second special symbol reserve storage area 85b (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of special symbol reserves that can be stored in each special symbol reserve storage area 85, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is 4 for both the first special symbol reserve storage area 85a and the second special symbol reserve storage area 85b. The special symbol reserves stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 85 are consumed when it becomes possible to display the special symbols based on those special symbol reserves in a variable manner. "Depleting the special symbol reserve" refers to determining the jackpot random number corresponding to the special symbol reserve and executing a variable display of the special symbol to indicate the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, even if the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the entry—that is, even if the entry occurs while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or while a special game is being played—the right to a jackpot lottery for that entry can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special symbol reserves is displayed on the special symbol reserve indicator 43. The first special symbol reserve indicator 43a and the second special symbol reserve indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special symbol reserve indicator 43 displays the number of special symbol reserves by lighting up the corresponding number of LEDs.

The variable display of the regular symbols is triggered by the passage of a game ball through gate 28. The regular symbol display unit 42 displays the regular symbols in a variable (variable) manner, and then displays a stopped symbol to indicate the result of the regular symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball through gate 28. The regular symbol displayed as stopped (regular symbol stopped symbol, the regular symbol displayed as a result of the variable display) is one regular symbol selected from multiple types of regular symbols through the regular symbol lottery. If the regular symbol stopped symbol is a predetermined specific regular symbol (a regular symbol with a predetermined stopping pattern, i.e., a regular winning symbol), an auxiliary game is performed to open the second start opening 21 in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state. The opening patterns of the second start opening 21 will be described later.

The regular symbol indicator 42 consists of two LEDs, and displays the regular symbol corresponding to the result of the regular symbol lottery depending on the lighting pattern of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, it displays a regular winning symbol with both LEDs lit, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, it displays a regular losing symbol with only the right LED lit, such as "●○". A pattern where all LEDs are off may also be used to represent a regular losing symbol. Before the regular symbol is displayed as stopped, the regular symbol is displayed as fluctuating for a predetermined fluctuating time. The fluctuating display pattern may, for example, involve both LEDs lighting up alternately. The fluctuating display pattern is not limited to the above patterns and can be any lighting pattern, as long as each LED is not displayed as stopped (lit in a specific pattern). For example, the fluctuating display pattern may involve all LEDs flashing simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) obtained for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal symbol reserve in the normal symbol reserve storage area 86 (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of normal symbol reserves that can be stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 86, and in this configuration, the upper limit is 4. Normal symbol reserves stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 86 are consumed when it becomes possible to display a variable normal symbol based on that normal symbol reserve. Consumption of a normal symbol reserve means determining the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to that normal symbol reserve and executing a variable normal symbol display to show the result of that determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if a variable normal symbol display based on the passage of a game ball through gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, even if a win occurs while the variable normal symbol display is being executed or while an auxiliary game is being executed, the right to draw a normal symbol for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved slots is displayed on the reserved slot indicator 44. The reserved slot indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of reserved slots by lighting up the corresponding number of LEDs.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on Figures 3 and 4. Figure 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. Figure 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (Figure 3), a sub-control board 90 (Figure 4), an image control board 100 (Figure 4), a lamp control board 107 (Figure 4), an audio control board 106 (Figure 4), and a payout control board 110 (Figure 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control related to game benefits such as jackpot抽選 and transitions in game states, and constitutes the main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control related to effects executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes the sub-control unit. Furthermore, the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least a sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 comprises a game control microcontroller 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcontroller 81 is a single-chip microcontroller mounted on the main control board 80 and controls the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcontroller 81 includes a main ROM 83 for storing programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as work memory, and a main CPU 82 for executing the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the memory areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcontroller 81 transmits and receives data with other boards, etc., via the input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcontroller 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via input/output circuits 87 and relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via relay board 88 include the large prize opening start sensor 17a, the first start sensor 20a, the second start sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize sensor 30a, the second large prize sensor 35a, the V-region sensor 39a, the non-V-region sensor 70a, and the normal prize sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of solenoids connected via relay board 88 include the electric tuner solenoid 24, the first large prize solenoid 33, the second large prize solenoid 38, and the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large prize opening start sensor 17a is installed inside the large prize opening start opening 17 and detects game balls that have entered the large prize opening start opening 17. The first start opening sensor 20a is installed inside the first start opening 20 and detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is installed inside the second start opening 21 and detects game balls that have entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is installed inside the gate 28 and detects game balls that have passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is installed inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is installed inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 35. The V-region sensor 39a is located in the V-region 39 inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have passed through the V-region 39. The non-V-region sensor 70a is located in the non-V-region 70 inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-region 70. The normal prize opening sensor 27a is located inside the normal prize opening 27 and detects game balls that have entered the normal prize opening 27. The normal prize opening sensor 29a detects game balls that have passed inside the normal prize opening 29. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. The V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of the first grand prize winning device 31.

The main control board 80 is connected to the display units 40 via the input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the regular symbol display 42, the first special symbol hold display 43a, the second special symbol hold display 43b, and the regular symbol hold display 44.

The main control board 80 is connected to the payout control board 110 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 dispenses prize balls. Based on signals from the game control microcomputer 81, the payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to dispense prize balls. The dispensed prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 dispenses rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball dispensing motor 131 of the ball dispensing device 130 to dispense balls based on signals from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The dispensed balls are detected by the ball dispensing sensor 132 for counting purposes. The card unit 135 is located adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information related to ball dispensing based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launching device 112 comprises a handle 60 (Figure 1), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects contact with the handle 60 using the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 using the launching volume 115. Then, it drives the launching motor 113 so that the game balls are launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launching volume 115.

The main control board 80 is connected to the sub-control board 90 (Figure 4) via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection, allowing only signal transmission from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (e.g., a circuit using diodes) (not shown) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means of restricting the direction of communication.

The sub-control board 90 includes a microcontroller 91 for controlling the game's effects and an input/output circuit 95. The microcontroller 91 for controlling the game's effects is a one-chip microcontroller mounted on the sub-control board 90 and controls the game's effects of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The microcontroller 91 for controlling the game's effects includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the effects as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and the memory area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The microcontroller 91 for controlling the game's effects sends and receives data with other boards, etc., via the input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the microcontroller 91 for controlling the game's effects. The sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 via the input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcontroller 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcontroller 101 is a one-chip microcontroller mounted on the image control board 100 and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to the program. The image control microcontroller 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. The ROM 103 stores not only the program for display control, but also image data such as still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically characters, items, shapes, letters, numbers, and symbols (including animation patterns) and background images. The RAM 104 is used as memory for processing the image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The performance control microcontroller 91, based on commands received from the main control board 80, instructs the image control microcontroller 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64. The image control microcontroller 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on commands from the performance control microcontroller 91 and performs display control based on the read image data.

The audio control board 106 is connected to a speaker 67. The performance control microcontroller 91, based on commands received from the main control board 80, outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc., from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106. The audio data, such as voice, output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may also have a CPU, which may execute the audio control based on the commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may also have a ROM, which may store the audio data. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the image control board 100's CPU 102 may execute the audio control. Furthermore, the image control board 100's ROM 103 may store the audio data.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to and controls the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable mechanism 14, the second movable mechanism 15, and the frame movable mechanism 69. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/exiting, light emission color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission pattern of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and controls the light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 according to the light emission pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable mechanism 14, the second movable mechanism 15, and the frame movable mechanism 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The microcontroller 91 for performance control creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable mechanism 14, the second movable mechanism 15, and the frame movable mechanism 69, and controls the operation of the first movable mechanism 14, the second movable mechanism 15, and the frame movable mechanism 69 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may also have a CPU, and the CPU may be used to execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable mechanisms 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may also have a ROM, and data related to the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The relay board 108 is connected to a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects when the performance button 63 (Figure 1) is pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. A vibration motor is attached to the performance button detection switch 63a, which is driven in response to the signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the performance button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects when the select button 68 is pressed. Additionally, the relay board 108 is also connected to a sword member detection switch that detects when the sword member 65 is operated.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5(A) is a diagram illustrating the table stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 5(B) is a diagram illustrating the memory area provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 6(A) is a diagram illustrating the table stored in the sub-ROM 93. Figure 6(B) is a diagram illustrating the memory area provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (Figure 5(A)) stores the following tables: jackpot determination table T1, reach determination table T2, normal symbol hit determination table T3, normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern determination table T6, electric tuner opening pattern determination table T7, big prize opening pattern determination table T8, and V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (Figure 5(B)) is provided with a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special symbol hold memory area 85, and a normal symbol hold memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands to be output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit during the main control processing (described later) are set, and includes commands such as pre-determination commands, hold ball count commands, variation start commands, variation stop commands, opening commands, round specification commands, ending commands, game state specification commands, V-pass commands, and customer waiting commands. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the game machine or game state are set during the main control processing (described later), and includes flags such as jackpot flags, jackpot end flags, first prize flags, second prize flags, ceiling flags, V flags, probability variation flags, and time reduction flags. The counter set area 84c is the area where counters used in the main control processing (described later) are set, and includes a random number counter, round counter, ceiling counter, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, etc. The special operation status set area 84d is the area where the status in the special operation processing (described later) is set. The special symbol hold storage area 85 includes the first special symbol hold storage area 85a where the first special symbol hold is stored, and the second special symbol hold storage area 85b where the second special symbol hold is stored. The first special symbol hold storage area 85a is provided with a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing groups of random numbers (hold information), such as special symbol winning random numbers, corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth special symbol holds, respectively. The second special symbol hold memory area 85b is provided with a first, second, third, and fourth memory area for storing random value groups (hold information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth special symbol holds, respectively. The regular symbol hold memory area 86 is provided with a first, second, third, and fourth memory area for storing random value groups (hold information) such as regular symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth regular symbol holds, respectively. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 is also provided with a winning type set buffer where special symbol stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer where drive data for driving the movable parts 14 and 15 and the movable frame 600 is set. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF or ON and is maintained as is. In other words, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and hold information remain unchanged regardless of whether the power is turned OFF or ON, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by a RAM clear of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the initial state of the flags is set as follows: the ceiling flag is set to "ON," and the other flags are set to "OFF." Also, the initial state of the counters is set as follows: the ceiling counter is set to "500," and the other counters are set to "0."

Sub-ROM 93 (Figure 6(A)) stores the pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51, the main effect pattern determination table T52, the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54. These determination tables are referenced by the effect control microcontroller 91 in the sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcontroller 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (Figure 6(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, a performance command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) where commands input from the main control unit side are stored during the sub-control main processing (described later), and stores pre-determination commands, reserved ball count commands, variation start commands, variation stop commands, opening commands, round specification commands, ending commands, game state specification commands, V-pass commands, customer waiting commands, etc. The performance command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, sound control board 106, lamp control board 107, and relay board 108 during the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and stores variation performance start commands, variation end command, variation performance start command, opening performance start command, round performance start command, ending performance start command, etc. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is the area where counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and includes the random number counter, the first special symbol hold effect counter, the second special symbol hold effect counter, the normal symbol hold effect counter, the ceiling effect counter, the carryover effect counter, the probability variation effect counter, and the time reduction effect counter. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, all except the carryover effect counter are not cleared by turning the power of the gaming machine 1 OFF or ON and are maintained as is. That is, the above commands, counters other than the carryover effect counter, and pre-determination information remain unchanged in state even when the power is turned OFF or ON, and the information is maintained. The carryover effect counter is reset by turning the power of the gaming machine 1 OFF or ON, and is set to 0 as its initial state. The information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by a RAM clear of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the initial state of the counters is set as follows: the ceiling effect counter is set to 500, and all other counters are set to 0.

Figure 7 is a diagram illustrating the various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 7(A) shows the random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 7(B) shows the random numbers acquired by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The game control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire "jackpot random numbers," "jackpot type random numbers," "reach random numbers," "variation pattern random numbers," and "normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers)" at timings described later. The "jackpot random number" is a random number used for the lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes values in the range of 0 to 65535. The "jackpot type random number" is a random number used for the lottery to determine the type of jackpot that has been won (jackpot type determination), and takes values in the range of 0 to 127. The "Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the symbol variation animation that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a miss, and it takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. Reach is a state in which, out of multiple animation symbols (decorative symbols), only one animation symbol remains that is being varied, and depending on which symbol the varied animation symbol stops on, it will result in a combination of animation symbols that indicates a jackpot win (for example, the state of "7↓7"). Note that the animation symbol that is stopped on the screen 7a in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking. The "Variation Pattern Random Number" is a random number used to determine the variation pattern, including the variation time, and it takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "Normal Symbol Random Number (Winning Random Number)" is used in the lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to perform the auxiliary game that opens the electric tuner 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "jackpot random number," "jackpot type random number," "reach random number," and "variation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting gate (first starting gate 20 or second starting gate 21). The random number set obtained based on the ball entering the first starting gate 20 is stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a, and the random number set obtained based on the ball entering the second starting gate 21 is stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is obtained based on the ball passing through gate 28. The obtained normal symbol random number is stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86.

The microcontroller 91 for controlling the game's effects is configured to acquire "pre-read effect random numbers" and "chance-up random numbers" at the timings described below. The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during a variation effect, and takes values in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect during a variation effect, and takes values in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random number values are stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random number values are stored in the sub-RAM 94.

Figure 8 illustrates the judgment tables T1 to T4. Figure 8(A) shows the diagram illustrating the jackpot judgment table T1, Figure 8(B) shows the diagram illustrating the reach judgment table T2, Figure 8(C) shows the diagram illustrating the normal symbol win judgment table T3, and Figure 8(D) shows the diagram illustrating the normal symbol variation pattern judgment table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in its main control processing (described later) to determine whether the acquired jackpot random number (any number between 0 and 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "miss." Figure 8(A) shows that in the "normal probability state," if the jackpot random number is between "0 and 164," it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535)," it is determined to be a "miss." Furthermore, in the "high probability state," if the jackpot random number is between "0 and 649," it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number is a number other than "0 to 649 (650 to 65535)," it is determined to be a "miss." The details of the "normal probability state" and "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control processing (described later) to determine whether the acquired reach random number (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to "reach present" or "no reach". Figure 8(B) shows that in the "non-time-saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "reach present", and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127)", it is determined to be "no reach". Also, in the "time-saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined to be "reach present", and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined to be "no reach". The contents of "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the chances of getting a reach when losing are lower in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because, in the shortened time state, more instances of no-reach misses with short fluctuation times are selected, thereby speeding up the consumption of special symbol reserves.

The regular symbol win/loss determination table T3 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in its main control processing (described later) to determine whether the acquired regular symbol random value (any number between 0 and 255) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss." Figure 8(C) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the regular symbol random value is between "0 and 2," it is determined to be a "win," and if the regular symbol random value is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 to 255)," it is determined to be a "loss." Furthermore, in the "time-saving state," if the regular symbol random value is between "0 and 254," it is determined to be a "win," and if the regular symbol random value is a number other than "0 to 254 (255)," it is determined to be a "loss."

The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in its main control processing (described later) to determine the duration of the normal symbol variation in seconds, depending on the game state (whether it is a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state). Figure 8(D) shows that when the state is "non-time-saving state," the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "30 seconds," and when the state is "time-saving state," the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "1 second."

Figure 9 is a diagram illustrating the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control processing (described later) to determine the "jackpot type" and "special symbol type" according to the acquired jackpot type random value (one of 0 to 127). In Figure 9, when a win occurs in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot", and the stopping symbol of special symbol 1 (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot", and the stopping symbol of special symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". If the random value for the jackpot type is between 50 and 55, the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 15R) jackpot with expected V-passing," and the special symbol that stops is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3." If the random value for the jackpot type is between 56 and 67, the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) jackpot with expected V-passing," and the special symbol that stops is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4." If the random value for the jackpot type is between 68 and 127, the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) jackpot without expected V-passing," and the special symbol that stops is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5." On the other hand, when a win is achieved in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), if the random value for the jackpot type is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot with 16RV passing", and the stopping symbol of special symbol 2 (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the random value for the jackpot type is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot with 16R (effectively 13R) with V not passing", and the stopping symbol of special symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". Furthermore, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stopping symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stopping symbol, the "opening (OP) command", "round specification command", and "ending (ED) command" for the special game can also be identified. The specific details of "16RV scheduled jackpot," "16R (effectively 15R) V scheduled jackpot," "16R (effectively 13R) V scheduled jackpot," and "16R (effectively 13R) V not scheduled jackpot" will be explained later.

Figure 10 is a diagram illustrating the variation pattern determination table T6 when the game is not in a time-saving state. Figure 11 is a diagram illustrating the variation pattern determination table T6 when the game is in a time-saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control processing (described later) to determine the variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random value (0 to 127). In Figure 10, for example, it is shown that when a ball enters the first start opening 20 in a non-time-saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be a "miss", the reach determination table T2 is determined to be a "reach", the number of held balls is "1 to 2", and the variation pattern random value is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". Figure 11 shows, for example, that in a time-saving state, if the ball enters the second starting gate 21, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "jackpot," the jackpot type determination table T5 determines it as a "jackpot scheduled to pass through 16RV," and the random value of the variation pattern is "0 to 10," then the variation pattern is determined to be "P61." As shown in Figures 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Furthermore, if a reach occurs, it is determined whether that reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). A super reach is a reach animation with a longer variation time after the reach than a normal reach. Here, five types of super reaches (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different variation times are set. SP1 to SP3 are executed as an evolution after a normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-consecutive win.

Figure 12 is a diagram illustrating the electric tuner opening pattern determination table T7. The electric tuner opening pattern determination table T7 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control processing (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the electric tuner 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state). Figure 12(A) shows that when it is a "non-time-saving state", the opening pattern of the electric tuner 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and when it is a "time-saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12". Figure 12(B) shows the contents of opening pattern 11 and opening pattern 12. In opening pattern 11, the electric tuner 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric tuner 22 is opened three times for an opening time of 2.0 seconds each time, with an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 seconds. However, this electric slot 22 will close even if there is remaining opening time, once a predetermined number of game balls have entered (a specified number of entries, maximum 10 balls).

Figure 13 is a diagram illustrating the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. The large prize opening pattern determination table T8 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control processing (described later) to determine the opening patterns of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stop data (Figure 9). Figure 13(A) shows that when the special symbol stop data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", when the special symbol stop data is "14H", "15H", or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 23". Figure 13(B) shows the contents of opening patterns 21, 22, and 23. In opening pattern 21, the first large prize slot 30 is opened once for 29.5 seconds in rounds 1-13 and 15 (long opening), and the second large prize slot 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds in rounds 14 and 16 (long opening). In opening pattern 22, the first large prize slot 30 is opened once for 29.5 seconds in rounds 1-13 (long opening), the second large prize slot 35 is opened once for 0.1 seconds in rounds 14 and 16 (short opening), and the first large prize slot 30 is opened once for 0.1 seconds in round 15 (short opening). In opening pattern 23, the first large prize slot 30 is opened once for a duration of 29.5 seconds (long opening) during rounds 1-13 and 15. The second large prize slot 35 is opened once for a duration of 0.1 seconds (short opening) during round 14. The second large prize slot 35 is opened once for a duration of 29.5 seconds (long opening) during round 16. However, the first and second large prize slots 30 and 35 will close if a predetermined number of game balls enter (maximum 9 balls), even if there is remaining opening time.

Figure 14 is a diagram illustrating the V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control processing (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 according to the special symbol stop data (Figure 9). Figure 14(A) shows that when the special symbol stop data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31", when the special symbol stop data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", when the special symbol stop data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and when the special symbol stop data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". Figure 14(B) shows the contents of opening patterns 31, 32, 33, and 34. In opening pattern 31, in rounds 2, 4, 6, and 8, when the first prize is awarded in the first large prize slot 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. In rounds 10 and 12, when the first prize is awarded in the first large prize slot 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is awarded, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In opening pattern 32, in rounds 2, 4, 6, and 12, when the first prize is awarded in the first large prize slot 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. In rounds 8 and 10, when the first prize is awarded in the first large prize slot 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is awarded, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In opening pattern 33, in rounds 2 and 6, when the first prize is awarded in the first large prize slot 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is awarded, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In rounds 4, 8, 10, and 12, when the first prize is awarded in the first large prize slot 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. In opening pattern 34, in rounds 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12, when the first prize is awarded in the first large prize slot 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is briefly opened for an opening time of 0.1 seconds.
Release the access.

4. Explanation of Jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "misses" as results of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "jackpot," the "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "miss," the "miss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed, which opens the big prize slots (first big prize slot 30 and second big prize slot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that was displayed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit opening games), an opening (OP) before the start of the first round game, and an ending (ED) after the end of the final round game. Each round game starts when the opening ends or when the previous round game ends, and ends when the next round game starts. The time (interval time) when the big prize slot is closed between rounds of play is included in the open rounds of play before that closure.

There are several types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are shown in Figure 9. Here, there are two main types of jackpots: "V-passing jackpots" and "V-non-passing jackpots." A "V-passing jackpot" is a jackpot in which the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 are activated in an opening pattern (V-passing opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V-area 39 during the jackpot game. Here, jackpots with special symbol stop data of 11H to 14H and 21H correspond to "V-passing jackpots (probability-changing jackpots)." When the combination of the opening patterns of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in Figure 13 and the opening pattern of the V-opening member 71 shown in Figure 14 is (opening pattern 21:opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22:opening pattern 33), or (opening pattern 23:opening pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V-area 39 during the jackpot game. A "V-Non-Passing Jackpot (Normal Jackpot)" is a jackpot in which the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 are activated in an opening pattern (V-Non-Passing Opening Pattern) that makes it impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-area 39 during the jackpot game. Here, jackpots with special symbol stop data of 15H and 22H correspond to "V-Non-Passing Jackpots." When the opening patterns of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in Figure 13 and the opening pattern of the V-opening member 71 shown in Figure 14 are combined into (Opening Pattern 22:Opening Pattern 34), it becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-area 39 during the jackpot game. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 serves as both the V-Passing Opening Pattern and the V-Non-Passing Opening Pattern.

The "V-passing planned jackpot" includes the "16RV-passing planned jackpot," the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing planned jackpot," and the "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing planned jackpot." The "16RV-passing planned jackpot" has an effective total of 16 rounds. For rounds 1 through 13 and 15, the first large prize opening 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round. For rounds 14 and 16, the second large prize opening 35 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 21). For rounds 10 and 12, the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened for a longer period (Figure 14: Opening Pattern 31), making it easy to pass through the V-region 39 within the first large prize opening 30.

The "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" has a total of 16 rounds, but the effective total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first large prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first large prize slot 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second large prize slot 35 is also only open for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot," from round 14 to 16, the opening time of the large prize slots is extremely short, making these rounds unlikely to award any prize balls. In short, the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is effectively a 13-round jackpot. In rounds 2R and 6R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully open (Figure 14: Opening Pattern 33), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 within the first large prize opening 30.

The "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" has a total of 16 rounds, but the effective total number of rounds is 15. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13 and round 15, the first large prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, and in round 16, the second large prize slot 35 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 14, the second large prize slot 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing scheduled jackpot," round 14 has an extremely short opening time for the large prize slots, making it a round where no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is effectively a 15-round jackpot. In rounds 8R and 10R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully open (Figure 14: Opening Pattern 32), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 within the first large prize winning opening 30.

The "V-Non-Passing Jackpot" is a "16R (effectively 13R) V-Non-Passing Jackpot" with opening pattern 22, where the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first large prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first large prize slot 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second large prize slot 35 is also only open for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 13R) V-Non-Passing Jackpot," from rounds 14 to 16, the opening time of the large prize slots is extremely short, making these rounds unlikely to award any prize balls. In short, the "16R (effectively 13R) V-Non-Passing Jackpot" is effectively a 13-round jackpot. In rounds 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R, and 12R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (Figure 14: opening pattern 34), making it virtually impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-shaped area 39 within the first large prize winning opening 30.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" have the same opening pattern (opening pattern 22) for the first large prize slot 30 and the second large prize slot 35 (opening/closing members 32 and 37), with only the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 being different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, the "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" are set up so that a time-saving game (100 times in this example) is played after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing jackpot," it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-area 39 in the first large prize slot 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state). On the other hand, in the case of a "16R (effectively 13R) jackpot with planned V-passing," the game ball can easily pass through the V-area 39 within the first large prize entry point 30, and the game state after this jackpot becomes a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state). As a result, it becomes difficult for players to distinguish between a "16R (effectively 13R) jackpot without planned V-passing" and a "16R (effectively 13R) jackpot with planned V-passing," and it becomes difficult to determine whether the game state after this jackpot will be a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state) or a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state). Furthermore, after the time-saving game ends, in the case of a "16R (effectively 13R) jackpot without planned V-passing," the game state becomes a low-probability low-base state (normal state), while in the case of a "16R (effectively 13R) jackpot with planned V-passing," the game state appears to be a normal high-probability low-base state. In other words, in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing planned jackpot," if the game ball passes through the V-area 39 within the first large prize entry point 30, when the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state becomes a latent state (latent probability variation state) where the probability is high despite being in a high probability low base state, and this latent probability variation state is difficult for the player to detect. In other words, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability, high-base state) after a jackpot game for a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot," the high-probability time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state) after a jackpot game for a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot," the low-probability, low-base state after the time-saving period ends for a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot," and the high-probability, low-base state after the time-saving period ends for a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" are all implemented in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between them.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery for the first special symbol (Special Symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots expected to pass through V, and 60/128 (approximately 47%) for jackpots not expected to pass through V. In contrast, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery for the second special symbol (Special Symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots expected to pass through V, and 45/128 (approximately 35.2%) for jackpots not expected to pass through V. Thus, in the game machine 1, the jackpot lottery conducted when a game ball enters the second start opening 21 (the lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player than the jackpot lottery conducted when a game ball enters the first start opening 20 (the lottery for the first special symbol).

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will now be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can perform "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display unit 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display unit 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing probability variation control on the special symbols of the special symbol display unit 41 is called the "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability change state)," and the state in which probability variation control is not performed is simply called the "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The game control microcomputer 81 achieves the high probability state by performing a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination table (Figure 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random values determined to be jackpots is greater in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, as a probability variation control for the special symbols. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. In other words, when the microcomputer 81 for game control is performing probability variation control on the special symbols of the special symbol display unit 41, the probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display unit 41 will be a jackpot symbol is higher compared to when probability variation control is not being performed.

Furthermore, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols of the special symbol display unit 41 to shorten the variation time is called the "time-shortened state," and the state in which the variation time shortening control is not performed is simply called the "non-time-shortened state." In the time-shortened state, the variation time of the special symbols (the time from the start of variation display to the time until the display result is derived and displayed) is shorter than in the non-time-shortened state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs variation pattern determination using a variation pattern determination table T6 (Figures 10 and 11), which is set so that in the time-shortened state, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected more often than in the non-time-shortened state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing variation time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display unit 41, a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the variable display of the special symbols compared to when the variation time shortening control is not performed. As a result, in the time-shortened state, the pace of consumption of special symbol reserves becomes faster, and effective winnings at the start gate (winnings that can be stored as special symbol reserves) are more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display unit 41, or it may execute only one of them.

The microcomputer 81 for game control performs probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the regular symbols on the regular symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. In other words, the microcomputer 81 for game control performs probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the regular symbols when the time reduction state is active, but does not perform them when the time reduction state is not active. As probability variation control for the regular symbols, the microcomputer 81 for game control performs a win determination (determination of the regular symbols) using the regular symbol win determination table T3 (Figure 8(C)), in which the number of regular symbol random values that are determined to be wins (winning random values) is greater in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. Therefore, in the time reduction state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal probability state of the regular symbols. In other words, when the microcomputer 81 for game control is performing probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display unit 42, the probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display unit 42 will be a winning symbol is higher compared to when probability variation control is not being performed. In the time-saving state, the variation time of the normal symbols is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbols is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but 1 second in the time-saving state (Figure 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric tuner 22 in auxiliary games is longer than in the non-time-saving state (Figure 12). That is, the microcomputer 81 for game control is performing opening time extension control on the electric tuner 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric tuner 22 opens in auxiliary games is greater than in the non-time-saving state (Figure 12). That is, the microcomputer 81 for game control is performing opening number increase control on the electric tuner 22. When the microcomputer 81 for game control is performing probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the regular symbols on the regular symbol display 42, and extension of opening time and increase of opening number control for the electric tuner 22, the electric tuner 22 will open more frequently and game balls will enter the second start opening 21 more frequently compared to when these controls are not being performed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls launched, will increase. Therefore, the state in which these controls are being performed is called the "high base state," and the state in which they are not being performed is called the "low base state." In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls held. The high base state is the state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports entry into the second start opening 21 by the electric tuner 22) is being performed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not necessarily have to perform all of the above controls. In other words, by executing one or more of the following controls—probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, reduction of the fluctuation time for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, extension of the opening time for the electric tuner 22, and increase of the number of openings for the electric tuner 22—it is sufficient that the electric tuner 22 is opened more easily than when the control is not executed. Furthermore, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently of the time-saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot win resulting from a V-passing scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a time-saving state, and a high-base state, provided that the V-area 39 was passed during that jackpot game. This game state is specifically called the "high-probability high-base state" or the "high-probability time-saving state." Specifically, the jackpots that result in a high-probability high-base state after a jackpot game are the "16RV scheduled jackpot," the "16R (effectively 15R) V scheduled jackpot," and the "16R (effectively 13R) V scheduled jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in Figure 9. For the "16RV scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 15R) V scheduled jackpot," the high-probability high-base state ends after the jackpot game when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and that jackpot game is executed. In the case of a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot," the high probability, high base state ends after the jackpot game when the variable display of special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this case), resulting in a high probability, low base state (latent probability variation state), or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and that jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, the game state after a jackpot game resulting from winning a V-passing scheduled jackpot is the normal probability state (not a high probability state, i.e., a low probability state), time-saving state, and high base state, provided that the V-area 39 has not been passed during that jackpot game (which is almost never the case). This game state is specifically called the "low probability, high base state" or "low probability, time-saving state." Specifically, the jackpot that results in a low probability, high base state after the jackpot game is the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in Figure 9. In this jackpot, the low-probability, high-base state ends after the jackpot game, either by performing a predetermined number of variable special symbol displays (100 times in this case), or by winning the next jackpot and executing that jackpot game. When playing game machine 1 for the first time, the game state after power-on is the normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is specifically called the "low-probability, low-base state." The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes also referred to as the "normal game state" or the "low-probability, non-time-saving state" (or simply the "non-time-saving state"). Furthermore, the state during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) is sometimes called the "special game state (jackpot game state)." Additionally, a state controlled in at least one of the high-probability state and high-base state is sometimes called the "specific game state."

In high-base states, such as high-probability high-base states and low-probability high-base states, it is advantageous to play by shooting to the right to guide the game ball into the right game area 3B (Figure 1). This is because, due to the electric support control, the electric tuner 22 is more likely to open compared to low-base states, making it easier to enter the second start opening 21 than to enter the first start opening 20. Therefore, in high-base states, players should shoot to the right to guide the game ball through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery, while also aiming to get the game ball into the second start opening 21. This allows for more start entries (entries into start openings) than shooting to the left. In addition, in game machine 1, players should shoot to the right even during jackpot play. On the other hand, in low-base states, it is advantageous to play by shooting to the left to guide the game ball into the left game area 3A (Figure 1). Because the electric support control is not being executed, the electric tuner 22 is less likely to open compared to the high base state, making it easier to enter the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. Therefore, in the low base state, players should shoot left to aim for the first start opening 20. This allows for more start entries than shooting right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (Figure 3) will be explained based on Figures 15 to 34. The counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the win/fail determination means (Figure 23) and the win/fail pre-determination means (Figures 18 and 19).

[Main control processing]
Figure 15 is a flowchart of the main control processing. When the power to the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program from the main ROM 83 to execute the main control processing. In the main control processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82, resetting various flags, status and counters. The initial value of the flags is "1" (ON) for the ceiling flag, and "0" (OFF) for all other flags. The initial value of the status is "1". The initial value of the counters is "500" for the ceiling counter, and "0" for all other counters. Note that the initial settings are executed only once after power is turned on and are not executed thereafter.

After the initial setup, the game control microcontroller 81 disables interrupt processing (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcontroller 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in Figure 7(A) (jackpot random value, jackpot type random value, reach random value, variation pattern random value, normal symbol random value) by incrementing them by 1. Each random number counter value resets to "0" and is incremented again once it reaches its set upper limit. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC, etc.

After the main random number update process for normal and special symbols, the game control microcontroller 81 enables interrupt processing (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined periods (for example, a 4 msec period). Then, between the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing, the update processing of various counter values by the main random number update process for normal and special symbols is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing will not start immediately, but will start only after interrupts are enabled.

[Main timer interrupt handling]
Figure 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt processing (Figure 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt processing, the game control microcontroller 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcontroller 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in Figure 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the main random number update process for normal and special symbols performed in the main control processing (Figure 15) described above. That is, the update process for the various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt processing until the start of the next main timer interrupt processing).

After the random number update process, the game control microcontroller 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcontroller 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1 and sets payout data for dispensing prize balls according to the type of prize entry slot into the output buffer of the main RAM 84. These various sensors include, for example, the first start slot sensor 20a, the second start slot sensor 21a, the first large prize entry slot sensor 30a, the second large prize entry slot sensor 35a, the regular prize entry slot sensor 27a, and the regular prize entry slot sensor 29a (Figure 3).

After input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 sequentially executes the following: start-out sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V-area sensor detection processing (step S106), and reserved ball count processing (step S107). Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball count processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands etc. set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In the other processing, for example, the second special figure reserved ball indicator 43b is controlled to display the number based on the reserved ball count of special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure reserved ball indicator 43a is controlled to display the number based on the reserved ball count of special figure 1.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
Figure 17 is a flowchart of the start-gate sensor detection process (Figure 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by gate sensor 28a. If no game ball has passed through gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If a game ball has passed through gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbol reserved balls is the number of normal symbol reserved balls, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of normal symbol reserved balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved balls with normal symbols is "3" or less (Step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls with normal symbols (Step S203), and then the process of acquiring a random number for normal symbols is performed (Step S204). Here, the microcomputer 81 for game control acquires the value of the random number counter for normal symbols (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number in the first to fourth memory areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 86 of the main RAM 84, in the memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls with normal symbols.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second start opening 21. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start opening sensor 21a. If no game ball has entered the second start opening 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 is the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2. If the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 is "3" or less (Step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 (Step S207), and then the process of acquiring random numbers related to Special Feature 2 is performed (Step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number set in the memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 among the first to fourth memory areas of the second Special Feature reserved ball storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number set in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, for the special symbol 2 pre-determination processing (Figure 18) described later. After the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol 2 pre-determination processing (step S209). Details of the special symbol 2 pre-determination processing will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first start opening 20. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start opening sensor 20a. If no game ball has entered the first start opening 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. If a game ball has entered the first start opening 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 is "4 (upper limit)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 is the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1. If the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process ends. If the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 is "3" or less (Step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 (Step S212), and then the process of acquiring random numbers related to Special Feature 1 is performed (Step S213). Here, similar to the process of acquiring random numbers related to Special Feature 2 described above (Step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number set in the first to fourth memory areas of the first Special Feature reserved storage area 85a, in the memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number set in a buffer different from the first Special Feature reserved storage area 85a (pre-determination buffer) for the Special Feature 1 pre-determination process described later (Figure 19). After the random number acquisition process related to Special Feature 1, the game control microcontroller 81 performs a pre-determination process for Special Feature 1 (step S214). Details of the pre-determination process for Special Feature 1 will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-determination Processing]
Figure 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (Figure 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variation flag is ON or not (step S301). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, if the probability variation flag is OFF, no pre-determination is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (Figure 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (Figure 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of whether or not it is a jackpot using the jackpot determination table T1 (Figure 8) and the jackpot random value. In this case, since it is in a high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of whether or not it is a jackpot by referring to the high probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") from the jackpot determination table T1. That is, it is determined to be a "jackpot" when the jackpot random value is between "0" and "649", and a "miss" when it is any other value. In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 which is used in the jackpot determination process (Figure 23) described later, but in other embodiments, the preliminary determination may be performed using a jackpot determination table different from the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot is "miss" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type (step S305). In the pre-determination of the jackpot type, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a random number value for the jackpot type as a judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (Figure 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained random number value for the jackpot type and the jackpot type determination table T5 (Figure 9). Here, regardless of whether the random number value for the jackpot type is "0" to "127", it is pre-determined as a "jackpot scheduled to pass 16RV". In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5, which is used in the jackpot determination process described later (Figure 23). However, in other embodiments, the pre-determination may be performed using a different jackpot type determination table for pre-determination than the jackpot type determination table T5.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the variation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the variation pattern random value and the reach random value as judgment values, which are temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer, by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (Figure 17: step S208). Next, since the game is in a time-saving state (time-saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state (Figure 11) and identifies the variation pattern from the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, the pre-determination result of whether or not there is a reach obtained from the reach random value, and the variation pattern random value. Note that in the variation pattern determination table T6 in Figure 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, if a pre-determination of a jackpot and a pre-determination of whether a reach is possible is performed, and the random value for the variation pattern is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 selects two variation patterns: "P64," which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2," and "P68," which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4." In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6, which is used in the variation pattern selection process described later (Figures 24 and 25). However, in other embodiments, the pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination table T6.

In step S307, the game control microcontroller 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (and, if a win occurs, the jackpot type pre-determination result), and the variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcontroller 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and then completes this process.

[Special Figure 1: Pre-determination process]
Figure 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (Figure 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determination process described above, if the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, if the probability variation flag is ON, no pre-determination is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (Figure 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (Figure 17: step S213). Next, since the game is in a normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") within the jackpot determination table T1. That is, it pre-determines "jackpot" when the jackpot random value is between "0" and "164", and pre-determines "miss" for any other value. Note that a different jackpot determination table for pre-determining may be used for the jackpot pre-determination, distinct from the jackpot determination table T1. The processing in steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the pre-determination processing in Special Figure 2 (Figure 18) described above, so the explanation is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
Figure 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (Figure 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the electric chute 22 is in operation or not (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbols are changing or not (step S502). If the normal symbols are changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbols are not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for the normal symbols is "0" or not (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. If there is one or more reserved balls (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when a game ball passes through gate 28 with the number of reserved balls for normal symbols at "0", in step S203 of the start-up sensor detection process (Figure 17), the number of reserved balls for normal symbols temporarily becomes "1", and then in step S504, the reserved balls are consumed and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols immediately becomes "0". The same applies to the number of reserved balls for special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start-up sensor detection process (Figure 17), the number of reserved balls for special symbols temporarily becomes "1", and then in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol waiting process (Figure 22) described later, the reserved balls are consumed and the number of reserved balls for special symbols becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a win determination by referring to the normal symbol win determination table T3 (Figure 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the normal symbol random value (win random value) as a determination value stored in the first memory area of the normal symbol hold memory area 86 (corresponding to the first normal symbol hold). Then, it determines whether it is a win or not using the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and the normal symbol win determination table T3. For example, in a non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random value is between "0" and "2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random value is anything else, it is determined to be a "miss" (see Figure 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (Figure 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and then uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to select the variation time of the normal symbols as the normal symbol variation pattern. Here, when it is not in a time-saving state, the variation time of the normal symbols is determined to be "30 seconds," and when it is in a time-saving state, the variation time of the normal symbols is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8(D)). The game control microcomputer 81 starts displaying the variation of the normal symbols by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol variation time is the variation time selected in step S506 (see Figure 8(D)). If the variation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the display of the normal symbol variation continues. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "miss" (step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned hit determination is a "hit" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric tuner opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric reel 22 is selected by referring to the electric reel opening pattern determination table T7 (Figure 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state) and selects the opening pattern of the electric reel 22 using the game state determination result and the electric reel opening pattern determination table T7. Here, when it is not in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when it is in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts operating the electric reel according to the selected opening pattern (step S512), and this process ends.

In step S501 described above, if the electric chute 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chute 22 has been met (step S520). The closing condition here is that either the number of balls entering the electric chute 22 has reached the specified maximum number of balls (for example, 6), or the operating time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it is time to close the electric chute 22. The operating time of the electric chute 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chute 22 has not been met (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chute 22 has been met (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 and stops its operation (step S521), thus terminating this process.

[Special Action Processing]
Figure 21 is a flowchart of the special operation processing (Figure 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize devices (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "Special Operation Status""1","2","3", and "4". When the "Special Operation Status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In special symbol standby processing, big win determination and variation pattern selection are performed. When the "Special Operation Status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol variation processing is performed (step S1304). In special symbol variation processing, after the variation time has elapsed, the output of the variation stop command is performed. When the "Special Operation Status" is "3" (Steps S1301, S1303: NO, Step S1305: YES), the special symbol confirmation process is performed (Step S1306). During the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and other actions are performed when a jackpot is hit. When the "Special Operation Status" is "4" (Steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), the special electric mechanism process is performed (Step S1308). During the special electric mechanism process, the jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Figure 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (Figure 21: step S1302). In the special symbol waiting process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of reserved balls in special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401). If the number of reserved balls in special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, if there is no memory in the second special symbol reserve storage area 85b of the group of random values obtained due to entry into the second start opening 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls in special symbol 2 is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in special symbol 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special symbol hold storage area 85b by one position from its current position toward the side from which it is read, and clears the hold information stored in the second special symbol hold storage area 85b that is furthest from the side from which it is read (step S1405). For example, if hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and if hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the second special symbol holds are consumed in the order in which they were held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special symbol hold storage area 85b (the leftmost hold image 9B of the four hold images 9B) is shifted toward the hold consumption image display area and displayed as the hold consumption image 9C. Furthermore, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth memory areas of the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left out of the four reserved images 9B) are each shifted one position to the left (Figure 1). This allows the player to recognize that one of the second special symbol reserved images has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol 2 variation start process (step S1406). In the special symbol 2 variation start process, the variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process. The game control microcomputer 81 also sets the special operation status to "2". The variation start command (special feature 2 variation start command) set in the special feature 2 variation start processing includes information about the special feature stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination processing (step S1402) and information about the variation pattern (including information about variation time) set in the variation pattern selection processing (step S1403).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 is "0" (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if there is no memory in the first Special Feature reserved ball storage area 85a of the random value group obtained due to entry into the first start opening 20, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random values stored in the first to fourth memory areas of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a by one position from the current position toward the reading side, and clears the hold information stored in the location furthest from the reading side in the first special symbol hold memory area 85a (step S1411). Through the above step, the first special symbol holds are consumed in the order in which they were held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9A corresponding to the first memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a (the rightmost hold image 9A of the four hold images 9A) is shifted toward the hold consumption image display area and displayed as the hold consumption image 9C. Also, the hold images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth memory areas of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a (the second, third, and fourth hold images 9A from the left of the four hold images 9A) are each shifted by one position to the right (Figure 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special symbol holds has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol 1 variation start process (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start process, the variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process. The game control microcomputer 81 also sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The variation start command (special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start process includes information related to the special symbol stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and information related to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) (including information related to the variation time).

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen or not (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for when customers are waiting. The game control microcomputer 81 may make this determination by, for example, turning on or off a demo screen display flag for when customers are waiting. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined waiting time to elapse, sets a customer waiting command to display the standby screen in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the display of the special symbol variation based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". In other words, the processing of the second special symbol reserve takes precedence over the processing of the first special symbol reserve. Furthermore, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of this embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol reserve is more likely to result in a jackpot that is more beneficial to the player (a jackpot expected to pass through the V-zone) than the lottery based on the first special symbol reserve.

[Big win determination process]
Figure 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (Figure 22: steps S1402, S1408). The jackpot determination process for Special Figure 2 (step S1402) and the jackpot determination process for Special Figure 1 (step S1408) are similar in their processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF (step S1501). If the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (Figure 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random value to be used as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for Special Figure 2, the microcomputer reads out the jackpot random value stored in the first memory area of the second special figure reserve memory area 85b (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reserves). In the jackpot determination process for Special Feature 1, the jackpot random value stored in the first memory area of the first Special Feature Reserve memory area 85a (corresponding to the first of the first Special Feature Reserves) is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random value to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. In this case, since it is in a high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is made based on the high probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") of the jackpot determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state within the jackpot determination table T1 (Figure 8) (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot random value in the same manner as in step S1502. Next, since the game is in the normal probability state (probability variation flag is OFF), it determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state within the jackpot determination table T1 (jackpot determination values from "0" to "164").

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random value for the type of jackpot as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for Special Figure 2, it reads out the random value for the type of jackpot stored in the first memory area of the second Special Figure hold memory area 85b. In the jackpot determination process for Special Figure 1, it reads out the random value for the type of jackpot stored in the first memory area of the first Special Figure hold memory area 85a. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of jackpot based on the read random value for the type of jackpot and the jackpot type determination table T5 (Figure 9). After determining the type of jackpot, the special symbol stop data (Figure 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination result in step S1503 or step S1505 is "miss," the special symbol stop data (01H) corresponding to the miss symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation Pattern Selection Process]
Figures 24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (Figure 22: steps S1403, S1409). The variation pattern selection process in Figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process in Figure 1 (step S1409) have similar processing flows, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the game state is a time-saving state or not (step S1600). The determination of whether or not it is a time-saving state is made by whether or not the time-saving flag is ON. If it is a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), the process moves to step S1612. If it is not a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process moves to step S1607. If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot is Special Symbol 2 or not (step S1603). If the jackpot is Special Symbol 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V-passing jackpot, so the process is skipped to step S1605. If the jackpot is Special Symbol 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot or not (step S1604). The determination of the jackpot type is made based on the Special Symbol stop symbol data set in the main RAM 84.

If the type of jackpot is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass through V in a non-time-saving state from the variation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the variation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, it reads out the variation pattern random value stored in the first memory area of the second special figure hold memory area 85b (corresponding to the first of the second special figure holds). In the variation pattern selection process for special figure 1, it reads out the variation pattern random value stored in the first memory area of the first special figure hold memory area 85a (corresponding to the first of the first special figure holds). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for jackpots scheduled to pass through the V-zone in the non-time-saving state, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to jackpots scheduled to pass through the V-zone (in Special Figure 1, the portion where the variation pattern is "P1" to "P3"; in Special Figure 2, the portion where the variation pattern is "P21" to "P23") is referenced (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random values, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

If the jackpot type is a jackpot that is not expected to pass through V (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the table for jackpots that are not expected to pass through V in the non-time-saving state within the variation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) (step S1606). Here, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving states shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to jackpots that are not expected to pass through V (the "P4" to "P6" portion) is referred to as the table for jackpots that are not expected to pass through V. From the read variation pattern random values, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern.

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random value is a reach establishment random value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, it reads out the reach random value stored in the first memory area of the second special figure reserve memory area 85b (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reserves). In the variation pattern selection process for special figure 1, it reads out the reach random value stored in the first memory area of the first special figure reserve memory area 85a (corresponding to the first of the first special figure reserves). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a reach has occurred using the reach determination table T2 (Figure 8(B)) and the reach random value. In this case, since it is not a time-saving state, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for non-time-saving states within the reach determination table T2 (the part where the reach determination value (random value for reach establishment) is "0" to "13").

If the random value for reach is a random value for a reach (step S1607: YES), that is, if it is a reach but a miss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the table for reach but miss in the non-time-saving state of the variation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) (step S1608). Here, as the table for reach but miss in the non-time-saving state, the part of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to a reach but a miss (in Special Figure 1, the part where the variation pattern is "P7" to "P14", in Special Figure 2, the part where the variation pattern is "P24" to "P31") is referred to. In Special Figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read random value for the variation pattern and the current number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 (1 to 4). In Special Feature 2, one of the variation patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected based on the read random value of the variation pattern and the current number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 (1 to 4). Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a function for shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls is activated. That is, in both Special Feature 1 and Special Feature 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected more often than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". This allows for faster consumption of Special Feature reserved balls when the number of reserved balls is large.

If the random value for reaching is not the random value for achieving a reach (step S1607: NO), that is, if it is a no-reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the table for no-reach losses in the non-time-saving state of the variation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) (step S1609). Here, as the table for no-reach losses in the non-time-saving state, the part of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to no-reach losses (in Special Figure 1, the part where the variation pattern is "P15" to "P16", in Special Figure 2, the part where the variation pattern is "P32" to "P33") is referred to. In Special Figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read random value for the variation pattern and the current number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 (1 to 4). In Special Feature 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read random value of the variation pattern and the current number of balls held in Special Feature 2 (1 to 4). Here again, the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of balls held, so a function for shortened variation according to the number of balls held is activated.

In step S1600, if it is determined that the game state is a time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or OFF (Figure 25: step S1612). From here on, the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following point, so the explanation will be omitted. The difference between the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the variable pattern determination table T6 that is referenced is different from that in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609 described above. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving states (Figure 10) is referenced, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the variation pattern determination table T6 for time-saving states (Figure 11) is referenced. For example, in step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V, the part of the variation pattern determination table T6 for time-saving states shown in Figure 11 that corresponds to a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (in Figure 1, the part where the variation pattern is "P41" to "P43", and in Figure 2, the part where the variation pattern is "P61" to "P63") is referenced. From the read variation pattern random values, in Figure 1, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern, and in Figure 2, one of "P61" to "P63" is selected. Furthermore, for example, in step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a jackpot that is not expected to pass through V, the portion of the time-saving state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in Figure 11 that corresponds to a jackpot that is not expected to pass through V (the portion "P44" to "P46") is referenced. From the read variation pattern random values, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern.

After selecting a variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and completes this process. The information of the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 during the output process (Figure 16: step S108). This initiates the variation display of the special symbols.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Figure 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation processing (Figure 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the variation time for the special symbol has elapsed and finished (step S1701). The variation time for the special symbol is the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing (Figures 24 and 25) described above. If the variation time has not finished (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol that was started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol waiting processing (Figure 22) continues. On the other hand, if the variation time has finished (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). The game control microcomputer 81 also performs other processing related to the variation stop (step S1704). For example, the microcomputer 81 for game control performs processing such as stopping the display of special symbols at symbols corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the microcomputer 81 for game control completes this processing.

[Special Symbol Confirmation Process]
Figure 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (Figure 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs game state management processing (step S1801). Game state management processing is the process for managing the number of ST rounds and the number of time-saving rounds, and its contents will be described later. After the game state management processing, it determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or OFF (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process returns to the special symbol waiting process (Figure 22), where the jackpot determination for the next held symbol is performed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening patterns for the jackpot entry point and V-opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the jackpot entry point opening pattern determination table T8 (Figure 13) to determine the opening pattern for the jackpot entry point from the special symbol stop data and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stop data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern for the jackpot entry point. The game control microcomputer 81 also refers to the V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (Figure 14) to determine the opening pattern for the V-opening/closing member 71 from the special symbol stop data and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stop data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern for the V-opening/closing member 71. The round counter value is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won, along with the setting of the opening patterns for the large prize slot and the V-shaped opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) performed during the jackpot game. In this case, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). This game state reset process resets (turns off) the probability variation flag and time reduction flag, and its details will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening begins (step S1806). Then, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process ends.

[Game state management processing]
Figure 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (Figure 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of times special symbols have been rotated during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set in the probability variation counter when transitioning to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or OFF. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of times special symbols have been changed during the time-saving state. Here, when transitioning to the time-saving state, the time-saving counter is set to "100". The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time-saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcontroller 81 sets the game state specification command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and completes this process. The game state specification command includes information about the current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON or OFF, the ceiling counter value, whether it is in a probability variation state or OFF, the probability variation counter value, whether it is in a time-saving state or OFF, the time-saving counter value, etc.).

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or OFF. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is used to count the specified number of spins until the b-time-saving mode (playtime) is reached, and it counts the number of special symbol variations performed when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of spins. As a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2012). That is, it determines whether the specified number of spins until the b-time-saving mode (playtime) is reached has elapsed. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (Step S2012: NO), the process skips to Step S2005. If the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (Step S2012: YES), the time reduction flag is switched ON (Step S2013), and the time reduction counter is set to "700" as the number of time reduction rounds (number of rounds granted). Then, the ceiling flag is switched OFF (Step S2015). After that, the process in Step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset process]
Figure 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (Figure 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time reduction flag is ON or OFF. If the time reduction flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to step S2105. If the time reduction flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time reduction flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or OFF. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2106). In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, the ceiling flag is OFF because it is neither in a high probability state nor a time-saving state. In the game machine 1, the low base state is always in place when it is not in a time-saving state, so the low base state is in place during the execution of a jackpot game.

[Special Electric Processing]
Figure 30 is a flowchart of the special electric prize processing (Figure 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the jackpot completion flag is ON or OFF (step S2200). The "jackpot completion flag" is a flag that indicates that all openings of the jackpot prize devices (first jackpot prize device 31 and second jackpot prize device 36) based on the opening pattern have been completed in the jackpot game currently being played. If the jackpot completion flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. If the jackpot completion flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V-opening/closing member operation process is performed to activate the V-opening/closing member 71 (step S2201). In this embodiment, the V-opening/closing member 71 is configured to activate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first large prize slot 30. In the V-opening/closing member operation process, the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined number of game balls enter, according to the V-opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Details of the V-opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V-opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30 and second large prize slot 35) are open or not (step S2202). If they are open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the jackpot opening is not open (Step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the jackpot opening (Step S2203). The time to open the jackpot opening includes, for example, when the opening time for the first round of play has elapsed after the jackpot opening time has passed, or when the interval time (closing time) for reopening the jackpot opening after it has been temporarily closed has elapsed, and it is time to reopen it again. If it is not time to open the jackpot opening (Step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to Step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the jackpot opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the jackpot opening (first jackpot opening 30 or second jackpot opening 35) according to an opening pattern (Figure 13) corresponding to the type of jackpot. After the jackpot opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round specification command (step S2208). The round specification command contains information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being played, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round specification command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the jackpot opening is not opened multiple times during a single round of gameplay. However, in another embodiment, if the large prize slot is opened multiple times during a single round of gameplay, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the opening of the large prize slot is the first opening during a single round, and only set the round specification command if it is the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, if the large prize slot is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the conditions for closing the large prize slot have been met (step S2210). The closing conditions here are that either the number of balls entering the large prize slot in that round of play has reached the predetermined maximum number of balls (for example, 9 balls per round), or the time to close the large prize slot has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (Figure 13) has elapsed since the large prize slot was opened). If the conditions for closing the large prize slot have not been met (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 completes this process. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the large prize slot have been met (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the large prize slot (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the large prize slot, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (2 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the large prize slot closed. As described above, the time (interval time) during which the large prize slot is closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended based on whether the predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large prize slot closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process.

If the current round of gameplay has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter value by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value is "0" or not (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of rounds of gameplay has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round of gameplay. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0", as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game, the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending begins (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when a game ball passes through the V area 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is the same length as the ending time when no game ball passes through the V area 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". This allows the player to perceive that even if a game ball passes through the V area 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot," it did not happen in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot." The ending time when no game ball passes through the V area 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is also the same length. After the jackpot ending begins, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process is completed.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot completion flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, and the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns OFF the jackpot completion flag (step S2231), turns OFF the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol waiting process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation process. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234), described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V-shaped opening/closing member operation processing]
Figure 31 is a flowchart of the V-opening/closing member operation process (Figure 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round of gameplay (the round in question) is an open round for the V-opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds are open rounds for the V-opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the round counter value is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", or "5". If it is not an open round for the V-opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is terminated. This is because there is no need to operate the V-opening/closing member 71 in that round.

If the V-opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first prize entry flag is ON or OFF (step S2502). The "first prize entry flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has entered the first large prize entry opening 30 in that round. If the first prize entry flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first prize entry flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), the process determines whether the first ball entry has been detected (step S2503). If the first ball entry has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there has been no ball entry into the first large prize entry opening 30 in that round, and therefore there is no need to activate the V-opening/closing member 71.

When the first ball enters the winning area is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-circuits the V-opening/closing member 71 and performs the V-effective period setting process (step S2504). The reason for short-circuiting the V-opening/closing member 71 is that, regardless of whether the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 (Figure 14(B)) is "short-circuiting" or "long-circuiting," a short-circuiting (in this case, 0.1 seconds) is performed when the first ball enters the winning area. Note that in the case of short-circuiting the V-opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V-opening/closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first large winning area 30 is configured to pass through the non-V area 70 without passing through the V area 39. In the V-effective period setting process, the period while the V-opening/closing member 71 is open and the few seconds after the V-opening/closing member 71 is closed are set as the V-effective period, during which the detection of game balls by the V area sensor 39a is enabled. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-circuits the V-opening/closing member 71 (for 0.1 seconds in this case) according to the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 (Figure 14(B)), and sets the period during which the V-opening/closing member 71 is open and the 1 second after it is closed as the V-effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the period other than the V-effective period (including when a jackpot game is not being played) as a V-invalid period, during which it determines that the detection of game balls by the V-area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of game balls by the V-area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of game balls by the V-area sensor 39a (see the V-area sensor detection process described later (Figure 33)). Also, "determining that the detection of game balls by the V-area sensor 39a is invalid" means not turning on the V flag even if game balls are detected by the V-area sensor 39a. The reason the V effective period includes the few seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 closes (ball ejection period) is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a, and this period is taken into consideration until a game ball that entered the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a. In other words, the V flag is turned ON only when V passage (passage of a game ball into the V area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and the V flag is not turned ON when V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after a jackpot is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (Figure 32) described later). In this way, the V flag is not turned ON and the high probability state is not set based on V passage due to fraudulent activity. After the V-opening/closing member 71 is short-circuited and the V-effective period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first prize winning flag to ON (step S2505) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first prize flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already been awarded (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second prize flag is ON or OFF (step S2520). The "second prize flag" is a flag that indicates that the second ball has been awarded to the first large prize opening 30 if the opening pattern of the V-opening member 71 in that round is a long opening. If the second prize flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. If the second prize flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V-opening member 71 in that round is a long opening or OFF (step S2521). If it is not a long opening (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short opening, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if the gate is open for a long time (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it has detected the second ball entering the gate (step S2522). If it has not detected the second ball entering the gate (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

If the second ball enters the winning slot is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V-opening/closing member 71 for a long period and performs the V-effective period setting process (step S2523). The reason for opening the V-opening/closing member 71 for a long period is that, in the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 (Figure 14(B)), if it is "long opening", a long opening (in this case, a maximum of 31.5 seconds) is performed when the second ball enters the winning slot. Note that, in this case, the maximum time for one round of play is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning slot 29.5 seconds + interval closing time of 2 seconds), so generally, the time from when the second ball enters the winning slot to the end of the round will be shorter than 31.5 seconds. As described later, the V-opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the opening time of the long opening of the V-opening/closing member 71 will be shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V-opening/closing member 71 is configured such that, because the opening time of the V-opening/closing member 71 is relatively long, at least a portion of the game balls that enter the first large prize winning opening 30 from the second ball onward will pass through the V-region 39. In the V-effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the period while the V-opening/closing member 71 is open as the V-effective period, and sets the V-invalid period at the end of the round along with the closing of the V-opening/closing member 71. After the long opening of the V-opening/closing member 71 and the V-effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second prize winning flag to ON (step S2524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-opening/closing member 71 is open or not. If the V-opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of game has ended or not (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of game has ended or not based on whether a predetermined interval time (2 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the jackpot opening was closed.

If the current round of gameplay has ended (Step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first and second prize winning flags to OFF (Step S2551), performs the V-opening/closing member closing process, and the V-invalidation period setting process (Step S2552). Here, at the end of the current round of gameplay, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V-opening/closing member 71, and after a few seconds (1 second in this case) have elapsed since the closing of the V-opening/closing member 71, sets the V-invalidation period, and completes this process.

If the current round of gameplay has not ended (Step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V-switching member 71 is met (Step S2560). The closing condition for the V-switching member 71 is, for example, that a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the V-switching member 71 has opened in the case of a short circuit. If the closing condition is met (Step S2560: YES), the V-switching member closing process and the V-invalid period setting process are performed (Step S2552), and this process ends. If the closing condition is not met (Step S2560: NO), this process ends with the V-switching member 71 in the open state and the V-effective period continuing.

In step S2540, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V-opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round of the game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first and second prize winning flags to OFF (step S2572) and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends as is.

[Game state setting process]
Figure 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (Figure 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V flag is ON or OFF (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time-saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the game state after this jackpot game becomes "non-high probability state", "time-saving state", and "high base state" (i.e., low probability high base). This low probability high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step S2305), and turns off the V flag (step S2306). The game control microcomputer 81 also turns on the time reduction flag (step S2307) and sets the time reduction counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the game state after this jackpot is a "high probability state," a "time reduction state," and a "high base state" (i.e., high probability, high base). This high probability, high base state ends when either the variable display of the special symbols occurs 100 times, or when the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag and sets "500" in the ceiling counter as the specified number of spins until the b-time-saving mode (playtime) is reached (step S2311). This means that after a jackpot, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the game will enter the b-time-saving mode (playtime) after 500 spins. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state specification command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and completes this process. The game state specification command contains information about the set game state (time-saving flag, time-saving counter, probability variation flag, probability variation counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V-region sensor detection processing]
Figure 33 is a flowchart of the V-region sensor detection process (Figure 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V-region sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V-region sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if detection is detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is within the V-valid period (step S2602). The V-valid period is the period set by the V-valid period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V-opening/closing member operation process (Figure 31). The V-valid period is set for a few seconds (ball removal period) when the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds. If the V validity period is not in effect (step S2602: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V validity period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets a V pass command (step S2604), and terminates this process.

[Handling of held balls]
Figure 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball count processing (Figure 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the reserved ball counts for special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and regular symbol balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball count command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball count command is a command to notify the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball count and includes information regarding the reserved ball counts for special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and regular symbol balls. After setting the reserved ball count command, the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process.

7. Operation of the Performance Control Microcontroller 91 The operation of the performance control microcontroller 91, which is provided on the sub-control board 90 (Figure 4), will be explained based on Figures 35 to 45. The counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the performance control microcontroller 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
Figure 35 is a flowchart of the sub-control main processing. When the power to the game machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcontroller 91 reads a program from the sub-ROM 93 to execute the sub-control main processing. In the sub-control main processing, the performance control microcontroller 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, the settings of the sub-CPU 92, various flags, status and counters are reset. The initial value of the flags is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counters is "0". Note that the CPU initialization processing is executed only once after power is turned on and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the microcontroller 91 for performance control disables interrupt processing (step S4015) and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the microcontroller 91 updates the random number counter value shown in Figure 7(B) by incrementing it by 1. Each random number counter value resets to "0" and is incremented again when it reaches the set upper limit. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, the random values may be incremented by 2 or more, in addition to incrementing by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the microcontroller 91 for performance control enables interrupt processing (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, the sub-timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, between the end of the sub-timer interrupt processing and the start of the next sub-timer interrupt processing, the random number update process is repeatedly executed.

[Sub-timer interrupt handling]
Figure 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing (Figure 35: step S4035). First, the performance control microcontroller 91 performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis processing, the performance control microcontroller 91 performs variable performance processing (step S4305). Variable performance processing is the process of setting a command before the end of the variable performance at a specific timing during the variable performance to execute a specific display performance on the display screen 7a, and details will be described later. After the variable performance processing, the performance control microcontroller 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch processing, the performance control microcontroller 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switch 63a. After the switch processing, the performance control microcontroller 91 performs command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcontroller 91 transmits various commands, which have been set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 through received command analysis processing, to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. The image control board 100, upon receiving the various commands, uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect corresponding to the received command. The sound control board 106, upon receiving the various commands, executes a sound effect by outputting sound from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107, upon receiving the various commands, executes a lamp effect by controlling the illumination of the panel lamp 5 and frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the performance control microcontroller 91 performs other processing (step S4320) and then completes this process. Other processing may include, for example, random number update processing.

[Received command parsing process]
Figure 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (Figure 36: step S4300). First, the microcontroller 91 for performance control determines whether or not it has received a pre-determination command from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has received a command (step S4415: YES), it performs a pre-read performance determination process (step S4420). The "pre-read performance determination process" determines whether or not to execute a pre-read performance, and if so, the pre-read performance pattern. Details of the pre-read performance determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not received a command (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-read performance determination process is skipped. A pre-read performance is a performance that suggests there is a high possibility that a jackpot is included in the newly stored hold information in the special symbol hold memory area 85, and is executed during a variation performance.

Next, the microcontroller 91 for performance control determines whether or not it has received a reserved ball count command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has received the command (step S4445: YES), it performs the reserved ball display process (step S4450). In the reserved ball display process, based on the information regarding the reserved ball count for special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol reserved balls included in the reserved ball count command, the values of the first special symbol reserved performance counter, the second special symbol reserved performance counter, and the normal symbol reserved performance counter, which are provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94, are updated. This allows the information on each reserved ball count to be maintained not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. Furthermore, the microcontroller 91 for performance control updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special symbol reserved performance counter, the second special symbol reserved performance counter, and the normal symbol reserved performance counter. On the other hand, if the pending ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the pending ball display process described above is skipped.

Next, the microcontroller 91 for performance control determines whether or not it has received a variation start command from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has received the command (step S4455: YES), it performs the variation performance start process (step S4460). The "variation performance start process" is the process of selecting the variation performance pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. Details of the variation performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not received the command (step S4455: NO), the above variation performance start process is skipped.

Next, the microcontroller 91 for performance control determines whether or not it has received a variation stop command from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has received the command (step S4465: YES), it performs the variation performance termination process (step S4470). The "variation performance termination process" is a process to stop the variation performance that is executed during the variation of the special symbols. In the variation performance termination process, the microcontroller 91 for performance control sets counters, etc., based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation performance termination command to end the variation performance. As a result, the decorative symbols corresponding to special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 that were in variation are stopped and displayed. The microcontroller 91 for performance control also performs the pre-determination information shift process (Figure 39), which will be described later. If the variation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above variation performance termination process is skipped.

Next, the microcontroller 91 for performance control determines whether or not it has received an opening command from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has received the command (step S4475: YES), it performs the opening performance pattern determination process (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is the process of selecting the opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the microcontroller 91 for performance control first analyzes the opening command and sets the information regarding the special symbol stop data set at the time of jackpot determination, which is included in the opening command, into the sub-RAM 94. Then, it selects an opening performance pattern that is pre-set according to the type of win indicated by the special symbol stop data, and sets an opening performance start command to start the selected opening performance in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening animation start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 during the command transmission process (Figure 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined opening animation image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that if no opening command has been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the opening animation pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Next, the microcontroller 91 for performance control determines whether or not it has received a round specification command from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has received the command (step S4485: YES), it performs the round performance pattern determination process (step S4490). The "round performance pattern determination process" is the process of selecting the opening game performance pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big prize slot or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round performance pattern determination process, the microcontroller 91 for performance control first analyzes the round specification command and sets the information regarding the special symbol stop data and the number of rounds included in the round specification command into the sub-RAM 94. Then, it selects a round performance pattern that is pre-set to correspond to the type of win and the number of rounds indicated by the special symbol stop data, and sets a round performance start command to start the selected round performance in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round animation start command set in the animation command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads the predetermined round animation image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If a round specification command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the round animation pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Next, the microcontroller 91 for performance control determines whether or not it has received an ending command from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has received the command (step S4495: YES), it performs the ending performance pattern determination process (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is the process of selecting the ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (jackpot game or minor jackpot game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the microcontroller 91 for performance control first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special symbol stop data included in the ending command into the sub-RAM 94. Then, it selects an ending performance pattern corresponding to the type of win indicated by the special symbol stop data and sets an ending performance start command to start the selected ending performance into the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending sequence start command, set in the performance command set area 94b, is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads the predetermined ending sequence image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If no ending sequence command is received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending sequence pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the microcontroller 91 for performance control performs other processing (step S4535). In this other processing, for example, when the microcontroller 91 for performance control receives a game state specification command, it stores information related to the game state included in the game state specification command (such as the time-saving flag, time-saving counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, and ceiling counter) in the sub-RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state specification command, the values of the time-saving performance counter, probability change performance counter, and ceiling performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of spins (number of games) during time-saving is set in the time-saving performance counter, the remaining number of spins during probability change is set in the probability change performance counter, and the remaining number of spins until the ceiling is reached is set in the ceiling performance counter. This allows the sub-controller 90 to store information on the number of time-saving spins, the number of probability change spins, and the number of ceiling spins, not just the main control board 80. Furthermore, when the performance control microcontroller 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores the V-pass information in the sub-RAM 94. The performance control microcontroller 91 then performs processing based on other commands (such as a customer waiting command or a RAM clear notification command) and terminates this process.

[Pre-read animation determination process]
Figure 38 is a flowchart of the pre-reading performance determination process (Figure 37: step S4420). First, the performance control microcontroller 91 performs a pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcontroller 91 stores the jackpot pre-determination result (jackpot determination information), jackpot type pre-determination result (jackpot type information), and variation pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information), which are included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80, in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

Figure 39 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores the jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information mentioned above, as well as pre-read performance pattern information. The pre-read performance pattern information is information indicating the content of the pre-read performance to be executed during the variation performance, and is selected in step S4604, which will be described later. Figure 39(A) shows the state in which the jackpot determination information "miss" and variation pattern information "P72" and "P73" are stored in the first to third storage areas as pre-determination results corresponding to the first to third Special Figure 2 reserves, respectively, and the pre-determination result corresponding to the variation is also stored in the same area. Figure 39(B) shows the state in which a win occurs in Special Figure 2 from the state in Figure 39(A), and the pre-determination information included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth Special Figure 2 reserve. Here, the pre-determination information includes the jackpot determination information "jackpot," the jackpot type information "21H," and the variation pattern information "P61." Additionally, "Pattern A" is set as pre-read performance pattern information in the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved symbols in Special Feature 2, and in the area corresponding to the current variation. Figure 39(C) shows the state after the variation has ended and the pre-determination information shift process has been executed, starting from the state in Figure 39(B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the current area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the pre-determination information in the fourth storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation performance termination process (Figure 37: step S4470).

Returning to Figure 38, the microcontroller 91 for performance control then determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the microcontroller 91 for performance control determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If pre-read performance pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c, new pre-read performance pattern information is not selected and stored. On the other hand, if pre-read performance pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the microcontroller 91 for performance control determines whether or not the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with a reach" (step S4603). Whether it's a "jackpot" or a "miss with a near-win" can be determined, for example, by the pre-determination result of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). The microcontroller 91 for performance control terminates this process if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "miss without a near-win" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a pre-read performance. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with a near-win" (step S4603: YES), the microcontroller 91 performs a pre-read performance execution determination to determine whether or not to perform a pre-read performance, and selects a pre-read performance pattern (step S4604). Specifically, the microcontroller 91 for performance control obtains the value of the pre-read performance random number counter, and determines whether or not to perform a pre-read performance, and if so, the pre-read performance pattern, by referring to the obtained random number and the pre-read performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 40 is a diagram illustrating the pre-announcement effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-judgment result is "Big Win" and the pre-announcement effect random value is "0-55", there is "None" pre-announcement effect. If the pre-announcement effect random value is "56-67", "Pattern A" is selected as the pre-announcement effect. If the pre-announcement effect random value is "68-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-announcement effect. Furthermore, if the pre-judgment result is "Reached but Missed", and the pre-announcement effect random value is "0-107", there is "None" pre-announcement effect. If the pre-announcement effect random value is "108-114", "Pattern A" is selected as the pre-announcement effect. If the pre-announcement effect random value is "115-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-announcement effect. Note that the type, content, and range of random values selected for the pre-announcement effect pattern can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to Figure 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a pre-read animation is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-read animation pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when storing the pre-read animation pattern in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the pre-read animation pattern is stored not only in the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also in the storage areas prior to the corresponding storage area and in that area. Specifically, as shown in Figure 39(B), "Pattern A" is set not only in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and in that area. As a result, pre-read animation pattern A is executed even in the variable animation that is executed before the variable animation corresponding to the fourth storage area (the variable animation corresponding to that area and the first to third storage areas). Whether or not a pre-read animation is executed in the variable animation corresponding to that area depends on the progress of that variable animation. In other words, if the timing for executing the pre-announcement effect has already passed during the variation effect, the pre-announcement effect will not be executed. However, if it is before the timing for executing the pre-announcement effect, it will be executed at that time. This will be explained later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-announcement effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process terminates.

[Start of variation effect processing]
Figure 41 is a flowchart of the variation animation start process (Figure 37: step S4460). First, the animation control microcontroller 91 analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the animation control microcontroller 91 sets information regarding the special symbol stop data and information regarding the variation pattern included in the variation start command into the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, and symbol information indicating the symbols as the result of the hit determination process for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. The game state information and symbol information acquired here can be referenced by the animation control microcontroller 91 as appropriate.

Next, the microcontroller 91 for performance control performs the core performance pattern determination process (step S5010). This core performance pattern determination process determines the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display and operation of predetermined characters, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67, and the control of the lighting of lamps). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effects and pre-announcement effects onto this core performance. The microcontroller 91 for performance control determines the core performance pattern by referring to the core performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 42 is a diagram illustrating the core performance pattern determination table T52. Figure 42 sets multiple core performance patterns for normal reach performances, multiple core performance patterns for SP1 performances, multiple core performance patterns for SP2 performances, multiple core performance patterns for SP3 performances, and multiple core performance patterns for no-reach miss performances. The types of core performance patterns can be set arbitrarily. For example, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the core performance pattern for SP1 performances will be selected. Also, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the core performance pattern for no-reach miss performances will be selected.

Returning to Figure 41, after determining the core performance pattern, the performance control microcontroller 91 performs the chance-up performance pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up performance pattern determination process is for determining additional performances to be superimposed on the variable performance. The performance control microcontroller 91 obtains the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up performance pattern by referring to the obtained random number value and the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 43 is a diagram illustrating the Chance Up Performance Pattern Determination Table T53. Here, only the portion of the Chance Up Performance Pattern Determination Table T53 that determines the variation performance pattern of Special Figure 1 during non-time-saving states is shown. Specifically, Figure 43 shows the chance up performance patterns executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". Note that the Chance Up Performance Pattern Determination Table T53 may or may not include a portion that determines the chance up performance patterns executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", or "61" to "73".

In Figure 43, the following chance-up animation patterns are set: "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO". These chance animation patterns correspond to the various chance-up animations described later.

Returning to Figure 41, after determining the chance-up animation pattern, the animation control microcontroller 91 performs the count animation pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count animation pattern determination process is for displaying the remaining number of spins (games) during the probability variation mode, the remaining number of spins during the time-saving mode, the remaining number of spins until reaching the ceiling, the number of spins since power-on, and the number of spins since the last big win on the display screen 7a. During the probability variation mode, the animation control microcontroller 91 displays the remaining number of probability variation spins on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability variation animation counter. Also, during the time-saving mode, the animation control microcontroller 91 displays the remaining number of probability variation spins based on the value of the time-saving animation counter.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 can execute various performances based on the value of the ceiling performance counter and the value of the carryover performance counter. The ceiling performance counter stores the number of spins remaining until the ceiling is reached, and the carryover performance counter records the number of spins since power-on. For example, each time the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a spin performance end command from the main control board 80, it can set the number of spins since power-on by incrementing the carryover performance counter. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH2 (for example, TH2 = 200) or less when the value of the carryover performance counter is TH1 (for example, TH1 = 10). If the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH2 or less, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling performance counter is greater than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. As a result, players who see the chance image can recognize that the game machine 1 has carried over the number of games from the previous day and that a RAM clear has not been performed. Furthermore, the performance control microcontroller 91 may display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the carryover performance counter is TH3 (for example, TH3 = 50). Also, the performance control microcontroller 91 may again hide the display or chance image representing the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the carryover performance counter is TH4 (for example, TH4 = 100). Also, the performance control microcontroller 91 may again display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the carryover performance counter is TH5 (for example, TH5 = 200). The performance control microcontroller 91 may decide whether or not to display the value of the ceiling performance counter based on the value of the carryover performance counter, as described above, or based on the value of the ceiling performance counter. For example, the microcontroller 91 for controlling the performance may display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value is TH6 (for example, TH6 = 100), turn off the display of the ceiling performance counter value when the value is TH7 (for example, TH7 = 70), and display the ceiling performance counter value again when the value is TH8 (for example, TH8 = 50).

After the count animation pattern determination process, the animation control microcontroller 91 may refer to the random value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed. This determines what kind of animation will be performed as a variable animation.

The microcontroller 91 for controlling the animation process sets a variable animation start command in the animation command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that the variable animation based on the variable animation pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 can be realized (step S5020). When the variable animation start command set in the animation command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 during the command transmission process (Figure 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the variable animation image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, the microcontroller 91 for performance control sets the variable performance timer (step S5030) and terminates this process. The variable performance timer is set with a variation time (Figure 42) corresponding to the variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", the variable performance timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during fluctuation animation]
Figure 44 is a flowchart of the processing during the variation effect (Figure 36: step S4305). The microcontroller 91 for effect control determines whether or not a variation effect is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not a variation effect is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variation effect timer is at zero. If a variation effect is not in progress (step S4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a variation effect is in progress (step S4701: YES), the microcontroller 91 for effect control determines whether or not it is time to set a pre-completion command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-completion command is a command that the microcontroller 91 for effect control informs the image control board 100, etc., that it is a specific timing during the variation effect. When the image control board 100 receives the pre-completion command, it switches the effect content or displays a specific image, etc., according to the information contained in the pre-completion command.

If it is not the time to set the command before the end of the variation (step S4702: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the time to set the command before the end of the variation (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-read performance pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the command before the end of the variation including the pre-read performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-read performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), the command before the end of the variation that does not include pre-read performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-read performance pattern information in the area, the command before the end of the variation including the pre-read performance pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation performance. The image control microcontroller 101 then initiates a pre-read animation, displaying a pre-read animation image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, if there is no pre-read animation pattern information in that area, a command indicating the end of the variation is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. In this case, if a pre-read image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcontroller 101 initiates a pre-read fade animation, fading out that pre-read image.

9. Operation of Movable Parts and Display Effects of Sub-Display Screen 64 The operation of the movable parts of the game board (first movable part 14, second movable part 15), the operation of the movable frame (frame movable part 69), and the display effects of the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be explained using Figures 46 to 50. The microcontroller 91 for performance control performs drive control to operate the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and the movable frame part 69 during game performances (display effects) and initial operations when the power is turned on. The microcontroller 91 for performance control also performs display effects to display specific images on the sub-display screen 64 during game performances (display effects) and initial operations when the power is turned on.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the movement of the first movable component 14. Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second embodiment of the first movable component 14. The first movable component 14 is a vertically elongated rod-shaped member, with its upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and its lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper and lower ends of the first movable component 14 are difficult to see, while the central part is visible in front of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable component 14 can be stationary in a retracted position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 (first embodiment). In the retracted position, only a part of the first movable component 14 may be stored and the rest visible, or the entire component may be stored and difficult to see. As shown in Figure 46, the first movable component 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7. The first movable component 14 is configured to move (advance) from its retracted position toward the right edge of the display screen 7a and to move horizontally in front of the display screen 7a. It can also be stopped at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable component 14 can be arbitrarily set. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 47, the first movable component 14 can move to the right edge of the display screen 7a and stop at that position (second mode). The first movable component 14 may have decorative parts formed on at least a portion of it, and may also be transparent.

Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second embodiment of the second movable component 15. The second movable component 15 is equipped with a rectangular decorative part inscribed with "OARO" and is configured to move vertically. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable component 15 can be stationary in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first embodiment). At this time, a portion of the second movable component 15 becomes difficult to see. From the state in Figure 1, the second movable component 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and can be stationary in the extended position (deployed position) shown in Figure 48 (second embodiment). In this second embodiment, the decorative part stops in front of the image display device 7, covering the area near the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable component 15 can move upward (retract) from the extended position in Figure 48 to the retracted position shown in Figure 1, where it can be stationary.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second embodiment of the movable frame mechanism 69. The movable frame mechanism 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on both the left and right sides of the handle 60, and each is configured to be movable in the left and right directions. The two members are made of a flexible material, and one main surface of each member is configured to move closer to or away from the handle 60. As shown in Figure 1, the two members of the movable frame mechanism 69 are normally stationary in retracted positions (home positions) away from the handle 60, on the left and right sides respectively (first embodiment). As shown in Figure 49, the two members of the movable frame mechanism 69 can move (advance) from their retracted positions toward the handle 60, that is, move closer to each other, and can be stationary in positions where they touch the handle 60 (second embodiment). When the movable frame mechanism 69 is in the advanced position, it touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60. The movable frame component 69 can move in a direction that separates the two members from each other, so that it changes from the second configuration to the first configuration.

Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U can each display images independently. Furthermore, they can perform effects synchronized with the image on display screen 7a.

10. Examples of Presentations, Effects, Modifications, and Appearances of this Embodiment Below, examples of presentations (display presentations, moving parts presentations) of this embodiment will be described. Examples of effects, modifications, and appearances of these presentations will also be described. The presentations described below are, as mentioned above, implemented by the presentation control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81 (jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, pre-judgment information, etc.). The following display presentation examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display presentation examples.

The following describes the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effects A to C using Figures 51 to 53. These confirmed stop symbol remaining display effects are executed during the variation of decorative symbols, etc. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Confirmed Stop Symbol Remaining Display Effect A]
Figure 51 is a diagram illustrating the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect A. The confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect is an effect in which, when a decorative symbol is displayed as stopped after a variation display, the display of the stopped decorative symbol is maintained while the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next special symbol variation is displayed. In confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect A, first, as shown in Figure 51(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, the hold icon 9A, and the variation icon (the said hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the stop display of the set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r, which are displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the stop display of the set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "789" after their variation, indicating the result of the previous special symbol lottery. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation state, corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation in question).

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is located below the first area DA1 and is a different area that does not overlap with the first area DA1. Therefore, the fluctuating display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 does not overlap with the stopped display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. However, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may partially overlap with decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in that case, they may be displayed on the front side or the back side of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

The hold icons 9A are displayed vertically in a row of four on the right side of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. Below this variable icon display area, a base image is displayed. Both the hold icons 9A and the variable icons 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in Figure 51(B), the fluctuating decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r stop displaying at "234". The stopped decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r do not overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In conjunction with the stopping display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the fluctuating icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. The lowest of the four hold icons 9A begins to move towards the fluctuating icon display area where the fluctuating icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 51(C), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variation display mode. The decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8f, the middle decorative symbol 8s, and the right decorative symbol 8t, which are displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. The variation display of this set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of this set of symbols indicates the special symbol lottery result. When the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variation display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, remain displayed in a stop display state.

The third area DA3 of the display screen 7a is located below the second area DA2 and is a different area that does not overlap with the second area DA2. Therefore, the fluctuating display of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3 does not overlap with the stationary display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. However, decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may partially overlap with decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and in that case, they may be displayed on either the front or back side of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r.

As shown in Figure 51(D), the fluctuating decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t stop displaying at "567". The stopped decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t do not overlap with the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r. In conjunction with the stopping display of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, the fluctuating icon (the corresponding held icon) 9C disappears. The lowest of the three held icons 9A begins to move towards the fluctuating icon display area where the fluctuating icon 9C is displayed. The remaining held icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 51(E), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variation display mode. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the right decorative symbol 8z, which are displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. The variation display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of the set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. When the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variation display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are maintained in a stop display state. Here, the variation display of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z is the same as the variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, 8l, 8c, 8r, and decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t. These decorative symbols are displayed as if the left, center, and right symbols are moving from top to bottom, respectively.

The fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a is located below the third region DA3 and is a different region that does not overlap with the third region DA3. Therefore, the fluctuating display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth region DA4 does not overlap with the stationary display of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third region DA3. However, decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may partially overlap with decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, and in that case, they may be displayed on either the front or back side of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t.

As shown in Figure 51(F), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be displayed in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are displayed in the first region DA1 of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, which are displayed in the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, which are displayed in the third region DA3 of the display screen 7a, disappear from view.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 51(G), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, stop at "735". No decorative patterns are displayed in the first area DA1, the second area DA2, and the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. In conjunction with the stopping of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 51(H), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were stopped at "735" in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, disappear, and the display screen 7a becomes empty of decorative symbols. The lower of the two adjacent hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special symbol variation begins. Then, as shown in Figure 51(I), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a in a variable display mode.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 51(J), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, stop at "135," and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. The remaining reserved icon 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special pattern variation begins.

[Confirmed Stop Symbol Remaining Display Effect B]
Figure 52 is a diagram illustrating the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect B. The confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect is an effect in which, when a decorative symbol is displayed as stopped after a variation display, the display of the stopped decorative symbol is maintained while the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next special symbol variation is displayed. The confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect B differs from the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect A mainly in that multiple decorative symbols are displayed overlapping each other, and a specific image is displayed that covers some of the decorative symbols. In the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect B, first, as shown in Figure 52(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, the hold icon 9A, and the variation icon (the said hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the stop display of the set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r, which are displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the stop display of the set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "789" after their variation, indicating the result of the previous special symbol lottery. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation state, corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation in question).

The second area DA2 of display screen 7a partially overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the fluctuating display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 partially overlaps with the stationary display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Note that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may also be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, or they may completely overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

The hold icons 9A are displayed vertically in a row of four on the right side of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. Below this variable icon display area, a base image is displayed. Both the hold icons 9A and the variable icons 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in Figure 52(B), the variable decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a fixed position at "234". Parts of the fixed decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r overlap with decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, with the overlapping portion displayed in front of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In conjunction with the fixed display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. The lowest of the four hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 52(C), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variation display mode. The decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8f, the middle decorative symbol 8s, and the right decorative symbol 8t, which are displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. The variation display of this set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of this set of symbols indicates the special symbol lottery result. When the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variation display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, remain displayed in a stop display state.

The third area DA3 of display screen 7a partially overlaps with the second area DA2. Therefore, the fluctuating display of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3 partially overlaps with the stationary display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. Here, decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3 are displayed in front of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. Note that decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may also be displayed behind decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, or they may completely overlap with decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Furthermore, the third area DA3 may partially overlap with the first area DA1, in which case decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may partially overlap with decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As shown in Figure 52(D), the variable decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are displayed in a fixed position at "567". Parts of the fixed decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t overlap with decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, with the overlapping portions displayed in front of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r. In conjunction with the fixed display of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. The lowest of the three hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 52(E), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variation display mode. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the right decorative symbol 8z, which are displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. The variation display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of the set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. When the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variation display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are maintained in a stop display state. Here, the variation display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z differs from that of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, 8l, 8c, 8r, and 8f, 8s, and 8t. The variation patterns of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, 8l, 8c, 8r, and 8f, 8s, and 8t are displayed as the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom. On the other hand, the variation patterns of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed as the left, center, and right patterns rotate horizontally around the vertical axis of rotation.

The fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the third area DA3. Therefore, the fluctuating display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4 partially overlaps with the stationary display of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3. Here, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3. Note that the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may also be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, or they may completely overlap with the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t. Furthermore, the fourth region DA4 may partially overlap with the second region DA2 and the first region DA1. In this case, decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may partially overlap with decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, or decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As shown in Figures 52(F) and 52(G), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are continuously displayed in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a, a specific image TG appears from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG is a shutter-like image, and it covers the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in the first region DA1 of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that are displayed in the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that are displayed in the third region DA3 of the display screen 7a, causing them to disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth region DA4, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed in front of the specific image TG, so even if the specific image TG covers the entire display screen 7a, the display is maintained. In other words, the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth region DA4, and on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first region DA1, 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second region DA2, and 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third region DA3.

Here, because the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number, a special effect is executed in which a specific image TG appears. The timing of the appearance of the specific image TG can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image TG may appear when the pre-read change of the reserve icon 9A becomes the fluctuation icon 9C, or when the pre-read change of the reserve icon 9A appears. Furthermore, the specific image TG may appear when switching from the special feature 1 fluctuation to the special feature 2 fluctuation, or when reaching the ceiling (b-time reduction (playtime)).

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 52(H), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, stop at "678". At this time, the specific image TG is displayed in the first area DA1, the second area DA2, and the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns on the back side of the specific image TG are not displayed. In conjunction with the stopping display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. The lowermost of the two reserved icons 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area, and the next special pattern variation begins. Then, as shown in Figure 52(I), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a in a variable state. When switching from the stopped display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in Figure 52(H) to the changing display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in Figure 52(I), the display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may continue, or the stopped display of the decorative patterns may disappear once, and the changing display of the decorative patterns may be newly displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 52(J), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, stop at "767," and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. The remaining reserved icon 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special symbol variation begins.

[Confirmed Stop Symbol Remaining Display Effect C]
Figure 53 is a diagram illustrating the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect C. The confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect is an effect in which, when a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable state and then stopped, the display of the stopped decorative symbol is maintained while the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next special symbol variable is displayed. The confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect C differs from the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect A mainly in that multiple decorative symbols are displayed overlapping each other, and a specific image is displayed that covers some of the decorative symbols. In the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect C, first, as shown in Figure 53(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the said hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The display of the changing symbols represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol change), and the display of the stopped symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the special symbols may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing state and correspond to the current special symbol change (the change in question).

The hold icon 9A is displayed horizontally in pairs at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this variable icon display area, a base image is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in Figure 53(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were previously displayed in a variable state, stop at "234". As the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost of the lined hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift. This example shows a case where one hold icon 9A is added due to a win.

As shown in Figure 53(C), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variation display mode. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the right decorative symbol 8z, which are displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The variation display of this set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of this set of symbols indicates the special symbol lottery result. When the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variation display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R remain displayed in a stop display state.

The second area DA2 of display screen 7a overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the fluctuating display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 overlaps with the stationary display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Alternatively, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Here, the variation display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z differs from that of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The variation of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom. On the other hand, the variation of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is such that the left, center, and right patterns rotate horizontally around the vertical axis.

As shown in Figures 53(D) and 53(E), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are continuously displayed in the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a, a specific image TG appears from left to right across the display screen 7a. The specific image TG is a shutter-like image, and it covers the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in the first region DA1 of the display screen 7a, causing them to disappear from view. Meanwhile, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second region DA2, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed in front of the specific image TG. Therefore, even when the specific image TG covers the entire display screen 7a, the display is maintained. In other words, the specific image TG is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second region DA2, and in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first region DA1.

Here, because the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number, a special effect is executed in which a specific image TG appears. The timing of the appearance of the specific image TG can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image TG may appear when the pre-read change of the reserve icon 9A becomes the fluctuation icon 9C, or when the pre-read change of the reserve icon 9A appears. Furthermore, the specific image TG may appear when switching from the special feature 1 fluctuation to the special feature 2 fluctuation, or when reaching the ceiling (b-time reduction (playtime)).

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 53(F), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, stop at "567". At this time, the specific image TG is displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns on the back side of the specific image TG are not displayed. In conjunction with the stopping display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. The rightmost of the two reserved icons 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area, and the next special pattern variation begins. Then, as shown in Figure 53(G), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a in a variable state. When switching from the stopped display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in Figure 53(F) to the changing display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in Figure 53(G), the display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may continue, or the stopped display of the decorative patterns may disappear once, and the changing display of the decorative patterns may be newly displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 53(H), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, stop at "678," and the variation icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. The remaining reserved icon 9A begins to move towards the variation icon display area where the variation icon 9C is displayed, and the next special pattern variation begins. When the next special pattern variation begins, as shown in Figure 53(I), the specific image TG disappears, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the first area DA1 in a variation state, and the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in the second area DA2 in a variation state. The variation display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 overlaps with the stopped display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. The variation display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponds to the same special pattern variation.

Here, the hold icon 9A, which had changed in a pre-read state, became a variation icon 9C, triggering the disappearance of the specific image TG. The timing of the disappearance of the specific image TG can be arbitrarily set. For example, the specific image TG may disappear after a predetermined number of variations have been performed since its appearance, or it may appear during the variation of Special Feature 1 and disappear when the variation of Special Feature 2 begins. Alternatively, the specific image TG may appear when the ceiling (b-time reduction (playtime)) is reached and disappear when the variation of Special Feature 2 begins.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 53(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, all stop displaying at "678".

[Example of effect]
The following shows an example of the effect of the display of remaining confirmed stop symbols.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 51(C) to (E), a first performance is performed in which a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t, which have been displayed in response to a first special symbol variation, are stopped and displayed. After the first performance, while maintaining the display of the stopped set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t, a second performance is performed in which a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, which correspond to the second special symbol variation that follows the first special symbol variation, are displayed in a variation display. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 52 and 53.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 51(E) and (F), after the second effect, while maintaining the display of a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were displayed in response to the second special symbol variation, a third effect can be performed in which the display of a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that were displayed in response to the first special symbol variation and then stopped disappears. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel effects unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 52 and 53.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 51(G) to (I), after the third performance, a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were displayed in response to the second special symbol variation are stopped and displayed. Then, while the stopped set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are not displayed, a fourth performance can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the third special symbol variation following the second special symbol variation are displayed in a variation display. With this configuration, the game can be visually entertained by a novel performance that switches from a performance in which the previously stopped symbols remain to a performance in which they do not, thereby improving the entertainment value for players. The same applies to Figures 52 and 53.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 52(F) and 52(G), in the third effect, a specific image TG is displayed on the back side of a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were displayed in response to the second special symbol variation, and on the front side of a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that were displayed in response to the first special symbol variation and then stopped. The display of the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that were displayed in response to the first special symbol variation and then stopped disappears when covered by the specific image TG. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel effects unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 53.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 52(D) and 52(E), in the second performance, the display of the changing set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the second special symbol change is displayed superimposed on the stopped display of the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 53.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 52(E), the variation display of a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t corresponding to the first special symbol variation and the variation display of a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the second special symbol variation have different variation patterns. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented effects, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 53.

[Variations]
The following shows a variation of the display of remaining symbols after the confirmed stop.
[Variation 1]
In Figure 51(I) of the ceiling reach indication effect A, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display manner in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a. However, decorative symbols may also be newly displayed in a variable display manner in regions other than the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a.
Furthermore, in Figure 52(H)(I) of the ceiling reach indication effect B, in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, after the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed as stopped, the display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the next special symbol variation begins. However, the display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the next special symbol variation may be displayed in an area other than the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a.
Furthermore, in Figure 53(F)(G) of the ceiling reach indication effect C, after the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed as stopped in the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a, the display of the variation of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the next special symbol variation begins. However, the display of the variation of decorative symbols corresponding to the next special symbol variation may be displayed in a region other than the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
◇[Pattern A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
One of the aforementioned multiple types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of indicating whether the result is correct or incorrect.
A first performance in which the set of decorative symbols that were displayed in response to the first special symbol variation are stopped and displayed,
After the first performance, while maintaining the display of the set of decorative symbols that were stopped, a second performance is performed in which the display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol variation following the first special symbol variation is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A1-2]
The gaming machine described in A1-1,
After the second performance, while maintaining the display of the set of decorative symbols that were displayed in response to the second special symbol variation, a third performance can be executed in which the display of the set of decorative symbols that were displayed in response to the first special symbol variation and then stopped disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A1-3]
The gaming machine described in A1-2,
After the third performance, the set of decorative symbols that were displayed in response to the second special symbol variation are stopped, and while the set of decorative symbols that were stopped are not displayed, a fourth performance can be executed in which the display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the third special symbol variation following the second special symbol variation is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A1-4]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment A1-2 or embodiment A1-3,
In the third performance described above, a specific image is displayed on the back side of the set of decorative symbols that were displayed in response to the second special symbol variation, and on the front side of the set of decorative symbols that were displayed in response to the first special symbol variation and then stopped, and the display of the set of decorative symbols that were displayed in response to the first special symbol variation and then stopped disappears as it is covered by the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A1-5]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A1-1 to A1-4,
In the second presentation, the display of the variation of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol variation is displayed superimposed on the set of decorative symbols that were stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A1-1 to A1-5,
The variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol variation and the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol variation have different variation patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The following describes the variable display area change effects A to C using Figures 54 to 56. These variable display area change effects are executed during the variation of decorative patterns, etc. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the variable display area change effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Variable display area change effect A]
Figure 54 is a diagram illustrating the variable display area change effect A. The variable display area change effect is an effect in which the display area on the display screen 7a in which the variable display of decorative symbols is shown changes when Special Symbol 1 changes and when Special Symbol 2 changes. Special Symbol 1 change means the change of special symbols in the first special symbol display 41a, and Special Symbol 2 change means the change of special symbols in the second special symbol display 41b. In variable display area change effect A, first, as shown in Figure 54(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a hold icon 9A, and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the Special Symbol 1 change is performed when the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols displayed in the horizontal area YA of the display screen 7a, including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The display of the variation of this set of symbols represents the variation of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the display of the stop of this set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation state, corresponding to the current special symbol 1 variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as the left, middle, and right symbols moving from top to bottom, respectively.

The hold icon 9A is displayed horizontally in pairs at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this variable icon display area, a base image is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in Figure 54(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were previously displayed in a variable state, stop at "234". In conjunction with the stopping of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the corresponding reserve icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost of the lined reserve icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9A shift. Here, an example is shown where one reserve icon 9A is added due to a win. Furthermore, in this example, the stopping of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates that the number of variations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) has reached 500, and the game state switches to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state).

When the game state switches to the time-saving state and the next Special Symbol 1 variation begins, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed as shown in Figure 54(C). The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the upper decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the lower decorative symbol 8z, which are displayed in the vertically elongated area TA of the display screen 7a. The variation display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of the set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variation state and correspond to the Special Symbol 1 variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation pattern of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed such that the upper, middle, and lower symbols move from left to right. Area TA of the display screen 7a is a vertically elongated area that partially overlaps with area YA, and the area is approximately the same. The text image for "Vertical Mode" is displayed in conjunction with the changing display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z. This indicates that the decorative patterns are arranged vertically. When switching from Figure 54(B) to Figure 54(C), that is, when the display of decorative patterns changes from horizontal to vertical, the background image may also change.

As shown in Figure 54(D), in the area TA of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be displayed in a variable state. At this point, a game ball enters the second starting port 21, and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In Figure 54(D), the same background image as in Figure 54(C) is displayed, while the "Vertical Mode" text image disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 54(E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a, stop at "789". Along with the stopping display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Here, since the consumption of the second special symbol hold takes precedence over the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the two side-by-side hold icons 9A remain as they are, and the hold icon 9B begins to move towards the variable icon display area, and the next special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) begins. The game state remains in the time-saving state.

Then, as shown in Figure 54(F), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in area TA of the display screen 7a. At this point, a game ball enters the second starting port 21, and a reserve icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserve is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. When switching from Figure 54(E) to Figure 54(F), that is, when the next special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) begins, the background image may also change.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 54(G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a, stop at "567". Along with the stopping display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. In Figure 54(G), the same background image as in Figure 54(F) is displayed. Here, since the consumption of the second special symbol hold takes precedence over the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the two side-by-side hold icons 9A remain as they are, and the hold icon 9B begins to move towards the variable icon display area, and the next special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) begins. The game state remains in the time-saving state.

When the next special symbol variation begins, the variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as shown in Figure 54(H). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the same configuration as in Figure 54(A), and include the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are displayed in the horizontal area YA of the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation state, corresponding to the current special symbol variation 2 (the variation in question). The variation pattern of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from top to bottom, respectively. When switching from Figure 54(G) to Figure 54(H), that is, when the display of decorative symbols changes from a vertical arrangement to a horizontal arrangement, the background image may also change.

Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols switches from the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in area TA to the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in area YA, depending on the elapsed time since the next spin (Figure 54(C)) after reaching the ceiling (b-time reduction (playtime)). The timing of the display mode switch can be arbitrarily set. For example, the switch may occur when the hold icon 9A or hold icon 9B, which has undergone a pre-read change, becomes the spin icon 9C, or it may occur after a predetermined number of spins have been performed since reaching the ceiling. Alternatively, the switch may occur when the ceiling (b-time reduction (playtime)) is reached, and revert to the original state when the playtime ends.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 54(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were displayed in the variable area YA of the display screen 7a, stop at "735". As the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Figure 54(I) displays the same background image as Figure 54(H). The rightmost of the two side-by-side hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area, and the next special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation) begins. At this point, the game state remains the time-saving state. Once the next special symbol variation begins, the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed, as shown in Figure 54(J).

[Variable display area change effect B]
Figure 55 is a diagram illustrating the variable display area change effect B. The variable display area change effect is an effect in which the display area on the display screen 7a where the variable display of decorative symbols is shown changes when Special Symbol 1 changes and when Special Symbol 2 changes. Special Symbol 1 change refers to the change of special symbols in the first special symbol display 41a, and Special Symbol 2 change refers to the change of special symbols in the second special symbol display 41b. The variable display area change effect B differs from the variable display area change effect A mainly in the way the display area of decorative symbols changes. In the variable display area change effect B, first, as shown in Figure 55(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a hold icon 9A, a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C, and the first background image HK1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the Special Symbol 1 change is performed when the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols displayed in the horizontal area YA of the display screen 7a, including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The display of the variation of this set of symbols represents the variation of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the display of the stop of this set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation state, corresponding to the current special symbol 1 variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as the left, middle, and right symbols moving from top to bottom, respectively.

The hold icon 9A is displayed horizontally in pairs at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this variable icon display area, a base image is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. The first background image HK1 is an elliptical image and is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C.

As shown in Figure 55(B), the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop displaying at "234". In conjunction with the stopping of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the fluctuating icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost of the lined hold icons 9A begins to move towards the fluctuating icon display area where the fluctuating icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift. Here, the stopping of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as described above indicates that the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) has reached 500, and the game state switches to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state).

When the game state switches to the time-saving state and the next Special Symbol 1 variation begins, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed as shown in Figure 55(C). The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the upper decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the lower decorative symbol 8z, which are displayed in the relatively small horizontal area YB of the display screen 7a. The variation display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of the set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variation state and correspond to the Special Symbol 1 variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation pattern of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from top to bottom, respectively. Area YB of display screen 7a is a horizontally elongated area located below area YA, not overlapping with area YA, and its area is smaller than that of area YA. In accordance with the changing display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the first mode image MG1, which includes the text image for "Small Display Mode," is displayed. That is, it indicates that the decorative patterns are displayed relatively smaller. When switching from Figure 55(B) to Figure 55(C), that is, when the position and size of the display area of the decorative patterns change, the background image switches from the first background image HK1 to the first mode image MG1.

As shown in Figure 55(D), in the YB region of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be displayed in a variable state. At this point, a game ball enters the second start opening 21, and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In Figure 55(D), the display of the first mode image MG1 continues.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 55(E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the YB area of the display screen 7a, stop at "567". Along with the stopping display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Here, since the consumption of the second special symbol hold takes precedence over the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the hold icon 9A remains as is, and the hold icon 9B begins to move towards the variable icon display area, and the next special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) begins. The game state remains the time-saving state, and the display of the first mode image MG1 continues.

Then, as shown in Figure 55(F), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in area YB of the display screen 7a. At this point, a game ball enters the second starting port 21, and a reserve icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserve is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In conjunction with the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the second mode image MG2, which includes the text image "Continued Small Display Mode," is displayed. That is, it indicates that the state in which the decorative symbols are displayed relatively small will continue. When switching from Figure 55(E) to Figure 55(F), that is, when the next special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) begins, the background image switches from the first mode image MG1 to the second mode image MG2.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 55(G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the YB area of the display screen 7a, stop at "789". Along with the stopping of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. In Figure 55(G), the display of the second mode image MG2 continues. Here, the consumption of the second special symbol hold takes precedence over the consumption of the first special symbol hold; therefore, the two side-by-side hold icons 9A remain as they are, while the hold icon 9B begins to move towards the variable icon display area, and the next special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) begins. The game state remains the time-saving state.

When the next special symbol variation begins, the variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as shown in Figure 55(H). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the same configuration as in Figure 55(A), and include the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are displayed in the horizontal area YA of the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation state, corresponding to the current special symbol variation 2 (the variation in question). The variation pattern of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from top to bottom, respectively. At this point, a game ball enters the second starting port 21, and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

In conjunction with the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a second background image HK2, which has a gourd shape, is displayed. The second background image HK2 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the changing icon (the hold icon) 9C. When switching from Figure 55(G) to Figure 55(H), that is, when the size of the decorative patterns changes from a small state to a large state, the background image also switches from the second mode image MG2 to the second background image HK2.

Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols switches from the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in area YB to the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in area YA, depending on the elapsed time since the next spin (Figure 55(C)) after reaching the ceiling (b-time reduction (playtime)). The timing of the display mode switch of the decorative symbols can be set arbitrarily. For example, the switch may occur when the hold icon 9A or hold icon 9B, which has undergone a pre-read change, becomes the spin icon 9C, or it may occur after a predetermined number of spins have been performed since reaching the ceiling. Alternatively, the switch may occur when the ceiling (b-time reduction (playtime)) is reached, and revert to the original state when the playtime ends.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 55(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were displayed in the area YA of the display screen 7a, stop at "735". Along with the stopping display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variation icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. In Figure 55(I), the display of the second background image HK2 continues. Here, since the consumption of the second special symbol hold takes precedence over the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the hold icon 9A remains as is, and the hold icon 9B begins to move towards the variation icon display area, and the next special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) begins. The game state remains in the time-saving state. When the next special symbol variation begins, as shown in Figure 55(J), the variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

[Fluctuating display area change effect C]
Figure 56 is a diagram illustrating the variable display area change effect C. The variable display area change effect is an effect in which the display area on the display screen 7a where the variable display of decorative symbols is shown changes when Special Symbol 1 changes and when Special Symbol 2 changes. Special Symbol 1 change refers to the change of special symbols in the first special symbol display 41a, and Special Symbol 2 change refers to the change of special symbols in the second special symbol display 41b. The variable display area change effect C differs from the variable display area change effect A mainly in the way the display area of decorative symbols changes. In the variable display area change effect C, first, as shown in Figure 56(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a hold icon 9A, a variable icon (the said hold icon) 9C, and a frame image WK are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the Special Symbol 1 change is performed when the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols displayed inside the frame image WK, including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The display of the changing symbols in this set represents the changing symbols of the special symbols (special symbol change), and the display of the stopping symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner, corresponding to the current special symbol 1 change (the change in question). Here, the changing pattern of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as the left, middle, and right symbols moving from top to bottom, respectively.

The hold icon 9A is displayed horizontally in pairs at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this variable icon display area, a base image is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. The frame image WK is a horizontally elongated rectangular image, displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed inside.

As shown in Figure 56(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were previously displayed in a variable state, stop at "234". In conjunction with the stopping of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost of the lined hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift. Here, the stopping of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as described above indicates that the number of variations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) has reached 500, and the game state switches to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state).

When the game state switches to the time-saving state and the next special symbol 1 variation begins, as shown in Figure 56(C), a shutter appears inside the frame image WK, moving from top to bottom. As the shutter closes, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become invisible.

When the shutter is completely closed, as shown in Figure 56(D), a variation display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed on the shutter. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including the upper decorative pattern 8x, the middle decorative pattern 8y, and the lower decorative pattern 8z, which are displayed in a relatively small horizontal area SA of the display screen 7a. The variation display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variation state and correspond to the special pattern 1 variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation mode of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is such that the left, middle, and right patterns move from top to bottom, respectively. The area SA of the display screen 7a is a horizontal area inside the frame image WK that overlaps with the shutter image, and its area is smaller than that of the frame image WK. Between Figure 56(B) and Figure 56(D), that is, when the position and size of the decorative pattern display area change, the background image may also change.

As shown in Figure 56(D), in the area SA of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be displayed in a variable state. At this point, a game ball enters the second starting port 21, and a reserve icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserve is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 56(E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a, stop at "567". Along with the stopping display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. Here, since the consumption of the second special symbol reserve takes precedence over the consumption of the first special symbol reserve, the reserved icon 9A remains as is, and the reserved icon 9B begins to move towards the variable icon display area, and the next special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) begins. The game state remains in the time-saving state.

Then, as shown in Figure 56(F), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner within area SA of the display screen 7a. When switching from Figure 56(E) to Figure 56(F), that is, when the next special pattern variation (special pattern 2 variation) begins, the background image may also change.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 56(G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a, stop at "789". Along with the stopping display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Here, since the consumption of the second special symbol hold takes precedence over the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the two side-by-side hold icons 9A remain as they are, and the hold icon 9B begins to move towards the variable icon display area, and the next special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) begins. The game state remains in the time-saving state.

When the next special symbol variation begins, as shown in Figure 56(H), the shutter moves upward inside the frame image WK, and as the shutter opens, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become visible. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the same state as the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, with the display showing "789".

When the shutter is fully open, as shown in Figure 56(I), the "789" stop indicators for decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z disappear, and the variable displays of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the same configuration as in Figure 56(A), and include the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, all displayed inside the frame image WK. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable state, corresponding to the current variation in Special Feature 2 (the variation in question). The variation mode of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left, middle, and right patterns move from top to bottom, respectively. Between Figure 56(G) and Figure 56(I), that is, when the position and size of the decorative pattern display area change, the background image may switch.

Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols switches from the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in area SA to the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R inside the frame image WK, depending on the elapsed time since the next variation (Figure 56(C)) after reaching the ceiling (b-time reduction (playtime)). The timing of the display mode switch of the decorative symbols can be set arbitrarily. For example, the switch may occur when the hold icon 9A or hold icon 9B, which has undergone a pre-read change, becomes the variation icon 9C, or it may occur after a predetermined number of variations have been performed since reaching the ceiling. Alternatively, the switch may occur when the ceiling (b-time reduction (playtime)) is reached (the shutter lowers), and then revert to the original state (the shutter rises) when the playtime ends.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 56(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were displayed in a variable state inside the frame image WK, stop at "735". As the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Figure 56(J) displays the same background image as Figure 56(I). The hold icon 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area, and the next special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation) begins. At this point, the game state remains the time-saving state. Once the next special symbol variation begins, the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

[Example of effect]
The following shows examples of the effects of the variable display area change animation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 54(C) to (G), a first performance can be performed in which a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the variation of special figure 1 are displayed in area TA of the display screen 7a, and a second performance can be performed in which, in the special figure variation following the special figure variation performed in the first performance, a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the variation of special figure 2 are displayed in area TA. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 55 and 56.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 54(A) to (B), a third effect can be performed in which, in the special symbol variation preceding the special symbol variation of special symbol 1 performed in the first effect, the variation display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special symbol variation of special symbol 1 is displayed in area YA of the display screen 7a, which is different from area TA. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel effects that are unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 55 and 56.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 54(C) to (H), a fourth effect can be performed in which, after the special symbol variation of special symbol 2 performed in the second effect, a variation display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special symbol variation of special symbol 2 is displayed in area YA. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel effects unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 55 and 56.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 54, the first performance (time-saving state) and the third performance (normal state) are different game states, while the first performance (time-saving state) and the second performance (time-saving state) are the same game state. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 55 and 56.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 54 to 56, the background image is different for the first effect and the third effect, and the background image is different for the first effect and the second effect. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel effects that are unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 54, areas YA and TA partially overlap. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented effects, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 56.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Modification 2, during the first and second effects, a set of changing decorative patterns is displayed in a third area of the display screen 7a, which is different from the first area and the second area. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel effects that are unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment.

[Variations]
The following shows a modified version of the variable display area change effect.
[Variation 1]
In the variable display area change effect A, the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in area YA and the variable display of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in area TA may be performed in a single variation. That is, during a single variation, the display may switch from the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in area YA to the variable display of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in area TA, or during a single variation, the display may switch from the variable display of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in area TA to the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in area YA. The same applies to the variable display area change effects B and C.

[Modified example 2]
In the variable display area change effect A, when decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in area YA, and decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in area TA, decorative patterns other than decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may be displayed in an area of display screen 7a different from areas YA and TA. The same applies to variable display area change effects B and C.

[Modification 3]
In the variable display area change effects A to C, the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change may be reversed. That is, in the variable display area change effects A to C, the part labeled as special figure 1 change may be treated as special figure 2 change, and the part labeled as special figure 2 change may be treated as special figure 1 change.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
◇[Pattern A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
One of the aforementioned multiple types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of indicating whether the result is correct or incorrect.
In the first area of the display means, a first performance is performed in which a display of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to one of the special figure variations, special figure 1 variation and special figure 2 variation, is shown.
A second performance is made possible in which, in the special symbol variation following the special symbol variation performed in the first performance, the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the other special symbol variation of special symbol variation 1 and special symbol variation 2 is displayed in the first area,
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine described in A2-1,
In the special symbol variation preceding the special symbol variation performed in the first performance, a third performance is possible in which the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to one of the special symbol variations, special symbol variation 1 and special symbol variation 2, is displayed in a second area of the display means that is different from the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine described in A2-2,
In a special symbol variation following a special symbol variation performed in the second performance, a fourth performance is possible in which the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the other special symbol variation among the special symbol variation 1 and special symbol variation 2 is displayed in the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A2-4]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment A2-2 or embodiment A2-3,
The first and third performances are in different game states, while the first and second performances are in the same game state.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A2-5]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions from A2-2 to A2-4,
The first and third productions have different background images, and the first and second productions have different background images.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A2-6]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions from A2-2 to A2-5,
The first region and the second region overlap in part.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A2-7]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions from A2-1 to A2-6,
In the first and second performances, the variable display of the set of decorative patterns is displayed in a third area of the display means that is different from the first and second areas.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The following describes the overlapping display area effects A to C using Figures 57 to 59. These overlapping display area effects are executed during the variation of decorative patterns, etc. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the overlapping display area effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Overlapping display area effect A]
Figure 57 is a diagram illustrating the Variable Display Area Overlap Performance A. The Variable Display Area Overlap Performance is a performance in which, while the display of decorative symbols is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a, a new decorative symbol identical to the decorative symbol in the first area is displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a. In Variable Display Area Overlap Performance A, first, as shown in Figure 57(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the said hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the Special Symbol 1 variation is performed when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The display of the changing symbols represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol change), and the display of the stopped symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the special symbols may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner, corresponding to the current special symbol change (the change in question). Here, the changing manner of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as the left, middle, and right symbols moving from top to bottom, respectively.

The hold icons 9A are displayed horizontally in a row of four at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icons (the corresponding hold icons) 9C are displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a base image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icons 9A and the variable icons 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in Figure 57(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were previously displayed in a fluctuating state, are stopped at "234". In conjunction with the stopping of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the stopped display at "234". Decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r, which are displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and are in the same state as decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, "same state" means that decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate when fluctuating and stop when stopped, corresponding to the same special symbol fluctuation. In other words, decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are in a synchronized state with each other. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may have the same pattern switching pattern (variation pattern) when displayed, or they may be different from each other. Here, the variation pattern of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8r is the same as that of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, where the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom. Alternatively, the variation pattern of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8r may be such that the left, center, and right patterns rotate horizontally around the vertical axis.

When decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a stopped state, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R remain displayed in their stopped state. Here, it is assumed that decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a stopped state approximately simultaneously with the stopped display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. However, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be newly displayed in a stopped state some time after the stopped display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (for example, 1 to 3 seconds later). Furthermore, when decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are still in a fluctuating state just before they stop, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be newly displayed in a fluctuating state and stop simultaneously with the stopping of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is located below the first area DA1 and is a different area that does not overlap with the first area DA1. Therefore, the fluctuating display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 does not overlap with the stationary display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. However, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may overlap with decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in at least part, and in that case, they may be displayed on the front side or the back side of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost of the lined hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 57(C), when the next special symbol variation begins, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed simultaneously in a variation state. Then, as shown in Figure 57(D), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed simultaneously as "567". Note that the variation start timing and stop display timing of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be staggered. In conjunction with the stop display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, the variation icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variation icon display area where the variation icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 57(E), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped in the first area DA1, disappear, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, which were stopped in the second area DA2, become displayed in a variation state. Then, as shown in Figure 57(F), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stop displaying "789". In conjunction with the stopping display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variation icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined-up hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variation icon display area where the variation icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 57(G), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variation state. While the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are being displayed in a variation state, as shown in Figure 57(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are newly displayed in the first region DA1 in a variation state. That is, here, an effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r. The timing of the appearance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is predetermined time after the variation display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r has been displayed. Note that the timing of the appearance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be simultaneous with the display of the variation display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 57(I), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r simultaneously stop and are displayed as "735". Note that the stopping timing of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may be staggered. In conjunction with the stopping of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the hold icon 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed.

As shown in Figure 57(J), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, which were displayed as stopped in the second area DA2, disappear, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were displayed as stopped in the first area DA1, become displayed as varied symbols. The state in Figure 57(J) is the same as the state in Figure 57(A), and then it becomes the state in Figure 57(B).

[Variable display area overlap effect B]
Figure 58 is a diagram illustrating the Variable Display Area Overlap Performance B. The Variable Display Area Overlap Performance is a performance in which, while the display of decorative symbols is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a, decorative symbols identical to those in the first area are newly displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a. The main difference between Variable Display Area Overlap Performance B and Variable Display Area Overlap Performance A is that multiple sets of decorative symbols are displayed overlapping each other. In Variable Display Area Overlap Performance B, first, as shown in Figure 58(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a hold icon 9A, and a variable icon (the said hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the Special Symbol 1 variation is executed when the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of this set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the stopping display of this set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the special symbol can be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable state, corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as the left, middle, and right symbols moving from top to bottom, respectively.

The hold icons 9A are displayed horizontally in a row of four at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icons (the corresponding hold icons) 9C are displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a base image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icons 9A and the variable icons 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in Figure 58(B), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable state, decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a variable state. That is, an effect is executed in which decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r, which are displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and are in the same state as decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, "same state" means that decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variable when they are variable and stop when they are stopped, corresponding to the same special symbol variation. In other words, decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are in a synchronized state with each other. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may have the same pattern switching pattern (variation pattern) when displayed, or they may be different from each other. Here, the variation pattern of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8r is the same as that of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, where the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom. Alternatively, the variation pattern of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8r may be such that the left, center, and right patterns rotate horizontally around the vertical axis.

The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r appear after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) since the display of the variation indicators for decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. However, the appearance of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r may occur simultaneously with the display of the variation indicators for decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

The second area DA2 of display screen 7a partially overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variation display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 partially overlaps with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Note that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may also be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, or they may completely overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable state, as shown in Figure 58(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed as "234". Note that the timing of the stop display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r may be staggered. In conjunction with the stop display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 58(D), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, which were stopped in the second area DA2, disappear, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped in the first area DA1, begin to vary. Then, as shown in Figure 58(E), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varying, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a varying state. That is, similar to Figure 58(B), an effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable state, as shown in Figure 58(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r simultaneously stop at "789". Note that, as in Figure 58(C), the start timing of the variable state and the stop display timing of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r may be staggered. In conjunction with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 58(G), when the next special symbol variation begins, similar to Figure 58(D), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that were stopped in the second area DA2 disappear, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped in the first area DA1 become displayed in a variation state. Then, as shown in Figure 58(H), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation state, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed. That is, similar to Figures 58(B) and (E), an effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable state, as shown in Figure 58(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed as "735". Note that, as in Figures 58(C) and (F), the timing of the variable start and stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r may be staggered. After the stop display, the front and back sides of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r are swapped. Here, the stop display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r is displayed in front of the stop display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and then switches to the back side of the stop display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Subsequently, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, along with decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, will swap their front and back sides during the display. This front-to-back swapping effect continues over multiple spins. The timing of this swapping effect can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be executed during the spin corresponding to the pre-changed spin icon 9C, or it may be executed when the ceiling is reached.

[Variable display area overlap effect C]
Figure 59 is a diagram illustrating the Variable Display Area Overlap Performance C. The Variable Display Area Overlap Performance is a performance in which, while the display of decorative symbols is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a, a new decorative symbol identical to the decorative symbol in the first area is displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a. The main difference between Variable Display Area Overlap Performance C and Variable Display Area Overlap Performance A is that multiple sets of decorative symbols are displayed overlapping each other. In Variable Display Area Overlap Performance C, first, as shown in Figure 59(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a hold icon 9A, a variable icon (the said hold icon) 9C, and a specific image IMG. Here, it is assumed that the Special Symbol 1 variation is executed when the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of this set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the stopping display of this set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the special symbol can be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable state, corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as the left, middle, and right symbols moving from top to bottom, respectively.

The hold icons 9A are displayed horizontally in a row of four at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icons (the corresponding hold icons) 9C are displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this area, a base image is displayed. Both the hold icons 9A and the variable icons 9C have a round (spherical) shape. The specific image IMG is an elliptical image and is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icons 9A, and the variable icons (the corresponding hold icons) 9C.

As shown in Figure 59(B), the display of a specific image (IMG) disappears while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable manner. The specific image (IMG) may disappear by decreasing in size, moving out of frame, or fading out. It may also disappear by being divided into multiple fragments. The timing of the disappearance of the specific image (IMG) can be arbitrarily set. For example, the specific image (IMG) may appear and disappear randomly for each variation pattern, or it may appear and disappear when a predetermined number of variations have been reached.

When the display of the specific image (IMG) disappears, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, which were hidden by the specific image (IMG), become visible. In other words, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed behind the specific image (IMG), and the effects that become visible when the specific image disappears are executed.

The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed again in a fluctuating state. In other words, an effect is executed in which decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed again in the same state as decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r, which are displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and are in the same state as decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, "same state" means that decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate when they fluctuate and stop when they stop, corresponding to the same special symbol fluctuations. In other words, decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are in a synchronized state with each other. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may have the same pattern switching pattern (variation pattern) when displayed, or they may be different from each other. Here, the variation pattern of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8r is the same as that of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, where the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom. Alternatively, the variation pattern of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8r may be such that the left, center, and right patterns rotate horizontally around the vertical axis.

The timing at which the specific image (IMG) disappears and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r appear is predetermined (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) after the display of the changing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

The second area DA2 of display screen 7a overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variation display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 overlaps with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. Alternatively, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable state, as shown in Figure 59(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed as "234". Note that the timing of the stop display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r may be staggered. In conjunction with the stop display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 59(D), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped in the first area DA1, disappear, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, which were stopped in the second area DA2, become displayed in a variation state. Then, as shown in Figure 59(E), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stop at "567". In conjunction with the stopping of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variation icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined-up hold icons 9A begins to move towards the variation icon display area where the variation icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A shift.

As shown in Figure 59(F), while decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are being displayed in a variable state, the variable displays of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are newly displayed. The timing of the new display of the variable displays of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be after a predetermined time has elapsed since decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r began to vary (for example, 1 to 3 seconds later), or it may be simultaneously with the start of the variation of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r.

As shown in Figure 59(G), a specific image (IMG) is newly displayed while decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are both being displayed in a changing manner. The timing of the appearance of the specific image (IMG) can be arbitrarily set. For example, the specific image (IMG) may be made to appear and disappear randomly for each changing pattern, or it may be made to appear and disappear when a predetermined number of changes have been made.

The specific image (IMG) is displayed on the front side of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and on the back side of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Therefore, when the specific image (IMG) is displayed, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are covered and disappear, while decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the specific image (IMG). The specific image (IMG) may appear by framing in, fading in, or being enlarged.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 59(H), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state at "735". While decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in this stopped state, the display of the specific image IMG disappears again, as shown in Figure 59(I). The method by which the specific image IMG disappears may be the same as in Figure 59(B) or different. Once the display of the specific image IMG disappears, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, which were hidden by the specific image IMG, are displayed. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed on the back side of the specific image IMG, and the effect that became visible when the specific image IMG disappeared is executed. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are then displayed again in a stopped state. That is, an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed again in the same state as decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 59(J), when the next special symbol variation begins, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were displayed as stopped in the first area DA1, disappear, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, which were displayed as stopped in the second area DA2, become displayed as varied symbols. The state in Figure 59(J) is the same as the state in Figure 59(D), and then it becomes the state in Figure 59(E).

[Example of effect]
The following shows an example of the effect of the overlapping display area animation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(A), (B), (G), and (H), a first performance is performed in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. After the first performance, while the display of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is maintained in the first area DA1, a second performance is performed in which another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a second area DA2 of a different display screen 7a, which is in the same state of variation or stop as the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1, while the display of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is maintained in the first area DA1. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 58 and 59.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(A), (B), (G) to (I), in the second performance, when a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 are displayed in a variable state, another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the second area DA2 in a variable state. After the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are both displayed in a stopped state. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 58 and 59.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(D), (E), (G) to (J), after the third effect, a fourth effect can be performed in which another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that were stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 are displayed in a variable manner again, while the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappear without being displayed in a variable manner. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel effects that are unlike anything seen before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 59.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(A) to (C), in the second performance, if a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 are stopped, another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the second area DA2 while still stopped. After the second performance, a fifth performance can be executed in which both the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 begin to change. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 53.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(C) and (D), after the fifth effect, a sixth effect is performed in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are both stopped. After the sixth effect, a seventh effect is performed in which the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that were stopped in the second area DA2 are displayed in a changing manner, while the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped in the first area DA1 disappear without changing. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel effects unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 59.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 57, the variation display of one set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and the variation display of another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 have different variation patterns. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented effects, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 58 and 59.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 58 and 59, the display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1 and the display of another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 are partially overlapped. This configuration allows for novel and unprecedented visual effects that can visually entertain players and enhance their enjoyment.
[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 59, in the first performance, a specific image IMG is displayed in the second area DA2, and in the second performance, the specific image IMG disappears, and another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in the area where the specific image IMG disappeared. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving their enjoyment.

[Variations]
The following shows a modified example of the overlapping display area effect.
[Variation 1]
In the overlapping display area effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may have the same pattern of switching (variation pattern) when displayed in a variable manner, or they may be different from each other. Also, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may overlap in at least a portion.

[Modified example 2]
The effects A to C of the overlapping display area may be combined as appropriate, or some may be deleted. Also, the overlapping display area effects A to C may be executed consecutively, or each effect may be executed repeatedly.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
◇[Pattern A3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
One of the aforementioned multiple types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of indicating whether the result is correct or incorrect.
In the first region of the display means, a first performance is performed in which a variable display of the set of decorative patterns is shown,
After the first performance, while the display of the set of decorative patterns is maintained in the first area, a second performance is performed in which, in a second area of the display means different from the first area, another set of decorative patterns in the same state of variation or stoppage as the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area is newly displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A3-2]
The gaming machine described in A3-1,
In the second performance, if the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area is displayed in a variable state, the other set of decorative patterns is newly displayed in the second area in a variable state.
After the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area are both stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A3-3]
The gaming machine described in A3-2,
After the third effect, a fourth effect can be performed in which the other set of decorative patterns that were stopped in the second area are displayed in a changing manner again, while the set of decorative patterns that were stopped in the first area disappear without changing.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A3-4]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A3-1 to A3-3,
In the second performance, if the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area is stopped, the other set of decorative symbols is newly displayed in the second area while still stopped.
After the second performance, a fifth performance can be executed in which the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area both begin to change display,
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A3-5]
The gaming machine described in Actual A3-4,
Following the fifth effect, a sixth effect occurs in which the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area are both stopped and displayed.
After the sixth performance, a seventh performance can be executed in which the other set of decorative patterns that were stopped in the second area are displayed in a changing manner again, while the set of decorative patterns that were stopped in the first area disappear without changing.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A3-6]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A3-1 to A3-5,
The variation display of the set of decorative patterns shown in the first area and the variation display of the other set of decorative patterns shown in the second area have different modes of variation from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A3-7]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A3-1 to A3-6,
The display of the changing set of decorative patterns shown in the first area and the display of the changing set of decorative patterns shown in the second area are displayed partially overlapping.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A3-8]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A3-1 to A3-7,
In the first performance described above, a specific image is displayed in the second area.
In the second performance described above, the specific image disappears, and the other set of decorative patterns is displayed in the area where the specific image disappeared.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The following describes the variable-position decorative pattern effects A to C using Figures 60 to 62. In Figures 60 to 62, various movable components arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for clarity in the drawings.

This display of undetermined stopping positions for decorative symbols can be executed when the game transitions to a special game mode. Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the display of undetermined stopping positions for decorative symbols, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first explain the decorative symbol stopping position variation A, then the decorative symbol stopping position variation B, and finally the decorative symbol stopping position variation C, in that order.

[Decorative pattern stopping position undetermined performance A]
The decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect A will be explained with reference to Figure 60. Figure 60 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect A. The decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect A occurs when the game transitions to a special game mode, and the following explanation will cover the case when transitioning from a normal game mode to a special game mode in a normal game state.

First, as shown in Figure 60(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with three vertically elongated rectangular areas (that is, areas that divide the display screen 7a into three equal columns) as variable display areas for the three decorative patterns (also called "variable decorative pattern areas"). The variable display of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is initiated by a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top of each variable display area toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L of the 3D image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the 3D image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the 3D image moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L begins its variation animation (variation display) when the reel rotates from the upper side of the left variation display area 8Lr to the lower side of the left variation display area 8Lr; the middle decorative symbol 8C begins its variation animation (variation display) when the reel rotates from the upper side of the middle variation display area 8Crr to the lower side of the middle variation display area 8Crr; and the right decorative symbol 8R begins its variation animation (variation display) when the reel rotates from the upper side of the right variation display area 8Rr to the lower side of the right variation display area 8Rr. The vertical distance of the left variation display area 8Lr, the vertical distance of the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the vertical distance of the right variation display area 8Rr are all the same. Furthermore, the horizontal distance of the left variation display area 8Lr, the horizontal distance of the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the horizontal distance of the right variation display area 8Rr are all the same.

In the variation animations (displays) for each decorative symbol, the reels rotate in the following order: 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → ...

Of the numbers "1" through "9", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" (excluding "7") are bright red, the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are bright blue, and "7" is yellow (gold). The size of the numbers "1" through "9" is a standard size, with a vertical distance of approximately one-third the vertical distance of the left variable display area 8Lr (center variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr), and a horizontal distance of approximately half the horizontal distance of the left variable display area 8Lr (center variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). Furthermore, the numbers "1" through "9" are formed using specially created typefaces (uniquely developed special typefaces) that differ from existing typefaces (generally available typefaces) such as Kaisho, Gothic, and Mincho.

In normal gameplay mode, when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a slow pace, changing from opaque to semi-transparent, and then rapidly changes in display mode. This allows the background image positioned behind the decorative symbol to be visible through the rapidly changing semi-transparent symbol. Just before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates, changing from semi-transparent back to opaque, and is displayed as either temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative symbol is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, a horizontally elongated rectangular sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and their corresponding smaller left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark shade) or a color close to dark (for example, deep green)) and does not change to any other color. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned on the upper right side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the right-variable display area 8Rr, which is the variation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the right decorative symbol 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing it from obstructing the sub-variable area KSZ. Furthermore, even if other visual effects appear, these effects are positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing them from obstructing it. In short, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not obscured by the right decorative symbol 8R or other visual effects.

The small decorative patterns are numerical patterns, and their font differs from that of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, a Mincho font). They are unified in a single color with high contrast to the single color background image of the sub-variation area KSZ (for example, a light color (yellow or white)), and do not change to other colors. The small decorative patterns are positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and remain opaque at all times. They do not become semi-transparent even when variation begins, and they do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbols do not exhibit a variable display effect (variable display) when the reels rotate. Instead, the variable display effect (variable display) is achieved by displaying number symbols of the same size and opaque appearance in the same display position.

When the variation effect (variation display) using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R begins, a variation effect (variation display) using the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also begins in the sub-variation area KSZ. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop displaying, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also all stop displaying.

Even if one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of temporary stop (for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol and a reach is formed), the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all continue to exhibit a variable animation (variation display). Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol continues; even if the right decorative symbol 8R is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small right decorative symbol continues; and simultaneously with the display of stop animations for the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all also display a stop animation.

Furthermore, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop and do not line up, resulting in a loss, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or they may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, if the left decorative symbol 8L stops at the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C at the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R at the number "3", the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "1", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "2", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "3", or the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "5", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "6", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a win occurs due to them aligning to the same symbol, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol will align to match the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

As part of the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the currently fluctuating left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R is displayed (placed) on the fluctuation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area for the first special symbol hold is provided in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the fluctuation display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (base image)) are available, each capable of displaying (placing) a hold icon 9A, allowing for a maximum of four hold icons 9A to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad overlap with the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative pattern 8C. However, since the central decorative pattern 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not obstructed by the central decorative pattern 8C. However, if other performance images appear, and the other performance images are located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will not be obstructed by the other performance images. However, if the other performance images are located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will be obstructed by the other performance images.

Since the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are located on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, they overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. However, because the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L. However, if other visual effects appear, and the other visual effects are positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the other visual effects. However, if the other visual effects are positioned in front of the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad will be obstructed by the other visual effects.

Thus, among the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Therefore, the hold display area as the first special symbol hold, consisting of the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, is positioned across the middle variable display area 8Cr and the left variable display area 8Lr.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and the reserve icon 9A is displayed at the first to fourth reserve display positions 9Ad. In other words, there are four reserve icons that have not been consumed and are currently stockpiled. The following explanation assumes that during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols, a game ball enters the first start port 20, resulting in a state where there are three or four reserve icons (i.e., a reserve count of 3 or 4), while no game ball enters the second start port 21. Furthermore, as the reserve count increases, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the variation effect (variation display) (variation time) decreases. For example, in this embodiment, when the reserve count is 3 or 4, the variation time in a no-reach miss is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, opposite the aforementioned sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), is a horizontally elongated rectangular display area HS, which displays the number of reserved balls (numbers) for the first special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 and the second special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21. The vertical dimension of the display area HS is the same as that of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal dimension of the display area HS is the same as that of the sub-variation area KSZ. In other words, the shape of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are identical.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the hold count display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to other colors. Although the hold count display area HS is located in the upper left of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the left variation display area 8Lr, which is the variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the hold count display area HS is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing it from obstructing it. Furthermore, even if other animation images appear, they are positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing them from obstructing it.

The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are displayed in a different font (for example, Gothic font) than the font of the small decorative symbols, and are set to a different solid color with high contrast to the solid color background image of the reservation number display area HS, and do not change to any other color. The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the reservation number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21 is displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reservation number display area HS, and are always displayed spaced apart from each other. These numbers, displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, are less likely to be confused with the various background and decorative images displayed on screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved ball count display area HS is not obscured by other visual effects. The blue color indicating the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright blue used for the even-numbered symbols "2," "4," "6," and "8." The red color indicating the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright red used for the odd-numbered symbols (excluding "7"), such as "1," "3," "5," and "9."

To briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the different probability of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, among the four icons—a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability. Furthermore, the probability of winning is set to increase in the following order for the smiling sphere icon: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning).

In the normal game mode, as shown in Figure 60(A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) begins. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, which varies from top to bottom in the left variation display area 8Lr, temporarily stops in the center of the left variation display area 8Lr and moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction. Next, the right decorative symbol 8R, which varies from top to bottom in the right variation display area 8Rr, temporarily stops in the center of the right variation display area 8Rr and moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction. Finally, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which varies from top to bottom in the middle variation display area 8Cr, temporarily stops in the center of the middle variation display area 8Cr and moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction.

In addition, during normal gameplay, multiple background images are available, and the background image switches as needed.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 60(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all stop (confirm) in the center of their respective variable display areas, resulting in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R being aligned on the same horizontal line and stopped (confirmed). Consequently, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, in order to use up the hold icon 9A placed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the display begins to move toward the corresponding variation display position 9Cd. As shown in Figure 60(C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the corresponding variation display position 9Cd, the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, and all the hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, a variation performance (variation display) using medium-sized decorative symbols begins in the second sub-variation area CSZ, which will be described later. After that, the background image switches from the background image for normal gameplay to the background image exclusive to A mode, and a large message image MSG, which will be described later, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This A mode is a special game mode. In A mode, a decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance A begins, which has a different display pattern from the decorative symbol variation performance (variation display) in the normal gameplay state shown in Figures 60(A) and (B) above.

The background image exclusive to Mode A is a background image different from the background image used in the normal game mode, and is exclusively used in Mode A. Only one or multiple types of background images exclusive to Mode A may be provided.

In this embodiment, the condition for the occurrence of the decorative symbol stop position irregular effect A is, for example, when the number of times the variable effect (variable display) is performed without a win reaches 2.5 to 3 times the number of times in the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state). Furthermore, in the decorative symbol stop position irregular effect A, a predetermined number of variable effects (variable display) are performed. This "determined number" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the number of times in the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), which in this case is 115 times.

When the decorative pattern stop position-indeterminate effect A begins, a second sub-variation area CSZ, having a horizontal rectangular shape, is provided on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. This area displays the corresponding medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern, respectively, in a variable performance (variable display). The vertical dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is approximately five times larger than that of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is approximately five times larger than that of the sub-variation area KSZ, resulting in similar shapes.

In the second sub-variation area CSZ, the size of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern displayed in the variation animation (variation display) is larger (about 5 times larger) than the size of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ, but smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. Furthermore, unlike the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern have a similar shape, being smaller versions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and are the same color. In other words, the medium-sized left decorative pattern is a smaller version of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L; the medium-sized central decorative pattern is a smaller version of the central decorative pattern 8C and has the same color as the central decorative pattern 8C; and the medium-sized right decorative pattern is a smaller version of the right decorative pattern 8R and has the same color as the right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, the background image of the second sub-variable area CSZ is fixed as colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to other colors. Since the second sub-variable area CSZ is located on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, in this embodiment, during the period when the second sub-variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, so the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, since the second sub-variable area CSZ is positioned at the very front, even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the second sub-variable area CSZ, so the second sub-variable area CSZ is not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the second sub-variable area CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other performance images.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the medium-sized decorative symbols do not exhibit a rotating reel display. Instead, at the same display position, the rotating effect (rotation display) occurs as if a coin were rotating, for example, starting from the left edge of the medium-sized decorative symbol, passing in front, and moving towards the right edge of the medium-sized decorative symbol. Furthermore, the medium-sized decorative symbols—that is, the left medium-sized decorative symbol, the middle medium-sized decorative symbol, and the right medium-sized decorative symbol—stop displaying at the same time if the rotating effect (rotation display) begins at the same time.

In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A, which performs a maximum of 115 fluctuation effects (fluctuation displays), is started, a fluctuation effect (fluctuation display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ and is performed for a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period when the fluctuation effect (fluctuation display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is performed for a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. When the fluctuation effect (fluctuation display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ and the second fluctuation effect (fluctuation display) is being performed, a message image MSG with the words "Entering A Mode" in gold color is displayed. This message image (MSG) is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment), then disappears from the display screen 7a. Afterward, a message image labeled "A Mode" appears as a ticker TP1 (see, for example, Figure 60(D)) along the top edge of the display screen 7a, moving from the right edge to the left edge of the screen 7a. This ticker display pattern is repeatedly displayed during the period in which the decorative pattern stop position-indefinite effect A is performed.

The text overlay TP1, which displays the message "A Mode," is the same color (gold) as the message image MSG, which displays "Entering A Mode." The area where text overlay TP1 is displayed is a band-shaped area with a predetermined distance from the top edge of the display screen 7a, and is approximately four times larger than the vertical dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). Although the area where text overlay TP1 is displayed overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, because the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS are positioned as the foremost area as described above, text overlay TP1 is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and therefore does not obstruct the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS. In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS is not obscured by text overlay TP1.

The area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed is, as described above, a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the top edge of the display screen 7a. This area overlaps with the upper area of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L; the upper area of the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C; and the upper area of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. In this embodiment, the area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed is positioned behind the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed.

When the text overlay TP1 is displayed along the top edge of the display screen 7a, moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear midway, nor does it gradually disappear by becoming particle-like. The text overlay TP1 is displayed at a constant speed, which is the speed specified for text overlay TP1.

When the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect A is performed, and the predetermined number of variation effects (variation display) using a medium-sized decorative symbol begins in the second sub-variation area CSZ, a counter image CNT displaying "Remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 60(D), just before this variation effect (variation display) ends. The counter image CNT is positioned in front of a semi-transparent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image for the counter image. The vertical dimension of this semi-transparent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image is approximately three times larger than the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), and the horizontal dimension of this semi-transparent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image is approximately six times larger than the horizontal dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS).

This translucent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image for the counter image overlaps with the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative pattern 8C. However, by positioning the counter image background image to be the closest to the viewer, the central decorative pattern 8C is positioned behind the counter image background image, preventing the counter image CNT, which is positioned in front of the counter image background image, from being obscured by the central decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, even if other performance images appear, these other performance images are positioned behind the counter image background image, preventing the counter image CNT, which is positioned in front of the counter image background image, from being obscured by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the counter image CNT, which is positioned in front of the counter image background image, is not obstructed by the central decorative pattern 8C or other performance images. Furthermore, because the background image for the counter image is semi-transparent, the areas of the background image where the counter image CNT is not placed (i.e., the areas of the background image that do not correspond to the counter image CNT) allow the central decorative symbol 8C and other visual effects (background images for the left decorative symbol 8L, central decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R) to be visible through the semi-transparent background image.

Furthermore, when the counter image CNT displaying "Remaining 105" appears in the lower center of the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R reappear and stop (slightly delayed from the start of the counter image CNT's display). At this time, the size of the reappearing left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the same as their size before disappearing, i.e., the size of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 60(A) and (B). However, the positions where the reappearing left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and stopped differ from the positions where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R were temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode shown in Figures 60(A) and (B).

Specifically, in the game mode shown in Figure 60(B), the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and then stopped is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. In contrast, in the variable symbol stop position performance A shown in Figure 60(D), the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and then stopped is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, but rather the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. At this time, if the medium-sized left decorative symbol stops and displays the number "1" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L will also stop and display the number "1".

In Figure 60(B), the temporary stop and stop display positions of the right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode are in the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R. In contrast, in Figure 60(D), in the variable stop position effect A of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop and stop display positions of the right decorative symbol 8R are not in the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but rather in the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr. At this time, if the medium-sized right decorative symbol stops and displays the number "2" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the right decorative symbol 8R will also stop and display the number "2".

In the game mode shown in Figure 60(B), the temporary stop and stop display positions of the central decorative symbol 8C are in the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative symbol 8C. In contrast, in the variable stop position performance A shown in Figure 60(D), the temporary stop and stop display positions of the central decorative symbol 8C are not in the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative symbol 8C, but rather on the lower right side of the central variable display area 8Cr. At this time, when the medium-sized central decorative symbol stops and displays the number "3" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the central decorative symbol 8C stops and displays the number "3". Although a counter image CNT is provided below the central variable display area 8Cr, because the counter image CNT is positioned closest to the viewer, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C displaying the number "3" is covered by the counter image CNT.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of (10th) variation performances (variation displays) using medium-sized decorative patterns are performed in the second sub-variation region CSZ. Immediately before this variation performance (variation display) ends, a counter image CNT showing "105 remaining" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R reappear and are displayed in a stopped state. However, when the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate performance A is started and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the counter image CNT is displayed, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may reappear just before the time comes for them to display in a stopped state. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R reappear, the second sub-variation area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbols also disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the predetermined number of (10) fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) are completed, and then the predetermined number of (10) + 1 (i.e., 11th) fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) begin, the fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) start so that the medium-sized left decorative symbol, the medium-sized middle decorative symbol, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol rotate coins at the same time, as shown in Figure 60(E), the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative symbols also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each light up, and the fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) are performed so that the reels rotate downwards in the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "104 remaining". In other words, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all begin their variation animation (variation display) at the same time. Furthermore, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop at the same time.

In this case, in the variable stop position effect A of the decorative symbols, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a different manner from the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the game modes shown in Figures 60(A) and (B). In the game modes shown in Figures 60(A) and (B), the variation effects (variation displays) of each decorative symbol are displayed in the order of the reels rotating in the sequence of numbers "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "7" → "8" → "9" → "1" → "2" → ..., as described above. However, in the variation effect A of the decorative symbol stop position, when the variation effect (variation display) of each stopped decorative symbol begins, each decorative symbol lights up and then moves downwards toward the bottom of its variation display area, or each decorative symbol lights up and moves downwards toward the bottom of its variation display area, after which the number immediately following each stopped decorative symbol does not appear, and a random number appears opaquely as the number immediately following each decorative symbol and stops. This occurs because the second sub-variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbols also disappear from the display screen 7a. This allows for a display mode where seemingly random numbers suddenly appear opaquely as the number immediately following each decorative symbol, and then stop and display.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed in Figure 60(D) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" displayed in Figure 60(D) becomes opaque and does not appear as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 60(E). Instead, a random number "4" appears opaquely and is displayed as the variation effect. Furthermore, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed in Figure 60(D) is on the upper right side of the left variation display area 8Lr, when the variation effect (variation display) begins and the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" displayed in Figure 60(E) is not on the upper right side of the left variation display area 8Lr, but on the lower left side of the left variation display area 8Lr.

In Figure 60(D), when the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "2" begins, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "3" following the number "2" on the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 60(D) becomes opaque and does not appear as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 60(E). Instead, a random number "5" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stop. Furthermore, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "2" in Figure 60(D) is on the upper left side of the right variation display area 8Rr, when the variation effect (variation display) begins and the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "5" in Figure 60(E) is not on the upper left side of the right variation display area 8Rr, but rather on the right side of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr.

In Figure 60(D), when the dynamic animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is stopped and displayed as "3," begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "4" following the number "3" in the central decorative symbol 8C, which was stopped and displayed in Figure 60(D), becomes opaque and does not appear as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 60(E). Instead, a random number "1" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stopping symbol. Furthermore, while the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "3" in Figure 60(D) is on the lower right side of the central variation display area 8Cr, when the variation animation (variation display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "1" in Figure 60(E) is not on the lower right side of the central variation display area 8Cr, but on the left side of the center of the central variation display area 8Cr.

In the second sub-variation area CSZ, when a variation performance (variation display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started for a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1 time (i.e., the 11th time), a text message image TP2 that reads "It's still going..." is displayed in multiple text display modes (in this case, three text messages TP2) moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a so that it is parallel to the top edge of the display screen 7a. The text message TP2 is white, and the probability of winning is higher for other colors (for example, blue, red, rainbow) compared to white (for example, the probability of winning is lowest for white, and increases in the order of blue, red, and then rainbow). The vertical dimension of the text message TP2 is approximately twice the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area in which the text TP2 is displayed is between the bottom edge of the area in which the text TP1 is displayed and the top edge of the background image for the counter image. It spans the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L; the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C; and the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. By positioning the text TP2 to be closest to the viewer, even when the text TP2 spans the right variable display area 8Rr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the left variable display area 8Lr, the text TP2 is positioned in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the text TP2 is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, it differs in that the aforementioned text overlay TP1 is positioned behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and is obscured by the sub-variation area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS.

Furthermore, while text overlay TP2 differs from the aforementioned text overlay TP1 in that it repeatedly moves and displays, it does not reappear from the right edge of the display screen 7a once it reaches the left edge. Multiple text overlays TP2 may be set to move at different speeds or at the same speed. Because the timing of their appearance from the right edge of the display screen 7a differs, some may reach the left edge of the display screen 7a and disappear in that particular variation, some may reach the left edge of the display screen 7a and disappear across the next variation, and some may even reach the left edge of the display screen 7a and disappear across subsequent variations (multiple variations).

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear midway, or it may gradually disappear as particles, or it may display in a way that results in missing image information (for example, the image may be divided into small blocks and not arranged in a regular, irregular manner, resulting in an unclear image), making it difficult to read. This differs from the aforementioned text overlay TP1, which, when displayed moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a along the top edge of the display screen 7a, does not suddenly disappear midway, does not gradually disappear as particles, and does not display in a way that results in missing image information.

Furthermore, the text overlay TP2 may move and be displayed at the same constant speed as text overlay TP1 (the speed used for text overlay TP1), at a faster constant speed than text overlay TP1 (the speed used for text overlay TP1), or at a slower constant speed than text overlay TP1 (the speed used for text overlay TP1). Additionally, the speed of text overlay TP2 may accelerate when moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, or decelerate when moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, or it may accelerate or decelerate when moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a. These points also differ from the text overlay TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop midway, or it may slow down before stopping. When text overlay TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may black out (a completely dark screen) as described later, and then the results may be displayed. These points also differ from the text overlay TP1 mentioned above.

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, the font may change midway through (for example, the font of all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may change, all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may become bold, all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may become regular, all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may become italic, the size of all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may change significantly, the size of all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may change significantly, or all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may be underlined), and the content may change to other content. These points also distinguish it from the text overlay TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a, its vertical dimension is approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). However, the vertical dimension of text overlay TP2 may exceed approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) when it is displayed as a moving element, or it may be less than approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) when it is displayed as a moving element. Additionally, when the vertical dimension of text overlay TP2 exceeds approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) when it is displayed as a moving element, it may appear red or rainbow-colored. These points also differ from the text overlay TP1 described above.

The content of the text overlay TP2 can be multiple, and the player can select and set it by operating the performance button 63. For example, the content of text overlay TP2 could be a comment from one of several characters representing the world of the game machine, a portion of the lyrics to the music played during the variable-position decorative symbol performance A, or comments from multiple people expressing the world of the background image for the variable-position decorative symbol performance A. Of course, the player can also choose to display or hide text overlay TP2. This selection can be made by the player in a setting mode during gameplay, or in a setting mode while waiting for a customer (waiting for a player).

In the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance A, the variable icon 9C and the reserve icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. Therefore, it is not possible to inform the player of the probability of a big win for that variation by changing the display pattern of the variable icon 9C, nor is it possible to suggest the probability of a win by changing the display pattern of the reserve icon 9A through a pre-read performance. For this reason, in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance A, the probability of a win can be suggested by changing the display pattern of the text TP2 in various ways. Text TP1 informs the player that it is in "A mode" and does not convey any other information to the player. For this reason, text TP2, which can suggest the probability of a win to the player, is placed in front of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, while text TP1, which does not convey any information to the player other than the information that it is in "A mode," is placed behind the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Furthermore, in the A-mode exclusive background image for the variable stop position of the decorative symbols, a background image exclusive to A-mode is displayed. Therefore, if multiple types of A-mode exclusive background images are available, the A-mode exclusive background image corresponding to the expected winning probability may be displayed.

Thus, unlike TP1, TP2 offers a wide variety of visual effects, which helps to mitigate the decline in player engagement with the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display) that can be seen in the A-type display where the stopping position of decorative symbols is unpredictable.

After the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 1st rotation (i.e., the 11th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 2nd rotation (i.e., the 12th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 60(F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "103 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect A, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol and then stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" displayed in Figure 60(E) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "5" following the number "4" displayed in Figure 60(E) becomes opaque and does not appear as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 60(F). Instead, a random number "6" appears opaquely and is displayed as the variation effect. Furthermore, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" displayed in Figure 60(E) is on the lower left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, when the variation effect (variation display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" displayed in Figure 60(F) is not on the lower left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, but in the center of the left variation display area 8Lr.

In Figure 60(E), when the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "5" begins, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "6" following the number "5" on the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 60(E) becomes opaque and does not appear as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 60(F). Instead, a random number "8" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stop. Furthermore, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "5" in Figure 60(E) is in the center right of the right variation display area 8Rr, when the variation effect (variation display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "8" in Figure 60(F) is not in the center right of the right variation display area 8Rr, but slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr.

In Figure 60(E), when the dynamic animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "1" is started, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the central decorative symbol 8C that was stopped in Figure 60(E) appears opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 60(F). Instead, a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, while the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "1" in Figure 60(E) is on the left center of the central variation display area 8Cr, when the variation animation (variation display) is started, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "8" in Figure 60(F) is not on the left center of the central variation display area 8Cr, but on the right center of the central variation display area 8Cr. The central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" jumps over the central variation display area 8Cr and crosses over the right variation display area 8Rr. Therefore, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" overlap. In other words, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" is displayed (the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves toward the lower side of the right display area 8Rr (direction of movement)). Here, in terms of the front-to-back relationship between the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8", the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is positioned in front of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8", resulting in a display configuration where the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" covers a portion of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8".

After the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 2nd rotation (i.e., the 12th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 3rd rotation (i.e., the 13th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 60(G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will each light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "102 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect A, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol and then stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" displayed in Figure 60(F) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "7" that follows the number "6" of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed in Figure 60(F) becomes opaque and does not appear as the left decorative symbol 8L displayed in Figure 60(G). Instead, a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as the variation effect. Furthermore, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" displayed in Figure 60(F) is in the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, when the variation effect (variation display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed in Figure 60(G) is not in the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, but rather in the upper left of the left variation display area 8Lr. Although the reserve count display area HS is located to the upper left of the left variable display area 8Lr, because the left variable display area 8Lr is positioned closest to the viewer, a portion of the decorative symbol 8L to the left of the number "1" is covered by the reserve count display area HS.

In Figure 60(F), when the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "8" begins its variation effect (variation display), the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "9" following the number "8" on the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 60(F) becomes opaque and does not appear as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 60(G). Instead, a random number "2" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stop. Furthermore, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "8" in Figure 60(F) is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr, when the variation effect (variation display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "2" in Figure 60(G) is not slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr, but rather to the lower right of the right variation display area 8Rr.

In Figure 60(F), when the dynamic animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "8" is started, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "9" following the number "8" of the central decorative symbol 8C that was stopped in Figure 60(F) appears opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 60(G). Instead, a random number "7" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, while the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "8" in Figure 60(F) is to the right of the center of the central variation display area 8Cr, when the variation animation (variation display) is started, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "7" in Figure 60(G) is not to the right of the center of the central variation display area 8Cr, but rather to the lower right of the central variation display area 8Cr. The central decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" jumps over the central variation display area 8Cr and crosses over the right variation display area 8Rr. Although a counter image CNT is provided below the central variable display area 8Cr, the counter image CNT is positioned closest to the viewer. Therefore, a portion of the central decorative pattern 8C for the number "7" is covered by the counter image CNT.

When the predetermined number of variations (10 times) + the 3rd variation (i.e., the 13th variation) begins, a text overlay TP2, which is a message image saying "Here we go...", moves from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, parallel to the top edge of the display screen 7a, in the style of a text overlay. Text overlay TP2 is white.

After the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 3rd rotation (i.e., the 13th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 4th rotation (i.e., the 14th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 60(H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "101 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect A, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol and then stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed in Figure 60(G) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" displayed in Figure 60(G) becomes opaque and does not appear as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 60(H), instead a random number "9" appears opaquely and is displayed as the variation effect. Furthermore, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed in Figure 60(G) is on the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, when the variation effect (variation display) begins and the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "9" displayed in Figure 60(H) is not on the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, but on the lower right side of the left variation display area 8Lr.

In Figure 60(G), when the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "2" begins, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "3" following the number "2" on the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 60(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 60(H). Instead, a random number "4" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stop. Furthermore, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "2" in Figure 60(G) is on the lower right side of the right variation display area 8Rr, when the variation effect (variation display) begins and the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "4" in Figure 60(H) is not on the lower right side of the right variation display area 8Rr, but rather closer to the upper left side of the right variation display area 8Rr. The right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" jumps over the right variation display area 8Rr and crosses over the middle variation display area 8Cr.

In Figure 60(G), when the dynamic animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "7" begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "8" following the number "7" of the central decorative symbol 8C that was stopped in Figure 60(G) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 60(H). Instead, a random number "3" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, while the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "7" in Figure 60(G) is towards the lower right of the central variation display area 8Cr, when the variation animation (variation display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "3" in Figure 60(H) is not towards the lower right of the central variation display area 8Cr, but towards the upper right of the central variation display area 8Cr. As a result, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" overlap. In other words, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is displayed (the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves toward the lower side of the right display area 8Rr (direction of movement)). (The right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is displayed in the direction in which the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is displayed (the direction in which the central decorative symbol 8C moves toward the lower side of the central display area 8Crr (direction of movement)). Here, in terms of the front-to-back relationship between the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4", the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is positioned in front of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3", resulting in a display configuration where the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" covers a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3".

As the variation animation (variation display) progresses, and the predetermined number of variations (10 times) + 54th time (i.e., 64th time) is completed, the predetermined number of variations (10 times) + 55th time (i.e., 65th time) begins. As shown in Figure 60(I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "50 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect A, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol and then stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" displayed at the 64th spin (not shown) begins its variation effect (variation display), the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "3" following the number "2" displayed at the 64th spin (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 60(I). Instead, a random number "4" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stop. Furthermore, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" displayed at the 64th spin (not shown) is in the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" displayed at the stop in Figure 60(I) after the variation effect (variation display) begins is not in the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, but slightly to the lower right of the center.

When the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" that was stopped on the 64th spin (not shown) begins to change, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "4" that follows the number "3" on the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped on the 64th spin (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 60(I), while a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as the stop. Furthermore, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" that was stopped on the 64th spin (not shown) is on the left side of the center of the right changing display area 8Rr, when the changing effect (changing display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" that was stopped on in Figure 60(I) is not on the left side of the center of the right changing display area 8Rr, but on the upper right side of the right changing display area 8Rr. Although a sub-variation area KSZ is provided above the right-hand variation display area 8Rr, the sub-variation area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer. Therefore, a portion of the right-hand decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" is covered by the sub-variation area KSZ.

When the dynamic animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "6" that was stopped and displayed on the 64th turn (not shown) begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "7" that follows the number "6" of the central decorative symbol 8C that was stopped and displayed on the 64th turn (not shown) becomes opaque and does not appear as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 60(I), and a random number "5" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopping symbol. Furthermore, while the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "6" that was stopped and displayed on the 64th turn (not shown) is on the upper left side of the central variation display area 8Cr, when the variation animation (variation display) begins and the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" that was stopped and displayed in Figure 60(I) is not on the upper left side of the central variation display area 8Cr, but closer to the lower left side of the central variation display area 8Cr, and the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" jumps over the central variation display area 8Cr and crosses over the left variation display area 8Lr. Therefore, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" overlap. In other words, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is displayed in the direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" is displayed (the direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves toward the lower side of the left display area 8Lr (direction of movement)). (The left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" is displayed in the direction in which the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is displayed (the direction in which the central decorative symbol 8C moves toward the lower side of the central display area 8Crr (direction of movement)). Here, in terms of the front-to-back relationship between the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4", the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is positioned in front of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4", resulting in a display configuration where the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" covers a portion of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4".

After the predetermined number of rotations (10) + 55th rotation (i.e., 65th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10) + 56th rotation (i.e., 66th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 60(J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will each light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "49 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect A, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol and then stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the stopped number "4" in Figure 60(I) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped in Figure 60(I) appears opaque and is not displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 60(J). Instead, a random number "2" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, in Figure 60(I), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "4" is slightly to the lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. In contrast, when the variable display (variable display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "2" in Figure 60(J) is not slightly to the lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but rather closer to the upper right of the left variable display area 8Lr. The left decorative symbol 8L for the number "2" jumps over the left variable display area 8Lr and crosses over the middle variable display area 8Cr.

In Figure 60(I), when the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "1" begins, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" on the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 60(I) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 60(J). Instead, a random number "7" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stop. Furthermore, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "1" in Figure 60(I) is on the upper right side of the right variation display area 8Rr, when the variation effect (variation display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "7" in Figure 60(J) is not on the upper right side of the right variation display area 8Rr, but rather in the lower center of the right variation display area 8Rr.

In Figure 60(I), when the dynamic animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "5" begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "6" following the number "5" of the central decorative symbol 8C that was stopped in Figure 60(I) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 60(J). Instead, a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, while the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "5" in Figure 60(I) is towards the lower left of the central variation display area 8Cr, when the variation animation (variation display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "8" in Figure 60(J) is not towards the lower left of the central variation display area 8Cr, but towards the upper left of the central variation display area 8Cr. As a result, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" overlap. In other words, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" is displayed (the direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves toward the lower side of the left display area 8Lr (direction of movement)). Here, in terms of the front-to-back relationship between the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2", the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" is positioned in front of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8", resulting in a display configuration where the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" partially covers the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8".

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56th time (i.e., 66th time) of the variation effect (variation display) begins, the following text overlays TP2, consisting of the message images "Is it about to happen?", "Ah, it's endless...", and "Ah, not yet...", move and are displayed parallel to the top edge of the display screen 7a, moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a in the manner of text overlays. The text overlay TP2 for the message image "Is it about to happen?" is blue, while the text overlays TP2 for the message images "Ah, it's endless..." and "Ah, not yet..." are white.

Subsequently, the variable display animation progresses, and after the predetermined number of animations (10) + 105th (i.e., 115th) is completed, Mode A ends, and the variable display animation A with its undetermined stopping position of the decorative symbols also ends. The game returns to the normal gameplay mode, and as shown in Figures 60(A) and (B), the variable display animation is performed using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

In addition, in the decorative symbol stop position in effect A, Figures 60(C) to 60(J) show the effect when there is a "no reach, miss." However, in the case of a "reach, miss," the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R do not stop temporarily aligned on the same horizontal line, the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a completely black screen), and a bright white beam of light converges toward the center of the display screen 7a and then disappears, resembling the power being turned off on an analog television's cathode ray tube. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. In other words, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol continues in the sub-variation area KSZ. This state is maintained until the time comes to announce the win or loss result (miss). Then, when the result of winning or losing (losing) is announced, as shown in Figures 60(C) to 60(J), the fluctuation effects (fluctuation displays) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will, as described above, appear opaquely as the number immediately following each decorative symbol and stop at the same time.

On the other hand, in the case of a win, just like in the case of a loss, the display screen 7a first blacks out (becomes a completely black screen), and a bright white beam of light converges toward the center of the display screen 7a and then disappears, resembling the power being turned off on an analog television's cathode ray tube. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. In other words, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol continues in the sub-variation area KSZ. After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R appear as, for example, the number "7" in the center of their respective left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr, lined up on the same horizontal line and temporarily stop, then the stop display is shown, confirming that it is a win, and then the winning game begins. When a win is announced, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R stop (confirm display) simultaneously. At the same time, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also stop (confirm display) with the same number (number symbol, in this case the number "7") as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

In the unpredictable stopping position of the decorative symbols (effect A), the longer the display screen 7a remains blacked out (the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation of winning. Therefore, even though the display screen 7a is a monotonous blacked-out screen, it can heighten and excite the player's anticipation.

Thus, in the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance A, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time they are confirmed to stop. In this case, when one of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R overlaps with another decorative pattern, for example, in the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R overlap in Figure 60(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, resulting in a display configuration where the middle decorative pattern 8C covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. In contrast, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R overlap in Figure 60(H), the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a display configuration where the right decorative pattern 8R covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, regarding the positional relationship between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C overlap in Figure 60(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, resulting in a display configuration where the middle decorative pattern 8C covers a portion of the left decorative pattern 8L. In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C overlap in Figure 60(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is positioned in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a display configuration where the left decorative pattern 8L covers a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Therefore, in the variable symbol stop position effect A, the stop positions of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R change randomly (irregularly) with each confirmed stop of these symbols. Furthermore, the relative positions (front-to-back) of the middle symbol 8C and right symbol 8R, and the relative positions (front-to-back) of the left symbol 8L and middle symbol 8C also change randomly (irregularly). This increases the variety of the variable effects (variable displays) for the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R. This helps to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play the variable symbol stop position effect A.

Furthermore, in the variable-position decorative symbol stop effect A, the left decorative symbol 8L did not extend beyond the top, left, and bottom edges of the display screen 7a from the left variable display area 8Lr, which is subject to the variable effect (variable display). However, it may be displayed in a way that makes it appear to extend beyond the edges. In this case, the portion of the left decorative symbol 8L that extends beyond the edges will be difficult to see. Similarly, the middle decorative symbol 8C did not extend beyond the top and bottom edges of the display screen 7a from the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is subject to the variable effect (variable display). However, it may be displayed in a way that makes it appear to extend beyond the edges. In this case, the portion of the middle decorative symbol 8C that extends beyond the edges will be difficult to see. Similarly, the right decorative symbol 8R did not extend beyond the top, right, and bottom edges of the display screen 7a from the right variable display area 8Rr, which is subject to the variable effect (variable display). However, it may be displayed in a way that makes it appear to extend beyond the edges. In this case, the portion of the right decorative symbol 8R that extends beyond the edges will be difficult to see.

[Decorative pattern stopping position undetermined effect B]
Next, the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect B will be explained with reference to Figure 61. Figure 61 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect B. The decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect B occurs when the game transitions to a special game mode, and the following explanation will cover the case when the game transitions from a normal game mode to a special game mode in a normal game state.

First, as shown in Figure 61(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with three vertically elongated rectangular areas (that is, areas that divide the display screen 7a into three equal columns) as variable display areas for the three decorative patterns (also called "variable decorative pattern areas"). The variable display of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is initiated by a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top of each variable display area toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L of the 3D image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the 3D image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the 3D image moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L begins its variation animation (variation display) when the reel rotates from the upper side of the left variation display area 8Lr to the lower side of the left variation display area 8Lr; the middle decorative symbol 8C begins its variation animation (variation display) when the reel rotates from the upper side of the middle variation display area 8Crr to the lower side of the middle variation display area 8Crr; and the right decorative symbol 8R begins its variation animation (variation display) when the reel rotates from the upper side of the right variation display area 8Rr to the lower side of the right variation display area 8Rr. The vertical distance of the left variation display area 8Lr, the vertical distance of the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the vertical distance of the right variation display area 8Rr are all the same. Furthermore, the horizontal distance of the left variation display area 8Lr, the horizontal distance of the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the horizontal distance of the right variation display area 8Rr are all the same.

In the variation animations (displays) for each decorative symbol, the reels rotate in the following order: 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → ...

Of the numbers "1" through "9", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" (excluding "7") are bright red, the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are bright blue, and "7" is yellow (gold). The size of the numbers "1" through "9" is a standard size, with a vertical distance of approximately one-third the vertical distance of the left variable display area 8Lr (center variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr), and a horizontal distance of approximately half the horizontal distance of the left variable display area 8Lr (center variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). Furthermore, the numbers "1" through "9" are formed using specially created typefaces (uniquely developed special typefaces) that differ from existing typefaces (generally available typefaces) such as Kaisho, Gothic, and Mincho typefaces, specifically for visual effect.

In normal gameplay mode, when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a slow pace, changing from opaque to semi-transparent, and then rapidly changes in display mode. This allows the background image positioned behind the decorative symbol to be visible through the rapidly changing semi-transparent symbol. Just before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates, changing from semi-transparent back to opaque, and is displayed as either temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative symbol is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, a horizontally elongated rectangular sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and their corresponding smaller left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark shade) or a color close to dark (for example, deep green)) and does not change to any other color. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned on the upper right side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the right-variable display area 8Rr, which is the variation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the right decorative symbol 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing it from obstructing the sub-variable area KSZ. Furthermore, even if other visual effects appear, these effects are positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing them from obstructing it. In short, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not obscured by the right decorative symbol 8R or other visual effects.

The small decorative patterns are numerical patterns, and their font differs from that of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, a Mincho font). They are unified in a single color with high contrast to the single color background image of the sub-variation area KSZ (for example, a light color (yellow or white)), and do not change to other colors. The small decorative patterns are positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and remain opaque at all times. They do not become semi-transparent even when variation begins, and they do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbols do not exhibit a variable display effect (variable display) when the reels rotate. Instead, the variable display effect (variable display) is achieved by displaying number symbols of the same size and opaque appearance in the same display position.

When the variation effect (variation display) using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R begins, a variation effect (variation display) using the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also begins in the sub-variation area KSZ. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop displaying, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also all stop displaying.

Even if one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of temporary stop (for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol and a reach is formed), the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all continue to exhibit a variable animation (variation display). Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol continues; even if the right decorative symbol 8R is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small right decorative symbol continues; and simultaneously with the display of stop animations for the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all also display a stop animation.

Furthermore, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop and do not line up, resulting in a loss, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or they may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, if the left decorative symbol 8L stops at the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C at the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R at the number "3", the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "1", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "2", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "3", or the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "5", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "6", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a win occurs due to them aligning to the same symbol, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol will align to match the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

As part of the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the currently fluctuating left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R is displayed (placed) on the fluctuation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area for the first special symbol hold is provided in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the fluctuation display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (base image)) are available, each capable of displaying (placing) a hold icon 9A, allowing for a maximum of four hold icons 9A to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad overlap with the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative pattern 8C. However, since the central decorative pattern 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not obstructed by the central decorative pattern 8C. However, if other performance images appear, and the other performance images are located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will not be obstructed by the other performance images. However, if the other performance images are located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will be obstructed by the other performance images.

Since the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are located on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, they overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. However, because the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L. However, if other visual effects appear, and the other visual effects are positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the other visual effects. However, if the other visual effects are positioned in front of the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad will be obstructed by the other visual effects.

Thus, among the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Therefore, the hold display area as the first special symbol hold, consisting of the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, is positioned across the middle variable display area 8Cr and the left variable display area 8Lr.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and the reserve icon 9A is displayed at the first to fourth reserve display positions 9Ad. In other words, there are four reserve icons that have not been consumed and are currently stockpiled. The following explanation assumes that during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols, a game ball enters the first start port 20, resulting in a state where there are three or four reserve icons (i.e., a reserve count of 3 or 4), while no game ball enters the second start port 21. Furthermore, as the reserve count increases, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the variation effect (variation display) (variation time) decreases. For example, in this embodiment, when the reserve count is 3 or 4, the variation time in a no-reach miss is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, opposite the aforementioned sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), is a horizontally elongated rectangular display area HS, which displays the number of reserved balls (numbers) for the first special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 and the second special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21. The vertical dimension of the display area HS is the same as that of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal dimension of the display area HS is the same as that of the sub-variation area KSZ. In other words, the shape of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are identical.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the hold count display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to other colors. Although the hold count display area HS is located in the upper left of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the left variation display area 8Lr, which is the variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the hold count display area HS is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing it from obstructing it. Furthermore, even if other animation images appear, they are positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing them from obstructing it.

The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are displayed in a different font (for example, Gothic font) than the font of the small decorative symbols, and are set to a different solid color with high contrast to the solid color background image of the reservation number display area HS, and do not change to any other color. The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the reservation number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21 is displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reservation number display area HS, and are always displayed spaced apart from each other. These numbers, displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, are less likely to be confused with the various background and decorative images displayed on screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved ball count display area HS is not obscured by other visual effects. The blue color indicating the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright blue used for the even-numbered symbols "2," "4," "6," and "8." The red color indicating the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright red used for the odd-numbered symbols (excluding "7"), such as "1," "3," "5," and "9."

To briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the different probability of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, among the four icons—a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability. Furthermore, the probability of winning is set to increase in the following order for the smiling sphere icon: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning).

In the normal game mode, as shown in Figure 61(A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) begins. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, which varies from top to bottom in the left variation display area 8Lr, temporarily stops in the center of the left variation display area 8Lr and moves slowly and subtly up and down. Next, the right decorative symbol 8R, which varies from top to bottom in the right variation display area 8Rr, temporarily stops in the center of the right variation display area 8Rr and moves slowly and subtly up and down. Finally, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which varies from top to bottom in the middle variation display area 8Cr, temporarily stops in the center of the middle variation display area 8Cr and moves slowly and subtly up and down.

In addition, during normal gameplay, multiple background images are available, and the background image switches as needed.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 61(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all stop (confirm) in the center of their respective variable display areas, resulting in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R being aligned on the same horizontal line and stopped (confirmed). Consequently, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, in order to consume the hold icon 9A placed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the display begins to move toward the corresponding variation display position 9Cd. As shown in Figure 61(C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the corresponding variation display position 9Cd, the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, and all the hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, a variation performance (variation display) using medium-sized decorative symbols begins in the second sub-variation area CSZ, which will be described later. After that, the background image switches from the background image for normal gameplay to the background image exclusive to A mode, and a large message image MSG, which will be described later, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This A mode is a special game mode. In A mode, a decorative symbol stop position indeterminate performance B begins, which has a different display pattern from the decorative symbol variation performance (variation display) in the normal gameplay state shown in Figures 61(A) and (B) above.

The background image exclusive to Mode A is a background image different from the background image used in the normal game mode, and is exclusively used in Mode A. Only one or multiple types of background images exclusive to Mode A may be provided.

In this embodiment, the condition for the occurrence of the decorative symbol stop position irregular effect B is, for example, when the number of times the variation effect (variation display) is performed without a win reaches 2.5 to 3 times the number of times in the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state). Furthermore, in the decorative symbol stop position irregular effect B, a predetermined number of variation effects (variation display) are performed. This "predetermined number" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the number of times in the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), which in this case is 115 times.

When the decorative pattern stop position-indeterminate effect B begins, a second sub-variation area CSZ, having a horizontal rectangular shape, is provided on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. This area displays the corresponding medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern, respectively, in a variable performance (variable display). The vertical dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is approximately five times larger than that of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is approximately five times larger than that of the sub-variation area KSZ, resulting in similar shapes.

In the second sub-variation area CSZ, the size of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern displayed in the variation animation (variation display) is larger (about 5 times larger) than the size of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ, but smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. Furthermore, unlike the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern have a similar shape, being smaller versions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and are the same color. In other words, the medium-sized left decorative pattern is a smaller version of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L; the medium-sized central decorative pattern is a smaller version of the central decorative pattern 8C and has the same color as the central decorative pattern 8C; and the medium-sized right decorative pattern is a smaller version of the right decorative pattern 8R and has the same color as the right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, the background image of the second sub-variable area CSZ is fixed as colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to other colors. Since the second sub-variable area CSZ is located on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, in this embodiment, during the period when the second sub-variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, so the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, since the second sub-variable area CSZ is positioned at the very front, even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the second sub-variable area CSZ, so the second sub-variable area CSZ is not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the second sub-variable area CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other performance images.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the medium-sized decorative symbols do not exhibit a rotating reel display. Instead, at the same display position, the rotating effect (rotation display) occurs as if a coin were rotating, for example, starting from the left edge of the medium-sized decorative symbol, passing in front, and moving towards the right edge of the medium-sized decorative symbol. Furthermore, the medium-sized decorative symbols—that is, the left medium-sized decorative symbol, the middle medium-sized decorative symbol, and the right medium-sized decorative symbol—stop displaying at the same time if the rotating effect (rotation display) begins at the same time.

In this embodiment, when the variable-position decorative symbol stop effect B, which performs a maximum of 115 variable effects (variable displays), is started, a variable effect (variable display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started in the second sub-variable area CSZ and is performed for a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period when the variable effect (variable display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is performed for a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable effect (variable display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started in the second sub-variable area CSZ and the second variable effect (variable display) is being performed, a message image MSG with the words "Entering A Mode" in gold color is displayed. This message image (MSG) is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment), then disappears from the display screen 7a. Afterward, the message image "A Mode" is displayed as a ticker TP1 (see, for example, Figure 61(D)) along the top edge of the display screen 7a, moving from the right edge to the left edge of the screen 7a, repeatedly during the period when the decorative pattern stop position-indeterminate effect B is being performed.

The text overlay TP1, which displays the message "A Mode," is the same color (gold) as the message image MSG, which displays "Entering A Mode." The area where text overlay TP1 is displayed is a band-shaped area with a predetermined distance from the top edge of the display screen 7a, and is approximately four times larger than the vertical dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). Although the area where text overlay TP1 is displayed overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, because the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS are positioned as the foremost area as described above, text overlay TP1 is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and therefore does not obstruct the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS. In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS is not obscured by text overlay TP1.

The area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed is, as described above, a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the top edge of the display screen 7a. This area overlaps with the upper area of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L; the upper area of the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C; and the upper area of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. In this embodiment, the area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed is positioned behind the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed.

When the text overlay TP1 is displayed moving along the top edge of the display screen 7a from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear midway, nor does it gradually disappear by becoming particle-like. The text overlay TP1 is displayed at a constant speed, which is the speed specified for text overlay TP1.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B is performed, and the predetermined number of variation effects (variation display) using a medium-sized decorative symbol begins in the second sub-variation area CSZ, a counter image CNT displaying "Remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 61(D), just before this variation effect (variation display) ends. The counter image CNT is positioned in front of a semi-transparent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image for the counter image. The vertical dimension of this semi-transparent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image is approximately three times larger than the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), and the horizontal dimension of this semi-transparent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image is approximately six times larger than the horizontal dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS).

This translucent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image for the counter image overlaps with the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative pattern 8C. However, by positioning the counter image background image to be the closest to the viewer, the central decorative pattern 8C is positioned behind the counter image background image, preventing the counter image CNT, which is positioned in front of the counter image background image, from being obscured by the central decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, even if other performance images appear, these other performance images are positioned behind the counter image background image, preventing the counter image CNT, which is positioned in front of the counter image background image, from being obscured by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the counter image CNT, which is positioned in front of the counter image background image, is not obstructed by the central decorative pattern 8C or other performance images. Furthermore, because the background image for the counter image is semi-transparent, the areas of the background image where the counter image CNT is not placed (i.e., the areas of the background image that do not correspond to the counter image CNT) allow the central decorative symbol 8C and other visual effects (background images for the left decorative symbol 8L, central decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R) to be visible through the semi-transparent background image.

Furthermore, when the counter image CNT displaying "105 remaining" appears in the lower center of the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R reappear and stop displaying (slightly delayed from the start of the display of the counter image CNT). At this time, the size of the reappearing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R will be different from their size before they disappeared, i.e., the size of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 61(A) and (B). Furthermore, the orientation of the reappearing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R may differ from the orientation of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 61(A) and (B). The positions where the reappearing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and stopped will also differ from the positions where they are temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode shown in Figures 61(A) and (B).

Specifically, in the variable stop position display B of the decorative symbol in Figure 61(D), the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped is larger than the normal size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Figure 61(B). Furthermore, in the game mode of Figure 61(B), the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. In contrast, in the variable stop position display B of the decorative symbol in Figure 61(D), the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, but rather on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, with a portion of the upper part of the left decorative symbol 8L protruding from the top edge of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, in the game mode shown in Figure 61(B), the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate). In contrast, in the variable-position decorative symbol stop effect B shown in Figure 61(D), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being slightly tilted to the left. At this time, if the medium-sized left decorative symbol stops and displays the number "1" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L will also stop and display the number "1".

In the variable stop position display B of the decorative symbol in Figure 61(D), the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is slightly larger than the normal size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Figure 61(B), but smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in the game mode of Figure 61(B), the position where the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped is in the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R. In contrast, in the variable stop position display B of the decorative symbol in Figure 61(D), the position where the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped is not in the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but rather on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, causing a portion of the upper part of the right decorative symbol 8R to protrude from the top edge of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Although a sub-variation area KSZ is provided above the right-variation display area 8Rr, the sub-variation area KSZ is positioned closest to the front, so a portion of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" is covered by the sub-variation area KSZ. Furthermore, in the game mode of Figure 61(B), the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is not tilted (vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate), whereas in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate performance B of Figure 61(D), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the right. At this time, if the medium-sized right decorative symbol stops displaying the number "2" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the right decorative symbol 8R will also stop displaying the number "2".

In the variable-position decorative symbol stop performance B shown in Figure 61(D), the size of the central decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped is considerably larger than the normal size of the central decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode shown in Figure 61(B), and is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in the game mode shown in Figure 61(B), the position where the central decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped is the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative symbol 8C, whereas in the variable-position decorative symbol stop performance B shown in Figure 61(D), the position where the central decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped is not the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative symbol 8C, but rather the lower side of the central variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, similar to how the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode shown in Figure 61(B), is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation), in the decorative symbol stop position variable effect B shown in Figure 61(D), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is not tilted. At this time, when the medium-sized middle decorative symbol stops and displays the number "3" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the middle decorative symbol 8C also stops and displays the number "3". Although a counter image CNT is provided below the middle variation display area 8Cr, because the counter image CNT is positioned closest to the viewer, a portion of the middle decorative symbol 8C displaying the number "3" is covered by the counter image CNT.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of (10th) variation performances (variation displays) using medium-sized decorative patterns are performed in the second sub-variation region CSZ. Immediately before this variation performance (variation display) ends, a counter image CNT showing "105 remaining" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R reappear and are displayed in a stopped state. However, when the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate performance B is started and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the counter image CNT is displayed, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may reappear just before the time comes for them to display in a stopped state. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R reappear, the second sub-variation area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbols also disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the predetermined number of (10) fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) are completed, and then the predetermined number of (10) + 1 (i.e., 11th) fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) begin, the fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) start so that the medium-sized left decorative symbol, the medium-sized middle decorative symbol, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol rotate coins at the same time, as shown in Figure 61(E), the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative symbols also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each light up, and the fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) are performed so that the reels rotate downwards in the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "104 remaining". In other words, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all begin their variation animation (variation display) at the same time. Furthermore, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop at the same time.

In this case, in the variable stop position effect B of the decorative symbols, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a different manner from the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the game modes shown in Figures 61(A) and (B). In the game modes shown in Figures 61(A) and (B), the variation effects (variation displays) of each decorative symbol are displayed in the order of the reels rotating in the sequence of numbers "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "7" → "8" → "9" → "1" → "2" → ..., as described above. However, in the variation effect B where the stopping position of the decorative symbol is not fixed, when the variation effect (variation display) of each stopped decorative symbol begins, each decorative symbol lights up and then moves downwards toward the bottom of the variation display area of each decorative symbol, or each decorative symbol lights up and moves downwards toward the bottom of the variation display area of each decorative symbol, and then the number immediately following each stopped decorative symbol does not appear, and a random number appears opaquely as the number immediately following each decorative symbol and is displayed as the stopping symbol. This occurs because the second sub-variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbols also disappear from the display screen 7a. This allows for a display mode where seemingly random numbers suddenly appear opaquely as the number immediately following each decorative symbol, and then stop and display.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(D) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as stopped in Figure 61(D) appears opaque and is not displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 61(E). Instead, a random number "4" appears opaquely and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 61(E) is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(D). Furthermore, in Figure 61(D), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "1" is on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. In contrast, when the variable display (variable display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "4" in Figure 61(E) is not on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, but on the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Moreover, in Figure 61(D), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L in the temporary stop display and the stopped display is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are slightly tilted counterclockwise relative to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being slightly tilted to the left. In contrast, in Figure 61(E), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L in the temporary stop display and the stopped display is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation.

In Figure 61(D), when the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "2" begins, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 61(D) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 61(E). Instead, a random number "5" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 61(E) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" that was stopped in Figure 61(D), and is also larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in Figure 61(D), the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "2" is on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "5" in Figure 61(E) is not on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, but closer to the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr. As a result, a portion of the upper and right sides of the right decorative symbol 8R protrudes from the top and right edges of the right variable display area 8Rr, respectively, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, in Figure 61(D), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the right. In contrast, in Figure 61(E), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being significantly tilted to the left.

In Figure 61(D), when the animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is displayed as stopped, begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "4" that follows the number "3" of the central decorative symbol 8C displayed as stopped in Figure 61(D) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 61(E). Instead, a random number "1" appears opaquely and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 61(E) is considerably smaller than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" that is displayed as temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 61(D), and is also considerably smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, in Figure 61(D), the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "3" is below the central variable display area 8Cr. In contrast, after the variable display (variable display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "1" in Figure 61(E) is not below the central variable display area 8Cr, but slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr. Moreover, in Figure 61(D), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped central decorative symbol 8C was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C were parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation. In contrast, in Figure 61(E), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped central decorative symbol 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the central decorative symbol 8C being slightly tilted to the left.

In the second sub-variation area CSZ, when a variation performance (variation display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started for a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1 time (i.e., the 11th time), a text message image TP2 that reads "It's still going..." is displayed in multiple text display modes (in this case, three text messages TP2) moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a so that it is parallel to the top edge of the display screen 7a. The text message TP2 is white, and the probability of winning is higher for other colors (for example, blue, red, rainbow) compared to white (for example, the probability of winning is lowest for white, and increases in the order of blue, red, and then rainbow). The vertical dimension of the text message TP2 is approximately twice the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area in which the text TP2 is displayed is between the bottom edge of the area in which the text TP1 is displayed and the top edge of the background image for the counter image. It spans the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L; the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C; and the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. By positioning the text TP2 to be closest to the viewer, even when the text TP2 spans the right variable display area 8Rr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the left variable display area 8Lr, the text TP2 is positioned in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the text TP2 is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, it differs in that the aforementioned text overlay TP1 is positioned behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and is obscured by the sub-variation area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS.

Furthermore, while text overlay TP2 differs from the aforementioned text overlay TP1 in that it repeatedly moves and displays, it does not reappear from the right edge of the display screen 7a once it reaches the left edge. Multiple text overlays TP2 may be set to move at different speeds or at the same speed. Because the timing of their appearance from the right edge of the display screen 7a differs, some may reach the left edge of the display screen 7a and disappear in that particular variation, some may reach the left edge of the display screen 7a and disappear across the next variation, and some may even reach the left edge of the display screen 7a and disappear across subsequent variations (multiple variations).

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear midway, or it may gradually disappear as particles, or it may display in a way that results in missing image information (for example, the image may be divided into small blocks and not arranged in a regular, irregular manner, resulting in an unclear image), making it difficult to read. This differs from the aforementioned text overlay TP1, which, when displayed moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a along the top edge of the display screen 7a, does not suddenly disappear midway, does not gradually disappear as particles, and does not display in a way that results in missing image information.

Furthermore, the text overlay TP2 may move and be displayed at the same constant speed as text overlay TP1 (the speed used for text overlay TP1), at a faster constant speed than text overlay TP1 (the speed used for text overlay TP1), or at a slower constant speed than text overlay TP1 (the speed used for text overlay TP1). Additionally, the speed of text overlay TP2 may accelerate when moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, or decelerate when moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, or it may accelerate or decelerate when moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a. These points also differ from the text overlay TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop midway, or it may slow down before stopping. When text overlay TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may black out (a completely dark screen) as described later, and then the results may be displayed. These points also differ from the text overlay TP1 mentioned above.

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, the font may change midway through (for example, the font of all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may change, all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may become bold, all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may become regular, all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may become italic, the size of all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may change significantly, the size of all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may change significantly, or all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may be underlined), and the content may change to other content. These points also distinguish it from the text overlay TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a, its vertical dimension is approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). However, the vertical dimension of text overlay TP2 may exceed approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) when it is displayed as a moving element, or it may be less than approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) when it is displayed as a moving element. Additionally, when the vertical dimension of text overlay TP2 exceeds approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) when it is displayed as a moving element, it may appear red or rainbow-colored. These points also differ from the text overlay TP1 described above.

The content of the text overlay TP2 can be multiple, and the player can select and set it by operating the performance button 63. For example, the content of text overlay TP2 could be a comment from one of several characters representing the world of the game machine, a portion of the lyrics to the music played during the variable-position decorative symbol performance B, or comments from multiple people expressing the world of the background image for the variable-position decorative symbol performance B. Of course, the player can also choose to display or hide text overlay TP2. This selection can be made by the player in a setting mode during gameplay, or in a setting mode while the machine is waiting for a customer (waiting for a player).

In the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance B, the variable icon 9C and the reserve icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. Therefore, it is not possible to inform the player of the probability of a big win for that variable by changing the display pattern of the variable icon 9C, nor is it possible to suggest the probability of a win by changing the display pattern of the reserve icon 9A through a pre-read performance. For this reason, in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance B, the probability of a win can be suggested by changing the display pattern of the text TP2 in various ways. Text TP1 informs the player that it is "A mode" and does not convey any other information to the player. For this reason, text TP2, which can suggest the probability of a win to the player, is placed in front of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, while text TP1, which does not convey any information to the player other than the information that it is "A mode," is placed behind the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Furthermore, in the "Undetermined Stop Position" effect B, a background image exclusive to Mode A is displayed. Therefore, if multiple types of Mode-exclusive background images are available, the display may be configured to show the Mode-exclusive background image corresponding to the expected winning probability.

Thus, unlike TP1, TP2 offers a wide variety of visual effects, which helps to mitigate the decline in player engagement with the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display) that is characteristic of the variable stopping position of decorative symbols (effect B).

After the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 1st rotation (i.e., the 11th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 2nd rotation (i.e., the 12th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 61(F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will each light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "103 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect B, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol before stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(E) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as stopped in Figure 61(E) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 61(F). Instead, a random number "6" appears opaquely and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 61(F) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(E), but is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in Figure 61(E), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "4" is below the left variable display area 8Lr. In contrast, after the variable display (variable display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "6" in Figure 61(F) is not below the left variable display area 8Lr, but in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. Moreover, in Figure 61(E), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped left decorative symbol 8L was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L were parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation. In contrast, in Figure 61(F), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped left decorative symbol 8L is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are significantly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being significantly tilted to the left.

In Figure 61(E), when the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "5" begins, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 61(E) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 61(F). Instead, a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as the stop. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 61(F) is considerably smaller than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" that was stopped in Figure 61(E), and is also smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, in Figure 61(E), the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "5" is towards the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas in Figure 61(F), after the variable effect (variable display) has started, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "8" is not towards the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Moreover, in Figure 61(E), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped right decorative symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being tilted significantly to the left, whereas in Figure 61(F), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped right decorative symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation.

In Figure 61(E), when the animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is displayed as stopped, begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" in the central decorative symbol 8C displayed as stopped in Figure 61(E) appears opaque and is not displayed as stopped in Figure 61(F). Instead, a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 61(F) is considerably larger than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" displayed as temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 61(E), and is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in Figure 61(E), the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "1" is slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "8" in Figure 61(F) is not slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, but rather to the upper right of the central variable display area 8Cr. As a result, a portion of the upper part of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "8" protrudes from the top edge of the central variable display area 8Cr, making it difficult to see, and the right side of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "8" jumps over the right edge of the central variable display area 8Cr and crosses over the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R for the number "8" overlap. In other words, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" is displayed (the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves toward the lower side of the right display area 8Rr (direction of movement)). Here, because the size of the central decorative symbol 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R, the larger central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is positioned in front of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8", resulting in a display configuration where the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" covers a portion of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8". Furthermore, in Figure 61(E), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, both when it is temporarily stopped and when it is stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the central decorative symbol 8C being slightly tilted to the left. In contrast, in Figure 61(F), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, both when it is temporarily stopped and when it is stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the central decorative symbol 8C being slightly tilted to the right.

After the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 2nd rotation (i.e., the 12th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 3rd rotation (i.e., the 13th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 61(G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will each light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "102 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect B, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol before stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(F) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "7" following the number "6" of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as stopped in Figure 61(F) appears opaque and is not displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 61(G). Instead, a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 61(G) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(F), but is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in Figure 61(F), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "6" is in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "1" in Figure 61(G) is not in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but rather in the upper left of the left variable display area 8Lr. As a result, a portion of the upper part of the left decorative symbol 8L protrudes from the top edge of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided in the upper left of the left variable display area 8Lr, the left variable display area 8Lr is positioned closest to the viewer, so a portion of the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "1" is covered by the reserved number display area HS. Furthermore, in Figure 61(F), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being significantly tilted to the left. In contrast, in Figure 61(G), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being significantly tilted to the right.

In Figure 61(F), when the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "8" starts to fluctuate, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 61(F) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 61(G). Instead, a random number "2" appears opaquely and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 61(G) is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "8" in Figure 61(F), and is slightly larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in Figure 61(F), the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "8" is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "2" in Figure 61(G) is not slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but rather to the lower right of the right variable display area 8Rr. As a result, a portion of the lower part of the right decorative symbol 8R protrudes from the bottom edge of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, in Figure 61(F), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation. In contrast, in Figure 61(G), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the left.

In Figure 61(F), when the animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is displayed as stopped, begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "9" following the number "8" in the central decorative symbol 8C, which was displayed as stopped in Figure 61(F), appears opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 61(G). Instead, a random number "7" appears opaque and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is displayed as both temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 61(G), is slightly larger than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" displayed as both temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 61(F), and is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in Figure 61(F), the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "8" is on the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "7" in Figure 61(G) is not on the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, but rather on the central right side of the central variable display area 8Cr. The central decorative symbol 8C for the number "7" jumps over the central variable display area 8Cr and crosses over the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, in Figure 61(F), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which was temporarily stopped and stopped, was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C were tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the right. In contrast, in Figure 61(G), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which was temporarily stopped and stopped, was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C were tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being significantly tilted to the right.

When the predetermined number of variations (10 times) + the 3rd variation (i.e., the 13th variation) begins, a text overlay TP2, which is a message image saying "Here we go...", moves from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, parallel to the top edge of the display screen 7a, in the style of a text overlay. Text overlay TP2 is white.

After the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 3rd rotation (i.e., the 13th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 4th rotation (i.e., the 14th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 61(H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "101 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect B, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol before stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(G) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as stopped in Figure 61(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 61(H). Instead, a random number "9" appears opaquely and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 61(H) is considerably smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(G), and is also smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, in Figure 61(G), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "1" is on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas when the variable effect (variable display) starts, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "9" in Figure 61(H) is not on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, but on the lower right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, in Figure 61(G), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which was displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L were tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being tilted significantly to the right. In contrast, in Figure 61(H), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which was displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L were tilted even more significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, meaning the left decorative symbol 8L was tilted even more significantly to the right than in Figure 61(G).

In Figure 61(G), when the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "2" begins, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 61(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 61(H). Instead, a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 61(H) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" that was stopped in Figure 61(G), and is also considerably larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in Figure 61(G), the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "2" is on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas when the variable effect (variable display) starts, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "4" in Figure 61(H) is not on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, but rather on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the right decorative symbol 8R for the number "4" jumps over the right variable display area 8Rr and crosses over the middle variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, in Figure 61(G), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the left. In contrast, in Figure 61(H), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being significantly tilted to the left.

In Figure 61(G), when the animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is stopped and displayed as the number "7", begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "8" following the number "7" in the central decorative symbol 8C that was stopped and displayed in Figure 61(G) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 61(H). Instead, a random number "3" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, in Figure 61(H), the size of the central decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol is smaller than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" that is temporarily stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol in Figure 61(G), but is larger than the normal size, and is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in Figure 61(G), the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "7" is to the right of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "3" in Figure 61(H) is not to the right of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, but to the upper right of the central variable display area 8Cr. As a result, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R for the number "4" overlap. In other words, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is displayed (the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr (direction of movement)). Here, because the size of the right decorative symbol 8R is larger than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C, the larger right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is positioned in front of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3", resulting in a display configuration where the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" covers a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3". Furthermore, in Figure 61(G), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being tilted significantly to the right. In contrast, in Figure 61(H), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation.

As the variation animation (variation display) progresses, and the predetermined number of variations (10 times) + 54th time (i.e., 64th time) is completed, the predetermined number of variations (10 times) + 55th time (i.e., 65th time) begins. As shown in Figure 61(I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "50 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect B, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol before stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" that was displayed as a stop on the 64th spin (not shown) begins to fluctuate, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "3" that follows the number "2" on the left decorative symbol 8L that was displayed as a stop on the 64th spin (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a stop on the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 61(I). Instead, a random number "4" appears opaquely and is displayed as a stop. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed as a stop on Figure 61(I) is considerably smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" that was displayed as a stop on the 64th spin (not shown), but it is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in the 64th spin (not shown), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "2" displayed is in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "4" displayed in Figure 61(I) is not in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but slightly to the lower right of the center. Additionally, in the 64th spin (not shown), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, both temporarily stopped and stopped, was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the left decorative symbol 8L were parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation. In contrast, in Figure 61(I), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, both temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are slightly tilted counterclockwise relative to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being slightly tilted to the left.

When the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" that was displayed as a stop on the 64th spin (not shown) begins to fluctuate, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "4" that follows the number "3" on the right decorative symbol 8R that was displayed as a stop on the 64th spin (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a stop on the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 61(I). Instead, a random number "1" appears opaquely and is displayed as a stop. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed as a stop on the 61(I) is considerably smaller than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" that was displayed as a stop on the 64th spin (not shown), and is also considerably smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, in the 64th spin (not shown), the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the number "3" that was stopped is to the left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the number "1" that was stopped in Figure 61(I) is not to the left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but to the upper right of the right variable display area 8Rr. Although a sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right variable display area 8Rr, the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer, so a portion of the right decorative symbol 8R for the number "1" is covered by the sub-variable area KSZ. Furthermore, in the 64th spin (not shown), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which was displayed as both a temporary stop and a stopped symbol, was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R were tilted slightly clockwise relative to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the right. In contrast, in Figure 61(I), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which was displayed as both a temporary stop and a stopped symbol, was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R were tilted significantly counterclockwise relative to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being significantly tilted to the left.

When the animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C, which was displayed as the number "6" in the 64th spin (not shown), begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "7" following the number "6" in the central decorative symbol 8C that was displayed as the 64th spin (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 61(I). Instead, a random number "5" appears opaque and is displayed as the central decorative symbol. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed in Figure 61(I) is considerably larger than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "6" that was temporarily stopped and displayed in the 64th spin (not shown), and is also considerably larger than the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in the 64th spin (not shown), the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "6" that was stopped is on the upper left side of the central variable display area 8Cr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "5" that was stopped in Figure 61(I) is not on the upper left side of the central variable display area 8Cr, but rather closer to the left center of the central variable display area 8Cr. As a result, the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "5" jumps over the central variable display area 8Cr and crosses over the left variable display area 8Lr. Therefore, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "5" and the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "4" overlap. In other words, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is displayed in the direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" is displayed (the direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves toward the lower side of the left display area 8Lr (direction of movement)). Here, because the size of the central decorative symbol 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R, the front-to-back relationship between the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" is such that the larger central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is positioned in front of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4", resulting in a display configuration where the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" covers a portion of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4". Furthermore, in the 64th spin (not shown), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which was displayed as both a temporary stop and a stopped symbol, was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C were tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being tilted significantly to the right. In contrast, in Figure 61(I), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which was displayed as both a temporary stop and a stopped symbol, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being tilted significantly to the right.

After the predetermined number of rotations (10) + 55th rotation (i.e., 65th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10) + 56th rotation (i.e., 66th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 61(J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will each light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "49 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect B, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol before stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(I) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as stopped in Figure 61(I) appears opaque and is not displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 61(J). Instead, a random number "2" appears opaquely and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 61(J) is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(J). Furthermore, in Figure 61(I), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the stopped number "4" is slightly to the lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the stopped number "2" in Figure 61(J) is not slightly to the lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but rather closer to the upper right of the left variable display area 8Lr. The left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" jumps over the left variable display area 8Lr and crosses over the middle variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, in Figure 61(I), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being slightly tilted to the left. In contrast, in Figure 61(J), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being slightly tilted to the left.

In Figure 61(I), when the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "1" begins, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 61(I) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 61(J). Instead, a random number "7" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, in Figure 61(J), the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" that was stopped in Figure 61(I), but smaller than the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in Figure 61(I), the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "1" is on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas when the variable effect (variable display) starts, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "7" in Figure 61(J) is not on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, but rather in the lower center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, in Figure 61(I), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being tilted significantly to the left. In contrast, in Figure 61(J), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being tilted slightly to the left. Compared to the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 61(I), the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are more parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation.

In Figure 61(I), when the animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is displayed as stopped, begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "6" following the number "5" in the central decorative symbol 8C displayed as stopped in Figure 61(I) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a stopped symbol 8C in Figure 61(J). Instead, a random number "8" appears opaquely and is displayed as a stopped symbol. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 61(J) is considerably smaller than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" displayed as temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 61(I), and is also smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, in Figure 61(I), the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "5" is slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "8" in Figure 61(J) is not slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, but rather to the upper left of the central variable display area 8Cr. As a result, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "8" and the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "2" overlap. In other words, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" is displayed (the direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves toward the lower side of the left display area 8Lr (direction of movement)). Here, because the size of the left decorative symbol 8L is larger than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8", the larger left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" is positioned in front of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8", resulting in a display configuration where the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" covers a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8". Furthermore, in Figure 61(I), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being tilted significantly to the right. In contrast, in Figure 61(J), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56th time (i.e., 66th time) of the variation effect (variation display) begins, the following text overlays TP2, consisting of the message images "Is it about to happen?", "Ah, it's endless...", and "Ah, not yet...", move and are displayed parallel to the top edge of the display screen 7a, moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a in the manner of text overlays. The text overlay TP2 for the message image "Is it about to happen?" is blue, while the text overlays TP2 for the message images "Ah, it's endless..." and "Ah, not yet..." are white.

Subsequently, the variable display animation progresses, and after the predetermined number of animations (10) + 105th (i.e., 115th) is completed, Mode A ends, and the variable display animation B (where the decorative symbols stop in a fixed position) also ends. The game returns to the normal gameplay mode, and as shown in Figures 61(A) and (B), the variable display animation is performed using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

In addition, while Figures 61(C) to 61(J) show the display for the case of a "no-reach miss" in the variable-position decorative symbol stop position effect B, in the case of a "reach but miss," the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R do not stop temporarily aligned on the same horizontal line, the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a completely black screen), and a bright white beam of light converges toward the center of the display screen 7a and then disappears, resembling the power being turned off on an analog television's cathode ray tube. At this time, the contents of the reserve number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. In other words, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol continues in the sub-variation area KSZ. This state is maintained until the time comes to announce the win/loss result (miss). Then, when the result of winning or losing (losing) is announced, as shown in Figures 61(C) to 61(J), the variation effects (variation displays) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will, as described above, appear opaquely as the number immediately following each decorative symbol and stop at the same time.

On the other hand, in the case of a win, just like in the case of a loss, the display screen 7a first blacks out (becomes a completely black screen), and a bright white beam of light converges toward the center of the display screen 7a and then disappears, resembling the power being turned off on an analog television's cathode ray tube. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. In other words, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol continues in the sub-variation area KSZ. After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R appear as, for example, the number "7" in the center of their respective left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr, lined up on the same horizontal line and temporarily stop, then the stop display is shown, confirming that it is a win, and then the winning game begins. When a win is announced, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R stop (confirm display) simultaneously. At the same time, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also stop (confirm display) with the same number (number symbol, in this case the number "7") as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

In the decorative symbol stop position-unpredictable effect B, the longer the display screen 7a remains blacked out (the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation of winning. Therefore, even though the display screen 7a is a monotonous blacked-out screen, it can heighten and excite the player's anticipation.

Thus, in the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance B, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time they are confirmed to stop. In this case, when one of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R overlaps with another decorative pattern, for example, in the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R overlap in Figure 61(F), the larger middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, resulting in a display configuration where the larger middle decorative pattern 8C covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. In contrast, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R overlap in Figure 61(H), the larger right decorative pattern 8R is positioned in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a display configuration where the larger right decorative pattern 8R covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, regarding the positional relationship between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C overlap in Figure 61(I), the larger middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, resulting in a display configuration where the larger middle decorative pattern 8C covers a portion of the left decorative pattern 8L. In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C overlap in Figure 61(J), the larger left decorative pattern 8L is positioned in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a display configuration where the larger left decorative pattern 8L covers a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Therefore, in the variable symbol stop position effect B, the stopping positions of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R change randomly (irregularly) each time they stop. Furthermore, the relative positions (front-to-back) of the middle symbol 8C and right symbol 8R, and the relative positions (front-to-back) of the left symbol 8L and middle symbol 8C, also change randomly (irregularly) so that the larger symbol is closer to the player. This increases the variety of the variable effects (variable displays) of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R. This helps to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play the variable symbol stop position effect B.

Furthermore, in the variable symbol stop position effect B, the sizes of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time they stop. Therefore, the variable symbol stop position effect B offers a rich variety of variations in the variable effects (variable displays) of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R, further contributing to suppressing the decline in player interest in the variable symbol stop position effect B.

Furthermore, in the variable symbol stop position effect B, the tilt of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R can also change randomly (irregularly) with each confirmed stop of these symbols. Therefore, the variable symbol stop position effect B offers even more variations in the variation effects (variation displays) of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R, further contributing to suppressing the decline in player interest in the variable symbol stop position effect B.

[Decorative pattern stopping position undetermined performance C]
Next, the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect C will be explained with reference to Figure 62. Figure 62 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect C. The decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect C occurs when the game transitions to a special game mode, and the following explanation will cover the case when transitioning from a normal game mode to a special game mode in a normal game state.

First, as shown in Figure 62(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with three vertically elongated rectangular areas (that is, areas that divide the display screen 7a into three equal columns) as variable display areas for the three decorative patterns (also called "variable decorative pattern areas"). The variable display of the decorative patterns (composed of number patterns (numbers "1" to "9") and various character patterns) is started by rotating the reels from the top of each variable display area toward the bottom of the display screen 7a in a display manner. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L begins its variation animation (variation display) when the reel rotates from the upper side of the left variation display area 8Lr to the lower side of the left variation display area 8Lr; the middle decorative symbol 8C begins its variation animation (variation display) when the reel rotates from the upper side of the middle variation display area 8Crr to the lower side of the middle variation display area 8Crr; and the right decorative symbol 8R begins its variation animation (variation display) when the reel rotates from the upper side of the right variation display area 8Rr to the lower side of the right variation display area 8Rr. The vertical distance of the left variation display area 8Lr, the vertical distance of the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the vertical distance of the right variation display area 8Rr are all the same. Furthermore, the horizontal distance of the left variation display area 8Lr, the horizontal distance of the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the horizontal distance of the right variation display area 8Rr are all the same.

Each decorative pattern in the 3D image is composed of a number (numbers "1" through "9") with a character pattern in multiple colors (full color) attached to it. The character pattern is displayed prominently, making it the main focus. Therefore, the number itself is smaller in size compared to the character pattern attached to it. Furthermore, each number pattern is accompanied by a different character pattern.

Specifically, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is composed of a bright blue number "6" pattern 8La with a character pattern 8Lb attached (see Figure 62(B)), the middle decorative pattern 8C is composed of a bright red number "3" pattern 8Ca with a character pattern 8Cb attached (see Figure 62(B)), and the right decorative pattern 8R is composed of a bright blue number "4" pattern 8Ra with a character pattern 8Rb attached (see Figure 62(B)).

In the variation animations (displays) for each decorative symbol, the reels rotate in the following order: 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → ...

The number patterns (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the number "X," where X represents a number) are colored. Specifically, among the numbers "1" through "9," the odd-numbered patterns, excluding the number "7," are bright red; the even-numbered patterns, 2, 4, 6, and 8, are bright blue; and the number "7" is yellow (gold). The decorative patterns, which consist of the number patterns and character patterns, are of a standard size, with a vertical distance of approximately one-third the vertical distance of the left variable display area 8Lr (center variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and a horizontal distance of approximately half the horizontal distance of the left variable display area 8Lr (center variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). In this case, the size of the numbers that make up the decorative patterns of a standard size is the standard size for number patterns. However, the numbers "1" through "9" are formed using a special typeface newly created for the purpose of presentation, different from existing typefaces (generally available typefaces) such as Kaisho, Gothic, and Mincho.

In normal gameplay mode, when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a slow pace, changing from opaque to semi-transparent, and then rapidly changes in display mode. This allows the background image positioned behind the decorative symbol to be visible through the rapidly changing semi-transparent symbol. Just before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates, changing from semi-transparent back to opaque, and is displayed as either temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative symbol is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, a horizontally elongated rectangular sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and corresponding smaller left decorative patterns, a small middle decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark shade) or a color close to dark (for example, deep green)) and does not change to any other color. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned on the upper right side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the right-variable display area 8Rr, which is the variation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the right decorative symbol 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing it from obstructing the sub-variable area KSZ. Furthermore, even if other visual effects appear, these effects are positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing them from obstructing it. In short, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not obscured by the right decorative symbol 8R or other visual effects.

The small decorative patterns are numerical patterns, and their font differs from that of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, a Mincho font). They are unified in a single color with high contrast to the single color background image of the sub-variation area KSZ (for example, a light color (yellow or white)), and do not change to other colors. The small decorative patterns are positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and remain opaque at all times. They do not become semi-transparent even when variation begins, and they do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbols do not exhibit a variable display effect (variable display) when the reels rotate. Instead, the variable display effect (variable display) is achieved by displaying number symbols of the same size and opaque appearance in the same display position.

When the variation effect (variation display) using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R begins, a variation effect (variation display) using the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also begins in the sub-variation area KSZ. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop displaying, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also all stop displaying.

Even if one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of temporary stop (for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol and a reach is formed), the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all continue to exhibit a variable animation (variation display). Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol continues; even if the right decorative symbol 8R is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small right decorative symbol continues; and simultaneously with the display of stop animations for the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all also display a stop animation.

Furthermore, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop and do not line up, resulting in a loss, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or they may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, if the left decorative symbol 8L stops at the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C at the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R at the number "3", the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "1", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "2", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "3", or the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "5", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "6", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a win occurs due to them aligning to the same symbol, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol will align to match the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

As part of the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the currently fluctuating left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R is displayed (placed) on the fluctuation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area for the first special symbol hold is provided in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the fluctuation display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (base image)) are available, each capable of displaying (placing) a hold icon 9A, allowing for a maximum of four hold icons 9A to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad overlap with the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative pattern 8C. However, since the central decorative pattern 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not obstructed by the central decorative pattern 8C. However, if other performance images appear, and the other performance images are located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will not be obstructed by the other performance images. However, if the other performance images are located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will be obstructed by the other performance images.

Since the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are located on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, they overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. However, because the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L. However, if other visual effects appear, and the other visual effects are positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the other visual effects. However, if the other visual effects are positioned in front of the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad will be obstructed by the other visual effects.

Thus, among the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Therefore, the hold display area as the first special symbol hold, consisting of the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, is positioned across the middle variable display area 8Cr and the left variable display area 8Lr.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and the reserve icon 9A is displayed at the first to fourth reserve display positions 9Ad. In other words, there are four reserve icons that have not been consumed and are currently stockpiled. The following explanation assumes that during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols, a game ball enters the first start port 20, resulting in a state where there are three or four reserve icons (i.e., a reserve count of 3 or 4), while no game ball enters the second start port 21. Furthermore, as the reserve count increases, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the variation effect (variation display) (variation time) decreases. For example, in this embodiment, when the reserve count is 3 or 4, the variation time in a no-reach miss is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, opposite the aforementioned sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), is a horizontally elongated rectangular display area HS, which displays the number of reserved balls (numbers) for the first special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 and the second special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21. The vertical dimension of the reserved ball display area HS is the same as the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal dimension of the reserved ball display area HS is the same as the horizontal dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ. In other words, the shape of the reserved ball display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are identical.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the hold count display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to other colors. Although the hold count display area HS is located in the upper left of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the left variation display area 8Lr, which is the variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the hold count display area HS is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing it from obstructing it. Furthermore, even if other animation images appear, they are positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing them from obstructing it.

The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are displayed in a different font (for example, Gothic font) than the font of the small decorative symbols, and are set to a different solid color with high contrast to the solid color background image of the reservation number display area HS, and do not change to any other color. The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the reservation number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21 is displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reservation number display area HS, and are always displayed spaced apart from each other. These numbers, displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, are less likely to be confused with the various background and decorative images displayed on screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved ball count display area HS is not obscured by other visual effects. The blue color indicating the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright blue used for the even-numbered symbols "2," "4," "6," and "8." The red color indicating the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright red used for the odd-numbered symbols (excluding "7"), such as "1," "3," "5," and "9."

To briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the different probability of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, among the four icons—a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability. Furthermore, the probability of winning is set to increase in the following order for the smiling sphere icon: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning).

In the normal game mode, as shown in Figure 62(A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) begins. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, which varies from top to bottom in the left variation display area 8Lr, temporarily stops in the center of the left variation display area 8Lr and moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction. Next, the right decorative symbol 8R, which varies from top to bottom in the right variation display area 8Rr, temporarily stops in the center of the right variation display area 8Rr and moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction. Finally, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which varies from top to bottom in the middle variation display area 8Cr, temporarily stops in the center of the middle variation display area 8Cr and moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction.

In addition, during normal gameplay, multiple background images are available, and the background image switches as needed.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 62(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all stop (confirm) in the center of their respective variable display areas, resulting in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R being aligned on the same horizontal line and stopped (confirmed). Consequently, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, in order to use up the hold icon 9A placed at the first hold display position 9Ad, when it starts moving toward the corresponding variation display position 9Cd, as shown in Figure 62(C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the corresponding variation display position 9Cd, the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, the corresponding variation icon 9C, and all the hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, a variation performance (variation display) using medium-sized decorative symbols begins in the second sub-variation area CSZ, which will be described later. After that, the background image switches from the background image for normal gameplay to the background image exclusive to A mode, and a large message image MSG, which will be described later, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This A mode is a special game mode. In A mode, a decorative symbol stop position indeterminate performance C begins, which has a different display pattern from the decorative symbol variation performance (variation display) in the normal gameplay state shown in Figures 62(A) and (B) above.

The background image exclusive to Mode A is a background image different from the background image used in the normal game mode, and is exclusively used in Mode A. Only one or multiple types of background images exclusive to Mode A may be provided.

In this embodiment, the condition for the random symbol stop position effect C to occur is, for example, when the number of times the variable effect (variable display) is performed without a win reaching 2.5 to 3 times the number of times in the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state). Furthermore, in the random symbol stop position effect C, a predetermined number of variable effects (variable display) are performed. This "predetermined number" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the number of times in the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), which in this case is 115 times.

When the decorative pattern stop position-indeterminate effect C begins, a second sub-variation area CSZ, having a horizontal rectangular shape, is provided on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. This area displays the corresponding medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern, respectively, in a variable performance (variable display). The vertical dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is approximately five times larger than that of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is approximately five times larger than that of the sub-variation area KSZ, resulting in similar shapes.

In the second sub-variation area CSZ, the size of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern displayed in the variation animation (variation display) is larger (about 5 times larger) than the size of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ, but smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. Furthermore, unlike the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern have a similar shape, being smaller versions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and are the same color. In other words, the medium-sized left decorative pattern is a smaller version of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L; the medium-sized central decorative pattern is a smaller version of the central decorative pattern 8C and has the same color as the central decorative pattern 8C; and the medium-sized right decorative pattern is a smaller version of the right decorative pattern 8R and has the same color as the right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, the background image of the second sub-variable area CSZ is fixed as colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to other colors. Since the second sub-variable area CSZ is located on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, in this embodiment, during the period when the second sub-variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, so the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, since the second sub-variable area CSZ is positioned at the very front, even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the second sub-variable area CSZ, so the second sub-variable area CSZ is not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the second sub-variable area CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other performance images.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the medium-sized decorative symbols do not exhibit a rotating reel display. Instead, at the same display position, the rotating effect (rotation display) occurs as if a coin were rotating, for example, starting from the left edge of the medium-sized decorative symbol, passing in front, and moving towards the right edge of the medium-sized decorative symbol. Furthermore, the medium-sized decorative symbols—that is, the left medium-sized decorative symbol, the middle medium-sized decorative symbol, and the right medium-sized decorative symbol—stop displaying at the same time if the rotating effect (rotation display) begins at the same time.

In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C, which performs a maximum of 115 fluctuation effects (fluctuation displays), is started, a fluctuation effect (fluctuation display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ and is performed for a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period when the fluctuation effect (fluctuation display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is performed for a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. When the fluctuation effect (fluctuation display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ and the second fluctuation effect (fluctuation display) is being performed, a message image MSG with the words "Entering A Mode" in gold color is displayed. This message image (MSG) is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment), then disappears from the display screen 7a. Afterward, the message image "A Mode" is displayed as a ticker TP1 (see, for example, Figure 61(D)) along the top edge of the display screen 7a, moving from the right edge to the left edge of the screen 7a, repeatedly during the period in which the decorative pattern stop position undetermined effect C is performed.

The text overlay TP1, which displays the message "A Mode," is the same color (gold) as the message image MSG, which displays "Entering A Mode." The area where text overlay TP1 is displayed is a band-shaped area with a predetermined distance from the top edge of the display screen 7a, and is approximately four times larger than the vertical dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). Although the area where text overlay TP1 is displayed overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, because the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS are positioned as the foremost area as described above, text overlay TP1 is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and therefore does not obstruct the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS. In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS is not obscured by text overlay TP1.

The area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed is, as described above, a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the top edge of the display screen 7a. This area overlaps with the upper area of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L; the upper area of the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C; and the upper area of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. In this embodiment, the area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed is positioned behind the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area where the teleprompter TP1 is displayed.

When the text overlay TP1 is displayed moving along the top edge of the display screen 7a from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear midway, nor does it gradually disappear by becoming particle-like. The text overlay TP1 is displayed at a constant speed, which is the speed specified for text overlay TP1.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C is performed, and the predetermined number of variation effects (variation display) using a medium-sized decorative symbol begins in the second sub-variation area CSZ, a counter image CNT displaying "Remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 62(D), just before this variation effect (variation display) ends. The counter image CNT is positioned in front of a semi-transparent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image for the counter image. The vertical dimension of this semi-transparent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image is approximately three times larger than the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), and the horizontal dimension of this semi-transparent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image is approximately six times larger than the horizontal dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS).

This translucent, horizontally elongated rectangular background image for the counter image overlaps with the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative pattern 8C. However, by positioning the counter image background image to be the closest to the viewer, the central decorative pattern 8C is positioned behind the counter image background image, preventing the counter image CNT, which is positioned in front of the counter image background image, from being obscured by the central decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, even if other performance images appear, these other performance images are positioned behind the counter image background image, preventing the counter image CNT, which is positioned in front of the counter image background image, from being obscured by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the counter image CNT, which is positioned in front of the counter image background image, is not obstructed by the central decorative pattern 8C or other performance images. Furthermore, because the background image for the counter image is semi-transparent, the areas of the background image where the counter image CNT is not placed (i.e., the areas of the background image that do not correspond to the counter image CNT) allow the central decorative symbol 8C and other visual effects (background images for the left decorative symbol 8L, central decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R) to be visible through the semi-transparent background image.

Furthermore, when the counter image CNT displaying "105 remaining" appears in the lower center of the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R reappear and stop displaying (slightly delayed from the start of the display of the counter image CNT). At this time, the character patterns 8Lb that make up the left decorative pattern 8L, 8Cb that make up the middle decorative pattern 8C, and 8Rb that make up the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed again, and only the number patterns 8La that make up the left decorative pattern 8L, 8Ca that make up the middle decorative pattern 8C, and 8Ca that make up the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again. Furthermore, the size of the number symbols 8La, 8Ca, and 8Ra that make up the reappearing left decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8C, and 8R is different from the size they were before they disappeared, that is, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L, 8C, and 8R in the game modes shown in Figures 62(A) and (B). In this case, the orientation of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may differ from the orientation shown in Figures 62(A) and (B) of the game mode. Furthermore, the positions where the numbers 8La (composing the left decorative symbol 8L), 8Ca (composing the middle decorative symbol 8C), and 8Ra (composing the right decorative symbol 8R) temporarily stop and are stopped differ from the positions where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R were temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode shown in Figures 62(A) and (B).

Specifically, in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C shown in Figure 62(D), the size of the number symbol 8La that constitutes the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and then stopped, is larger than the normal size of the number symbol 8La that constitutes the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and then stopped, in the game mode shown in Figure 62(B). Furthermore, in the game mode shown in Figure 62(B), the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and then stopped is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. In contrast, in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C shown in Figure 62(D), the position where the number symbol 8La that constitutes the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and then stopped is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, but rather on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, causing a portion of the upper part of the left decorative symbol 8L to protrude from the top edge of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, in the game mode shown in Figure 62(B), the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate). In contrast, in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C shown in Figure 62(D), the tilt of the number symbol 8La that constitutes the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the number symbol 8La are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. This results in the number symbol 8La that constitutes the left decorative symbol 8L being slightly tilted to the left. At this time, if the medium-sized left decorative symbol stops and displays the number "1" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L will also stop and display the number "1".

In the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C shown in Figure 62(D), the size of the number symbol 8Ra that constitutes the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is slightly larger than the normal size of the number symbol 8Ra that constitutes the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, in the game mode shown in Figure 62(B), but smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in the game mode shown in Figure 62(B), the temporary stop display and the stop display position of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R. In contrast, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate performance C shown in Figure 62(D), the temporary stop display and the stop display position of the number symbols 8Ra that constitute the right decorative symbol 8R are not in the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but rather on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr. As a result, a portion of the upper part of the right decorative symbol 8R protrudes from the top edge of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Although a sub-variation area KSZ is provided above the right variable display area 8Rr, the sub-variation area KSZ is positioned closest to the player, so a portion of the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "2" is covered by the sub-variation area KSZ. Furthermore, in the game mode shown in Figure 62(B), the temporarily stopped and stopped right decorative symbol 8R is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation). In contrast, in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C shown in Figure 62(D), the tilt of the number symbols 8Ra constituting the temporarily stopped and stopped right decorative symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted slightly clockwise relative to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the number symbols 8Ra constituting the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the right. At this time, if the medium-sized right decorative symbol stops and displays the number "2" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the right decorative symbol 8R will also stop and display the number "2".

In the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C shown in Figure 62(D), the size of the number symbol 8Caa that constitutes the central decorative symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is considerably larger than the normal size of the number symbol 8Caa that constitutes the central decorative symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, in the game mode shown in Figure 62(B), and is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in the game mode shown in Figure 62(B), the temporary stop and stop display position of the central decorative symbol 8C is in the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative symbol 8C, whereas in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C shown in Figure 62(D), the temporary stop and stop display position of the number symbol 8La that constitutes the central decorative symbol 8C is not in the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the central decorative symbol 8C, but rather on the lower side of the central variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, in the game mode of Figure 62(B), the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate). Similarly, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate performance C of Figure 61(D), the tilt of the number symbol 8Ca that constitutes the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the number symbol 8La that constitutes the middle decorative symbol 8C is not tilted. At this time, when the medium-sized middle decorative symbol stops and displays the number "3" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the middle decorative symbol 8C stops and displays the number "3". Although a counter image CNT is located below the central variable display area 8Cr, the counter image CNT is positioned closest to the viewer. As a result, a portion of the central decorative pattern 8C for the number "3" is obscured by the counter image CNT.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of variation performances (variation displays) using medium-sized decorative patterns are performed in the second sub-variation region CSZ. Immediately before this variation performance (variation display) ends, a counter image CNT showing "105 remaining" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and only the number patterns 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R reappear and stop. However, after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the decoration pattern stop position indeterminate performance C, the counter image CNT is displayed, and furthermore, just before the time comes for the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R to stop and display, only the number patterns 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R may reappear. When the number symbols 8La (which make up the left decorative symbol 8L), 8Ca (which makes up the middle decorative symbol 8C), and 8Ra (which makes up the right decorative symbol 8R) reappear, the second sub-variation area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbols also disappear from the display screen 7a.

From this point forward, for the sake of explanation, the "number pattern 8La that constitutes the left decorative pattern 8L" may be simply referred to as "left decorative pattern 8L," the "number pattern 8Ca that constitutes the middle decorative pattern 8C" may be simply referred to as "middle decorative pattern 8C," and the "number pattern 8Ca that constitutes the right decorative pattern 8R" may be simply referred to as "right decorative pattern 8R."

After the predetermined number of (10) fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) have finished, the predetermined number of (10) + 1 (i.e., 11th) fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) begin. When the fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) begin so that the medium-sized left decorative symbol, the medium-sized middle decorative symbol, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol rotate coins at the same time, as shown in Figure 62(E), the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative symbols also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each light up, and the fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) are performed so that the reels rotate downwards in the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "104 remaining". In other words, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all begin their variation animation (variation display) at the same time. Furthermore, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop at the same time.

In this case, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display C of the decorative symbol stop position is different from the display of the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R in the game modes shown in Figures 62(A) and (B). In the game modes shown in Figures 62(A) and (B), the variation effects (variation displays) of each decorative symbol are displayed in the order of the reels rotating in the sequence of numbers "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "7" → "8" → "9" → "1" → "2" → ..., as described above. However, in the variation effect C where the stopping position of the decorative symbol is not fixed, when the variation effect (variation display) of each stopped decorative symbol begins, each decorative symbol lights up and then moves downwards toward the bottom of the variation display area of each decorative symbol, or each decorative symbol lights up and moves downwards toward the bottom of the variation display area of each decorative symbol, and then the number immediately following each stopped decorative symbol does not appear, and a random number appears opaquely as the number immediately following each decorative symbol and is displayed as the stopping symbol. This occurs because the second sub-variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbols also disappear from the display screen 7a. This allows for a display mode where seemingly random numbers suddenly appear opaquely as the number immediately following each decorative symbol, and then stop and display.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Figure 62(D) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as stopped in Figure 62(D) appears opaque and is not displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 62(E). Instead, a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 62(E) is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Figure 62(D). Furthermore, in Figure 62(D), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "1" is on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. In contrast, when the variable display (variable display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "4" in Figure 62(E) is not on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, but on the lower side. Moreover, in Figure 62(D), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L in the temporary stop display and the stopped display is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are slightly tilted counterclockwise relative to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being slightly tilted to the left. In contrast, in Figure 62(E), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L in the temporary stop display and the stopped display is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation.

In Figure 62(D), when the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "2" begins, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 62(D) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 62(E). Instead, a random number "5" appears opaque and is displayed as the stop. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 62(E) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" that was stopped in Figure 62(D), and is also larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in Figure 62(D), the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "2" is on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "5" in Figure 62(E) is not on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, but closer to the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr. As a result, a portion of the upper and right sides of the right decorative symbol 8R protrudes from the top and right edges of the right variable display area 8Rr, respectively, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, in Figure 62(D), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the right. In contrast, in Figure 62(E), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being significantly tilted to the left.

In Figure 62(D), when the animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is displayed as stopped, begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "4" that follows the number "3" in the central decorative symbol 8C displayed as stopped in Figure 62(D) becomes opaque and is not displayed as stopped in Figure 62(E). Instead, a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 62(E) is considerably smaller than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" that is displayed as temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 62(D), and is also considerably smaller than the normal size of the number symbol. Furthermore, in Figure 62(D), the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "3" is below the central variable display area 8Cr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "1" in Figure 62(E) is not below the central variable display area 8Cr, but slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr. Moreover, in Figure 62(D), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped central decorative symbol 8C was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C were parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation. In contrast, in Figure 62(E), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped central decorative symbol 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are slightly tilted counterclockwise relative to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the central decorative symbol 8C being slightly tilted to the left.

In the second sub-variation area CSZ, when a variation performance (variation display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started for a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1 time (i.e., the 11th time), a text message image TP2 that reads "It's still going..." is displayed in multiple text display modes (in this case, three text messages TP2) moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a so that it is parallel to the top edge of the display screen 7a. The text message TP2 is white, and the probability of winning is higher for other colors (for example, blue, red, rainbow) compared to white (for example, the probability of winning is lowest for white, and increases in the order of blue, red, and then rainbow). The vertical dimension of the text message TP2 is approximately twice the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area in which the text TP2 is displayed is between the bottom edge of the area in which the text TP1 is displayed and the top edge of the background image for the counter image. It spans the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L; the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C; and the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. By positioning the text TP2 to be closest to the viewer, even when the text TP2 spans the right variable display area 8Rr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the left variable display area 8Lr, the text TP2 is positioned in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the text TP2 is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, it differs in that the aforementioned text overlay TP1 is positioned behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and is obscured by the sub-variation area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS.

Furthermore, while text overlay TP2 differs from the aforementioned text overlay TP1 in that it repeatedly moves and displays, it does not reappear from the right edge of the display screen 7a once it reaches the left edge. Multiple text overlays TP2 may be set to move at different speeds or at the same speed. Because the timing of their appearance from the right edge of the display screen 7a differs, some may reach the left edge of the display screen 7a and disappear in that particular variation, some may reach the left edge of the display screen 7a and disappear across the next variation, and some may even reach the left edge of the display screen 7a and disappear across subsequent variations (multiple variations).

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear midway, or it may gradually disappear as particles, or it may display in a way that results in missing image information (for example, the image may be divided into small blocks and not arranged in a regular, irregular manner, resulting in an unclear image), making it difficult to read. This differs from the aforementioned text overlay TP1, which, when displayed moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a along the top edge of the display screen 7a, does not suddenly disappear midway, does not gradually disappear as particles, and does not display in a way that results in missing image information.

Furthermore, the text overlay TP2 may move and be displayed at the same constant speed as text overlay TP1 (the speed used for text overlay TP1), at a faster constant speed than text overlay TP1 (the speed used for text overlay TP1), or at a slower constant speed than text overlay TP1 (the speed used for text overlay TP1). Additionally, the speed of text overlay TP2 may accelerate when moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, or decelerate when moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, or it may accelerate or decelerate when moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a. These points also differ from the text overlay TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop midway, or it may slow down before stopping. When text overlay TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may black out (a completely dark screen) as described later, and then the results may be displayed. These points also differ from the text overlay TP1 mentioned above.

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, the font may change midway through (for example, the font of all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may change, all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may become bold, all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may become regular, all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may become italic, the size of all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may change significantly, the size of all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may change significantly, or all or some of the characters in text overlay TP2 may be underlined), and the content may change to other content. These points also distinguish it from the text overlay TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the text overlay TP2 appears from the right edge of the display screen 7a, its vertical dimension is approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). However, the vertical dimension of text overlay TP2 may exceed approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) when it is displayed as a moving element, or it may be less than approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) when it is displayed as a moving element. Additionally, when the vertical dimension of text overlay TP2 exceeds approximately twice that of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) when it is displayed as a moving element, it may appear red or rainbow-colored. These points also differ from the text overlay TP1 described above.

The content of the text overlay TP2 can be multiple, and the player can select and set it by operating the performance button 63. For example, the content of text overlay TP2 could be a comment from one of several characters representing the world of the game machine, a portion of the lyrics to the music played during the variable-position decorative symbol performance C, or comments from multiple people expressing the world of the background image for the variable-position decorative symbol performance C. Of course, the player can also choose to display or hide text overlay TP2. This selection can be made by the player in a setting mode during gameplay, or in a setting mode while waiting for a customer (waiting for a player).

In the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C, the variable icon 9C and the reserve icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. Therefore, it is not possible to inform the player of the probability of a big win for that variable by changing the display pattern of the variable icon 9C, nor is it possible to suggest the probability of a win by changing the display pattern of the reserve icon 9A through a pre-read performance. For this reason, in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C, the probability of a win can be suggested by changing the display pattern of the text TP2 in various ways. Text TP1 informs the player that it is in "A mode" and does not convey any other information to the player. For this reason, text TP2, which can suggest the probability of a win to the player, is placed in front of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, while text TP1, which does not convey any information to the player other than the information that it is in "A mode," is placed behind the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Furthermore, in the variable stopping position of the decorative symbols (effect C), a background image exclusive to Mode A is displayed. Therefore, if multiple types of Mode-exclusive background images are available, the display may be configured to show the Mode-exclusive background image corresponding to the expected winning probability.

Thus, unlike TP1, TP2 offers a wide variety of visual effects, which helps to mitigate the decline in player engagement with the variable display of decorative symbols (variable symbol stop position effect C).

After the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 1st rotation (i.e., the 11th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 2nd rotation (i.e., the 12th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 62(F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will each light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "103 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect C, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol before stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" displayed as stopped in Figure 62(E) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as stopped in Figure 62(E) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 62(F). Instead, a random number "6" appears opaquely and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 62(F) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" displayed as stopped in Figure 62(E), but larger than the normal size of the number symbol. Furthermore, in Figure 62(E), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "4" is below the left variable display area 8Lr. In contrast, after the variable display (variable display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "6" in Figure 62(F) is not below the left variable display area 8Lr, but in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. Moreover, in Figure 62(E), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped left decorative symbol 8L was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L were parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation. In contrast, in Figure 62(F), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped left decorative symbol 8L is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are significantly tilted counterclockwise relative to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being significantly tilted to the left.

In Figure 62(E), when the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "5" begins, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 62(E) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 62(F). Instead, a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 62(F) is considerably smaller than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" that was stopped in Figure 62(E), and is slightly smaller than the normal size of the number symbol. Furthermore, in Figure 62(E), the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "5" is towards the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas in Figure 62(F), after the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "8" is not towards the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Moreover, in Figure 62(E), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped right decorative symbol 8R was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R were tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being tilted significantly to the left, whereas in Figure 62(F), the tilt of the temporarily stopped and stopped right decorative symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation.

In Figure 62(E), when the animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is displayed as stopped, begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" in the central decorative symbol 8C displayed as stopped in Figure 62(E) becomes opaque and is not displayed as stopped in Figure 62(F). Instead, a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 62(F) is considerably larger than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" displayed as temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped in Figure 62(E), and is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in Figure 62(E), the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "1" is slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "8" in Figure 62(F) is not slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, but rather to the upper right of the central variable display area 8Cr. As a result, a portion of the upper part of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "8" protrudes from the top edge of the central variable display area 8Cr, making it difficult to see, and the right side of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "8" jumps over the right edge of the central variable display area 8Cr and crosses over the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R for the number "8" overlap. In other words, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" is displayed (the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves toward the lower side of the right display area 8Rr (direction of movement)). Here, because the size of the central decorative symbol 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R, the larger central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is positioned in front of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8", resulting in a display configuration where the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" covers a portion of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8". Furthermore, in Figure 62(E), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, when it is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the central decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the left. In contrast, in Figure 62(F), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, when it is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the central decorative symbol 8C being slightly tilted to the right.

After the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 2nd rotation (i.e., the 12th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 3rd rotation (i.e., the 13th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 62(G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will each light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "102 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect C, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol before stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" displayed as stopped in Figure 62(F) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "7" following the number "6" of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as stopped in Figure 62(F) appears opaque and is not displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 62(G). Instead, a random number "1" appears opaquely and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 62(G) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" displayed as stopped in Figure 61(F), but is larger than the normal size of the number symbol. Furthermore, in Figure 62(F), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "6" is in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "1" in Figure 62(G) is not in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but rather in the upper left of the left variable display area 8Lr. As a result, a portion of the upper part of the left decorative symbol 8L protrudes from the top edge of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided in the upper left of the left variable display area 8Lr, the left variable display area 8Lr is positioned closest to the viewer, so a portion of the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "1" is covered by the reserved number display area HS. Furthermore, in Figure 62(F), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being tilted significantly to the left. In contrast, in Figure 62(G), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being tilted significantly to the right.

In Figure 62(F), when the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "8" starts to change, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 62(F) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 62(G). Instead, a random number "2" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 62(G) is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "8" in Figure 62(F), and is slightly larger than the normal size of the number symbol. Furthermore, in Figure 62(F), the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "8" is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "2" in Figure 62(G) is not slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but rather to the lower right of the right variable display area 8Rr. As a result, a portion of the lower part of the right decorative symbol 8R protrudes from the bottom edge of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, in Figure 62(F), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation. In contrast, in Figure 62(G), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the left.

In Figure 62(F), when the animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is displayed as stopped, begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "9" following the number "8" in the central decorative symbol 8C, which was displayed as stopped in Figure 62(F), appears opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 62(G). Instead, a random number "7" appears opaque and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, in Figure 62(G), the size of the temporarily stopped and stopped central decorative symbol 8C is slightly larger than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 62(F), and is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in Figure 62(F), the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "8" is on the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas when the variable effect (variable display) starts, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "7" in Figure 62(G) is not on the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, but rather on the central right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, and the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "7" jumps over the central variable display area 8Cr and crosses over the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, in Figure 62(F), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the right. In contrast, in Figure 62(G), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being significantly tilted to the right.

When the predetermined number of variations (10 times) + the 3rd variation (i.e., the 13th variation) begins, a text overlay TP2, which is a message image saying "Here we go...", moves from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, parallel to the top edge of the display screen 7a, in the style of a text overlay. Text overlay TP2 is white.

After the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 3rd rotation (i.e., the 13th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has finished, and the predetermined number of rotations (10 rotations) + 4th rotation (i.e., the 14th rotation) of the variation animation (variation display) has started, as shown in Figure 62(H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will each light up, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr will rotate downwards in the variation animation (variation display), and the counter image CNT will be updated and displayed as "101 remaining".

In this instance, during the variable symbol stop position effect C, the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R will, as described above, display random numbers appearing opaquely as the next number after each symbol before stopping. If the variable effects (variation display) of the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R begin at the same time, they will stop at the same time.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Figure 62(G) begins, the left decorative symbol 8L lights up, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as stopped in Figure 62(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 62(H). Instead, a random number "9" appears opaque and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 62(H) is considerably smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Figure 62(G), and is also smaller than the normal size of the number symbols. Furthermore, in Figure 62(G), the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "1" is on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas when the variable effect (variable display) starts, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L for the stopped number "9" in Figure 62(H) is not on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, but on the lower right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, in Figure 62(G), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which was displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L were tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the left decorative symbol 8L being tilted significantly to the right. In contrast, in Figure 62(H), the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, which was displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped, was such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the left decorative symbol 8L were tilted even more significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, meaning the left decorative symbol 8L was tilted even more significantly to the right than in Figure 62(G).

In Figure 62(G), when the right decorative symbol 8R of the stopped number "2" starts to fluctuate, the right decorative symbol 8R lights up, and the number "3" following the number "2" on the right decorative symbol 8R that was stopped in Figure 62(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in Figure 62(H). Instead, a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 62(H) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" that was stopped in Figure 62(G), and is also considerably larger than the normal size of the number symbols. Furthermore, in Figure 62(G), the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "2" is on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr. In contrast, when the variable effect (variable display) begins, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R for the stopped number "4" in Figure 62(H) is not on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, but rather on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr. The right decorative symbol 8R for the number "4" jumps over the right variable display area 8Rr and crosses over the middle variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, in Figure 61(G), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being slightly tilted to the left. In contrast, in Figure 61(H), the tilt of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being significantly tilted to the left.

In Figure 62(G), when the animation (variation display) of the central decorative symbol 8C of the stopped number "7" begins, the central decorative symbol 8C lights up, and the number "8" following the number "7" of the central decorative symbol 8C that was stopped in Figure 62(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative symbol 8C in Figure 62(H). Instead, a random number "3" appears opaque and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Furthermore, in Figure 62(H), the size of the temporarily stopped and stopped central decorative symbol 8C is smaller than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" that was temporarily stopped and stopped in Figure 62(G), but it is larger than the normal size of the number symbol and larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Furthermore, in Figure 62(G), the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "7" is to the right of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas when the variable effect (variable display) starts, the position of the central decorative symbol 8C for the stopped number "3" in Figure 62(H) is not to the right of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, but to the upper right of the central variable display area 8Cr. As a result, a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C for the number "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R for the number "4" overlap. In other words, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is displayed (the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr (direction of movement)). Here, because the size of the right decorative symbol 8R is larger than the size of the central decorative symbol 8C, the larger right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is positioned in front of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3", resulting in a display configuration where the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" covers a portion of the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "3". Furthermore, in Figure 62(G), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction of reel rotation, resulting in the right decorative symbol 8R being tilted significantly to the right. In contrast, in Figure 62(H), the tilt of the central decorative symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and stopped, is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower edges of the central decorative symbol 8C are parallel to the vertical direction of reel rotation.

When the predetermined number of variations (10 times) + 54th time (i.e., 64th time) of the variation animation (variation display) begins, a message image, text TP2, reading "Coming Soon...", will be displayed in multiple text display patterns (in this case, six text TP2s) moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, parallel to the top edge of the display screen 7a. The text TP2s are rainbow-colored, suggesting a high probability of winning.

As the variable display animation progresses, and the predetermined number of animations (10) + 54th animation (i.e., 64th animation) is completed, and then the predetermined number of animations (10) + 55th animation (i.e., 65th animation) begins, as shown in Figure 62(I), the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes completely black), and a bright white beam of light converges toward the center of the display screen 7a before disappearing, resembling the power being turned off on an analog television's cathode ray tube. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-variable area KSZ remain displayed. In other words, the variable display animation using the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol continues in the sub-variable area KSZ.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 62(J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R appear as the number "7" in the center of their respective left variable display areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr, respectively. They then temporarily stop on the same horizontal line and are displayed as a confirmed win, thus initiating the winning game. When a win is announced, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as a confirmed win. Simultaneously, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also stop and display the number "7," which is the same number (number symbol) as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Subsequently, once the winning game ends, Mode A is forcibly terminated, and the variable symbol stop position effect C has also ended. To return to the normal game mode, as shown in Figures 62(A) and (B), a variation effect (variation display) will occur using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

In addition, in the decorative symbol stop position in effect C, Figures 62(C) to 62(H) show the effect when there is a "no reach, miss." However, in the case of a "reach, miss," the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R do not stop temporarily aligned on the same horizontal line, the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a completely black screen), and a bright white beam of light converges toward the center of the display screen 7a and then disappears, resembling the power being turned off on an analog television's cathode ray tube. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. In other words, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol continues in the sub-variation area KSZ. This state is maintained until the time comes to announce the win or loss result (miss). Then, when the result of winning or losing (losing) is announced, as shown in Figures 62(C) to 62(H), the variation effects (variation displays) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will, as described above, appear opaquely as the number immediately following each decorative symbol and stop at the same time.

In the decorative symbol stopping position-unpredictable effect C, the longer the display screen 7a remains blacked out (the period during which the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation of winning. Therefore, even though the display screen 7a is a monotonous blacked-out screen, it can heighten and excite the player's anticipation.

Thus, in the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance C, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time they are confirmed to stop. In this case, when one of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R overlaps with another decorative pattern, for example, in the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R overlap in Figure 62(F), the larger middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, resulting in a display configuration where the larger middle decorative pattern 8C covers a portion of the right decorative pattern 8R. In contrast, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R overlap in Figure 62(H), the larger right decorative pattern 8R is positioned in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a display configuration where the larger right decorative pattern 8R covers a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Therefore, in the variable symbol stop position effect C, the stop positions of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R change randomly (irregularly) each time they stop. Furthermore, the relative positions (front-to-back relationship) between, for example, the middle symbol 8C and the right symbol 8R also change randomly (irregularly) so that the larger symbol is closer to the player. This increases the variety of the variable effects (variable displays) for the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R. This helps to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play the variable symbol stop position effect C.

Furthermore, in the variable symbol stop position effect C, the sizes of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time they stop. Therefore, the variable symbol stop position effect C offers a rich variety of variations in the variable effects (variable displays) of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R, further contributing to suppressing the decline in player interest in the variable symbol stop position effect C.

Furthermore, in the variable symbol stop position effect C, the tilt of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R can also change randomly (irregularly) with each confirmed stop of these symbols. Therefore, the variable symbol stop position effect C offers even more variations in the variation effects (variation displays) of the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R, further contributing to suppressing the decline in player interest in the variable symbol stop position effect C.

[Example of effect]
The following shows an example of the effect of the display where the stopping position of the decorative symbols is unpredictable.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position random performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position random performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position random performance C in Figure 62, an image display device 7 (display means) is provided that can perform (display) a variable performance of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (multiple symbols), and a first performance (in Figures 60(C) to (J) in decorative symbol stop position random performance A, Figures 61(C) to (J) in decorative symbol stop position random performance B, and Figures 62(C) to (H) in decorative symbol stop position random performance C) can be performed in which the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (each symbol) change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are confirmed to stop (confirmed stop of symbols). With this configuration, in the first performance, the stopping positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time they are confirmed to stop. This helps to eliminate monotony in the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Therefore, the entertainment value can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effects in the decorative symbol stop position random effect B in Figure 61 and the decorative symbol stop position random effect C in Figure 62 (Figures 61(D) to (J) in the decorative symbol stop position random effect B, and Figures 62(D) to (H) in the decorative symbol stop position random effect C) include an effect in which the size of each symbol changes randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbols) are confirmed to stop. With this configuration, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R that stopped in the previous round change randomly (irregularly), and the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R that stopped in the current round change randomly (irregularly). By displaying the decorative symbols (symbols) in a way that emphasizes and makes them stand out when they are displayed large, it is possible to give players the feeling that the history of the decorative symbols (symbols) that have been displayed large so far might be some kind of hint about the upcoming performance, and contribute to them being able to come up with their own ideas about the rules of the performance.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effects in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in Figure 61 and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in Figure 62 (Figures 61(D) to (J) in decorative symbol stop position in effect B, and Figures 62(D) to (H) in decorative symbol stop position in effect C) include effects in which the tilt of each symbol changes irregularly each time the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbols) are confirmed to stop. With this configuration, the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R that stopped in the previous round, and the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R that stopped in the current round, change randomly (irregularly). For example, the history of the tilt of the left decorative symbol 8L (symbol) can give the player a feeling that it might be some kind of hint about the upcoming performance, and can help them to come up with the rules of the performance themselves.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first performance in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance C in Figure 62 (in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance A, Figures 60(F), (H) to (J); in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance B, Figures 61(F), (H) to (J); and in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance C, Figures 62(F), (H)) includes a performance in which one symbol is displayed overlapping with another symbol when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbols) are confirmed to stop. With this configuration, for example, the central decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a way that they overlap, so there is no concept of making the displayed symbols easier to see, as in conventional designs. This allows for a novel and unprecedented display of the decorative symbols (symbols) in confirmation, and even if the decorative symbols (symbols) are repeatedly displayed in a variation animation (variation display) and the confirmation display (win/loss result) is consistently a loss, it helps to prevent players from feeling monotonous.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first performance in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance C in Figure 62 (in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance A, Figures 60(F), (H) to (J); in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance B, Figures 61(F), (H) to (J); and in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance C, Figures 62(F), (H)) includes a performance in which one symbol is displayed in the direction of movement of the other symbol when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbols) are confirmed to stop. Specifically, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance A in Figure 60(F), the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance B in Figure 61(F), and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance C in Figure 62(F), the middle decorative symbol 8C (one symbol) is displayed in the direction of movement of the right decorative symbol 8R (the other symbol) (the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr). With this configuration, a display pattern can be achieved in which a part of one symbol and a part of another symbol overlap in the vertical direction. Furthermore, it is possible to arrange the symbols so that one symbol and another symbol do not lie on the same horizontal line.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effects in the decorative symbol stop position random effect A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position random effect B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position random effect C in Figure 62 (in the decorative symbol stop position random effect A, Figures 60(D), (E), (G), (I); in the decorative symbol stop position random effect B, Figures 61(D), (E), (G), (I); and in the decorative symbol stop position random effect C, Figures 62(D), (E), (G)) include effects in which the display pattern of the same symbol changes with each variation. Specifically, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position random effect A in Figures 60(D), (E), (G), (I), the display pattern is such that the position of the number "1", which is the same symbol, changes randomly (irregularly). With this configuration, even when the variable display is performed repeatedly and the same symbol frequently stops in a fixed position, the position of the same symbol that stops in a fixed position changes randomly (irregularly), thus contributing to reducing the monotony of the performance caused by the same symbol that stops in a fixed position. Furthermore, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance B shown in Figures 61(D), (E), (G), (I), and the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance C shown in Figures 62(D), (E), (G), the position, size, and tilt of the number "1", which is the same symbol, change randomly (irregularly). With this configuration, even when the variable display is performed repeatedly and the same symbol frequently stops in a fixed position, the position, size, and tilt of the same symbol that stops in a fixed position change randomly (irregularly), thus contributing to reducing the monotony of the performance caused by the same symbol that stops in a fixed position.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C in Figure 62, the image display device 7 (display means) can display message images MSG, teleprompter TP1, and teleprompter TP2 (multiple types of images) in addition to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (multiple symbols), and the first performance (in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance A, see Figures 60(C) to (J), the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance) In the B version, Figures 61(C) to (J), and in the C version, Figures 62(C) to (H), which show the variable stopping position of the decorative symbols, the effects include displaying a teletext TP2 (first image) in front of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbols) while they are changing and when they are confirmed to stop (while the symbols are changing and when the symbols are confirmed to stop), and displaying a teletext TP1 (second image) in behind the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbols). This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize that the teletext TP2 (first image) is being displayed, and makes the suggestion from the teletext TP2 (first image) easier for the player to understand and emphasize.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance of the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance C in Figure 62 (Figures 60(D) to (J) for decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance A, Figures 61(D) to (J) for decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance B, and Figures 62(D) to (H) for decorative symbol stop position in definite performance C), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (multiple symbols) are temporarily stopped at the same timing before being fixed in place. With this configuration, each time the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R perform a variation animation (variation display), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R can temporarily stop simultaneously and then stop in a final position. Therefore, when the variation animation (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is performed and the final display is shown, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R Although they are images, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R can be given a sense of weight to the player. This sense of weight gives the player a "boom" impact when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped, and by repeatedly performing the rhythmic variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, it is possible to reduce monotony.

[Variations]
The following shows a variation of the display where the stopping position of the decorative pattern is not fixed.
[Variation 1]
In the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance C in Figure 62, the performance was based on the game ball entering the first start opening 20. In other words, it was performed in the so-called left-handed playing state. However, it may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second start opening 21. In other words, it may also be performed in the so-called right-handed playing state.

[Modified example 2]
In the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent effect C in Figure 62, these effects occurred when transitioning from the normal game mode to the special game mode (A mode) in the normal game state. However, the special game mode (A mode) may be performed not in the normal game state, but when transitioning from the normal game state to the aforementioned time reduction (playtime) described above.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C in Figure 62, one of the decorative symbols among the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R spanned across the variable display area corresponding to the other decorative symbol. However, this other decorative symbol may also span across the variable display area corresponding to the other decorative symbol. Specifically, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance A in Figure 60(F), the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance B in Figure 61(F), and the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C in Figure 62(F), the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" jumps over the right edge of the middle variable display area 8Cr and crosses over the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" may also be made to jump over the left edge of the right variable display area 8Rr and cross over the middle variable display area 8Cr. This can contribute to increasing the variations in the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Furthermore, the central decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" is displayed (the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr (direction of movement)).

[Modification 4]
In the undetermined stopping position of decorative symbols in Figure 60 (A), Figure 61 (B), and Figure 62 (C), the number immediately following each decorative symbol that was previously displayed was not shown, and random numbers appeared and stopped in an opaque manner as the number immediately following each decorative symbol. However, because it is random, the decorative symbol that is displayed this time may happen to be the same as the one that was displayed last time, or the decorative symbol that is displayed this time may happen to be the one that is immediately following the one that was displayed last time.

[Modified example 5]
In the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance C in Figure 62, the special game mode A mode is initiated as a trigger, meaning it starts suddenly. Therefore, it may be possible to perform an effect that suggests that the start time of A mode is approaching. For example, the number of remaining variation performances (variation displays) that will mark the start time of A mode may be displayed as a number in the upper center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the remaining number of fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) to trigger the start of A mode reaches 100, a white message image saying "100 more" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and then hidden. When the remaining number of fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) to trigger the start of A mode reaches 50, a blue message image saying "50 more" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and then hidden. When the remaining number of fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) to trigger the start of A mode reaches 25, a yellow message image saying "25 more" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and then hidden. When the remaining number of fluctuation animations (fluctuation displays) to trigger the start of A mode reaches 10, a red message image saying "10 more" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the red message image continues to be displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a with each fluctuation countdown until A mode is started. Then, a red message image saying "Remaining 0 (zero)" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and just before a message image MSG saying "Entering A Mode" in yellow (gold) is displayed, the red message image saying "Remaining 0 (zero)" is hidden. The color of the message image indicating the number of remaining variation effects (variation display) that will mark the start of A Mode changes in the order of white → blue → yellow → red as the start of A Mode approaches, thus building anticipation among players for A Mode.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance B in Figure 61 and the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance C in Figure 62, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are confirmed to stop. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, as well as the inclination of the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, also change randomly (irregularly). However, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, as well as the size of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, may also be changed randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are confirmed to stop. This helps to eliminate monotony in the variation effects (variation displays) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

[Variation 7]
In the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance B in Figure 61 and the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance C in Figure 62, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R change randomly (irregularly) each time they stop, and furthermore, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, and the inclination of the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R also change randomly (irregularly). However, it is also possible to make the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, and the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R change randomly (irregularly) each time they stop. This helps to eliminate monotony in the variation effects (variation displays) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

[Variation 8]
In the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance A (Figure 60), the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance B (Figure 61), and the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C (Figure 62), it is not possible to indicate the probability of a jackpot by changing the display pattern of the hold icon 9A through a pre-read performance. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot can be indicated by changing the display pattern of the text TP2 in various ways. For example, the hold icon 9A had a higher probability of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of a jackpot)). Therefore, the pre-read performance may be used to set the probability of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of a jackpot)) as the color of the text TP2.

[Modified example 9]
In the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position inconsistent performance C in Figure 62, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with three vertically elongated rectangular areas (i.e., areas that divide the display screen 7a into three equal columns) as variable display areas (variable display areas for decorative symbols) for the three decorative symbols. The decorative symbol variation performance (variable display) starts with the left decorative symbol 8L in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr to the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, the decorative symbol variation performance (variable display) starts with the middle decorative symbol 8C in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side of the middle variable display area 8Crr to the lower side of the middle variable display area 8Crr, and the decorative symbol variation performance (variable display) starts with the right decorative symbol 8R in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr to the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. However, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be provided with three horizontally elongated rectangular areas (that is, areas that divide the display screen 7a into three equal rows) as variable display areas for the three decorative patterns (variable areas for the decorative patterns).

In this case, the left decorative symbol 8L acts as the upper decorative symbol, and the reel rotates from the right side of the upper variable display area to the left side of the upper variable display area as the display mode begins, and after a temporary stop in the center of the upper variable display area, it is displayed as stopped. The middle decorative symbol 8C acts as the middle decorative symbol, and the reel rotates from the right side of the middle variable display area to the left side of the middle variable display area as the display mode begins, and after a temporary stop in the center of the middle variable display area, it is displayed as stopped. The right decorative symbol 8R acts as the lower decorative symbol, and the reel rotates from the right side of the lower variable display area to the left side of the lower variable display area as the display mode begins, and after a temporary stop in the center of the lower variable display area, it is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, for example, the upper decorative symbols may partially extend from the upper variable display area into the middle variable display area and remain stopped across both areas; the middle decorative symbols may partially extend from the middle variable display area into the upper variable display area and remain stopped across both areas; or they may extend from the middle variable display area into the lower variable display area and remain stopped across both areas; and the lower decorative symbols may partially extend from the lower variable display area into the middle variable display area and remain stopped across both areas. Of course, the upper decorative symbols may partially extend from the right, top, or left edges of the upper variable display area, making them difficult to see; the middle decorative symbols may partially extend from the right or left edges of the middle variable display area, making them difficult to see; and the lower decorative symbols may partially extend from the right, bottom, or left edges of the lower variable display area, making them difficult to see.

[Modified example 10]
In the first performance of the decorative symbol stop position random performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position random performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position random performance C in Figure 62, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are confirmed to stop. At this time, various effect sounds (various sound effects) and performance sounds may suddenly become muted, and the first performance may proceed across multiple variations. In this way, an unnatural effect can be created by the muted state, and the longer this state continues (the longer it lasts), the higher the expectation of a win can be discovered by the player themselves, which can help reduce the monotony of the variation performance (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

[Variation 11]
In the first performance of the decorative symbol stop position random performance A in Figure 60, the decorative symbol stop position random performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative symbol stop position random performance C in Figure 62, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are confirmed to stop. However, it is also possible to have a performance in which two of the decorative symbols 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, and the remaining decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed on this same horizontal line, or such a performance may be included. For example, if the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the right decorative symbol 8R will not be stopped and displayed on this same horizontal line. If the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side-by-side on the same horizontal line, the middle decorative symbol 8C will not be displayed side-by-side on the same horizontal line. If the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side-by-side on the same horizontal line, the left decorative symbol 8L will not be displayed side-by-side on the same horizontal line. If two of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed side-by-side on the same horizontal line, they may be placed on the left, center, or right side of each variation display area on the same horizontal line, as long as the two decorative symbols are displayed side-by-side on the same horizontal line. For example, if the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed side-by-side on the upper side of the display screen 7a on the same horizontal line, the left decorative symbol 8L will be placed on the upper right side of the left variation display area 8Lr and displayed side-by-side, and the middle decorative symbol 8C will be placed on the upper left side of the middle variation display area 8Cr and displayed side-by-side.

[Modified example 12]
In the first performance of the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance B in Figure 61 and the decorative symbol stop position irregular performance C in Figure 62, the tilt of each symbol can change irregularly with each confirmed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbol). However, it is also possible to have a performance in which two of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R stop and display with the same tilt, and the remaining decorative symbol stops and displays with a tilt different from this same tilt, or to include such a performance. For example, in the case of completely different rotation directions, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are rotated slightly counterclockwise and tilted at an angle, so the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C stop and display with a tilt slightly to the left, and the right decorative symbol 8R stops and displays with a tilt slightly to the right, rotated slightly clockwise and tilted at an angle different from this same tilt. For example, if the rotation direction is the same but the tilt is different, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R will rotate significantly clockwise and tilt at an angle, so the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R will stop and be displayed tilted significantly to the right, and the middle decorative symbol 8C will be displayed tilted slightly to the right, with an angle tilted by rotating slightly clockwise, as an example of a different tilt from this same tilt.

[Modification 13]
In the decorative pattern stop position inconsistent performance A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stop position inconsistent performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stop position inconsistent performance C in Figure 62, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (stopped) when they jump over their own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and span across to other variable display areas, and when they overlap in the front-to-back direction with a part of a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stopped) in another variable display area, their positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) changes randomly (irregularly). However, when one of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, or right decorative symbol 8R jumps over its own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and spans across to another variable display area, the decorative symbol that is being temporarily stopped (stopped) across its own variable display area and another variable display area may be positioned in front of the decorative symbol that is being temporarily stopped (stopped) in the other variable display area. In other words, when one of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, or right decorative pattern 8R jumps over its own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and spans across to another variable display area, the decorative pattern that is being temporarily stopped (stopped) across its own variable display area and another variable display area may be displayed in such a way that it covers a portion of the decorative pattern that is being temporarily stopped (stopped) in the other variable display area.

[Modification 14]
In the decorative pattern stop position inconsistent performance B shown in Figure 61 and the decorative pattern stop position inconsistent performance C shown in Figure 62, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (stopped) when they jump over their own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and span across to other variable display areas, and when they overlap in the front-to-back direction with a part of a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stopped) in another variable display area, the display configuration is such that the decorative pattern with the larger size is positioned in front of the other decorative pattern in relation to its position (front-to-back relationship). However, when one of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, or right decorative pattern 8R jumps over its own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and spans across to another variable display area, the display method may be to compare the size of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stopped) across its own variable display area and the other variable display area with the size of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stopped) in the other variable display area, and position the smaller decorative pattern forward. In other words, when one of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, or right decorative pattern 8R jumps over its own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and spans across to another variable display area, and the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stopped) while spanning across its own variable display area and another variable display area overlaps with the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stopped) in the other variable display area, the smaller decorative pattern may be positioned in front of the larger decorative pattern, covering a portion of the larger decorative pattern.

[Modified example 15]
In the decorative pattern stopping position inconsistent effect A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stopping position inconsistent effect B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stopping position inconsistent effect C in Figure 62, some of the effects described may not be included, or other effects may be added.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
◇[Pattern A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple patterns in a variable manner,
A first effect can be implemented in which the stopping position of each symbol changes irregularly each time a symbol is confirmed to stop.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine described in A4-1,
The first effect described above includes an effect in which the size of each symbol changes irregularly each time a symbol is confirmed to stop.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect A4-3]
A gaming machine as described in Actual A4-1 or Actual A4-2,
The first effect described above includes an effect in which the tilt of each symbol changes irregularly each time a symbol is confirmed to stop.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Pattern A4-4]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A4-1 to A4-3,
The first effect described above includes an effect in which one symbol is displayed overlapping with another symbol when the symbols are confirmed to stop.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect A4-5]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A4-1 to A4-4,
The first performance includes a performance in which one symbol is displayed in the direction of movement of the other symbol when the symbols are confirmed to stop.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect A4-6]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A4-1 to A4-5,
The first performance includes a performance in which the same symbol changes its display pattern with each variation,
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect A4-7]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A4-1 to A4-6,
The display means is capable of displaying multiple types of images in addition to the multiple patterns,
The first performance includes a performance in which a first image is moved and displayed in front of the symbols while the symbols are changing and when the symbols are fixed and stopped, and a second image is moved and displayed behind the symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Pattern A4-8]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A4-1 to A4-7,
The first performance involves temporarily stopping the multiple symbols at the same time and then stopping them permanently.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The sudden stop and confirmation of decorative symbols A to C are described below using Figures 63 to 65. These sudden stop and confirmation of decorative symbols are executed during the variation of decorative symbols. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90. If the command includes an instruction to execute the sudden stop and confirmation of decorative symbols, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). It also reads the corresponding drive data from the ROM 103 and drives the first movable mechanism 14.

[Decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect A]
Figure 63 is a diagram illustrating the sudden confirmed stop animation A of decorative symbols. The sudden confirmed stop animation of decorative symbols is an animation in which a set of decorative symbols are displayed in a winning state (confirmed stop) without being displayed in a reach state. In the sudden confirmed stop animation A of decorative symbols, first, as shown in Figure 63(A), the displayed screen 7a shows the stopped (confirmed stop) decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. The variation display of this set of symbols represents the variation display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of this set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the special symbols may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped at "234". Here, it is assumed that the game state is a normal state (low probability, low base state), the special symbol 1 reserve consumption has started, and the special symbol 1 variation will now be executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that the result of this special symbol 1 lottery is a jackpot, and the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has been selected.

As shown in Figure 63(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in accordance with the current special symbol variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left, center, and right symbols move from top to bottom. In this case, the symbols are moving at high speed, making them difficult to see. Note that the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be any desired variation mode. For example, the left, center, and right symbols may each rotate horizontally around the vertical axis of rotation.

As shown in Figures 63(C) and 63(D), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, an effect is executed in which a different set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r enter the frame while decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are still being displayed in a changing state. Decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are the same shape and size as decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, with the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r moving towards decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R from different directions. The left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r are the same, and in this case, they are "7". The shape and size of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are the same as those of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but they may be different.

The left decorative symbol 8l enters the frame from the left edge of the display screen 7a toward the right, overlapping with the variable left decorative symbol 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative symbol 8c enters the frame from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a toward the top, overlapping with the variable middle decorative symbol 8C, and is displayed on the front side of the middle decorative symbol 8C. The right decorative symbol 8r enters the frame from the right edge of the display screen 7a toward the left, overlapping with the variable right decorative symbol 8R, and is displayed on the front side of the right decorative symbol 8R.

As shown in Figure 63(E), almost simultaneously with the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r stopping in a horizontal line, the display of the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears. This results in the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stopping at "777" (confirmed stop), after which the jackpot animation is executed. In this way, in the sudden confirmed stop animation A of the decorative symbols, after the special symbol fluctuation begins, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner before being displayed in a reach-type manner. Instead, the set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stop in a jackpot-type manner, thus surprising the player and enhancing the excitement.

Figures 63(F) to 63(J) show other examples of the sudden confirmation and stop effect A of the decorative symbols, as explained in Figures 63(A) to 63(E). In Figures 63(F) to 63(J), while the stop indicators for decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, an effect is executed in which decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, different from those 8L, 8C, and 8R, enter the frame.

Figure 63(F) shows the same state as Figure 63(A). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped (confirmed stop) at "234", are displayed on the display screen 7a.

In Figure 63(G), even though the special symbol variation has started due to the consumption of the special symbol 1 reserve, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R remain stopped without corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation in question). In other words, the display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which was stopped in response to the previous special symbol variation, remains maintained throughout the current variation.

As shown in Figure 63(H)(I), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the current special symbol variation (the variation in question), while the stop indicators for decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, an effect is executed in which a set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, different from decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, enter the frame. Decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are the same shape and size as decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, with the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r moving towards decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R from different directions. The left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r are the same, and in this case, they are "7". The shape and size of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are the same as those of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, but they may be different.

The left decorative symbol 8l enters the frame from the left edge of the display screen 7a toward the right, overlapping with the variable left decorative symbol 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative symbol 8c enters the frame from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a toward the top, overlapping with the variable middle decorative symbol 8C, and is displayed on the front side of the middle decorative symbol 8C. The right decorative symbol 8r enters the frame from the right edge of the display screen 7a toward the left, overlapping with the variable right decorative symbol 8R, and is displayed on the front side of the right decorative symbol 8R.

As shown in Figure 63(J), almost simultaneously with the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r stopping in a horizontal line, the displays of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were previously displayed as "234," disappear. This results in decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stopping at "777" (confirmed stop), after which the jackpot animation is executed. In this way, in the sudden confirmed stop animation A of decorative symbols, after the start of the special symbol variation, the displays of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed after the previous special symbol variation are maintained. Then, without being displayed in a reach-type configuration, the set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stop in a jackpot-type configuration, thus surprising the player and enhancing the excitement.

[Decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect B]
Figure 64 is a diagram illustrating the sudden confirmed stop effect B of the decorative symbols. The sudden confirmed stop effect of the decorative symbols is an effect in which a set of decorative symbols stops (confirms) in a winning state without being displayed in a reach state. The main difference between the sudden confirmed stop effect of the decorative symbols B and the sudden confirmed stop effect of the decorative symbols A is that multiple sets of decorative symbols are not displayed, and the effect consists only of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the sudden confirmed stop effect of the decorative symbols B, first, as shown in Figure 64(A), the stopped (confirmed) decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. The variation display of this set of symbols represents the variation display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stopping display of this set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the special symbols may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped at "234". Here, it is assumed that the game state is a normal state (low probability, low base state), the special symbol 1 reserve consumption has started, and the special symbol 1 variation will now be executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that the result of this special symbol 1 lottery is a jackpot, and the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has been selected.

When the special symbol 1 reserve is consumed and the special symbol variation begins, in the sudden confirmation stop effect B of the decorative symbols, as shown in Figure 64(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear instead of being displayed in accordance with the current special symbol variation (the variation in question).

As shown in Figure 64(C), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the current special symbol variation (the variation in question), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, and a text image displaying "Big Win" is shown, immediately indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 64(D), an animation is performed in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R enter the frame. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move towards the center of the display screen 7a from different directions: the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R. The left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R are the same symbol, which in this case is "7".

The left decorative symbol 8L enters the frame from the left edge of the display screen 7a, moving towards the center of the display screen 7a, and stops approximately to the left of the center of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative symbol 8C enters the frame from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, moving towards the center of the display screen 7a, and stops approximately to the right of the center of the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R enters the frame from the right edge of the display screen 7a, moving towards the center of the display screen 7a, and stops approximately to the right of the center of the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figure 64(E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in a horizontal line. This results in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopping to display "777" (confirmed stop), after which the jackpot animation is executed. In this way, the sudden confirmed stop animation B of the decorative symbols surprises the player and enhances the excitement, as the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the jackpot configuration without displaying their variation or reach patterns after the special symbol variation begins.

Figures 64(F) to 64(J) show other examples of the sudden confirmation and stop animation B of the decorative symbols, as explained in Figures 64(A) to 64(E). In Figures 64(F) to 64(J), the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move independently and fade out from the display screen 7a, after which the animation announcing a jackpot is performed.

Figure 64(F) shows the same state as Figure 64(A). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped (confirmed) at "234", are displayed on the display screen 7a.

In Figure 64(G), despite the special symbol variation starting due to the consumption of the special symbol 1 hold, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R remain stopped, not corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation in question). Subsequently, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move in different directions and fade out of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L exits the frame towards the lower left of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative symbol 8C exits the frame towards the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R exits the frame towards the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Figure 64(H) shows the same state as Figure 64(C). That is, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the current special symbol variation (the variation in question), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have faded out and disappeared, the text image displaying "Big Win" is shown, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suddenly announced as a big win.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 64(I), an animation is performed in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R enter the frame. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R aligned. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol, and in this case, they represent "7".

As shown in Figure 64(J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned horizontally and stop near the center of the display screen 7a. This results in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopping in a "777" display (confirmed stop), after which the jackpot animation is executed. In this way, the sudden confirmed stop animation B of the decorative symbols surprises the player and enhances the excitement, as the display of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and their reach patterns, are not shown after the special symbol variation begins, but instead stop in a jackpot pattern.

[Decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect C]
Figure 65 is a diagram illustrating the sudden confirmed stop effect C of the decorative symbols. The sudden confirmed stop effect of the decorative symbols is an effect in which a set of decorative symbols stops (confirms) in a winning state without being displayed in a reach state. The sudden confirmed stop effect of the decorative symbols C differs from the sudden confirmed stop effect of the decorative symbols A mainly in that multiple sets of decorative symbols are not displayed, and only the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown, and the operation of the first movable mechanism 14 is included. In the sudden confirmed stop effect of the decorative symbols C, first, as shown in Figure 65(A), the stopped (confirmed) decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed. The first movable mechanism 14 is stationary in the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The changing display of this set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stopping display of this set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the special symbols may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped at "234". Here, the game state is assumed to be the normal state (low probability, low base state), the special symbol 1 reserve has started to be consumed, and the special symbol 1 variation will now be executed. Furthermore, here, the result of this special symbol 1 lottery is assumed to be a jackpot, and the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has been selected.

When the special symbol 1 reserve is consumed and the special symbol variation begins, as shown in Figure 65(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R remain stopped without corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation in question). In this state, the first movable mechanism 14 moves from the left edge to the right edge of the display screen 7a, moving to the right in front of the display screen 7a. In conjunction with this movement of the first movable mechanism 14, an effect is executed in which the display content of the display screen 7a changes. Specifically, the display switches from the first screen, which shows the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, to the second screen, which displays the word "Big Win." Here, the first screen does not move; instead, the second screen moves in front of the first screen, covering it, thus creating the effect of switching the display content.

When the first movable mechanism 14 moves to its rightmost extension position, it stops there. At this point, as shown in Figure 65(C), the display screen 7a will show only the second screen, displaying the word "Big Win." This immediately notifies the player that the special feature lottery result is a big win.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 65(D), the first movable mechanism 14 moves from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a, in front of the display screen 7a. In conjunction with this movement of the first movable mechanism 14, a visual effect is executed in which the display content of the display screen 7a changes. Specifically, the display switches from the second screen, which displays the word "Big Win," to the first screen, where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop and display "777." Here, the second screen does not move; instead, the first screen moves in front of the second screen, covering it, thus creating the visual effect of the display content changing.

When the first movable component 14 moves to its leftmost retracted position, it stops there. At this time, as shown in Figure 65(E), the display screen 7a will show only the first screen displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped at "777". Afterward, the jackpot animation is executed. In this way, the sudden confirmation stop animation C of the decorative symbols surprises the player and enhances the excitement, as the display of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and their reach patterns, are not shown after the special symbol variation begins, but instead stop in the jackpot pattern.

Figures 65(F) to 65(J) show other examples of the sudden confirmation and stop animation C of the decorative symbols, as explained in Figures 65(A) to 65(E). In Figures 65(F) to 65(J), the transition from the first screen, which displays the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, to the second screen, which displays the word "Big Win," differs from that shown in Figures 65(A) to 65(E).

Figure 65(F) shows the same state as Figure 65(A). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped (confirmed stop) at "234," are displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, the first movable mechanism 14 is stationary in the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

In Figure 65(G), similar to Figure 65(B), as the first movable mechanism 14 moves to the right, the display switches from the first screen, which shows the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, to the second screen, which displays the word "Big Win." Here, both the first and second screens move to the right, creating a sliding effect where the displayed content changes.

Figure 65(H) shows the same state as Figure 65(C). That is, when the first movable mechanism 14 moves to its rightmost extension position, it stops there. Also, the display screen 7a becomes the second screen, showing only the "Big Win" text image. This immediately notifies the player that the special feature lottery result is a big win.

In Figure 65(I), similar to Figure 65(D), as the first movable mechanism 14 moves to the left, the display switches from the second screen, which shows the word "Big Win," to the first screen, where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop and display "777." Here, both the first and second screens move to the left, creating a sliding effect where the displayed content changes.

Figure 65(J) shows the same state as Figure 65(E). That is, when the first movable mechanism 14 moves to its leftmost retracted position, it stops there. Also, the display screen 7a becomes a state where only the first screen showing the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped at "777," is displayed. After that, the jackpot animation is executed. In this way, in the sudden confirmation stop animation C of the decorative symbols, after the special symbol variation begins, the variation display and reach pattern of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, but instead the symbols stop in the jackpot pattern. This can surprise the player and enhance the excitement.

[Example of effect]
The following shows an example of the effect of the sudden confirmation stop effect for decorative symbols.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 63, after the special symbol variation begins, a special effect can be performed in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a winning state without being displayed in a reach state. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented effects, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 64 and 65.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 63(A) to (E), in this presentation, after the special symbol variation begins, the variation display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the stop display of the winning pattern of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented presentations, thereby improving the level of enjoyment.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 63(F) to (J), in this presentation, after the special symbol variation starts, the display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped after the previous special symbol variation is maintained, and then the display of the winning pattern is displayed without the display of the variation of a set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r corresponding to the current special symbol variation. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with a novel presentation unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 65.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 63, in this effect, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that were stopped in the winning state are displayed within the frame. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with a novel effect unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 64 and 65.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 64 and 65, in this presentation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in a reach pattern, and a win is announced by the display of the word "Win" image. After the announcement, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop and are displayed in a win pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with a novel presentation unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to the modified example in Figure 63.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 64, in this presentation, after the display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, the word "Win" is displayed to indicate a win. After the announcement, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped in the winning configuration, are displayed in the frame. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with a novel presentation unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to the modified example shown in Figure 65.

[Variations]
The following shows a variation of the sudden confirmation and stop animation for decorative symbols.
[Variation 1]
In the sudden confirmation stop animation A of the decorative symbols, after Figure 63(B), the fluctuation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, and in Figure 63(C), with the fluctuation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R not displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may enter the frame as "7". Then, in Figure 63(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may stop confirmed as "777", and a jackpot may be announced.

[Modified example 2]
In Figure 63(B) of the sudden confirmation stop effect A of the decorative symbols, while the variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed, the word image "Big Win" may appear and a big win may be announced.

[Modification 3]
In the sudden confirmation stop animation A for the decorative symbols, the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r are assumed to appear as "7". However, the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r may be numbers other than "7", or images other than numbers. Furthermore, the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r may appear as different numbers and stop on losing symbols.

[Modification 4]
In the sudden confirmation and stopping of decorative patterns B and C, the notification of a win may be an image other than the word "Big Win". Furthermore, the notification of a big win is not limited to the display of an image, but may also be the movement of a mechanism or the generation of sound.

[Modified example 5]
In the sudden confirmation stop effect C of the decorative symbols, after the stop symbols "234" of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, the first movable mechanism 14 may move to the right from the retracted position toward the advanced position.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
◇[Pattern A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
One of the aforementioned multiple types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of indicating whether the result is correct or incorrect.
After the special feature variation begins, the aforementioned set of decorative symbols can be displayed in a winning state without being displayed in a reach state,
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine described in A5-1,
In the aforementioned presentation, after the special symbol variation begins, the variation of the set of decorative symbols and the stopping of the winning pattern are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A5-3]
The gaming machine described in A5-1,
In the aforementioned presentation, after the special symbol variation begins, the display of the set of decorative symbols that was stopped after the previous special symbol variation is maintained, and then, without displaying the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the current special symbol variation, the stop display of the winning pattern is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A5-4]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A5-1 to A5-3,
In the aforementioned presentation, the set of decorative symbols that were stopped in the winning position are displayed within the frame.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A5-5]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A5-1 to A5-4,
In the aforementioned presentation, the set of decorative symbols is not displayed in a reach-out manner when a win is announced, and after the announcement, the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a win-out manner.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine described in A5-5,
In the aforementioned presentation, after the display of the set of decorative symbols disappears, the win is announced, and after the announcement, the set of decorative symbols, which were stopped in the winning configuration, are displayed in the frame.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process in Figure 28, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0) during the low probability state (normal state), the game transitions to a playtime state (low probability time reduction state). This playtime state continues until the special symbol variations reach 700 times.

The following describes the linked effects A to C using Figures 66 to 68. These linked effects are executed during the reel symbol variation animation in the normal state, time-saving state (low probability, low base state), or probability variation state (high probability, high base state). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the linked effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Mechanical device-linked effect A]
Figure 66 is a diagram illustrating the special feature linked effect A. The special feature linked effect A in Figure 66 is an effect that occurs when the special symbols change in the same way. In the special feature linked effect A, as shown in Figure 66(A), a decorative symbol change effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol change effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol change effect. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram. Furthermore, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 66(B), a mechanism deployment animation is performed. In this mechanism deployment animation, the first movable mechanism 14 moves from its retracted position on the left of the display screen 7a to its deployed position (from left to right across the display screen 7a), passing in front of the display screen 7a. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable mechanism 14 from its retracted position to its deployed position. Furthermore, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed with the 7 symbol stopped at the 7 symbol for the 8L symbol and the right decorative symbol 8R, while the decorative symbol 8C rapidly changes, forming a reach state. Also, in the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable mechanism 14 has passed displays an effect image EF (for example, a black-based effect image) instead of the background image HK.

Next, as shown in Figure 66(C), the mechanism movement animation A is performed. In this mechanism movement animation A, the first movable mechanism 14 moves from its deployed position to its retracted position (to the left). At this time, as the first movable mechanism 14 moves, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right edge of the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged with 8L at the top, 8C in the center, and 8R at the bottom, each representing a 7, forming the jackpot symbol. The ally character CRA also moves to the left in conjunction with the leftward movement of the first movable mechanism 14.

Next, as shown in Figure 66(D), the mechanism movement effect B is performed. In this mechanism movement effect B, the first movable mechanism 14 moves further in the retreat direction (to the left). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left in conjunction with the first movable mechanism 14. In detail, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left at the same speed as the first movable mechanism 14 moves in the retreat direction (to the left). In this case, as the first movable mechanism 14 moves to the retreat position (to the left), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller, and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in Figure 66(E), the mechanism movement effect C is performed. In this mechanism movement effect C, the first movable mechanism 14 moves to the retracted position, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are positioned approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is positioned to the left of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this case, the effect image EF disappears, and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 66(F), the jackpot symbol notification animation is performed. In this jackpot symbol notification animation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped approximately in the center of the display screen 7a and are announced as the jackpot symbol 7. At this time, the friendly character CRA is removed.

Furthermore, in the above-described mechanism movement effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are set to move to the left in conjunction with the first movable mechanism 14 at the same speed. However, this is not limited to this; the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may move in conjunction with the first movable mechanism 14 at a slower speed, or at a faster speed.

[Mechanical device-linked effect B]
Figure 67 is a diagram illustrating the linked effect B. The linked effect B in Figure 67 is an effect that occurs when the special symbols change in the same way. In linked effect B, as shown in Figure 67(A), a decorative symbol change effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol change effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol change effect. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram. Furthermore, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(B), the special feature deployment animation A is performed. In this special feature deployment animation A, the first movable special feature 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from its retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to its deployed position (from left to right on the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable special feature 14 from its retracted position to its deployed position. Furthermore, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed with the right decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopping at the number 6, while the decorative symbol 8C rapidly changes, forming a reach state. Also, in the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable special feature 14 has passed displays an effect image EF (for example, a black-based effect image) instead of the background image HK.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(C), the mechanism movement animation A is performed. In this mechanism movement animation A, the first movable mechanism 14 moves from its deployed position to its retracted position (to the left). At this time, as the first movable mechanism 14 moves, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right edge of the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged with 8L at the top, 8C in the center, and 8R at the bottom, each forming a 6-symbol combination, creating the jackpot symbol. The ally character CRA also moves to the left in conjunction with the leftward movement of the first movable mechanism 14.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(D), the mechanism movement effect B is performed. In this mechanism movement effect B, the first movable mechanism 14 moves further in the retreat direction (to the left). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left in conjunction with the first movable mechanism 14. In detail, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left at the same speed as the first movable mechanism 14 moves in the retreat direction (to the left). In this case, as the first movable mechanism 14 moves to the retreat position (to the left), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller, and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(E), the mechanism movement effect C is performed. In this mechanism movement effect C, the first movable mechanism 14 moves to its retracted position, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are positioned approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is positioned to the left of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this case, the effect image EF disappears, and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(F), a timer button animation is performed. In this timer button animation, a button image XA1 is displayed prompting the player to press the animation button 63. This button image XA1 includes the word "PUSH" to encourage the player to press the animation button 63, and the words "3 seconds remaining" to indicate the timer countdown.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(G), the special feature deployment animation B is performed. In this special feature deployment animation B, the first movable special feature 14 moves again in front of the display screen 7a, from its retracted position on the left of the display screen 7a to its deployed position (from left to right of the display screen 7a). In this case, in the area of the display screen 7a that the first movable special feature 14 has passed through, the effect image EF (for example, a black-based effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK, and the button image XA1 is erased.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(H), a jackpot symbol upgrade animation is performed. In this jackpot symbol upgrade animation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop and are displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. They are then changed from the 6 symbol to the 7 symbol and announced as the jackpot symbol. In other words, they are upgraded to the 7 symbol, which is relatively more advantageous for the player than the 6 symbol. At this time, the upgraded 7 symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed without being linked to the first movable mechanism 14.

Furthermore, in the above-described mechanism movement effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are set to move to the left in conjunction with the first movable mechanism 14 at the same speed. However, this is not limited to this; the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may move in conjunction with the first movable mechanism 14 at a slower speed, or at a faster speed.

[Mechanical device linked effect C]
Figure 68 is a diagram illustrating the linked effect C. The linked effect C in Figure 68 is an effect that occurs when the special symbols change in the same way. In the linked effect C, as shown in Figure 68(A), a decorative symbol change effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol change effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol change effect. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram. Furthermore, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(B), the special feature deployment animation A is performed. In this special feature deployment animation A, the first movable special feature 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from its retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to its deployed position (from left to right on the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable special feature 14 from its retracted position to its deployed position. Furthermore, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed with the right decorative symbol 8R stopping at the number 6, and the decorative symbol 8C rapidly changing, forming a reach state. Also, in the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable special feature 14 has passed is replaced with an effect image EF (for example, a black-based effect image) instead of the background image HK.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(C), the mechanism movement animation A is performed. In this mechanism movement animation A, the first movable mechanism 14 moves from its deployed position to its retracted position (to the left). At this time, as the first movable mechanism 14 moves, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right edge of the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged with 8L at the top, 8C in the center, and 8R at the bottom, each forming a 6-symbol combination, creating the jackpot symbol. The ally character CRA also moves to the left in conjunction with the leftward movement of the first movable mechanism 14.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(D), the mechanism movement effect B is performed. In this mechanism movement effect B, the first movable mechanism 14 moves further in the retreat direction (to the left). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left in conjunction with the first movable mechanism 14. In detail, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left at the same speed as the first movable mechanism 14 moves in the retreat direction (to the left). In this case, as the first movable mechanism 14 moves to the retreat position (to the left), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller, and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(E), the mechanism movement effect C is performed. In this mechanism movement effect C, the first movable mechanism 14 moves to the retracted position, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are positioned approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is positioned to the left of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this case, the effect image EF disappears, and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(F), a jackpot symbol enlargement animation is performed. In this jackpot symbol enlargement animation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged. At this time, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed so that they extend beyond the display screen 7a. Also, the ally character CRA is removed.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(G), a timer button animation is performed. In this timer button animation, a button image XA1 is displayed prompting the player to press the animation button 63. This button image XA1 includes the word "PUSH" to encourage the player to press the animation button 63, and the words "3 seconds remaining" to indicate the timer countdown.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(H), the special feature deployment animation B is performed. In this special feature deployment animation B, the first movable special feature 14 moves again in front of the display screen 7a, from its retracted position on the left of the display screen 7a to its deployed position (from left to right of the display screen 7a). In this case, in the area of the display screen 7a that the first movable special feature 14 has passed through, the background image HK is replaced with an effect image EF (for example, a black-based effect image), and the button image XA1 is erased.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(I), a jackpot symbol upgrade animation is performed. In this jackpot symbol upgrade animation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, changing from the 6 symbol to the 7 symbol, and are announced as the jackpot symbol. In other words, they are upgraded to the 7 symbol, which is relatively more advantageous for the player than the 6 symbol. At this time, the upgraded 7 symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed without being linked to the first movable mechanism 14.

Furthermore, in the above-described mechanism movement effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are set to move to the left in conjunction with the first movable mechanism 14 at the same speed. However, this is not limited to this; the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may move in conjunction with the first movable mechanism 14 at a slower speed, or at a faster speed.

[Variations]
In the above-described mechanism-linked effects A to C, when linked with the first movable mechanism 14, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appeared from the right edge of the display screen 7a. However, the system is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be linked with the first movable mechanism 14 from a state where they are stopped on the display screen 7a.
In the above-described mechanism-linked effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that link with the first movable mechanism 14 were linked in a state where they formed a jackpot symbol. However, the system is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be linked with the first movable mechanism 14 in a state where they formed a losing symbol.

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned linked mechanism effects A to C, after the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable mechanism 14 are performed in conjunction, as shown in mechanism movement effects A to C. With this configuration, the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable mechanism 14 can be emphasized, and the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable mechanism 14 can be made to attract the player's attention. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above-described mechanism-linked effects A to C, as shown in mechanism movement effects A to C, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move and the first movable mechanism 14 moves, the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable mechanism 14 move in the same direction in conjunction. This configuration allows the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable mechanism 14 to be synchronized, drawing the player's attention to the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable mechanism 14. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above-described mechanism-linked effects A to C, as shown in mechanism movement effects A to C, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move and the first movable mechanism 14 moves, the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable mechanism 14 move in sync at the same speed. This configuration allows for perfect synchronization of the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable mechanism 14, drawing the player's attention to the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable mechanism 14. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above-described linked effects A to C, as shown in the moving effects A to C, when the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable mechanism 14 are synchronized, the first movable mechanism 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position. With this configuration, when the first movable mechanism 14 moves in the direction of exiting the display screen 7a, a synchronized effect occurs between the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable mechanism 14. This allows the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable mechanism 14 to be emphasized to the player. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above-described mechanism-linked effects A to C, as shown in mechanism movement effects A to C, when the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the movement of the first movable mechanism 14, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed on the display screen 7a, but gradually appear on the display screen 7a as the first movable mechanism 14 moves, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fully displayed on the display screen 7a. This configuration allows for the gradual synchronization of the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R with the movement of the first movable mechanism 14, drawing the player's attention to the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable mechanism 14. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above-described mechanism-linked effects A to C, as shown in mechanism movement effects A to C, when the movement of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the movement of the first movable mechanism 14, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a jackpot symbol. This configuration emphasizes the notification of a jackpot using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, amplifying the player's joy at winning a jackpot. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing multiple display effects and a movable movable mechanism,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect described above is an effect that moves decorative patterns,
The second display effect described above is an effect that moves the movable prop,
A combination of the first and second display effects may be performed.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed, and the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable mechanism in the second display performance are performed in conjunction.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XA-2]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XA-1,
In the aforementioned combination performance, the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable mechanism in the second display performance are performed in the same direction in conjunction with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XA-2,
In the aforementioned combination performance, the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable mechanism in the second display performance are performed in conjunction with each other at the same movement speed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Condition XA-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XA-3,
The aforementioned movable component is capable of moving between a retracted position and an extended position.
In the aforementioned combination performance, when the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable mechanism in the second display performance are performed in conjunction, the movable mechanism moves from the deployed position toward the retracted position.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XA-5]
The gaming machine described in Actual XA-4,
In the aforementioned combination performance, when the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable mechanism in the second display performance are performed in conjunction, the decorative pattern is gradually displayed on the display means from a state where it is not displayed on the display means as the movable mechanism moves, and thereafter the decorative pattern is fully displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Pattern XA-6]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XA-5,
The decorative symbols that are moved in the first display effect described above are decorative symbols that form the jackpot symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process in Figure 28, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0) during the low probability state (normal state), the game transitions to a playtime state (low probability time reduction state). This playtime state continues until the special symbol variations reach 700 times.

The scrolling effects A to C are described below using Figures 69 to 71. These scrolling effects are executed during the reel spinning animation in the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability, low base state), or the probability variation state (high probability, high base state). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the scrolling effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Scrolling effect A]
Figure 69 is a diagram illustrating the scroll animation A. The scroll animation A in Figure 69 is an animation performed with the same variation of special symbols. In the scroll animation A, as shown in Figure 69(A), a decorative symbol variation animation is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation animation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol variation animation. The hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 69(B), a temporary stop animation for decorative symbols is performed. In this animation, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop. Specifically, decorative symbol 8L stops at symbol 7, decorative symbol 8C stops at symbol 5, and decorative symbol 8R stops at symbol 3. Furthermore, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of a predetermined triangle. Also, in this decorative symbol temporary stop animation, the ally character CRA is positioned in the upper right. In this decorative symbol temporary stop animation, the image displayed on the display screen 7a, including decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA, is also called the stop image XB1.

Next, as shown in Figure 69(C), a downward scrolling effect is performed. In this downward scrolling effect, a series of continuous still images XB1 scroll (move) across the display screen 7a from top to bottom. At this time, a boundary XB2 is provided between the continuous still images XB1. This boundary XB2 is indicated by hatching in the figure. In the figure, arrows indicate that the boundary XB2 is scrolling (moving) downwards.

Next, as shown in Figure 69(D), a downward scrolling stop effect is performed. In this downward scrolling stop effect, two consecutive stop images XB1, arranged vertically, are displayed in a stopped state so that the boundary XB2 between the two stop images XB1 is visible. In this case, a portion of each of the two stop images XB1 is displayed, and when combined, they form a single stop image XB1. Specifically, in Figure 69(C), when the upper stop image XB1 is placed below the lower stop image XB1, it forms a single complete stop image XB1. That is, a single stop image XB1 is displayed across the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 69(E), a reach replacement animation is performed. In this reach replacement animation, two consecutive stop images XB1 move downwards, and the boundary XB2 moves to the bottom edge of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary XB2 disappears, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the stop image XB1 disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, forming a reach state. At this time, the new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R consist of the animation symbol 8L and decorative symbol 8R, both of which are 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is rapidly changing. In addition, in this reach replacement animation, a transformation occurs and a new ally character CRA is displayed, further enhancing the mysterious atmosphere.
After that, all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, and a symbol confirmation stop animation is performed, indicating either a loss or a big win.
Note that the image displayed on screen 7a during the reach replacement animation is a different image from the stopped image XB1.

[Scrolling effect B]
Figure 70 is a diagram illustrating the scroll animation B. The scroll animation B in Figure 70 is an animation performed with the same variation of special symbols. In the scroll animation B, as shown in Figure 70(A), a decorative symbol variation animation is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation animation, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol variation animation. The hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 70(B), a temporary stop animation for decorative symbols is performed. In this animation, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop. Specifically, decorative symbol 8L stops at symbol 7, decorative symbol 8C stops at symbol 5, and decorative symbol 8R stops at symbol 3. Furthermore, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of a predetermined triangle. Also, in this decorative symbol temporary stop animation, the ally character CRA is positioned in the upper right. In this decorative symbol temporary stop animation, the image displayed on the display screen 7a, including decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA, is also called the stop image XB1.

Next, as shown in Figure 70(C), a downward scrolling effect is performed. In this downward scrolling effect, a series of continuous still images XB1 scroll (move) across the display screen 7a from top to bottom (first direction). At this time, a boundary XB2 is provided between the continuous still images XB1. This boundary XB2 is indicated by hatching in the figure. In the figure, arrows indicate that the boundary XB2 is scrolling (moving) downwards.

Next, as shown in Figure 70(D), a downward scrolling stop effect is performed. In this downward scrolling stop effect, two consecutive stop images XB1, arranged vertically, are displayed in a stopped state so that the boundary XB2 between the two stop images XB1 is visible. In this case, a portion of each of the two stop images XB1 is displayed, and when combined, they form a single stop image XB1. Specifically, in Figure 70(C), when the upper stop image XB1 is placed below the lower stop image XB1, it forms a single complete stop image XB1. That is, a single stop image XB1 is displayed across the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 70(E), an upward scrolling effect is performed. In this upward scrolling effect, the continuous series of stopped images XB1 scroll (move) from the downward direction to the upward direction (second direction), starting from the downward scrolling stop state. In the figure, arrows indicate that the boundary XB2 is also scrolling (moving) upward.

Next, as shown in Figure 70(F), an upward scrolling stop effect is performed. In this upward scrolling stop effect, two consecutive stop images XB1 are displayed in a way that the boundary XB2 between the two stop images XB1 is visible. In this case, a portion of each of the two stop images XB1 is displayed, and when combined, they form a single stop image XB1. Specifically, in Figure 70(F), when the upper stop image XB1 is placed below the lower stop image XB1, it forms a single complete stop image XB1. That is, a single stop image XB1 is displayed across the entire display screen 7a.

The stopping position of boundary XB2 in the downward scrolling stop effect described above is different from the stopping position of boundary XB2 in the upward scrolling stop effect described above. With this configuration, the stopping positions differ due to scrolling in different directions, which can provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere and, as a result, enhance the enjoyment of the game.
However, this is not limited to the above, and the stopping position of boundary XB2 in the downward scrolling stop effect and the stopping position of boundary XB2 in the upward scrolling stop effect may be the same.

Next, as shown in Figure 70(G), a reach replacement animation is performed. In this reach replacement animation, two consecutive stop images XB1 move downwards, and the boundary XB2 moves to the bottom edge of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary XB2 disappears, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the stop image XB1 disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, forming a reach state. At this time, the new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R consist of the animation symbol 8L and decorative symbol 8R, both of which are 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is rapidly changing. In addition, in this reach replacement animation, a transformation occurs and a new ally character CRA is displayed, further enhancing the mysterious atmosphere.
After that, all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, and a symbol confirmation stop animation is performed, indicating either a loss or a big win.
Note that the image displayed on screen 7a during the reach replacement animation is a different image from the stopped image XB1.

[Scrolling effect C]
Figure 71 is a diagram illustrating the scroll animation C. The scroll animation C in Figure 71 is an animation performed with the same variation of special symbols. In the scroll animation C, as shown in Figure 71(A), a decorative symbol variation animation is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation animation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol variation animation. The hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 71(B), a temporary stop animation for decorative symbols is performed. In this animation, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop. Specifically, decorative symbol 8L stops at symbol 7, decorative symbol 8C stops at symbol 5, and decorative symbol 8R stops at symbol 3. Furthermore, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of a predetermined triangle. Also, in this decorative symbol temporary stop animation, the ally character CRA is positioned in the upper right. In this decorative symbol temporary stop animation, the image displayed on the display screen 7a, including decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA, is also called the stop image XB1.

Next, as shown in Figure 71(C), a downward scrolling effect is performed. In this downward scrolling effect, a series of continuous still images XB1 scroll (move) across the display screen 7a from top to bottom (first direction). At this time, a boundary section XB2 is provided between the continuous still images XB1. This boundary section XB2 is indicated by hatching in the figure. In the figure, arrows indicate that the boundary section XB2 is scrolling (moving) downwards.

Next, as shown in Figure 71(D), a downward scrolling stop effect is performed. In this downward scrolling stop effect, two consecutive stop images XB1, arranged vertically, are displayed in a stopped state so that the boundary XB2 between the two stop images XB1 is visible. In this case, a portion of each of the two stop images XB1 is displayed, and when combined, they form a single stop image XB1. Specifically, in Figure 71(C), when the upper stop image XB1 is placed below the lower stop image XB1, it forms a single complete stop image XB1. That is, a single stop image XB1 is displayed across the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 71(E), an upward scrolling effect is performed. In this upward scrolling effect, the continuous series of stopped images XB1 scroll (move) from the downward direction to the upward direction (second direction), starting from the downward scrolling stop state. In the figure, arrows indicate that the boundary XB2 is also scrolling (moving) upward.

Next, as shown in Figure 71(F), an upward scrolling stop effect is performed. In this upward scrolling stop effect, two consecutive stop images XB1 are displayed in a stopped state, with the boundary XB2 between the two stop images XB1 visible. In this case, a portion of each of the two stop images XB1 is displayed, and when combined, they form a single stop image XB1. Specifically, in Figure 71(F), when the upper stop image XB1 is placed below the lower stop image XB1, it forms a single complete stop image XB1. That is, a single stop image XB1 is displayed across the entire display screen 7a.

The stopping position of boundary XB2 in the downward scrolling stop effect described above is different from the stopping position of boundary XB2 in the upward scrolling stop effect described above. With this configuration, the stopping positions differ due to scrolling in different directions, which can provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere and, as a result, enhance the enjoyment of the game.
However, this is not limited to the above, and the stopping position of boundary XB2 in the downward scrolling stop effect and the stopping position of boundary XB2 in the upward scrolling stop effect may be the same.

Next, as shown in Figure 71(G), boundary effect A is performed. In this boundary effect A, the boundary XB2 expands vertically, and three characters XB3 appear on the boundary XB2. These characters XB3 represent smiling faces.

Next, as shown in Figure 71(H), boundary effect B is performed. In this boundary effect B, character XB3 appears to leap out (move) from boundary XB2. In this case, character XB3 can either completely leap out from boundary XB2 or partially leap out from boundary XB2. This configuration allows for a mysterious atmosphere to be created through scrolling and scrolling stop effects, followed by a surprise for the player through the boundary effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in Figure 71(I), a reach replacement animation is performed. In this reach replacement animation, two consecutive stop images XB1 move downwards, and the boundary XB2 moves to the bottom edge of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary XB2 disappears, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the stop image XB1 disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, forming a reach state. At this time, the new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R consist of the animation symbol 8L and decorative symbol 8R, both of which are 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is rapidly changing. In addition, in this reach replacement animation, a transformation occurs and a new ally character CRA is displayed, further enhancing the mysterious atmosphere.
After that, all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, and a symbol confirmation stop animation is performed, indicating either a loss or a big win.
Note that the image displayed on screen 7a during the reach replacement animation is different from the stopped image XB1.

[Variations]
In the boundary area XB2 described above, a predetermined image (for example, an effect image, a character image) may be displayed.
In the scrolling effects A to C described above, when the consecutive stopped images XB1 are scrolling, the second movable mechanism 15 may be moved in the scrolling direction. In other words, the scrolling of the stopped images XB1 and the movement of the second movable mechanism 15 may be linked.

[Example of effect]
In the scrolling effects A to C described above, a temporary stop effect for decorative symbols displays a stopped image XB1 including the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the ally character CRA. Subsequently, multiple consecutive stopped images XB1 are scrolled in a first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a. Then, on the display screen 7a, two consecutive stopped images XB1 are displayed in a stopped state so that the boundary XB2 between the two stopped images XB1 is visible. With this configuration, multiple consecutive stopped images XB1 are scrolled in a first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two consecutive stopped images XB1 are displayed in a stopped state so that the boundary XB2 between the two stopped images XB1 is visible. This provides the player with a mysterious atmosphere and draws their attention to what will happen next (whether it will scroll again, or whether a different effect from scrolling (for example, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a pre-announcement effect, or a chance-up effect) will occur). As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the scrolling effects A to C described above, multiple consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in a first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a. Then, on the display screen 7a, two consecutive still images XB1 are displayed stopped so that the boundary XB2 between the two images XB1 is visible. After that, multiple consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in a second direction (upward) on the display screen 7a. This configuration provides the player with a more mysterious atmosphere and draws their attention to the subsequent developments (whether it will scroll again, or whether a different effect (e.g., a pseudo-consecutive effect, a pre-announcement effect, a chance-up effect) will occur). As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the scrolling effects A to C described above, multiple consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in a first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a. Then, on the display screen 7a, two consecutive still images XB1 are displayed stopped so that the boundary XB2 between the two images XB1 is visible. Subsequently, multiple consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in a second direction (upward) on the display screen 7a. Then, the boundary XB2 between the two images XB1 is again displayed stopped. This configuration allows for a mysterious atmosphere to be created for the player, drawing their attention to the subsequent developments (whether the images will scroll again, or whether a different effect (e.g., a pseudo-consecutive effect, a pre-announcement effect, or a chance-up effect) will occur). As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the scrolling animations B and C described above, the position of boundary XB2 during the downward scrolling stop animation differs from the position of boundary XB2 during the upward scrolling stop animation. This configuration allows for the emphasis on the difference between the downward scrolling animation (scrolling in the first direction) and the upward scrolling animation (scrolling in the second direction), thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The scrolling animations A through C described above occur during the same spin of the special symbols. This configuration allows for a mysterious atmosphere to be created for the player within a short period, drawing their attention to the subsequent developments (whether the screen will scroll again, or whether a different animation (e.g., a pseudo-consecutive spin animation, a pre-announcement animation, or a chance-up animation) will occur). As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing multiple display effects and a movable movable mechanism,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a third display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect is an effect that displays the first image,
The second display effect is a display effect in which a plurality of consecutive images of the first image are scrolled in a first direction by the display means,
The third display effect is a display effect in which two consecutive first images are stopped and displayed in the display means so that the boundary between the two consecutive first images is visible.
A combination of the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the first display performance is performed, after the first display performance is performed, the second display performance is performed, after the second display performance is performed, the third display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XB-2]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XB-1,
In some cases, a fourth display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In the fourth display effect, the plurality of consecutive first images are scrolled and displayed by the display means in a second direction opposite to the first direction.
The aforementioned combination effect may include the fourth display effect.
In the aforementioned combination presentation, the fourth presentation is performed after the third presentation.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XB-2,
In some cases, a fifth display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In the fifth display effect, the display means is used to pause and display the boundary between the two consecutive first images so that it is visible.
The aforementioned combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the aforementioned combination presentation, the fifth display presentation is performed after the fourth display presentation.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XB-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XB-3,
The position of the boundary in the third display effect and the position of the boundary in the fifth display effect are different.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XB-4,
It is equipped with a variable display means for displaying special symbols in a variable manner,
The aforementioned combination performance is performed during the same variation of the special symbol in the variation display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process in Figure 28, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0) during the low probability state (normal state), the game transitions to a playtime state (low probability time reduction state). This playtime state continues until the special symbol variations reach 700 times.

The following describes the special decorative pattern variation effects A to C using Figures 72 to 74. These special decorative pattern variation effects are executed during decorative pattern variation effects in the normal state, time-saving state (low probability, low base state), or probability variation state (high probability, high base state). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the special decorative pattern variation effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Special Pattern Variation Effect A]
Figure 72 is a diagram illustrating the special variation effect A of the decorative symbols. The special variation effect A of the decorative symbols in Figure 72 is an effect of the same variation of special symbols. In the special variation effect A of the decorative symbols, as shown in Figure 72(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the right-hand shooting suggestion display XC1 is displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol variation effect. This right-hand shooting suggestion display XC1 is a display that prompts the player to shoot to the right. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 72(B), a pre-movement animation is performed. During this pre-movement animation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased. At this time, the right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 72(C), the moving object movement animation A is performed. In this animation A, the moving object XC2 appears from the top of the display screen 7a. The moving object XC2 is an image that mimics the second movable object 15, and specifically consists of a rectangular image and a bar-shaped image. Various letters and characters are displayed on the rectangular portion of the moving object XC2. In this moving object movement animation A, when the moving object XC2 appears from the top, a decorative pattern 8L is displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC2. The animation pattern 8L is the number 7. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC2.

Next, as shown in Figure 72(D), the moving object movement animation B is performed. In this animation B, the moving object XC2 moves upward. In this animation B, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC2. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC2.

Next, as shown in Figure 72(E), the moving object movement animation C is performed. In this moving object movement animation C, the moving object XC2 moves downward. In this moving object movement animation C, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC2. This character XC4 is a smiling character. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC2, the right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.
Subsequently, regardless of the movement of the moving object XC2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed position, forming either a losing or winning symbol.

[Special Pattern Variation Effect B]
Figure 73 is a diagram illustrating the special variation effect B of the decorative symbols. The special variation effect B of the decorative symbols in Figure 73 is an effect that occurs when the special symbols are varied in the same way. In the special variation effect B of the decorative symbols, as shown in Figure 73(A), the decorative symbols variation effect is performed first. In this decorative symbols variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the right-hand shooting suggestion display XC1 is displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbols variation effect. This right-hand shooting suggestion display XC1 is a display that prompts the player to shoot to the right. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 73(B), an icon display animation is performed. In this icon display animation, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased, and multiple icon images XC3 are displayed. These icon images XC3 represent predetermined emblems and are scattered across the entire display screen 7a. At this time, the right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 73(C), the moving object movement animation A is performed. In this moving object movement animation A, the moving object XC5 appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. The moving object XC5 moves from left to right on the display screen 7a. The moving object XC5 is an image that imitates the first movable object 14, and specifically, it is a rod-shaped image. In this moving object movement animation A, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement animation A, in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right, the decorative pattern 8L is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5. The post-movement area XC6 is the area on the display screen 7a after the movement of the moving object XC5. The decorative pattern 8L is the number 7. The right-hand shooting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 73(D), the moving object movement animation B is performed. In this animation B, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this animation B, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement animation B, the decorative pattern 8L is fully displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 73(E), the moving object movement animation C is performed. In this animation C, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this animation C, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion it touches. Also, in the moving object movement animation C, in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right, the decorative pattern 8C is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 73(F), the moving object movement animation D is performed. In this animation D, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this animation D, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion it touches. Also, in the moving object movement animation D, the decorative pattern 8C is fully displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 73(G), the moving object movement animation E is performed. In this animation E, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this animation E, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion it touches. Also, in the moving object movement animation E, in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right, the decorative pattern 8R and character XC4 are gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5. This character XC4 is a smiling character. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 73(H), the moving object movement animation F is performed. In this animation F, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this animation F, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion it touches. Also, in the moving object movement animation F, the decorative pattern 8C and character XC4 are fully displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 73(I), a decorative pattern enlargement effect is performed. In this effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged while the moving object XC5 is stationary. At this time, character XC4 is not enlarged. Character XC4 may be enlarged if desired. Icon images XC3 that were not erased by the moving object XC5 continue to be displayed. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 73(J), a decorative pattern fade-out effect is performed. In this decorative pattern fade-out effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the character XC4 gradually disappear. Icon images XC3 that were not erased by the moving object XC5 continue to be displayed. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.
Subsequently, regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed position, forming either a losing or winning symbol.

[Special Pattern Variation Effect C]
Figure 74 is a diagram illustrating the special variation effect C of the decorative symbols. The special variation effect C of the decorative symbols in Figure 74 is an effect that occurs when the special symbols are varied in the same way. In the special variation effect C of the decorative symbols, as shown in Figure 74(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the right-hand shooting suggestion display XC1 is displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol variation effect. This right-hand shooting suggestion display XC1 is a display that prompts the player to shoot to the right. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(B), an icon display animation is performed. In this icon display animation, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased, and multiple icon images XC3 are displayed. These icon images XC3 represent predetermined emblems and are scattered across the entire display screen 7a. At this time, the right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(C), the moving object movement animation A is performed. In this moving object movement animation A, the moving object XC5 appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. The moving object XC5 moves from left to right on the display screen 7a. The moving object XC5 is an image that imitates the first movable object 14, and specifically, it is a rod-shaped image. In this moving object movement animation A, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement animation A, in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right, the decorative pattern 8L is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5. The post-movement area XC6 is the area on the display screen 7a after the movement of the moving object XC5. The decorative pattern 8L is the number 7. The right-hand shooting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(D), the moving object movement animation B is performed. In this animation B, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this animation B, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement animation B, the decorative pattern 8L is fully displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(E), the moving object movement animation C is performed. In this animation C, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this animation C, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion it touches. Also, in the moving object movement animation C, in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right, the decorative pattern 8C is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(F), the moving object movement animation D is performed. In this animation D, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this animation D, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion it touches. Also, in the moving object movement animation D, the decorative pattern 8C is fully displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(G), the moving object movement animation E is performed. In this animation E, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this animation E, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion it touches. Also, in the moving object movement animation E, in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right, the decorative pattern 8R and character XC4 are gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5. This character XC4 is a smiling character. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(H), the moving object movement animation F is performed. In this animation F, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this animation F, when the moving object XC5 passes over the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion it touches. Also, in the moving object movement animation F, the decorative pattern 8C and character XC4 are fully displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(I), the moving object movement animation G is performed. In this animation G, the moving object XC5 reverses direction and moves from right to left on the display screen 7a. During this animation G, the decorative symbols 8R and character XC4 are erased from the parts they touch the moving object XC5. That is, the decorative symbols 8R and character XC4 are gradually erased as the moving object XC5 moves. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(J), the moving object movement animation H is performed. In this animation H, the moving object XC5 moves further to the left on the display screen 7a. During this animation H, the decorative pattern 8R and character XC4 are completely erased. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(K), the moving object movement animation I is performed. In this animation I, the moving object XC5 moves further to the left on the display screen 7a. In this animation I, the decorative symbol 8C is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. That is, the decorative symbol 8C is gradually erased as the moving object XC5 moves. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(L), the moving object movement animation J is performed. In this animation J, the moving object XC5 moves further to the left on the display screen 7a. During this animation J, the decorative symbol 8C is completely erased. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(M), the moving object movement effect K is performed. In this moving object movement effect K, the moving object XC5 moves further to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect K, the decorative pattern 8L is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. That is, the decorative pattern 8L is gradually erased as the moving object XC5 moves. The right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(N), the moving object movement animation L is performed. In this moving object movement animation L, the moving object XC5 moves further to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement animation L, the decorative pattern 8L is completely erased. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the right-hand play suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.
Subsequently, regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed position, forming either a losing or winning symbol.

[Variations]
In the special variation effect C of the decorative pattern described above, the decorative pattern or character was erased from the part that touched the moving body XC5 in the moving body movement effects G to L. However, the device is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern or character may be erased from the part that overlaps with the moving body XC5.
The above-mentioned special variation effect B and special variation effect C of the decorative pattern can be executed in different variations, and for example, they may be executed during the same game state (shortened time state, probability variation state).

[Example of effect]
In the special decorative pattern variation effects A to C described above, the moving object movement effect causes the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to be gradually displayed as the moving object moves. With this configuration, the display effects of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be expressed in contrast to the moving object, making the display effects of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R more engaging. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the special decorative pattern variation effects B and C described above, during the moving object movement effect, a portion of the decorative pattern is displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which is the area after the moving object XC5 has moved. The display area of the decorative pattern gradually increases in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves. This configuration synchronizes the movement of the moving object XC5 with the display of the decorative pattern, providing the player with a new decorative pattern variation effect and elevating the effect to something mysterious and intriguing. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the special decorative pattern variation effects A to C described above, the decorative patterns are not displayed before the moving object movement effect in which the decorative patterns are gradually revealed. This configuration enhances the mystery and intrigue surrounding the display of decorative patterns during the moving object movement effect, thereby improving the overall enjoyment of the game.

In the special variation effect B of the decorative symbols described above, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed during the moving object movement effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased during the decorative symbol fade-out effect, regardless of the movement of the moving object. This configuration allows for a more mysterious and intriguing display of the decorative symbols during the moving object movement effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the special variation effect B of the decorative symbols described above, after the moving object movement effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R enlarge during the decorative symbol enlargement effect, and then gradually fade out and disappear during the decorative symbol fade-out effect. This configuration makes the display of the decorative symbols during the moving object movement effect more mysterious and intriguing. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

The special decorative pattern variations A to C described above occur during the same variation, but in a high-base state (probability variation state or time-saving state) which is relatively more advantageous to the player compared to a low-base state (normal state). Players have a greater expectation of winning a jackpot in a high-base state than in a low-base state. With this configuration, by having the moving object movement effect occur during a predetermined variation in the high-base state, the moving object movement effect can be made more mysterious and the sense of anticipation for the moving object movement effect can be increased. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Concept XC-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect described above is an effect that displays a moving object,
The second display effect described above is a display effect that shows decorative patterns.
A combination of the first and second display effects may be performed.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the second display performance is performed while the first display performance is being performed, and when the first display performance and the second display performance are being performed, the decorative pattern is gradually displayed in the second display performance in accordance with the movement of the moving body in the first display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XC-2]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XC-1,
In the aforementioned combination performance, the second display performance displays a part of the decorative pattern in the post-movement region, which is the area after the moving body has moved, and displays the decorative pattern so that the display area gradually increases in the post-movement region, which expands as the moving body moves.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XC-3]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XC-2,
In the aforementioned combination performance, the decorative pattern is not displayed before the second display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Fire XC-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XC-3,
In some cases, a third display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The third display effect is an effect in which the decorative pattern is erased.
The aforementioned combination effect may include the third display effect.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the third display performance is performed after the second display performance, and in the second display performance, after the decorative pattern is displayed in the post-movement area, in the third display performance, the decorative pattern is erased regardless of the movement of the moving body.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Fire XC-5]
The gaming machine described in Instance XC-4,
In the aforementioned combination effect, in the third display effect, when the decorative pattern is erased, it is gradually faded away while being enlarged.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XC-6]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XC-5,
The game state of the aforementioned gaming machine is always one of several game states, including a first game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player and a second game state that is relatively favorable to the player.
In the aforementioned combination presentation, the first display presentation, the second display presentation, and the third display presentation are the same variation and are performed during the second game state.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process in Figure 28, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0) during the low probability state (normal state), the game transitions to a playtime state (low probability time reduction state). This playtime state continues until the special symbol variations reach 700 times.

The following describes the decorative symbol loss effects A to C using Figures 75 to 77. These decorative symbol loss effects are executed during the decorative symbol fluctuation effects in the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability, low base state), or the probability variation state (high probability, high base state). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative symbol loss effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Decorative pattern missing effect A]
Figure 75 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol deficiency effect A. The decorative symbol deficiency effect A in Figure 75 is an effect that occurs with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative symbol deficiency effect A, as shown in Figure 75(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 75(B), a reach state display animation is performed. In this reach state display animation, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the 7 symbol, and decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the 4 symbol, forming a reach state. Also, an icon image XD1 is displayed during the reach state display animation. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in Figure 75(C), a moving object collision effect A is performed. In this moving object collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect A, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns) causes damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in Figure 75(D), the moving object collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, and the icon image XD1 collides with the central part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect B, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (4 patterns) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, creating a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 75(D), a moving object collision effect C is performed. In this moving object collision effect C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further, while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect C, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (the four patterns) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, creating a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 75(F), the moving object collision effect D is performed. In this moving object collision effect D, the decorative symbol 8C with four symbols, which has multiple missing parts XD2 (enlarged missing parts XD2), is erased, and a new decorative symbol 8C representing five symbols is temporarily displayed, forming a reach state. Also, the icon image XD1 is displayed in a changed position. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in Figure 75(G), a moving object collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (pattern 5) causes damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in Figure 75(H), a moving object collision effect F is performed. In this moving object collision effect F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the icon image XD1 collides with the central part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect F, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (pattern 5) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 75(I), a moving object collision effect G is performed. In this moving object collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further, while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect G, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (pattern 5) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 75(J), a super reach sequence is performed. In this super reach sequence, decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the 7 symbol, while decorative symbol 8C rapidly changes to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and icon image XD1 are displayed, with icon image XD1 attacking the ally character CRA.
After that, the losing symbols or the winning symbols are displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative pattern missing effect B]
Figure 76 is a diagram illustrating the decorative pattern deficiency effect B. The decorative pattern deficiency effect B in Figure 76 is an effect that occurs with the same variation of special patterns. In the decorative pattern deficiency effect B, as shown in Figure 76(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed first. In this decorative pattern variation effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 76(B), a reach state display animation is performed. In this reach state display animation, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the number 7, and decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the number 4, forming a reach state. Also, an icon image XD1 is displayed during the reach state display animation. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in Figure 76(C), a moving object collision effect A is performed. In this moving object collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect A, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns) causes damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in Figure 76(D), the moving object collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the icon image XD1 collides with the central part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect B, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, creating a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 76(D), a moving object collision effect C is performed. In this moving object collision effect C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further, while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect C, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (the four patterns) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, creating a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 76(F), the moving object collision effect D is performed. In this moving object collision effect D, the decorative symbol 8C with four symbols, which has multiple missing parts XD2 (enlarged missing parts XD2), is erased, and a new decorative symbol 8C representing five symbols is temporarily displayed, forming a reach state. Also, the icon image XD1 is displayed in a changed position. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in Figure 76(G), a moving object collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (the 5th pattern) causes damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in Figure 76(H), a moving object collision effect F is performed. In this moving object collision effect F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the icon image XD1 collides with the central part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect F, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (pattern 5) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 76(I), a moving object collision effect G is performed. In this moving object collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further, while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect G, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (pattern 5) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 76(J), the decorative pattern restoration effect A is performed. In this decorative pattern restoration effect A, light emitted from the icon image XD1 partially restores the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), reducing the area of the missing portion XD2. Specifically, in the decorative pattern restoration effect A, the missing portions XD2 in the middle and lower parts of the decorative pattern 8C are restored, returning it to its state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in Figure 76(K), the decorative pattern restoration effect B is performed. In this decorative pattern restoration effect B, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is completely restored by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the missing part XD2 disappears. Specifically, in decorative pattern restoration effect B, the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C is further restored, and the decorative pattern 8C is completely returned to its state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in Figure 76(L), a super reach sequence is performed. In this super reach sequence, decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the 7 symbol, while decorative symbol 8C rapidly changes to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and icon image XD1 are displayed, with icon image XD1 attacking the ally character CRA.
After that, the losing symbols or the winning symbols are displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative pattern missing effect C]
Figure 77 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol deficiency effect C. The decorative symbol deficiency effect C in Figure 77 is an effect that occurs with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative symbol deficiency effect C, as shown in Figure 77(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(B), a reach state display animation is performed. In this reach state display animation, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the 7 symbol, and decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the 4 symbol, forming a reach state. Also, an icon image XD1 is displayed during the reach state display animation. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in Figure 77(C), a moving object collision effect A is performed. In this moving object collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect A, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns) causes damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(D), the moving object collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the icon image XD1 collides with the central part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect B, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (the four patterns) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, creating a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(D), a moving object collision effect C is performed. In this moving object collision effect C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further, while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect C, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (the four patterns) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(F), the moving object collision effect D is performed. In this moving object collision effect D, the decorative symbol 8C with four symbols, which has multiple missing parts XD2 (enlarged missing parts XD2), is erased, and a new decorative symbol 8C representing five symbols is temporarily displayed, forming a reach state. Also, the icon image XD1 is displayed in a changed position. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in Figure 77(G), a moving object collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (pattern 5) causes damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(H), a moving object collision effect F is performed. In this moving object collision effect F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the icon image XD1 collides with the central part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect F, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (pattern 5) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms, while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(I), a moving object collision effect G is performed. In this moving object collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further, while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect G, the collision of the icon image XD1 with the decorative pattern 8C (pattern 5) causes further damage to the collision area of the decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a new damaged area XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged area XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(J), a cut-in animation is performed. In this cut-in animation, a cut-in image XD3 is displayed to conceal the decorative symbol 8C, or decorative symbols 8L and 8R, which have a missing portion XD2. This cut-in image XD3 includes an icon image XD1 as a chance-up element, the text "Super Hot!" as a chance-up element, and the ally character CRA as a chance-up element.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(K), the decorative pattern restoration effect A is performed. In this decorative pattern restoration effect A, light emitted from the icon image XD1 partially restores the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), reducing the area of the missing portion XD2. Specifically, in the decorative pattern restoration effect A, the missing portions XD2 in the middle and lower parts of the decorative pattern 8C are restored, returning it to its state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(L), the decorative pattern restoration effect B is performed. In this decorative pattern restoration effect B, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is completely restored by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the missing part XD2 disappears. Specifically, in decorative pattern restoration effect B, the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C is further restored, and the decorative pattern 8C is completely returned to its state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(M), a super reach sequence is performed. In this super reach sequence, decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the 7 symbol, while decorative symbol 8C rapidly changes to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and icon image XD1 are displayed, with icon image XD1 attacking the ally character CRA.
After that, the losing symbols or the winning symbols are displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Variations]
In the above decorative pattern loss effects A to C, icon image XD1 was used as the moving object that collides with the decorative pattern, but it is not limited to this; anything that moves can be used, and predetermined characters, letters, effects, etc., may also be used as the moving object.
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol loss effects A to C, the moving object collision effect is performed on decorative symbols in a reach state, but it is not limited to this, and the moving object collision effect may also be performed on decorative symbols that are in motion. In this case, the decorative symbols in motion may be decorative symbols in motion at a slower speed than normal motion.
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern loss effect C, the cut-in effect is performed after the moving object collision effect G, but it is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect may be performed during any of the moving object collision effects or during any of the decorative pattern restoration effects.

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern loss effects A to C, an icon image XD1 as a moving object and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Subsequently, when the icon image XD1 collides with decorative pattern 8C, the collision area of decorative pattern 8C is lost, resulting in a loss area XD2. With this configuration, the action of the moving icon image XD1 makes the variation effect of the decorative patterns mysterious, and as a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above-described decorative pattern defect effects A to C, when a defect XD2 occurs in the decorative pattern 8C during the moving object collision effect, the decorative pattern 8C enlarges as the defect XD2 expands. With this configuration, the decorative pattern enlarges when the defect XD2 expands due to the icon image XD1. This emphasizes the expansion of the defect XD2 by the icon image XD1, making the decorative pattern variation effect more mysterious and, as a result, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-described decorative pattern defect effects A to C, when a defect XD2 occurs in the decorative pattern 8C during the moving object collision effect, the decorative pattern 8C deforms as the defect XD2 expands. With this configuration, the decorative pattern deforms when the defect XD2 expands due to the icon image XD1. This emphasizes the expansion of the defect XD2 by the icon image XD1, making the decorative pattern's transformation effect more mysterious and, as a result, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-mentioned decorative symbol loss effects A to C, during the moving object collision effects A to C, a loss XD2 occurs and expands in the decorative symbol 8C, which consists of four symbols, until these four symbols disappear. Subsequently, in the moving object collision effects D to G, a loss XD2 occurs and expands in the decorative symbol 8C, which consists of five symbols. This configuration allows for the sequential loss and expansion of different symbols in the decorative symbol 8C, making the variation of the decorative symbols more mysterious and, as a result, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-mentioned decorative symbol loss effects A to C, during the moving object collision effects A to C, a loss XD2 occurs in the decorative symbol 8C, which consists of four symbols, and expands until these four symbols disappear. Subsequently, in the moving object collision effects D to G, a loss XD2 occurs in the decorative symbol 8C, which consists of five symbols, and expands, followed by a super reach effect. With this configuration, different symbols are sequentially lost and expanded in the decorative symbol 8C, and then the effect develops into a super reach effect, making the variation of the decorative symbols more mysterious and drawing the player's attention to the subsequent super reach effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.
[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a third display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect is an effect that displays a predetermined moving object,
The second display effect is a display effect that shows the first decorative pattern,
The third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined moving body collides with the first decorative pattern, causing the collision portion of the first decorative pattern to be damaged.
A combination of the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the second display performance is performed while the first display performance is being performed, and then the third display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XD-2]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XD-1,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the first decorative pattern becomes larger as the missing portion expands.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XD-2,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the first decorative pattern deforms as the missing portion expands.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Fire XD-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XD-3,
In some cases, a fourth display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a second decorative pattern different from the first decorative pattern is displayed, and the moving body collides with the second decorative pattern, causing the collision portion of the second decorative pattern to be damaged.
The aforementioned combination effect may include a fourth display effect.
In the aforementioned combination performance, in the third display performance, after the missing portion of the first decorative pattern is enlarged, the first decorative pattern disappears, and then the fourth display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XD-5]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XD-4,
In the fourth display animation of the aforementioned combination animation, the missing portion of the second decorative symbol is enlarged, then the second decorative symbol disappears, and then a super reach animation is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The following describes the ceiling reach indication effects A to C using Figures 78 to 80. These ceiling reach indication effects are executed during the variation of decorative symbols, etc. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the ceiling reach indication effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or on the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Ceiling Reaching Indication演出 A]
Figure 78 is a diagram illustrating the ceiling reach indication effect A. The ceiling reach indication effect is an effect that, in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state), displays information related to the remaining number of spins until time-saving (playtime) is reached (expected reach information), informing the player of the number of spins (number of games) until playtime is reached. When the number of spins reaches 600 in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the game state to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state). Here, the number of spins until playtime is reached is also called the ceiling, and reaching that number of spins is also called reaching the ceiling.

In the ceiling reach indication演出A, as shown in Figure 78(A), the display screen 7a first shows the variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the game count display GS, which represents the number of games (number of variations) since the end of the jackpot game. The variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponds to the variation display of Special Symbol 1 in the normal state. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variation icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The game count display GS is displayed at the lower right corner of display screen 7a and contains a numerical value representing the number of games (spins) since the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the number of spins (games) since the end of the jackpot game is 400, and the text image "Game Count 400" is displayed. The game count displayed on the game count display GS is not cleared by turning the power of the gaming machine 1 on or off. However, the game count displayed on the game count display GS may be cleared by turning the power on or off.

Furthermore, in Figure 78(A), the remaining number of spins until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC=201). The sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1 has the following thresholds set (stored) for the ceiling effect counter: 1st threshold TH1=201, 2nd threshold TH2=51, 3rd threshold TH3=11, and 4th threshold TH4=1. Note that these threshold values are examples and can be set to any number.

The sub-control board 90 determines, for each fluctuation, whether the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is equal to the first threshold TH1. When the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the first threshold TH1 (TC = TH1 = 201), as shown in Figure 78(B), the sub-control board 90 displays the first expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R was displayed. The expected arrival information TJ is displayed at the first position in the center of the left edge of the display screen 7a and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of spins information CD.

The mode image MG represents the performance mode that is executed after the number of spins reaches 600 in the normal state (after reaching the ceiling). In this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 starts the "Playtime Mode" performance after reaching the ceiling, so an image displaying the words "Playtime Mode" is shown. The remaining spins information CD is an image of the words "200 spins remaining," and together with the mode image MG displayed above, it can be read as "200 spins until Playtime Mode." The "200 spins" part numerically indicates the number of spins remaining until reaching the ceiling, and corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the ceiling performance counter value TC. When this expected arrival information TJ is displayed, the player can know the number of spins remaining until reaching b (playtime).

The "Expected Arrival Information TJ" disappears before the corresponding fluctuation (the fluctuation where TC = TH1 = 201) ends (stops). Specifically, the "Expected Arrival Information TJ" is displayed after the fluctuation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is shown when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter equals the first threshold TH1, and disappears before the fluctuation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R switches to a stop display. After the "Expected Arrival Information TJ" disappears, the stop display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special feature 1 variation multiple times as shown in Figure 78(B), the sub-control board 90 determines, for each variation, whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold TH2. When the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold TH2 (TC = TH2 = 51), as shown in Figures 78(C) and (D), the sub-control board 90 displays the second expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R was displayed. The expected arrival information TJ is displayed in the second position at the center of the right edge of the display screen 7a and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD, similar to the previous (first) display.

The mode image MG is the same "Playtime Mode" text image as last time. The remaining spins information CD is the text image "90% achieved," and together with the mode image MG displayed above, it can be read as "90% achieved to Playtime Mode." The "90%" part represents the percentage of the number of spins performed so far (required spins minus remaining spins) relative to the number of spins required to reach the ceiling (e.g., 600). This is the second time the expected arrival information TJ has been displayed. Since 150 spins have passed since the first display and clearing of the expected arrival information TJ in Figure 78(B), the player is feeling anxious, having once known the remaining spin count, and then again being unsure. This second display of the expected arrival information TJ provides a sense of relief after the initial anxiety.

The second expected arrival information TJ disappears before the corresponding fluctuation (the fluctuation where TC = TH2 = 51) ends. That is, the second expected arrival information TJ appears after the fluctuation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter equals the second threshold TH2, and disappears before the fluctuation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R switches to the stop display. After the expected arrival information TJ disappears, the stop display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special feature 1 variation multiple times as shown in Figure 78(D), the sub-control board 90 determines, for each variation, whether the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is equal to the third threshold TH3. When the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the third threshold TH3 (TC = TH3 = 11), the sub-control board 90 displays the third expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 78(E). The expected arrival information TJ is displayed in the first position at the center of the left edge of the display screen 7a and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD, similar to the first (two previous) and second (last) displays.

After the third estimated arrival information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the estimated arrival information TJ moves downward toward the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 78(F). Upon reaching the third position, the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, the estimated arrival information TJ moves to the right toward the fourth position, the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 78(G).

When the expected arrival information TJ reaches the fourth position at the bottom right of display screen 7a, it is displayed adjacent to the game count display GS, which is displayed at the bottom right of display screen 7a, with the two displays side-by-side, one above the other. Here, a new rectangular frame image is displayed, and within this frame image, the remaining number of turns information CD ("10 turns remaining") and the game count display GS ("590 games") are displayed side-by-side, one above the other.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 78(H), even after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop displaying, the third expected arrival information TJ remains displayed. The third expected arrival information TJ remains displayed at the fourth position in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a until the ceiling is reached (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of times the ceiling is reached).

As shown in Figure 78(H), after repeating the special feature 1 variation multiple times, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold TH4 (TC = TH4 = 1), as shown in Figures 78(I) and (J), the remaining number of times information CD in the expected arrival information TJ becomes "0 times," and the game count display GS becomes "600 games."

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop and the next spin begins, the value TC on the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 switches the game state from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state). This triggers the entry into b-time-saving (playtime). Since there are still special symbol 1 reserves remaining, a special symbol 1 lottery is performed in the time-saving state after entry.

As shown in Figure 78(K), the display of the expected arrival information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes. Then, as shown in Figure 78(L), the mode image MG for "Playtime Mode" and the start image TN for "Entry" are displayed. This indicates that the ceiling has been reached and the "Playtime Mode" performance has begun.

[Ceiling Reaching Indication演出 B]
Figure 79 is a diagram illustrating the ceiling reach indication effect B. The ceiling reach indication effect is an effect that displays information (expected reach information) related to the remaining number of spins until reaching the b time reduction (playtime) during normal play (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state), informing the player of the number of spins (number of games) until playtime is reached. When the number of spins reaches 600 in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the play state to the time reduction state (normal probability state, time reduction state, and high base state). Here, the number of spins until playtime is reached is also called the ceiling, and reaching that number of spins is also called reaching the ceiling.

In Figure 79(A), the remaining number of spins until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value of the ceiling effect counter, TC, is 201 (TC = 201). The sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1 has the following threshold values set (stored) for the ceiling effect counter: 1st threshold TH1 = 201, 2nd threshold TH2 = 51, 3rd threshold TH3 = 11, and 4th threshold TH4 = 1. Note that these threshold values are examples and can be set to any number.

The sub-control board 90 determines, with each fluctuation, whether the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is equal to the first threshold TH1. When the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the first threshold TH1 (TC = TH1 = 201), the sub-control board 90 displays the first expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 79(A). The expected arrival information TJ is displayed prominently in a first position near the center of the display screen 7a and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of attempts information CD.

The mode image MG represents the performance mode that is executed after the number of spins reaches 600 in the normal state (after reaching the ceiling). In this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 starts the "Playtime Mode" performance after reaching the ceiling, so an image showing the words "Playtime Mode" is displayed. The remaining spins information CD includes a text image that says "200 spins left", a rectangular meter image, and a percentage image that says "40%".
The text image "200 spins remaining" is arranged in conjunction with the mode image MG displayed above it to read "200 spins remaining until playtime mode." The "200 spins" part numerically indicates the number of spins remaining until the ceiling is reached, and corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. The percentage image, which is "40%", numerically indicates the percentage of the remaining spins to reach the ceiling relative to the number of spins required to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). The meter image corresponds the numerical value of the percentage image to the area of a specific colored region, and as the numerical value of the percentage image decreases, the area of the specific colored region decreases. When this expected arrival information TJ is displayed, the player can find out how many spins are remaining until they reach b time reduction (playtime).

As shown in Figure 79(A), the display screen 7a also displays the variation of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the game count display GS, which shows the number of games (number of variations) since the end of the jackpot game. The variation displays of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the variation of Special Symbol 1. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variation icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The game count display GS is displayed at the lower right corner of display screen 7a and contains a numerical value representing the number of games (spins) since the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the number of spins (games) since the end of the jackpot game is 400, and the text image "Game Count 400" is displayed. The game count displayed on the game count display GS is not cleared by turning the power of the gaming machine 1 on or off. However, the game count displayed on the game count display GS may be cleared by turning the power on or off.

The expected arrival information TJ disappears before the corresponding fluctuation (the fluctuation where TC = TH1 = 201) ends. That is, the expected arrival information TJ is displayed after the fluctuation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter equals the first threshold TH1, and disappears before the fluctuation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R switches to a stop display. After the expected arrival information TJ disappears, the stop display of "567" for decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed, as shown in Figure 79(B).

After repeating the special feature 1 variation multiple times as shown in Figure 79(B), the sub-control board 90 determines, for each variation, whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold TH2. When the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold TH2 (TC = TH2 = 51), the sub-control board 90 displays the second expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 79(C). The second expected arrival information TJ is displayed in the same first position as the first expected arrival information TJ, that is, near the center of the display screen 7a. The second expected arrival information TJ includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD, just as it was displayed previously. When the expected arrival information TJ is displayed, the display area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were being displayed during the variation, is reduced.

The mode image MG is the same "Playtime Mode" text image as before. The remaining spins information CD includes a text image of "50 spins remaining," a rectangular meter image, and a percentage image showing "10%." The "50 spins remaining" text image, together with the mode image MG displayed above, is configured to read as "50 spins until Playtime Mode." The percentage image showing "10%" numerically indicates the percentage of remaining spins to the required number of spins to reach the ceiling (e.g., 600). The meter image correlates the numerical value in the percentage image to the area of a specific colored region; as the numerical value in the percentage image decreases, the area of the specific colored region decreases. This is the second display of the expected arrival information TJ. Since 150 spins have passed since the first display and disappearance of the expected arrival information TJ in Figure 79(A), the player is feeling anxious, having once known the remaining spin count, and then again being unsure. This second display of the expected arrival information TJ provides a sense of relief after the initial anxiety.

After the second expected arrival information TJ is displayed, as shown in Figure 79(D), the expected arrival information TJ moves toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a while shrinking in size. Upon reaching the second position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, it is displayed adjacent to the game count display GS, which is displayed vertically at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The second expected arrival information TJ remains displayed at the second position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a until the ceiling is reached (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling count). As the expected arrival information TJ shrinks, the display areas of the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are expanded.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 79(E), while the expected arrival information TJ is displayed, the false expected arrival information tj is also displayed in a larger size. Whether or not the false expected arrival information tj is displayed is randomly determined by a lottery for each variation pattern; here, it is assumed that the display was determined by the lottery. Also, here, the false expected arrival information tj is displayed during the same variation as the expected arrival information TJ, but it may also be displayed during a variation following the variation in which the expected arrival information TJ was displayed. Furthermore, the expected arrival information TJ may be displayed after the variation in which the false expected arrival information tj was displayed. The false expected arrival information tj, like the expected arrival information TJ, includes a mode image mg and false remaining count information cd.

Mode image mg, like mode image MG, is a text image of "Playtime Mode". The false remaining spins information cd includes a text image of "10 spins left", a rectangular meter image, and a percentage image of "2%". The text image of "10 spins left", together with mode image MG displayed above, is configured to read "10 spins left until Playtime Mode". The "10 spins" part is a different number from the actual number of spins left until the ceiling is reached, indicating a false remaining spin count. The false remaining spin count may be more or less than the actual remaining spin count and is determined randomly. The "10 spins" part is then decremented by one with each spin. The percentage image of "2%" numerically shows the percentage of the false remaining spins to the ceiling relative to the number of spins required to reach the ceiling (e.g., 600). The meter image associates the numerical value of the percentage image with the area of a specific color region, and the area of the specific color region decreases as the numerical value of the percentage image decreases. When this false arrival information tj is displayed, players mistakenly believe it represents the remaining number of spins until they reach b (playtime).

After the false arrival information tj is displayed, as shown in Figure 79(F), the false arrival information tj moves toward the lower left corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced in size. Upon reaching the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, it is displayed side-by-side with the arrival information TJ displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The player becomes confused, unsure which of the arrival information TJ and the false arrival information tj is correct. This creates suspense for the player and enhances the game's appeal.

After repeating the special figure 1 variation multiple times as shown in Figure 79(F), as shown in Figure 79(G), when the text image included in the false remaining count information cd of the false arrival date information tj becomes "0 times remaining," the text image of "False" is also displayed, indicating that this false arrival date information tj is fake. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 79(H), the display of the false arrival date information tj disappears. The arrival date information TJ continues to be displayed.

As shown in Figure 79(H), after repeating the special feature 1 variation multiple times, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold TH4 (TC = TH4 = 1), as shown in Figures 79(I) and (J), the remaining number of times information CD in the expected arrival information TJ becomes "0 times," and the game count display GS becomes "600 games."

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop displaying "789" and the next spin begins, the value TC on the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 switches the game state from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state). This triggers the entry into b-time-saving (playtime). Since there are still special symbol 1 reserves remaining, a special symbol 1 lottery is performed in the time-saving state after entry.

As shown in Figure 79(K), the display of the expected arrival information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes. Then, as shown in Figure 79(L), the mode image MG for "Playtime Mode" and the start image TN for "Entry" are displayed. This indicates that the ceiling has been reached and the "Playtime Mode" performance has begun.

[Ceiling Reaching Indication演出 C]
Figure 80 is a diagram illustrating the ceiling reach indication effect C. The ceiling reach indication effect is an effect that displays information (expected reach information) related to the remaining number of spins until the b time reduction (playtime) is reached during normal play (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state), informing the player of the number of spins (number of games) until playtime is reached. When the number of spins reaches 600 in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the play state to the time reduction state (normal probability state, time reduction state, and high base state). Here, the number of spins until playtime is reached is also called the ceiling, and reaching that number of spins is also called reaching the ceiling.

In Figure 80(A), the remaining number of spins until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value of the ceiling effect counter, TC, is 201 (TC = 201). The sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1 has the following thresholds set (stored) for the ceiling effect counter: 1st threshold TH1 = 201, 2nd threshold TH2 = 51, 3rd threshold TH3 = 11, and 4th threshold TH4 = 1. Note that these threshold values are examples and can be set to any number.

The sub-control board 90 determines, with each fluctuation, whether the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is equal to the first threshold TH1. When the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the first threshold TH1 (TC = TH1 = 201), the sub-control board 90 displays the first expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 80(A). The expected arrival information TJ is displayed prominently in a first position near the center of the display screen 7a and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of attempts information CD.

The mode image MG represents the performance mode that is executed after the number of spins reaches 600 in the normal state (after reaching the ceiling). In this embodiment, the game machine 1 starts the mode performance represented by a smiling face image after reaching the ceiling, so the smiling face image and the word "Mode" are displayed. The remaining spins information CD is an image of the words "Almost there," and together with the mode image MG displayed above, it is configured to be read as "Almost there to the smiling face image mode." The "Almost there" part qualitatively indicates the number of spins remaining until the ceiling is reached and corresponds to the value TC of the ceiling performance counter. Thus, the remaining spins information CD may also contain qualitative content other than numerical values. Here, depending on the number of spins remaining until the ceiling is reached, it is displayed in the following order: "Still a while," "Good progress," "Almost there," "Just a little more," "Almost achieved," and "Achieved." When this expected arrival information TJ is displayed, the player can roughly know the number of spins remaining until the b time reduction (playtime) is reached.

As shown in Figure 80(A), the display screen 7a also displays the variation of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the game count display GS, which shows the number of games (number of variations) since the end of the jackpot game. The variation displays of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the variation of Special Symbol 1. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variation icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon (the corresponding hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The game count display GS is displayed at the lower right corner of display screen 7a and contains a numerical value representing the number of games (spins) since the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the number of spins (games) since the end of the jackpot game is 400, and the text image "Game Count 400" is displayed. The game count displayed on the game count display GS is not cleared by turning the power of the gaming machine 1 on or off. However, the game count displayed on the game count display GS may be cleared by turning the power on or off.

The expected arrival information TJ disappears before the corresponding fluctuation (the fluctuation where TC = TH1 = 201) ends. That is, the expected arrival information TJ is displayed after the fluctuation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter equals the first threshold TH1, and disappears before the fluctuation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R switches to a stop display. After the expected arrival information TJ disappears, the stop display of "567" for decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed, as shown in Figure 80(B).

After repeating the special feature 1 variation multiple times as shown in Figure 80(B), the sub-control board 90 determines, for each variation, whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold TH2. When the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold TH2 (TC = TH2 = 51), the sub-control board 90 displays the second expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 80(C). The second expected arrival information TJ is displayed in the same first position as the first expected arrival information TJ, that is, near the center of the display screen 7a. The second expected arrival information TJ includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD, just as it was displayed previously. When the expected arrival information TJ is displayed, the display areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were being displayed during the variation, are reduced.

The mode image MG is the same "Playtime Mode" text image as last time. The remaining spins information CD is the "Almost There" text image, and together with the mode image MG displayed above, it can be read as "Almost there to the smiley face image mode." This is the second time the expected arrival information TJ has been displayed. Since 150 spins have passed since the first display and disappearance of the expected arrival information TJ in Figure 80(A), the player is experiencing anxiety, having once known the remaining spin count, and then again being unsure. This second display provides a sense of reassurance after the initial anxiety.

After the second expected arrival information TJ is displayed, as shown in Figure 80(D), the expected arrival information TJ moves toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a while shrinking in size. Upon reaching the second position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, it is displayed adjacent to the game count display GS, which is displayed vertically at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The second expected arrival information TJ remains displayed at the second position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a until the ceiling is reached (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of times the ceiling is reached). As the expected arrival information TJ shrinks, the display areas of the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are expanded.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 80(E), even after the fluctuating decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop displaying, the destination information TJ continues to be displayed. As shown in Figure 80(F), when the next fluctuation begins, the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start fluctuating again. Meanwhile, the destination information TJ continues to be displayed with the same content as the previous fluctuation. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 80(G), even after the fluctuating decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop displaying, the destination information TJ continues to be displayed. The destination information TJ continues to be displayed with the same content as the previous fluctuation. In other words, the remaining count information CD is a text image of "Almost there," and does not change with each fluctuation count, but the text content changes after a certain number of fluctuation counts have passed.

After repeating the special feature 1 variation multiple times as shown in Figure 80(G), the sub-control board 90 determines, for each variation, whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the third threshold TH3. When the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the third threshold TH3 (TC = TH3 = 11), the sub-control board 90 changes the content of the remaining number of attempts information CD in the expected arrival information TJ, as shown in Figure 80(H). Specifically, the text image "Almost there" is changed to "Almost achieved."

From Figure 80(H), after repeating the special feature 1 fluctuation multiple times, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold TH4 (TC = TH4 = 1), the content of the remaining number of plays information CD in the expected reach information TJ is further changed, as shown in Figures 80(I) and (J). Specifically, the text image "Almost Achieved" is changed to "Achieved." The game count display GS becomes "Game Count 600."

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop displaying "678" and the next spin begins, the value TC on the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 switches the game state from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state). This triggers the entry into b-time-saving (playtime). Since there are still special symbol 1 reserves remaining, a special symbol 1 lottery is performed in the time-saving state after entry.

As shown in Figure 80(K), the display of the expected arrival information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Then, as shown in Figure 80(L), the mode image MG of the "Smile Face Image Mode" and the start image TN of "Entering" are displayed. This indicates that the ceiling has been reached and the "Smile Face Image Mode" performance has begun.

[Example of effect]
The following are examples of the effects of the animations that suggest the ceiling has been reached.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 78(A) to (E), a first performance can be executed in the normal state in which the expected arrival information TJ, which is information related to the remaining number of spins until the ceiling is reached, is displayed; a second performance can be executed in the normal state after the first performance in which the display of the expected arrival information TJ disappears; and a third performance can be executed in the normal state after the second performance in which the expected arrival information TJ is displayed again. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 79 and 80.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 78(E) to (J), in the third performance, the display of the expected arrival information TJ continues until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of times the ceiling is reached. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 79 and 80.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 78, the expected arrival information TJ includes a mode image representing a performance mode (playtime mode) that is executed after the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of times the ceiling is reached. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 79 and 80.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 78(L), a mode image representing the performance mode is displayed at the start of the performance mode that is executed after reaching the ceiling. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 79 and 80.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 79, in the first performance, the expected arrival information TJ is displayed at a first position on the display screen 7a, and in the third performance, after being displayed at the first position, the expected arrival information TJ is reduced in size and moves to a second position on the display screen 7a, where it continues to be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 80.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 78, the expected arrival information TJ includes a numerical image representing the remaining number of spins until the ceiling is reached, and in the third effect, a numerical image representing the number of games played is displayed adjacent to the expected arrival information TJ at the second position. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel effects unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 79.

[Variations]
The following shows variations of the animation that suggests the ceiling has been reached.
[Variation 1]
In the ceiling reach indication演出 A and B, the remaining spins information CD is assumed to correspond to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the ceiling effect counter value TC. However, the remaining spins information CD may also correspond to the ceiling effect counter value TC. For example, in the above embodiment, the remaining spins information CD is displayed as 0 during the spin just before reaching the ceiling, but the remaining spins information CD may become 1 during the spin just before reaching the ceiling, and the state where the remaining spins information CD becomes 0 may not be displayed before the playtime mode starts.

[Modified example 2]
In the ceiling reach indication演出B, the timing of the display of the false reach information tj is determined randomly. That is, the false reach information tj may be displayed before the actual reach information TJ. Also, the remaining count information CD of the reach information TJ and the false remaining count information cd of the false reach information tj may become 0 first. For example, even if the false remaining count information cd of the false reach information tj is not 0, the remaining count information CD of the reach information TJ may become 0 first, and the remaining count information CD may enter playtime mode.

[Modification 3]
In the ceiling reach indication演出B, the remaining spins information CD includes a text image that reads "200 spins left", a rectangular meter image, and a percentage image that reads "40%". However, the remaining spins information CD may consist of at least one of these elements.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
◇[Verification A10-1]
A display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine comprising a game state switching means that switches the game state to a second game state when the number of fluctuations in the first game state reaches a specific number,
In the first game state, a first presentation is made in which information related to the remaining number of spins until the specified number is reached is displayed,
Following the first performance, in the first game state, a second performance occurs in which the display of the expected arrival information disappears,
After the second performance, in the first game state, a third performance is made possible in which the expected arrival information is displayed again,
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine described in A10-1,
In the third presentation, the display of the expected number of occurrences in the first game state continues until the number of occurrences reaches the specified number.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A10-3]
A gaming machine according to the embodiment A10-1 or embodiment A10-2,
The aforementioned expected arrival information includes a mode image representing a performance mode that is executed after the number of fluctuations in the first game state reaches the specified number.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A10-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment A10-3,
When the aforementioned performance mode starts, the mode image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Pattern A10-5]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A10-1 to A10-4,
In the first presentation described above, the expected arrival information is displayed at the first position of the display means,
In the third presentation, the arrival information is displayed at the first position, then shrinks and moves to the second position of the display means, and continues to be displayed at the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine described in A10-5,
The aforementioned expected arrival information includes a numerical image representing the remaining number of fluctuations until the specified number is reached.
In the third presentation, a numerical image representing the number of games is displayed adjacent to the expected arrival information at the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process in Figure 28, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 during the low probability state (normal state) (when the ceiling counter reaches 0, i.e., when the ceiling is reached), the machine transitions to a playtime state (low probability time-saving state). This playtime state continues until the special symbol variations reach 700 times. In this embodiment, the display mode during the normal state is also called the normal mode, and the display mode during the low probability time-saving state (playtime) is also called the "high-speed time-saving mode." Hereafter, "when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0)" during the low probability state (normal state) will also be simply referred to as "when the ceiling is reached."

The mode-indicating image display effects A to C are described below using Figures 81 to 83. These mode-indicating image display effects are executed during the variation of decorative symbols in the normal state (low probability state) or the time-saving state (low probability, low base state). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the mode-indicating image display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Mode Indication Image Display Presentation A]
Figure 81 is a diagram illustrating mode indication image display effect A. This mode indication image display effect A represents the display effects for the number of special symbol variations before the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) is reached, when the ceiling is reached, and for the number of variations after the ceiling is reached, during the low probability state (normal state). Specifically, in Mode Indication Image Display Performance A, Pre-Ceiling Performance A is a display performance when the number of special symbol spins is 3 spins remaining until reaching the ceiling, Pre-Ceiling Performance B is a display performance when the number of special symbol spins is 2 spins remaining until reaching the ceiling, Pre-Ceiling Performance C is a display performance when the number of special symbol spins is 1 spin remaining until reaching the ceiling, Ceiling Reaching Performances A to C are display performances when the number of special symbol spins is 0 spins remaining until reaching the ceiling (ceiling reached), Ceiling Reaching Performance D is a display performance when the number of special symbol spins has 1 spin after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when 1 spin has occurred after entering the Bakusou Jintan Mode (Playtime), and Ceiling Reaching Performance E is a display performance when the number of special symbol spins has reached a predetermined number of spins (for example, 10 spins) after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when a predetermined number of spins (for example, 10 spins) has occurred after entering the Bakusou Jintan Mode (Playtime). In the mode indication image display shown in Figure 81, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display performance A, in the pre-ceiling performance A shown in Figure 81(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining spin count display XE2 are displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the 7 symbol, decorative symbol 8C displays the 4 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R displays the 8 symbol. The first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image that suggests the high-speed time-saving mode and is rectangular in shape. In other words, in this pre-ceiling performance A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. The remaining spin count display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1 and represents the remaining spin count until the ceiling is reached. In the pre-ceiling animation A, the number of spins for the special symbol is 3 until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "3 spins remaining".

Next, as shown in Figure 81(B), in the pre-ceiling animation B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, while the first mode indication image XE1 and the remaining spin count display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the symbol 9, decorative symbol 8C displays the symbol 8, and decorative symbol 8R displays the symbol 4. In this pre-ceiling animation B, the first mode indication image XE1 is displayed despite the game state being normal and the display mode being normal mode. Furthermore, the remaining spin count display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode indication image XE1. In the pre-ceiling animation B, since there are 2 spins remaining until the ceiling is reached, the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "2 spins remaining."

Next, as shown in Figure 81(C), in the pre-ceiling animation C, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, while the first mode indication image XE1 and the remaining spin count display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the symbol 5, decorative symbol 8C displays the symbol 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the symbol 7. In this pre-ceiling animation C, the first mode indication image XE1 is displayed despite the game state being normal and the display mode being normal mode. Furthermore, the remaining spin count display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode indication image XE1. In the pre-ceiling animation C, since there is only one spin remaining until the ceiling is reached for the special symbols, the remaining spin count display XE2 is shown as "1 spin remaining."

Next, as shown in Figure 81(D), in the ceiling reach animation A, the remaining spin count display XE2 is continuously displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the right-hand shooting display XE3 is displayed in the upper right, and the high-speed time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed approximately in the center. The right-hand shooting display XE3 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which to shoot the game ball, specifically, it suggests shooting to the right. The high-speed time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image that suggests to the player that they have entered high-speed time-saving mode, and it says "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reach animation A, the number of spins for the special symbol has reached the ceiling, so the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "0 spins remaining".

Next, as shown in Figure 81(E), in the ceiling reach animation B, the right-hand shooting indicator XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the second mode indication image XE5 is displayed in the lower left. The second mode indication image XE5 is an image that suggests the high-speed time-saving mode. The second mode indication image XE5 is trapezoidal in shape, which differs from the shape of the first mode indication image XE1.

Next, as shown in Figure 81(F), in the ceiling reach animation C, the right-hand shooting indicator XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed approximately in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image that explains the high-speed time-saving mode, and specifically displays "If the movable mechanism moves, it's a jackpot," meaning that in the high-speed time-saving mode, a jackpot occurs when the movable mechanism (for example, the first movable mechanism 14 or the second movable mechanism 15) moves from the retracted position to the deployed position.

Next, as shown in Figure 81(G), in the ceiling reach演出 D, the right-hand play indicator XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed in the lower left, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, the 9 symbol is displayed for decorative symbol 8L, the 4 symbol for decorative symbol 8C, and the 8 symbol for decorative symbol 8R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reach演出 D are the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pre-ceiling演出 A-C.

Next, after a predetermined number of spins (for example, 10 spins) following the ceiling reach animation D, as shown in Figure 81(H), in the ceiling reach animation E, on the display screen 7a, the right-hand spinning display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, the 9 symbol is displayed as the stop for decorative symbol 8L, the 5 symbol is displayed as the stop for decorative symbol 8C, and the 7 symbol is displayed as the stop for decorative symbol 8R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reach animation E are the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pre-ceiling animations A to C.
After that, during the high-speed time-saving mode, the same animation as the ceiling reach animation E will occur.

[Mode Indication Image Display Presentation B]
Figure 82 is a diagram illustrating mode indication image display effect B. This mode indication image display effect B represents the display effects for the number of special symbol variations before the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) is reached, when the ceiling is reached, and for the number of variations after the ceiling is reached, during the low probability state (normal state). Specifically, in Mode Indication Image Display Performance B, Pre-Ceiling Performance A is a display performance when the number of special symbol spins is 3 spins remaining until reaching the ceiling, Pre-Ceiling Performance B is a display performance when the number of special symbol spins is 2 spins remaining until reaching the ceiling, Pre-Ceiling Performance C is a display performance when the number of special symbol spins is 1 spin remaining until reaching the ceiling, Ceiling Reaching Performances A to C are display performances when the number of special symbol spins is 0 spins remaining until reaching the ceiling (ceiling reached), Ceiling Reaching Performance D is a display performance when the number of special symbol spins has 1 spin after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when 1 spin has occurred after entering the Bakusou Jintan Mode (Playtime), and Ceiling Reaching Performance E is a display performance when the number of special symbol spins has reached a predetermined number of spins (for example, 10 spins) after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when a predetermined number of spins (for example, 10 spins) has occurred after entering the Bakusou Jintan Mode (Playtime). In the mode indication image display shown in Figure 82, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display effect B, in the pre-ceiling effect A shown in Figure 82(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining spin count display XE2 are displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the 7 symbol, decorative symbol 8C displays the 4 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R displays the 8 symbol. The first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image that suggests the high-speed time-saving mode and is rectangular in shape. In other words, in this pre-ceiling effect A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. The remaining spin count display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1 and represents the remaining spin count until the ceiling is reached. In the pre-ceiling animation A, the number of spins for the special symbol is 3 until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "3 spins remaining".

Next, as shown in Figure 82(B), in the pre-ceiling animation B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, while the first mode indication image XE1 and the remaining spin count display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the symbol 9, decorative symbol 8C displays the symbol 8, and decorative symbol 8R displays the symbol 4. In this pre-ceiling animation B, the first mode indication image XE1 is displayed despite the game state being normal and the display mode being normal mode. Furthermore, the remaining spin count display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode indication image XE1. In the pre-ceiling animation B, since there are 2 spins remaining until the ceiling is reached, the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "2 spins remaining."

Next, as shown in Figure 82(C), in the pre-ceiling animation C, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, while the first mode indication image XE1 and the remaining spin count display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the symbol 5, decorative symbol 8C displays the symbol 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the symbol 7. In this pre-ceiling animation C, the first mode indication image XE1 is displayed despite the game state being normal and the display mode being normal mode. Furthermore, the remaining spin count display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode indication image XE1. In the pre-ceiling animation C, since there is only one spin remaining until the ceiling is reached for the special symbols, the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "1 spin remaining."

Next, as shown in Figure 82(D), in the ceiling reach animation A, the remaining spin count display XE2 is continuously displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the right-hand shooting display XE3 is displayed in the upper right, and the high-speed time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed approximately in the center. The right-hand shooting display XE3 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which to shoot the game ball, specifically, it suggests shooting to the right. The high-speed time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image that suggests to the player that they have entered high-speed time-saving mode, and it says "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reach animation A, the number of spins for the special symbol has reached the ceiling, so the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "0 spins remaining".

Next, as shown in Figure 82(E), in the ceiling reach animation B, the right-hand shot indicator XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the second mode indication image XE5 is displayed from approximately the bottom center to the lower right. The second mode indication image XE5 is an image that suggests the high-speed time-saving mode. The second mode indication image XE5 is rectangular in shape, the same as the first mode indication image XE1. However, the second mode indication image XE5 is larger than the first mode indication image XE1. The display position of the second mode indication image XE5 is the same as the display position of the first mode indication image XE1. However, it is not limited to this, and the display position of the second mode indication image XE5 may differ from the display position of the first mode indication image XE1.

Next, as shown in Figure 82(F), in the ceiling reach animation C, the right-hand shooting indicator XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed approximately in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image that explains the high-speed time-saving mode, and specifically displays "If the movable mechanism moves, it's a jackpot," meaning that in the high-speed time-saving mode, a jackpot occurs when the movable mechanism (for example, the first movable mechanism 14 or the second movable mechanism 15) moves from the retracted position to the deployed position.

Next, as shown in Figure 82(G), in the ceiling reach演出 D, the right-hand shot display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from approximately the bottom center to the lower right, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the symbol 9, decorative symbol 8C displays the symbol 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the symbol 8. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reach演出 D are the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pre-ceiling演出 A-C.

Next, after a predetermined number of spins (for example, 10 spins) following the ceiling reach animation D, as shown in Figure 82(H), in the ceiling reach animation E, on the display screen 7a, the right-hand shot display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, the 9 symbol is displayed as the stop for decorative symbol 8L, the 5 symbol is displayed as the stop for decorative symbol 8C, and the 7 symbol is displayed as the stop for decorative symbol 8R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reach animation E are the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pre-ceiling animations A to C.
After that, during the high-speed time-saving mode, the same animation as the ceiling reach animation E will occur.

[Mode Indication Image Display Production C]
Figure 83 is a diagram illustrating the mode indication image display effect C. This mode indication image display effect C represents the display effects for the number of special symbol variations before the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) is reached, when the ceiling is reached, and for the number of variations after the ceiling is reached, during the low probability state (normal state). Specifically, in the mode suggestion image display effect C, the pre-ceiling effect A is a display effect when the number of special symbol spins is 3 spins remaining until the ceiling is reached, the pre-ceiling effect B is a display effect when the number of special symbol spins is 2 spins remaining until the ceiling is reached, the pre-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of special symbol spins is 1 spin remaining until the ceiling is reached, the ceiling reach effects A to C are display effects when the number of special symbol spins is 0 spins remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling reached), the ceiling reach effect D is a display effect when the number of special symbol spins has 1 spin after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when 1 spin has occurred after entering the high-speed time-saving mode (playtime), and the ceiling reach effect E is a display effect when the number of special symbol spins has reached a predetermined number of spins (for example, 10 spins) after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when a predetermined number of spins (for example, 10 spins) has occurred after entering the high-speed time-saving mode (playtime). In the mode indication image display shown in Figure 83, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display effect C, in the pre-ceiling effect A shown in Figure 83(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining spin count display XE2 are displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the 7 symbol, decorative symbol 8C displays the 4 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R displays the 8 symbol. The first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image that suggests the high-speed time-saving mode and is rectangular in shape. In other words, in this pre-ceiling effect A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. The remaining spin count display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1 and represents the remaining spin count until the ceiling is reached. In the pre-ceiling animation A, the number of spins for the special symbol is 3 until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "3 spins remaining".

Next, as shown in Figure 83(B), in the pre-ceiling animation B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, while the first mode indication image XE1 and the remaining spin count display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the symbol 9, decorative symbol 8C displays the symbol 8, and decorative symbol 8R displays the symbol 4. In this pre-ceiling animation B, the first mode indication image XE1 is displayed despite the game state being normal and the display mode being normal mode. Furthermore, the remaining spin count display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode indication image XE1. In the pre-ceiling animation B, since there are 2 spins remaining until the ceiling is reached, the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "2 spins remaining."

Next, as shown in Figure 83(C), in the pre-ceiling animation C, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, while the first mode indication image XE1 and the remaining spin count display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the symbol 5, decorative symbol 8C displays the symbol 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the symbol 7. In this pre-ceiling animation C, the first mode indication image XE1 is displayed despite the game state being normal and the display mode being normal mode. Furthermore, the remaining spin count display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode indication image XE1. In the pre-ceiling animation C, since there is only one spin remaining until the ceiling is reached for the special symbols, the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "1 spin remaining."

Next, as shown in Figure 83(D), in the ceiling reach animation A, the remaining spin count display XE2 is continuously displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the right-hand shooting display XE3 is displayed in the upper right, and the high-speed time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed approximately in the center. The right-hand shooting display XE3 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which to shoot the game ball, specifically, it suggests shooting to the right. The high-speed time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image that suggests to the player that they have entered high-speed time-saving mode, and it says "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reach animation A, the number of spins for the special symbol has reached the ceiling, so the remaining spin count display XE2 shows "0 spins remaining".

Next, as shown in Figure 83(E), in the ceiling reach animation B, the right-hand shot indicator XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the second mode indication image XE5 is displayed from approximately the bottom center to the lower right. The second mode indication image XE5 is an image that suggests the high-speed time-saving mode. The second mode indication image XE5 is rectangular in shape, the same as the first mode indication image XE1. However, the second mode indication image XE5 is larger than the first mode indication image XE1. The display position of the second mode indication image XE5 is the same as the display position of the first mode indication image XE1. However, it is not limited to this, and the display position of the second mode indication image XE5 may differ from the display position of the first mode indication image XE1.

Next, as shown in Figure 83(F), in the ceiling reach animation C, the right-hand shooting indicator XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed approximately in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image that explains the high-speed time-saving mode, and specifically displays "If the movable mechanism moves, it's a jackpot," meaning that in the high-speed time-saving mode, a jackpot occurs when the movable mechanism (for example, the first movable mechanism 14 or the second movable mechanism 15) moves from the retracted position to the deployed position.

Next, as shown in Figure 83(G), in the ceiling reach演出 D, the right-hand shot display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from approximately the bottom center to the lower right, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the symbol 9, decorative symbol 8C displays the symbol 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the symbol 8. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reach演出 D are displayed smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pre-ceiling演出 A-C.

Next, after a predetermined number of spins (for example, 10 spins) following the ceiling reach animation D, as shown in Figure 83(H), in the ceiling reach animation E, on the display screen 7a, the right-hand spinning display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, the 9 symbol is displayed as the stop for decorative symbol 8L, the 5 symbol is displayed as the stop for decorative symbol 8C, and the 7 symbol is displayed as the stop for decorative symbol 8R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reach animation E are displayed smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pre-ceiling animations A to C.
After that, during the high-speed time-saving mode, the same animation as the ceiling reach animation E will occur.

[Variations]
In the above mode suggestion image display effect A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the second mode suggestion image XE5 have different shapes, but the text "Bakusou Jintan Mode" written in the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is the same. However, this is not the only option, and the text written in the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the second mode suggestion image XE5 may be different.

[Example of effect]
In the above mode suggestion image display effects A to C, when in the normal state and before the number of special symbol spins reaches the ceiling, a first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed, suggesting the high-speed time-saving mode (playtime), even though the game is in the normal state and in normal mode. Subsequently, when the number of special symbol spins reaches the ceiling, the game changes from the normal state to a low-probability time-saving state, and the display mode transitions from normal mode to high-speed time-saving mode, a second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed, suggesting high-speed time-saving mode. This configuration allows players to feel a sense of anticipation for high-speed time-saving mode even before reaching the ceiling, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above mode indication image display sequences A to C, the first mode indication image XE1 is displayed in conjunction with the remaining spin count display XE2. This configuration allows for a greater sense of anticipation for the "Super-Speed Short-Time Mode" to the player even before reaching the ceiling, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above mode indication image display effects A to C, the second mode indication image XE5 is erased after a predetermined number of spins following the ceiling (500 spins) of the special symbol's spin count. With this configuration, since the second mode indication image XE5 is erased after the display mode enters the "Bakusou Jinsan Mode," the player's attention can be drawn to the Bakusou Jinsan Mode display effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above mode indication image display sequences A to C, when the ceiling is reached (before the second mode indication image XE5 is cleared), mode explanation image XE6, which explains the "Explosive Speed Shortening Mode," is displayed. This configuration allows for the player to feel a sense of anticipation for the Explosive Speed Shortening Mode while simultaneously conveying its details, thereby dramatically increasing the anticipation for the Explosive Speed Shortening Mode. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above mode indication image display sequences A to C, when the ceiling is reached, the right-hand shooting indicator XE3 is displayed before the second mode indication image XE5 is displayed. This configuration encourages the player to shoot the balls when entering the high-speed time-saving mode, thus preventing the player from suffering disadvantages. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple display effects,
The game machine is played in one of a plurality of game states, which include a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. When the number of special symbol variations in the first game state reaches a predetermined number, the game state changes to the second game state. In the second game state, the display mode of the display means transitions to a specific mode.
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect is an effect in which, when the game state is the first game state and before the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number, a first mode suggestion image is displayed that suggests the specific mode in the second game state, even though the game state is the first game state.
The second display effect is an effect that displays a second mode suggestion image that indicates the specific mode when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times, causing the game state to change from the first game state to the second game state and the display mode to transition to the specific mode.
A combination of the first and second display effects may be performed.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the first display performance is performed, followed by the second display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XE-2]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XE-1,
In the first display presentation of the combination presentation, the first mode suggestion image is displayed with the remaining number of times up to the predetermined number of times associated with it.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XE-2,
In the second display presentation of the combination presentation, the second mode suggestion image is erased after the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times and then a specific number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XE-3,
In some cases, a third display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The third display effect is an effect in which a mode explanation display is shown that describes the specific mode,
The aforementioned combination effect may include the third display effect.
In the aforementioned combination presentation, the third display presentation is performed before the second mode suggestion image is erased in the second display presentation.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XE-4,
In some cases, a fourth display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The fourth display effect is a display that indicates the direction in which the game balls should be launched,
The aforementioned combination effect may include the fourth display effect.
In the aforementioned combination presentation, the fourth display presentation is performed before the second mode suggestion image in the second display presentation is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process in Figure 28, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 during the low probability state (normal state) (when the ceiling counter reaches 0, i.e., when the ceiling is reached), the machine transitions to a playtime state (low probability time-saving state). This playtime state continues until the special symbol variations reach 700 times. In this embodiment, the display mode during the normal state is also called the normal mode, and the display mode during the low probability time-saving state (playtime) is also called the "high-speed time-saving mode." Hereafter, "when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0)" during the low probability state (normal state) will also be simply referred to as "when the ceiling is reached."

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game state setting process in Figure 32 ends a jackpot, if the V flag is OFF (step 2301: NO) (i.e., when transitioning to a low probability time-saving game state), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step S2303) (i.e., the low probability time-saving game state is continued after a jackpot until the number of special symbol variations reaches 100). However, this is not limited to this, and when transitioning to a low probability time-saving game state after a jackpot, the low probability time-saving state may be continued until the number of special symbol variations reaches 499. Furthermore, in the game state setting process shown in Figure 32, when the V flag is ON (step 2301: YES) (i.e., when transitioning to the high probability time-saving game state), the time-saving count is set to 100 (step S2308), and the high probability time-saving state continues after a big win until the number of special symbol variations reaches 100. In this case, after the number of special symbol variations reaches 100, the low probability time-saving state may continue until the number of special symbol variations reaches 499.
The following mode-indicating image continuation sequences A to C are sequences that can occur when the low-probability time-saving state continues until the number of special symbol spins reaches 499 after a big win, or when the low-probability time-saving state continues until the number of special symbol spins reaches 499 after a high-probability time-saving state.
Furthermore, when the number of special symbol spins reaches 499 after a big win, or when the number of special symbol spins reaches 499 after a high-probability time-saving state, this is referred to as "when the spins occur before reaching the ceiling."

The mode-indicating image continuation sequences A to C are described below using Figures 84 to 86. These mode-indicating image continuation sequences are executed during the variation of decorative symbols in the normal state (low probability state) or the time-saving state (low probability, low base state). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the mode-indicating image continuation sequence, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Mode-indicating image continuation effect A]
Figure 84 is a diagram illustrating the Mode Indication Image Continuation Performance A. This Mode Indication Image Continuation Performance A represents the display performances for the number of special symbol spins before reaching the spin before reaching the ceiling, the spin before reaching the ceiling, and the spin when reaching the ceiling, during the low probability state (normal state). Specifically, in Mode Indication Image Continuation Performance A, the pre-ceiling performance A is the display performance when there are 3 spins remaining until the pre-ceiling spin of the special symbol, the pre-ceiling performance B is the display performance when there are 2 spins remaining until the pre-ceiling spin of the special symbol, the pre-ceiling performance C is the display performance when there is 1 spin remaining until the pre-ceiling spin of the special symbol, the pre-ceiling spin performances A to B are the display performances during the spin before reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling reach performance is the display performance when there are 0 spins remaining until reaching the ceiling (ceiling reach), that is, when entering the high-speed time-saving mode (playtime). In this mode suggestion image continuation sequence A, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the diagram.

In this mode suggestion image continuation performance A, in the pre-ceiling performance A shown in Figure 84(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of spins display XF2 are displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the 7 symbol, decorative symbol 8C displays the 4 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R displays the 8 symbol. In addition, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image that suggests the game state is a low-probability time-saving state, that is, an image that suggests the high-speed time-saving mode, and it is trapezoidal in shape. The high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the words "high-speed time-saving mode" and various effects. Furthermore, the remaining spin count display XF2 is displayed in conjunction with the image XF1 suggesting the "Bakusou Jinzai Mode," and represents the remaining spins until the game state transitions from the low-probability Jinzai Mode to the normal state, or in other words, the remaining spins until the spin before reaching the ceiling. In the pre-ceiling演出A, the number of spins for the special symbols is 3 until the spin before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining spin count display XF2 shows "3 spins remaining."

Next, as shown in Figure 84(B), in the pre-ceiling演出B (pre-ceiling演出B), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, while the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining spin count display XF2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the 9 symbol, decorative symbol 8C displays the 8 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R displays the 4 symbol. The remaining spin count display XF2 is displayed in conjunction with the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling演出B, since there are 2 spins remaining for the special symbols until the spin before reaching the ceiling, the remaining spin count display XF2 shows "2 spins remaining."

Next, as shown in Figure 84(C), in the pre-ceiling演出C, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, while the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining spin count display XF2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the number 5, decorative symbol 8C displays the number 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the number 7. The remaining spin count display XF2 is displayed in conjunction with the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling演出C, since there is only one spin remaining for the special symbols until the spin before reaching the ceiling, the remaining spin count display XF2 shows "1 spin remaining."

Next, as shown in Figure 84(D), in the pre-ceiling fluctuation演出A, an enlarged image XF1 suggesting the high-speed time-saving mode is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Figure 84(E), in the pre-ceiling variation performance B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of variations display XF2 are displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the number 9, decorative symbol 8C displays the number 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the number 8. The remaining number of variations display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling variation performance B, it is a performance for the variation before reaching the ceiling, meaning that the number of variations of the special symbols is 0 until the variation before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of variations display XF2 is shown as "0 remaining". In other words, in this pre-ceiling variation演出B, even though the game state has changed from a low probability time-saving state to a normal state, the image XF1 suggesting the high-speed time-saving mode is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 84(F), in the ceiling reach animation, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed from approximately the bottom center to the bottom right, and the right-shooting indicator XF4 is displayed in the upper right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L is displayed as the 9 symbol, decorative symbol 8C is displayed as the 5 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R is displayed as the 7 symbol. The right-shooting indicator XF4 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which to shoot the game ball, specifically a display that suggests to the player to shoot to the right.
If a big win does not occur afterward, the "Bakusou Jinsan Mode" continues, and the animation continues in a low-probability time-saving state, similar to the ceiling reach animation. After reaching the ceiling, when the number of special symbol spins reaches 700, the game state changes from the low-probability time-saving state to the normal state, the Bakusou Jinsan Mode ends, and the display of the Bakusou Jinsan Mode suggestion image XF1 also ends.

[Mode-indicating image continuation effect B]
Figure 85 is a diagram illustrating Mode Indication Image Continuation Performance B. This Mode Indication Image Continuation Performance B represents the display performances for the number of special symbol spins before reaching the spin before reaching the ceiling, the spin before reaching the ceiling, and the spin when reaching the ceiling, during the low probability state (normal state). Specifically, in Mode Indication Image Continuation Performance B, Pre-Ceiling Performance A is the display performance when the number of special symbol spins is 3 spins remaining until the spin before reaching the ceiling, Pre-Ceiling Performance B is the display performance when the number of special symbol spins is 2 spins remaining until the spin before reaching the ceiling, Pre-Ceiling Performance C is the display performance when the number of special symbol spins is 1 spin remaining until the spin before reaching the ceiling, Pre-Ceiling Spin-off Performances A to B are the display performances during the spin before reaching the ceiling, and Ceiling Reaching Performance is the display performance when the number of special symbol spins is 0 spins remaining until reaching the ceiling (ceiling reached), that is, when entering the Bakusou Jin-tan Mode (Playtime). In this mode suggestion image continuation sequence B, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the diagram.

In this mode suggestion image continuation performance B, in the pre-ceiling performance A shown in Figure 85(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of spins display XF2 are displayed at the bottom. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the 7 symbol, decorative symbol 8C displays the 4 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R displays the 8 symbol. In addition, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image that suggests the game state is a low-probability time-saving state, that is, an image that suggests the high-speed time-saving mode, and it is trapezoidal in shape. The high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the words "high-speed time-saving mode" and various effects. Furthermore, the remaining spin count display XF2 is displayed in conjunction with the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1, and represents the remaining spins until the game state transitions from the low-probability time-saving state to the normal state, in other words, the remaining spins until the spin before reaching the ceiling. In the pre-ceiling演出A, the number of spins for the special symbols is 3 until the spin before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining spin count display XF2 shows "3 spins remaining." Also, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the spin count display XF2 move from right to left on display screen 7a, and once they reach the left edge, they reappear from the right edge and move to the left again.

Next, as shown in Figure 85(B), in the pre-ceiling performance B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and below them, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining spin count display XF2 are displayed consecutively. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the 9 symbol, decorative symbol 8C displays the 8 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R displays the 4 symbol. Also, the remaining spin count display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling performance B, since there are 2 spins remaining for the special symbols until the spin before reaching the ceiling, the remaining spin count display XF2 is shown as "2 spins remaining". Furthermore, the image XF1 suggesting the "High-Speed Time-Saving Mode" and the display XF2 showing the number of spins move from right to left on display screen 7a. Upon reaching the left edge, they reappear from the right edge and move to the left again.

Next, as shown in Figure 85(C), in the pre-ceiling performance C, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and below them, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining spin count display XF2 are displayed consecutively. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the number 5, decorative symbol 8C displays the number 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the number 7. Also, the remaining spin count display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling performance C, since there is only one spin remaining for the special symbols until the spin before reaching the ceiling, the remaining spin count display XF2 is shown as "1 spin remaining". Furthermore, the image XF1 suggesting the "High-Speed Time-Saving Mode" and the display XF2 showing the number of spins move from right to left on display screen 7a. Upon reaching the left edge, they reappear from the right edge and move to the left again.

Next, as shown in Figure 85(D), in the pre-ceiling fluctuation演出A, an enlarged image XF1 suggesting the high-speed time-saving mode is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Figure 85(E), in the pre-ceiling variation performance B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of variations display XF2 are displayed at the bottom. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the number 9, decorative symbol 8C displays the number 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the number 8. The remaining number of variations display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling variation performance B, it is a performance for the variation before reaching the ceiling, meaning that the number of variations of the special symbols is 0 until the variation before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of variations display XF2 is shown as "0 remaining". In other words, in this pre-ceiling variation演出B, even though the game state has changed from a low probability time-saving state to a normal state, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed. Furthermore, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the variation count display XF2 move from right to left on the display screen 7a, and once they reach the left edge, they reappear from the right edge and move to the left again.

Next, as shown in Figure 85(F), in the ceiling reach animation, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed at the bottom, and the right-shooting indicator XF4 is displayed in the upper right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the 9 symbol, decorative symbol 8C displays the 5 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R displays the 7 symbol. The right-shooting indicator XF4 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which to shoot the game balls, specifically, a display that suggests to the player to shoot to the right. In addition, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 moves from right to left on the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the left edge, it reappears from the right edge and moves to the left again.
If a big win does not occur afterward, the "Bakusou Jinsan Mode" continues, and the animation continues in a low-probability time-saving state, similar to the ceiling reach animation. After reaching the ceiling, when the number of special symbol spins reaches 700, the game state changes from the low-probability time-saving state to the normal state, the Bakusou Jinsan Mode ends, and the display of the Bakusou Jinsan Mode suggestion image XF1 also ends.

[Mode-indicating image continuation effect C]
Figure 86 is a diagram illustrating the Mode Indication Image Continuation Performance C. This Mode Indication Image Continuation Performance C represents the display performances for the number of special symbol spins before reaching the spin before reaching the ceiling, the spin before reaching the ceiling, and the spin when reaching the ceiling, during the low probability state (normal state). Specifically, in Mode Indication Image Continuation Performance C, the pre-ceiling performance A is the display performance when there are 3 spins remaining until the pre-ceiling spin of the special symbol, the pre-ceiling performance B is the display performance when there are 2 spins remaining until the pre-ceiling spin of the special symbol, the pre-ceiling performance C is the display performance when there is 1 spin remaining until the pre-ceiling spin of the special symbol, the pre-ceiling spin performances A to B are the display performances during the spin before reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling reach performance is the display performance when there are 0 spins remaining until reaching the ceiling (ceiling reach), that is, when entering the high-speed time-saving mode (playtime). In this mode suggestion image continuation演出 C, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the diagram.

In this mode suggestion image continuation performance C, in the pre-ceiling performance A shown in Figure 86(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of spins display XF2 are displayed below it. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the 7 symbol, decorative symbol 8C displays the 4 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R displays the 8 symbol. In addition, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image that suggests the game state is a low-probability time-saving state, that is, an image that suggests the high-speed time-saving mode, and is formed in a band shape from the lower right to the lower left of the display screen 7a. The high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the words "high-speed time-saving mode" and various effects. Furthermore, the remaining spin count display XF2 is displayed in conjunction with the "Rampage Time-Saving Mode" suggestion image XF1, and represents the remaining spins until the game state transitions from the low-probability time-saving state to the normal state, or in other words, the remaining spins until the spin before reaching the ceiling. In the pre-ceiling演出A, the number of spins for the special symbols is 3 until the spin before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining spin count display XF2 shows "3 spins remaining." Also, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the "Rampage Time-Saving Mode" suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the "Rampage Time-Saving Mode" suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the "Rampage Time-Saving Mode" suggestion image XF1, the text representing "Rampage Time-Saving Mode" moves from right to left on display screen 7a, and once it reaches the left edge, it reappears from the right edge and moves to the left again.

Next, as shown in Figure 86(B), in the pre-ceiling performance B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a, and below them, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining spin count display XF2 are displayed consecutively. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, the 9 symbol is displayed when decorative symbol 8L stops, the 8 symbol is displayed when decorative symbol 8C stops, and the 4 symbol is displayed when decorative symbol 8R stops. The remaining spin count display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling performance B, since there are 2 spins remaining until the spin before reaching the ceiling for the special symbols, the remaining spin count display XF2 shows "2 spins remaining". Also, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the "Bakusou Jin-tan Mode" suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Furthermore, in the Bakusou Jin-tan Mode suggestion image XF1, the text representing "Bakusou Jin-tan Mode" moves from right to left on display screen 7a, and upon reaching the left edge, reappears from the right edge and moves to the left again.

Next, as shown in Figure 86(C), in the pre-ceiling performance C, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a, and below them, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining spin count display XF2 are displayed consecutively. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the number 5, decorative symbol 8C displays the number 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the number 7. Also, the remaining spin count display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling performance C, since there is only one spin remaining for the special symbols until the spin before reaching the ceiling, the remaining spin count display XF2 is shown as "1 spin remaining". Furthermore, the "Bakusou Jin-tan Mode" suggestion image XF1 and the "Spin Count Display XF2" move from right to left on display screen 7a, and upon reaching the left edge, reappear from the right edge and move to the left again. Also, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the "Bakusou Jin-tan Mode" suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the "Bakusou Jin-tan Mode" suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Additionally, the text representing "Bakusou Jin-tan Mode" in the "Bakusou Jin-tan Mode" suggestion image XF1 moves from right to left on display screen 7a, and upon reaching the left edge, reappears from the right edge and moves to the left again.

Next, as shown in Figure 86(D), in the pre-ceiling fluctuation演出A, an enlarged image XF1 suggesting the high-speed time-saving mode is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Figure 86(E), in the pre-ceiling variation performance B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the lower left, and the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of variations display XF2 are displayed at the bottom. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the number 9, decorative symbol 8C displays the number 4, and decorative symbol 8R displays the number 8. The remaining number of variations display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling variation performance B, it is a performance for the variation before reaching the ceiling, meaning that the number of variations of the special symbols is 0 until the variation before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of variations display XF2 is shown as "0 remaining". In other words, in this pre-ceiling variation演出B, despite the game state changing from a low probability time-saving state to a normal state, the Bakusou Time-Saving Mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed. Also, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the Bakusou Time-Saving Mode suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the Bakusou Time-Saving Mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Furthermore, in the Bakusou Time-Saving Mode suggestion image XF1, the text representing "Bakusou Time-Saving Mode" moves from right to left on the display screen 7a, and once it reaches the left edge, it reappears from the right edge and moves to the left again.

Next, as shown in Figure 86(F), in the ceiling reach animation, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed below, and the right-shooting indicator XF4 is displayed in the upper right. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols; specifically, decorative symbol 8L displays the 9 symbol, decorative symbol 8C displays the 5 symbol, and decorative symbol 8R displays the 7 symbol. The right-shooting indicator XF4 is an indicator that suggests to the player the direction in which to shoot the game balls, specifically an indicator that suggests shooting to the right. Also, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Furthermore, in the image XF1 suggesting the "Rampage Time-Saving Mode," the text representing "Rampage Time-Saving Mode" moves from right to left on display screen 7a, and once it reaches the left edge, it reappears from the right edge and moves to the left again.
If a big win does not occur afterward, the "Bakusou Jinsan Mode" continues, and the animation continues in a low-probability time-saving state, similar to the ceiling reach animation. After reaching the ceiling, when the number of special symbol spins reaches 700, the game state changes from the low-probability time-saving state to the normal state, the Bakusou Jinsan Mode ends, and the display of the Bakusou Jinsan Mode suggestion image XF1 also ends.

[Variations]
In the above mode suggestion image continuation effect C, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 was configured such that the text and effects contained in the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 moved in a predetermined direction. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and the text and effects inside the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 may move while the image itself moves.

In the above mode suggestion image continuation sequences A to C, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling sequence and the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling sequence are the same. However, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling sequence and the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling sequence may have different shapes, contain different characters, contain different effects, or contain different images. Also, although the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling sequence and the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling arrival sequence are the same, the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling sequence and the high-speed time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling arrival sequence may have different shapes, contain different characters, contain different effects, or contain different images. Furthermore, while the image XF1 indicating the "Extreme Speed Shortening Mode" during the pre-ceiling fluctuation sequence and the image XF1 indicating the "Extreme Speed Shortening Mode" during the ceiling arrival sequence were the same, the image XF1 indicating the "Extreme Speed Shortening Mode" during the pre-ceiling fluctuation sequence and the image XF1 indicating the "Extreme Speed Shortening Mode" during the ceiling arrival sequence may have different shapes, contain different characters, contain different effects, or contain different images.

[Example of effect]
In the above mode suggestion image continuation sequences A to C, during the low probability state (normal state), in the pre-ceiling sequence where the number of special symbol spins is a few spins before reaching the spin before reaching the ceiling, the Bakusou Jin-tan mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed. Subsequently, in the pre-ceiling spin sequence where the number of special symbol spins reaches 499 spins (corresponding to the second specified number) before reaching the ceiling, even though the game state has changed from the low probability Jin-tan state to the normal state, the Bakusou Jin-tan mode suggestion image XF1, which indicates the low probability Jin-tan state, is displayed. Subsequently, when the ceiling is reached, the Bakusou Jin-tan mode suggestion image XF1 is continuously displayed in the ceiling reach sequence. With this configuration, if the game returns from the low probability Jin-tan state to the normal state before reaching the ceiling, and then immediately returns to the low probability Jin-tan state upon reaching the ceiling, the advantageous Bakusou Jin-tan mode is announced to the player without notifying them that they have returned to the normal state. This suppresses the player's disappointment upon returning to the normal state, and allows the player to enjoy the Bakusou Jin-tan mode with pleasure. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above mode indication image continuation sequences A to C, the high-speed time-saving mode indication image XF1 in the pre-ceiling sequence and the high-speed time-saving mode indication image XF1 in the pre-ceiling variation sequence have the same configuration. This configuration allows for a return to the normal state from the low-probability time-saving state before reaching the ceiling, and then a return to the low-probability time-saving state immediately upon reaching the ceiling. This reduces the player's disappointment upon returning to the normal state, allowing them to enjoy the high-speed time-saving mode more comfortably. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above mode indication image continuation sequences A to C, the high-speed time-saving mode indication image XF1 in the pre-ceiling sequence and the high-speed time-saving mode indication image XF1 in the ceiling arrival sequence have the same configuration. This configuration allows for a return to the normal state from the low-probability time-saving state before reaching the ceiling, and then a return to the low-probability time-saving state immediately upon reaching the ceiling. This reduces the player's disappointment upon returning to the normal state, allowing them to enjoy the high-speed time-saving mode more comfortably. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above mode indication image continuation effect C, the high-speed time-saving mode indication image XF1 has a configuration in which the internal text and effects move. This configuration allows the high-speed time-saving mode indication image XF1 to be emphasized to the player, allowing the player to enjoy the high-speed time-saving mode more comfortably. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above mode indication image continuation sequences A-C, the remaining number of spins is displayed (XF2) during the pre-ceiling sequences A-C. This configuration allows for a countdown display from the low-probability time-saving state back to the normal state, creating a sense of tension for the player during this time. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple display effects, in which the game is played in one of multiple game states, including a first game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player and a second game state that is relatively favorable to the player, and when the number of times the special symbols change in the first game state reaches a first predetermined number of times, the game state is changed to the second game state,
In the aforementioned gaming machine, when the number of times the special symbols change reaches a second predetermined number that is less than the first predetermined number, the gaming state may be changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a third display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect is an effect in which, when the second game state is in progress, the display means displays an image indicating a favorable mode for the player,
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect and when the number of times the special symbol has changed reaches the second predetermined number, and is an effect in which the advantageous mode suggestion image is displayed even though the number of times the special symbol has changed to the second predetermined number and the game state has changed to the first game state.
The third display effect is performed after the second display effect and when the number of times the special symbol has changed reaches the first predetermined number, and is an effect that displays the image indicating the advantageous mode.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XF-2]
A gaming machine according to the embodiment XF-1,
The image indicating the advantageous mode in the first display presentation and the image indicating the advantageous mode in the second display presentation are the same.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XF-2,
The image indicating the advantageous mode in the first display presentation and the image indicating the advantageous mode in the third display presentation are the same.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XF-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XF-3,
The aforementioned image suggesting the advantageous mode includes a moving image.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XF-4,
In the first display presentation, the remaining number of spins until the number of spins of the special symbol reaches the second specified number is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process in Figure 28, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0) during the low probability state (normal state), the game transitions to a playtime state (low probability time reduction state). This playtime state continues until the special symbol variations reach 700 times.

The following describes the multiple-section display effects A to C using Figures 87 to 89. These multiple-section display effects are executed during the variation of decorative symbols in the normal state, time-saving state (low probability, low base state), or probability variation state (high probability, high base state). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the multiple-section display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Multiple Section Display Presentation A]
Figure 87 is a diagram illustrating the multiple section display effect A. The multiple section display effect A in Figure 87 is an effect that occurs when special symbols change in the same way. In the multiple section display effect A, as shown in Figure 87(A), a decorative symbol change effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol change effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 87(B), a button display animation is performed. In this animation, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped, and a button image XG is displayed on the rotating decorative symbol 8C. This button image XG is an image intended to prompt the player to operate the animation button 63, and the word "PUSH" is displayed within the image. Decorative symbol 8L is stopped at two symbols, and decorative symbol 8R is stopped at three symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 87(C), a screen splitting effect is performed. In this screen splitting effect, the button image XG is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and a predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33 to form a divided region G. The button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this screen splitting effect, the divided region G is formed so that the button image XG is located in section G22. Each section of this divided region G is formed in a matrix-like (grid-like, checkerboard-like) pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 87(D), a section image display animation is performed. In the section image display animation, in the divided region G, the second character group CRB is displayed in section G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G21, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G31, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G23, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in section G12. In other words, in the section image display animation, in the divided region G, the second character group CRB is displayed in section G11, and then, starting from the button image XG, the first character group CRA or the second character group CRB is displayed sequentially in each section in a clockwise direction. The first character group CRA is an image representing a battle between friendly characters and enemy characters. The second character group, CRB, consists of images representing a smiling character and an emblem composed of a circle and a triangle.

Next, as shown in Figure 87(E), a section image erasure effect is performed. This effect simultaneously erases the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each section of the divided region G, resulting in a blackout. In the example in Figure 87(E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. Alternatively, other images, such as a static image, may be displayed instead of the blackout.

Next, as shown in Figure 87(F), a section-wide image display animation is performed. In this section-wide image display animation, a character image CRC, different from the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB, is displayed across the entire divided region G (each section). This character image CRC represents a fighting warrior character.

Next, as shown in Figure 87(G), Super Reach演出 A is performed. In this Super Reach演出 A, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop and are displayed as the number 7, while decorative symbol 8C is rapidly changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 87(H), Super Reach演出 B is performed. In this Super Reach演出 B, the reach state is maintained by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, while the first character group CRA, which was displayed in multiple sections of the divided area G of the section image display演出, is displayed, and predetermined actions are performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 87(I), the Super Reach演出 C is performed. In this Super Reach演出 C, the reach state is maintained by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, while the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed, and an action unfolds in which they confront each other.
Afterward, depending on the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a losing symbol or a winning symbol will be displayed, and the result of either a loss or a win will be announced.

[Multiple Section Display Effect B]
Figure 88 is a diagram illustrating the multiple section display effect B. The multiple section display effect B in Figure 88 is an effect that occurs when special symbols change in the same way. In the multiple section display effect B, as shown in Figure 88(A), a decorative symbol change effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol change effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 88(B), a button display animation is performed. In this animation, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped, and a button image XG is displayed on the rotating decorative symbol 8C. This button image XG is an image intended to prompt the player to operate the animation button 63, and the word "PUSH" is displayed within the image. Decorative symbol 8L is stopped at two symbols, and decorative symbol 8R is stopped at three symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 88(C), a screen splitting effect is performed. In this screen splitting effect, the button image XG is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and a predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33 to form a divided region G. The button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this screen splitting effect, the divided region G is formed so that the button image XG is located in section G22. Each section of this divided region G is formed in a matrix-like (grid-like, checkerboard-like) pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 88(D), a section image display animation is performed. In the section image display animation, in the divided region G, the second character group CRB is displayed in section G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G21, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G31, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G23, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in section G12. In other words, in the section image display animation, in the divided region G, the second character group CRB is displayed in section G11, and then, starting from the button image XG, the first character group CRA or the second character group CRB is displayed sequentially in each section in a clockwise direction. The first character group CRA is an image representing a battle between friendly characters and enemy characters. The second character group, CRB, consists of images representing a smiling character and an emblem composed of a circle and a triangle.

Furthermore, within the divided region G, the frame of each section has a predetermined color effect, and the color of the frame effect differs depending on the image displayed in each section. Specifically, in sections G21, G31, G32, G33, G23, and G13, where the first character group CRA is displayed, the frame effect is red; in sections G12 and G11, where the second character group CRB is displayed, the frame effect is blue; and in section G22, where the button image XG is displayed, the frame effect is green.

Next, as shown in Figure 88(E), a section image erasure effect is performed. This effect simultaneously erases the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each section of the divided region G, resulting in a blackout. In the example in Figure 88(E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. Alternatively, another image, such as a static image, may be displayed instead of the blackout.

Next, as shown in Figure 88(F), a section-wide image display animation is performed. In this section-wide image display animation, the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB, which were displayed in each section during the section image display animation, are displayed across the entire divided region G (each section).

Next, as shown in Figure 88(G), Super Reach演出 A is performed. In this Super Reach演出 A, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop and are displayed as the number 7, while decorative symbol 8C is rapidly changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 88(H), Super Reach演出 B is performed. In this Super Reach演出 B, the reach state is maintained by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, while the first character group CRA, which was displayed in multiple sections of the divided area G of the section image display演出, is displayed, and predetermined actions are performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 88(I), the Super Reach演出 C is performed. In this Super Reach演出 C, the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, while the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed, and an action unfolds in which they confront each other. The character image CRC represents a warrior character in battle.
Afterward, depending on the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a losing symbol or a winning symbol will be displayed, and the result of either a loss or a win will be announced.

[Multiple Section Display Effect C]
Figure 89 is a diagram illustrating the multiple section display effect C. The multiple section display effect C in Figure 89 is an effect that occurs when special symbols change in the same way. In the multiple section display effect C, as shown in Figure 89(A), a decorative symbol change effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol change effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 89(B), a button display animation is performed. In this animation, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped, and a button image XG is displayed on the rotating decorative symbol 8C. This button image XG is an image that prompts the player to operate the animation button 63, and the word "PUSH" is displayed within the image. Decorative symbol 8L is stopped at two symbols, and decorative symbol 8R is stopped at three symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 89(C), a screen splitting effect is performed. In this screen splitting effect, the button image XG is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and a predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33 to form a divided area G. The button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this screen splitting effect, the divided area G is formed so that the button image XG is located in section G22. Each section of this divided area G is a rectangle and is formed in a roughly matrix-like (grid-like, checkerboard-like) pattern. The shape and size of each section of the divided area G are different.
Furthermore, adjacent sections of the divided region G are generally separated by a predetermined distance. However, there may be parts where adjacent sections of the divided region G are in contact. In the following section image display effects, section image deletion effects, and overall section image display effects, the distance between adjacent sections remains the same as the distance during the screen division effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 89(D), a section image display animation is performed. In the section image display animation, in the divided region G, the second character group CRB is displayed in section G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G21, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G31, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G23, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in section G12. In other words, in the section image display animation, in the divided region G, after the second character group CRB is displayed in section G11, the first character group CRA or the second character group CRB is displayed sequentially in each section in a clockwise direction starting from the button image XG. The first character group CRA is an image representing a battle between friendly characters and enemy characters. The second character group, CRB, consists of images representing a smiling character and an emblem composed of a circle and a triangle.

Furthermore, within the divided region G, the frame of each section has a predetermined color effect, and the color of the frame effect differs depending on the image displayed in each section. Specifically, in sections G21, G31, G32, G33, G23, and G13, where the first character group CRA is displayed, the frame effect is red; in sections G12 and G11, where the second character group CRB is displayed, the frame effect is blue; and in section G22, where the button image XG is displayed, the frame effect is green.

Next, as shown in Figure 89(E), a section image erasure effect is performed. This effect simultaneously erases the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each section of the divided region G, resulting in a blackout. In the example in Figure 89(E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. Alternatively, another image, such as a static image, may be displayed instead of the blackout.

Next, as shown in Figure 89(F), a section-wide image display animation is performed. In this section-wide image display animation, the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB, which were displayed in each section during the section image display animation, are displayed across the entire divided region G (each section).

Next, as shown in Figure 89(G), Super Reach演出 A is performed. In this Super Reach演出 A, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop and are displayed as the number 7, while decorative symbol 8C is rapidly changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 89(H), Super Reach演出 B is performed. In this Super Reach演出 B, the reach state is maintained by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, while the first character group CRA, which was displayed in multiple sections of the divided area G of the section image display演出, is displayed, and predetermined actions are performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 89(I), the Super Reach演出 C is performed. In this Super Reach演出 C, the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, while the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed, and an action unfolds in which they confront each other.
Afterward, depending on the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a losing symbol or a winning symbol will be displayed, and the result of either a loss or a win will be announced.

[Variations]
In the above-described multiple section display effects B and C, the section image display effect was configured to display the first character group CRA, which has a larger number of displayed sections than the first character group CRB, across the entire divided area G. However, it is not limited to this, and the section image display effect may also be configured to display the second character group CRB, which has a smaller number of displayed sections than the first character group CRA.
In the above-described multiple-section display effects A to C, the button image XG is the same shape and size in the button display effect, screen splitting effect, and section image display effect. However, it is not limited to this, and different shapes and/or different sizes may be used in the button display effect, screen splitting effect, and section image display effect.

[Example of effect]
In the above-described multiple section display effects A to C, a screen splitting effect displays a divided area G that divides a predetermined area of the display screen 7a. In the section image display effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of divided area G, and the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine sections of divided area G. Subsequently, in the section image erasure effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, the first character group CRA displayed in the six sections and the second character group CRB displayed in the two sections are erased. With this configuration, different image groups displayed in multiple sections are erased, providing the player with a spectacular sight in an instant and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the multi-section display effects A to C described above, during the screen splitting effect, when the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the split area G, and the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine sections of the split area G, the button image XG representing the effect button 63 is displayed. With this configuration, the button image XG is displayed alongside the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in multiple sections, providing the player with a spectacular and mysterious experience, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-described multi-section display effect A, during the section image display effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, and the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G. Then, during the section image erasure effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, the first character group CRA displayed in the six sections and the second character group CRB displayed in the two sections disappear. Afterward, during the overall section image effect, a portion of an image (character image CRC) different from the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB is displayed in the divided area G. This configuration creates a sense of mystery by displaying the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG in the divided area G, thereby enhancing the appeal of the section image display effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-described multi-section display effect A, during the section image display effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G, and the button image XG is displayed in one of the sections of the divided area G. Then, during the section image erasure effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, the first character group CRA displayed in the six sections, the second character group CRB displayed in the two sections, and the button image XG disappear. Afterward, during the overall section image effect, an image different from the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG (character image CRC) is displayed in the divided area G. This configuration allows for a greater sense of mystery compared to displaying the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG in the divided area G, thereby enhancing the appeal of the section image display effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the multiple-section display effects A to C described above, the button display effect displays the button image XG, and the screen splitting effect forms a divided area G that includes the button image XG in one section. This configuration allows the player to perceive the divided area G as being centered around the button image XG, thereby creating anticipation for the effects using the corresponding effect button 63. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing multiple display effects and an operating means that can be operated by a player,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect is an effect in which the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of sections and displayed, a first image is displayed in a first number of the plurality of sections, and a second image is displayed in a second number of the plurality of sections.
The second display effect is an effect in which the first image displayed in the first number section and the second image displayed in the second number section disappear when the player operates the operating means.
A combination of the first and second display effects may be performed.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the first display performance is performed, followed by the second display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[XG-2]
The gaming machine described in XG-1,
In some cases, a third display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The third display effect is an effect in which an image of the operating means representing the operating means is displayed in a predetermined section among the plurality of sections of the display means,
The aforementioned combination effect includes the aforementioned third display effect,
In the aforementioned combination performance, the third display performance is performed while the first display performance is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[XG-3]
The gaming machine described in XG-2,
In the second display effect in the aforementioned combination effect, the first image and the second image disappear, and an image different from the first image and the second image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[XG-4]
The gaming machine described in XG-3,
In some cases, a fourth display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is represented using the plurality of sections of the display means, specifically the section where the first image is displayed, the section where the second image is displayed, and the section where the operation means image is displayed.
The aforementioned combination effect includes the fourth display effect,
In the aforementioned combination presentation, the fourth display presentation is performed after the second display presentation.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[XG-5]
The gaming machine described in XG-4,
When the first and third display effects of the combination effect are performed, and the display area of the display means is divided into multiple sections for display, the effect is performed with the operating means image displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process in Figure 28, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0) during the low probability state (normal state), the game transitions to a playtime state (low probability time reduction state). This playtime state continues until the special symbol variations reach 700 times.

The following describes the functional timer display effects A to C using Figures 90 to 92. These functional timer display effects are executed during the reel spinning animation when the game state is normal, shortened time (low probability, low base state), or probability variation state (high probability, high base state). Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a functional timer display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Function-Specific Timer Display Presentation A]
Figure 90 is a diagram illustrating the function-specific timer display animation A. The function-specific timer display animation A in Figure 90 is an animation performed with the same variation of special symbols. In the function-specific timer display animation A, as shown in Figure 90(A), a decorative symbol variation animation is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation animation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 90(B), the first timer display animation A is performed. In this first timer display animation A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below it. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown timer, and the timer value is displayed within a double rectangular frame. The timer value can display two digits in seconds, and can also display seconds up to two decimal places. In the example shown in the figure, the first timer display XH1 is set to an initial timer value of exactly 10 seconds. The target timer value for the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in Figure 90(C), the first timer display animation B is performed. In this first timer display animation B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed in the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 becomes 0 seconds, which is the target timer value.

Next, as shown in Figure 90(D), a movable mechanism activation animation is performed. In this animation, the first movable mechanism 14 activates and moves from its retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to its deployed position. At this time, the area on the display screen 7a that the first movable mechanism 14 has passed through is darkened to emphasize that the first movable mechanism 14 has activated. In the example shown, the area on the display screen 7a that has darkened due to the passage of the first movable mechanism 14 is indicated by hatching.

Next, in the movable mechanism activation sequence, after the first movable mechanism 14 returns to its retracted position, the jackpot symbol sequence A is performed, as shown in Figure 90(E). In this jackpot symbol sequence A, the jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of six symbols; that is, the jackpot symbol is formed by a sequence of six symbols. This jackpot symbol using six symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot will transition to a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state), and is therefore of lower value to the player than the jackpot symbol using seven symbols, which will be described later.

Next, as shown in Figure 90(F), the second timer display is performed. In this second timer display, the second timer display XH2 is displayed in the same position on the display screen 7a where the first timer display XH1 was previously displayed. This second timer display XH2 is a countdown timer, displaying the timer value within a single rectangular frame, which differs from the first timer display XH1. Furthermore, the second timer display XH2 can display the timer value as two digits in seconds, but the decimal part of the seconds is omitted. In the example shown, the second timer display XH2 is set to an initial timer value of 5 seconds. The target timer value for the second timer display XH2 is 0 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 90(G), a button image display animation is performed. In this animation, a button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image intended to prompt the player to press the animation button 63, and is displayed in conjunction with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a short time after the countdown of the second timer display XH2 begins. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 90(H), the jackpot symbol animation B is performed. In this jackpot symbol animation B, the jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 7 symbols, that is, the jackpot symbol is formed by matching 7 symbols. This jackpot symbol made of 7 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot will transition to a probability variation state (high probability time reduction state), and is a jackpot symbol of higher value to the player than the jackpot symbol made of 6 symbols mentioned above.
After that, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game, the game transitions to a probability variation state (high probability, high base state).

[Function-Specific Timer Display Presentation B]
Figure 91 is a diagram illustrating the function-specific timer display animation B. The function-specific timer display animation B in Figure 91 is an animation performed with the same variation of special symbols. In the function-specific timer display animation B, as shown in Figure 91(A), a decorative symbol variation animation is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation animation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 91(B), the first timer display animation A is performed. In this first timer display animation A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below it. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown timer, and the timer value is displayed within a double rectangular frame. The timer value can display two digits in seconds, and can also display seconds up to two decimal places. In the example shown in the figure, the first timer display XH1 is set to an initial timer value of exactly 10 seconds. The target timer value for the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in Figure 91(C), the first timer display animation B is performed. In this first timer display animation B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed in the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 reaches the target timer value of 0 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 91(D), a movable mechanism activation animation is performed. In this animation, the first movable mechanism 14 activates and moves from its retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to its deployed position. At this time, the area on the display screen 7a that the first movable mechanism 14 has passed through is darkened to emphasize that the first movable mechanism 14 has activated. In the example shown, the area on the display screen 7a that has darkened due to the passage of the first movable mechanism 14 is indicated by hatching.

Next, in the movable mechanism activation sequence, after the first movable mechanism 14 returns to its retracted position, the jackpot symbol sequence A is performed, as shown in Figure 91(E). In this jackpot symbol sequence A, the jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of six symbols; that is, the jackpot symbol is formed by a sequence of six symbols. This jackpot symbol using six symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot will transition to a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state), and is therefore of lower value to the player than the jackpot symbol using seven symbols, which will be described later.

Next, as shown in Figure 91(F), the second timer display animation is performed. In this second timer display animation, the second timer display XH2 is displayed in a different position on the display screen 7a than where the first timer display XH1 (described later) was displayed. This second timer display XH2 is a countdown timer, and the timer value is displayed within a hexagonal frame, having a different shape (appearance) from the first timer display XH1. Furthermore, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can be displayed as two digits in seconds, but the decimal part of the seconds is omitted. In the example shown in the figure, the second timer display XH2 is set to an initial timer value of 5 seconds. The target timer value for the second timer display XH2 is 0 seconds. The first timer display XH1 in the first timer display animation and the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display animation have different sizes. In this case, the first timer display XH1 may be larger or smaller than the second timer display XH2.

Next, as shown in Figure 91(G), a button image display animation is performed. In this animation, a button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image intended to prompt the player to press the animation button 63, and is displayed in conjunction with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a short time after the countdown of the second timer display XH2 begins. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 91(H), the jackpot symbol animation B is performed. In this jackpot symbol animation B, the jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 7 symbols, that is, the jackpot symbol is formed by matching 7 symbols. This jackpot symbol made of 7 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot will transition to a probability variation state (high probability time reduction state), and is a jackpot symbol of higher value to the player than the jackpot symbol made of 6 symbols mentioned above.
After that, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game, the game transitions to a probability variation state (high probability, high base state).

[Function-Specific Timer Display Presentation C]
Figure 92 is a diagram illustrating the function-specific timer display animation C. The function-specific timer display animation C in Figure 92 is an animation performed when special symbols change in the same way. In the function-specific timer display animation C, as shown in Figure 92(A), a decorative symbol change animation is performed first. In this decorative symbol change animation, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 92(B), the first timer display animation A is performed. In this first timer display animation A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below it. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown timer, and the timer value is displayed within a double rectangular frame. The timer value can display two digits in seconds, and can also display seconds up to two decimal places. In the example shown in the figure, the first timer display XH1 is set to an initial timer value of exactly 10 seconds. The target timer value for the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in Figure 92(C), the first timer display animation B is performed. In this first timer display animation B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed in the same position, and the animation shows the timer value of the first timer display XH1 reaching 5 seconds before the target timer value of 0 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 92(D), a movable mechanism activation animation is performed. In this animation, the first movable mechanism 14 activates and moves from its retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to its deployed position. That is, this movable mechanism activation animation is designed so that the first movable mechanism 14 activates before the timer value on the first timer display XH1 reaches the target timer value of 0 seconds. At this time, the area on the display screen 7a that the first movable mechanism 14 has passed through is darkened to emphasize that the first movable mechanism 14 has activated. In the example shown, the area on the display screen 7a that has darkened due to the passage of the first movable mechanism 14 is indicated by hatching. The figure also shows that the timer value on the first timer display XH1 is 04:50, which is before the target timer value.

Next, in the movable mechanism activation sequence, after the first movable mechanism 14 returns to its retracted position, the jackpot symbol sequence A is performed, as shown in Figure 92(E). In this jackpot symbol sequence A, the jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of six symbols; that is, the jackpot symbol is formed by a sequence of six symbols. This jackpot symbol using six symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot will transition to a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state), and is therefore of lower value to the player than the jackpot symbol using seven symbols, which will be described later.

Next, as shown in Figure 92(F), the second timer display animation is performed. In this second timer display animation, the second timer display XH2 is displayed in a different position on the display screen 7a than where the first timer display XH1 (described later) was displayed. This second timer display XH2 is a countdown timer, and the timer value is displayed within a hexagonal frame, having a different shape (appearance) from the first timer display XH1. Furthermore, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can be displayed as two digits in seconds, but the decimal part of the seconds is omitted. In the example shown in the figure, the second timer display XH2 is set to an initial timer value of 5 seconds. The target timer value for the second timer display XH2 is 0 seconds. The first timer display XH1 in the first timer display animation and the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display animation have different sizes. In this case, the first timer display XH1 may be larger or smaller than the second timer display XH2.

Next, as shown in Figure 92(G), a button image display animation is performed. In this animation, a button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image intended to prompt the player to press the animation button 63, and is displayed in conjunction with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a short time after the countdown of the second timer display XH2 begins. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 92(H), the jackpot symbol animation B is performed. In this jackpot symbol animation B, the jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 7 symbols, that is, the jackpot symbol is formed by matching 7 symbols. This jackpot symbol made of 7 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot will transition to a probability variation state (high probability time reduction state), and is a jackpot symbol of higher value to the player than the jackpot symbol made of 6 symbols mentioned above.
After that, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game, the game transitions to a probability variation state (high probability, high base state).

[Variations]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the function-specific timer display effects A to C are performed during the same spin, but the invention is not limited to this, and the function-specific timer display effects A to C may be performed across multiple spins.
In the above-described timer display effects A to C, in the same variation, the first movable mechanism 14 is activated based on the first timer display effect, and the jackpot symbol effect is performed, and then the jackpot symbol effect is performed based on the second timer display effect. However, it is not limited to this, and the jackpot symbol effect may be performed based on the second timer display effect, and then the first movable mechanism 14 is activated based on the first timer display effect, and the jackpot symbol effect may be performed.
In the above-described timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 were countdown timers, but the system is not limited to this; one or both of the two timers may be count-up timers.
In the above-described timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 were configured not to appear at the same time. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 may be configured to appear at the same time.
In the above-described timer display effects A to C, the button image XH3 is displayed after the second timer display XH2 is displayed, but it is not limited to this, and may be displayed before the second timer display XH2 is displayed, or at the same time as the second timer display XH2 is displayed.
In the above-described timer display effects A to C, when the second timer display XH2 appeared and the button image XH3 was displayed, a jackpot symbol of relatively higher value to the player (a jackpot symbol of 7 made up of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R) was displayed compared to the jackpot symbol effect A. However, even if the second timer display XH2 appears, if the button image XH3 does not appear, the jackpot symbol does not upgrade, and the same jackpot symbol as in jackpot symbol effect A is displayed.

[Example of effect]
In the above-described timer display effects A to C, during the same spin, the first movable mechanism 14 is activated (moves) based on the first timer display XH1, and then the jackpot symbol is displayed based on the second timer display XH2. With this configuration, two different timer displays are performed during the same spin, each with a different role. One timer display activates the first movable mechanism 14, and the other timer display displays the jackpot symbol. This prevents the timer effects from becoming monotonous and enhances the enjoyment of the timer effects. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above-described timer display effects A to C, during the same spin, the first movable mechanism 14 operates (moves) based on the first timer display XH1, displaying a jackpot symbol with 6 symbols that suggests a jackpot of relatively low value to the player. Subsequently, based on the second timer display XH2, a jackpot symbol with 7 symbols that suggests a jackpot of relatively high value to the player is displayed. With this configuration, two different timer displays occur during the same spin, each with a different role. One timer display activates the first movable mechanism 14 and displays a jackpot symbol with 6 symbols that suggests a jackpot of relatively low value to the player, while the other timer display displays a jackpot symbol with 7 symbols that suggests a jackpot of relatively high value to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy each timer display, preventing monotony in the timer effects and enhancing the enjoyment of the timer effects. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-described timer display effect C, the first timer display effect sets the initial timer value of the first timer display XH1 and counts down. The first movable mechanism 14 activates before the timer value reaches the target of 0 seconds. This configuration surprises the player and enhances the excitement of the timer effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-described timer display effects B and C, the display position of the first timer display XH1 in the first timer display effect and the display position of the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display effect are configured to be different. This configuration allows the player to clearly see the difference between the two timer displays because the display positions of the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 are different. Therefore, the player can enjoy distinguishing between the two timer displays, preventing monotony in the timer effects and enhancing the player's interest in them. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-described timer display effects B and C, the first timer display XH1 in the first timer display effect and the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display effect are configured to be of different sizes. This configuration allows the player to clearly see the difference between the two timer displays, as they are of different sizes. Therefore, the player can enjoy distinguishing between the two timer displays, preventing monotony in the timer effects and enhancing their appeal. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect XH-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means and a movable member capable of executing multiple display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect is an effect in which the movable member operates based on the timer display of the first embodiment,
The second display effect is an effect that displays the first jackpot symbol based on a timer display of a second form which has a different form from the timer display of the first form,
A combination of the first and second display effects may be performed.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed during the same fluctuation.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XH-2]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XH-1,
In the first display presentation of the combination presentation, the movable member operates based on the timer display of the first mode, and a second jackpot symbol different from the first jackpot symbol is displayed.
The first jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol that is of higher value to the player than the second jackpot symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XH-3]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XH-2,
In the first display presentation of the combination presentation, the initial timer value of the timer display in the first mode is set and counted, and the movable member is activated before the timer value of the timer display in the first mode reaches the target value.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Condition XH-4]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XH-3,
In the aforementioned combination display, the timer display in the first mode of the first display display and the timer display in the second mode of the second display display differ in their display positions on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XH-5]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XH-4,
In the aforementioned combination display, the timer display in the first mode of the first display display and the timer display in the second mode of the second display display are of different sizes.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The specific image transition effects A to C will be explained below using Figures 93 to 95. These specific image transition effects can be executed during the variation effect of the animation symbols. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the specific image transition effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Specific Image Transition Effect A]
Figure 93 is a diagram illustrating the specific image transition effect A.
First, as shown in Figure 93(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 93(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 93(C), the battle start animation is executed. This animation marks the beginning of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. The left animation symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right animation symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 93(D) to (F), an image transition animation is executed. During the image transition animation, four images labeled "FIGHT"—G1, G2, G3, and G4—are displayed around the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, image G1 is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, image G2 at the left, image G3 at the bottom, and image G4 at the right.

In Figure 93(D), the brightness of image G1, one of the four images labeled "FIGHT," is set higher than that of the other images G2-G4. As a result, image G1 appears brighter than the other images G2-G4.

In Figure 93(E), the brightness of image G2, one of the four images labeled "FIGHT," is set higher than that of the other images G1, G3, and G4. As a result, image G2 appears brighter than the other images G1, G3, and G4.

In Figure 93(F), the brightness of image G4, one of the four images labeled "FIGHT," is set higher than that of the other images G1-G3. As a result, image G4 appears brighter than the other images G1-G3.

In the image transition sequence, images with higher brightness are created in the order of Image G1 → Image G2 → Image G3 → Image G4 → Image G1 → ... . As a result, in the image transition sequence, the brightly displayed "FIGHT" image rotates counterclockwise around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Furthermore, while the image transition animation is running, a battle animation between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, during the image transition animation, the left animation symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right animation symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 93(G), the victory/defeat determination animation is executed. This animation announces the result of the battle. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA won the battle. If the ally character CRA lost the battle, the enemy character CRB would be displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in Figure 93(H), the confirmed stop animation (winning) is executed. The confirmed stop animation (winning) is an animation where the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all appear as the same number and stop. Here, the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R all stop at "5".

[Specific image transition effect B]
Figure 94 is a diagram illustrating the specific image transition effect B.
First, as shown in Figure 94(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 94(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 94(C), the battle start animation is executed. This animation marks the beginning of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. The left animation symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right animation symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 94(D) to (F), an image transition animation is executed. During the image transition animation, six images G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, and G6, which constitute the string "BATTLE," are displayed around the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, image G1, representing "B," is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a; image G2, representing "A," is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a; image G3, representing "T," is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a; image G4, representing "T," is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a; image G5, representing "L," is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a; and image G6, representing "E," is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a.

In Figure 94(D), the brightness of image G1, one of the six images that make up the string "BATTLE," is set higher than that of the other images G2-G6. As a result, image G1 appears brighter than the other images G2-G6.

In Figure 94(E), the brightness of image G4, which is one of the six images that make up the string "BATTLE," is set higher than that of the other images G1-G3, G5, and G6. As a result, image G4 appears brighter than the other images G1-G3, G5, and G6.

In Figure 94(F), the brightness of image G6, one of the six images that make up the string "BATTLE," is set higher than that of the other images G1-G5. As a result, image G6 appears brighter than the other images G1-G5.

In the image transition sequence, images with higher brightness are created in the following order: Image G1 for "B" → Image G2 for "A" → Image G3 for "T" → Image G4 for "T" → Image G5 for "L" → Image G6 for "E" → Image G1 for "B" → ... This results in the image transition sequence displaying each character of the "BATTLE" string rotating counterclockwise around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Furthermore, while the image transition animation is running, a battle animation between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, during the image transition animation, the left animation symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right animation symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 94(G), the victory/defeat determination animation is executed. This animation announces the result of the battle. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA won the battle. If the ally character CRA lost the battle, the enemy character CRB would be displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in Figure 94(H), the confirmed stop animation (winning) is executed. The confirmed stop animation (winning) is an animation where the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all appear as the same number and stop. Here, the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R all stop at "5".

[Specific image transition effect C]
Figure 95 is a diagram illustrating the specific image transition effect C.
First, as shown in Figure 95(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 95(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 95(C), the battle start animation is executed. This animation marks the beginning of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. The left animation symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right animation symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 95(D) to (F), an image transition animation is executed. During the image transition animation, six images G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, and G6, which constitute the string "BATTLE," are displayed around the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, image G1, representing "B," is displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a; image G2, representing "A," is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a; image G3, representing "T," is displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a; image G4, representing "T," is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a; image G5, representing "L," is displayed in the lower right of the display screen 7a; and image G6, representing "E," is displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Furthermore, in the image transition sequence, the second movable component 15 moves downward (advances) from its retracted position and stops at its advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The letters "OARO" on the second movable component 15 are configured to light up independently, one letter at a time. In addition to illumination, the brightness may also be adjustable.

In Figure 95(D), the brightness of image G1, one of the six images that make up the string "BATTLE," is set higher than that of the other images G2-G6. As a result, image G1 appears brighter than the other images G2-G6.

In Figure 95(E), the brightness of image G6, one of the six images that make up the string "BATTLE," is set higher than that of the other images G1-G5. As a result, image G6 appears brighter than the other images G1-G5.

In Figure 95(F), the brightness of the letter "O" (the rightmost "O"), one of the four letters that make up the string "OARO," is set higher than that of the other letters. This makes the letter "O" appear brighter than the other letters.

In the image transition sequence, images and characters with higher brightness compared to other images are created in the following order: Image G1 of "B" → Image G2 of "A" → Image G3 of "T" → Image G4 of "T" → Image G5 of "L" → Image G6 of "E" → Letter "O" → Letter "R" → Letter "A" → Letter "O" → Image G1 of "B" → ... As a result, in the image transition sequence, each character constituting the strings "BATTLE" and "OARO" is displayed rotating counterclockwise around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Furthermore, while the image transition animation is running, a battle animation between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, during the image transition animation, the left animation symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right animation symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 95(G), the victory/defeat determination animation is executed. This animation announces the result of the battle. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA won the battle. If the ally character CRA lost the battle, the enemy character CRB would be displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in Figure 95(H), the confirmed stop animation (winning) is executed. The confirmed stop animation (winning) is an animation where the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop at the same number. Here, the left animation symbol 8L, the middle animation symbol 8C, and the right animation symbol 8R all stop at the number "5".

[Example of effect]
The following shows examples of the effects of specific image transition animations.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, multiple images are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and the brightness of these images is changed to distinguish a specific image from the remaining images. This process is repeated, thereby transitioning a specific image from the multiple images. Specifically, four images spelling "FIGHT" are displayed, and the string "FIGHT" is transitioned by changing the brightness of the four images G1 to G4 (Figure 93(D)(E)(F)). Also, the characters of the string "BATTLE" are transitioned by changing the brightness of the six images G1 to G6 that make up the string (Figure 94(D)(E)(F), Figure 95(D)(E)(F)). With this configuration, the display of images on the periphery of the display screen 7a becomes novel, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, images G1-G4 for "FIGHT" and images G1-G6 that constitute the string "BATTLE" correspond to "predetermined images." Brightness corresponds to "color attributes." Additionally, the image transition effects in Figures 93-95 correspond to "transition effects."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the image transition effect, a specific image among multiple images transitions counterclockwise toward the display screen 7a (Figures 93(D) to (F), 94(D) to (F), and 95(D) to (F)). With this configuration, rotational movement can be added to the display of images at the periphery of the display screen 7a, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a second movable mechanism 15 is provided, and the characters constituting the string "OARO" light up in accordance with the transition of a specific image (Figure 95(F)). With this configuration, movement can be added to the display of images in the peripheral area, including the second movable mechanism 15, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. The second movable mechanism 15 corresponds to the "light-emitting part" and the "mechanism".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when an image transition effect is being executed, a battle scene between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds in the center of the display screen 7a. With this configuration, movement can be added to the periphery of the battle scene, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. The moving image of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fighting corresponds to the "image related to the predetermined image," and the battle scene corresponds to the "image display effect."

[Variations]
The following shows some variations of the specific image transition effect.
[Variation 1]
The above example involved changing the brightness of an image during a transition, but this is not the only method; any method that changes the color attributes of a given image's display color is acceptable. These color attributes include brightness, lightness, saturation, and hue.

[Modified example 2]
In the above example, the transition animation showed specific images moving counterclockwise, but they may also be moved clockwise. In addition to clockwise and counterclockwise, the images may be moved in a predetermined order, or in a random order.

[Modification 3]
In the above example, the second movable component 15 was used to illuminate the characters that make up the string "OARO" in accordance with the transition of a specific image (Figure 95(F)). Alternatively, the "light-emitting part" could be implemented as an image. For example, the characters "OARO" could be displayed as an image on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
In the above example, the second movable component 15 is used as the "light-emitting part," but there may be multiple "light-emitting parts." For example, four panel lamps may be provided near the corners of the display screen 7a.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine having a display device,
The display device can display multiple predetermined images on the periphery of its display screen, and by repeatedly changing the color attribute, which is an attribute of the display color of the multiple predetermined images, it is possible to perform a transition effect that causes the specific image to transition.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine described in embodiment B6-1,
In the transition animation, the specific image among the plurality of predetermined images transitions clockwise or counterclockwise toward the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Aspect B6-3]
A gaming machine according to the embodiment B6-1 or embodiment B6-2,
The display screen is further equipped with a light-emitting unit located near the periphery of the screen, which is capable of emitting light.
The light-emitting unit emits light in accordance with the transition of the specified image.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Pattern B6-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment B6-3,
The light-emitting unit is displayed as an image on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine described in embodiment B6-3,
The light-emitting part is arranged as a feature at the periphery of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Aspect B6-6]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions from B6-1 to B6-5,
In parallel with the aforementioned transition animation, an image display animation can be executed, which displays an image related to a predetermined image in a specific area of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The specific image absorption effects A to C will be explained below using Figures 96 to 98. These specific image absorption effects can be executed during the variation effect of the effect symbols. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it includes an instruction to execute the specific image absorption effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Specific Image Absorption Effect A]
Figure 96 is a diagram illustrating the specific image absorption effect A.
First, as shown in Figure 96(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 96(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 96(C), (D), and (F), an image animation is performed. The image animation is performed with the second movable object 15 moved so that it overlaps the top of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The image animation is also performed in the subsequent enlarged image display animation (Figure 96(G)) and the display color change animation (Figure 96(H)). The second movable object 15 has the string "OARO" written on it, composed of multiple characters.

As shown in Figure 96(C), in the initial image display, images TG1, TG2, and TG3 corresponding to the leftmost "O," "A," and "R" characters of the string "OARO" on the second movable mechanism are displayed. Image TG1, representing "O," moves across the display screen 7a towards the leftmost "O" on the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y1. Image TG2, representing "A," moves across the display screen 7a towards the "A" on the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y2. Image TG3, representing "R," moves across the display screen 7a towards the "R" on the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y3. Note that the image corresponding to the rightmost "O" of the string "OARO" is not displayed here.

Furthermore, the movement speeds of images TG1 to TG3 may be the same or different. Also, as shown in Figure 96(C), images TG1 to TG3 may move along a straight trajectory or along a curved trajectory that sways gently. Moreover, images TG1 to TG3 may move while rotating. The axis of rotation in this case can be anything, but for example, an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a could be considered.

As shown in Figure 96(D), in the mid-stage image presentation, the image TG1 of "O" is closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15 compared to the initial stage image presentation. The image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y1, to get even closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15. Also, the image TG2 of "A" moves as indicated by arrow Y2 and disappears near the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15 (shown by a dashed line in the figure). For example, the image TG2 of "A" shrinks as if being sucked into the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15, and disappears as its transparency increases. When the image TG2 of "A" disappears, a new image TG4 of "A" is displayed. The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y4. Furthermore, the image TG3 of "R" is closer to the "R" on the second movable mechanism 15 compared to the initial image presentation. As indicated by arrow Y3, the image TG3 of "R" moves further along the display screen 7a to get even closer to the "R" on the second movable mechanism 15.

Next, as shown in Figure 96(E), a chance animation is executed. The chance animation is an animation performed based on the expectation of winning. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed slightly to the left of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG, "Chance," is displayed. Note that the chance animation is not limited to this type of animation; for example, it could also be an audio animation, such as outputting a sound effect.

As shown in Figure 96(F), in the image presentation (later stage), the image TG5 of "O" moves across the display screen 7a towards the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y5. The image TG6 of "A" moves across the display screen 7a towards the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y6. The image TG7 of "R" moves across the display screen 7a towards the "R" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y7. The image TG8 of "O" moves across the display screen 7a towards the rightmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y8. Images TG5 to TG8 move towards the corresponding characters on the second movable mechanism 15 and disappear near the characters.

In the later stage of the image presentation, image TG8, corresponding to the rightmost "O" in the string "OARO" on the second movable mechanism 15, is newly displayed and moves across the display screen 7a. In the image presentation, the image corresponding to the string "OARO" on the second movable mechanism 15 is displayed, moves across the display screen 7a, and then disappears. However, compared to the presentation using the image corresponding to the leftmost "O," "A," and "R," the presentation using the image corresponding to "O," "A," "R," and "O" suggests a higher probability of winning. In other words, the corresponding character is determined based on the probability of winning. Therefore, the presentation may be performed using the image corresponding to the "O" in "OARO," or it may be performed using the images corresponding to the "O" and "A" in "OARO."

Furthermore, while image sequences will be executed concurrently in subsequent performances, they are similar to the image sequences in the later stages, and therefore the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 96(G), the enlarged image display effect is executed. This effect displays one of the characters that was the target of the effect, corresponding to "OARO" on the second movable mechanism 15, enlarged and at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, the image UG of "O" is shown. The expected probability of winning may differ depending on the character. The display color of the image UG of "O" is assumed to be blue. Possible display colors here include, for example, blue, green, purple, red, and gold. The order of increasing probability of winning is blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in Figure 96(H), a display color change animation is executed. This animation changes the display color of the image enlarged during the enlarged image display animation. Here, the color of the image UG for "O" is changed to red. This animation suggests a high probability of winning.

[Specific Image Absorption Effect B]
Figure 97 is a diagram illustrating the specific image absorption effect B.
First, as shown in Figure 97(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 97(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 97(C), (D), and (F), an image animation is performed. The image animation is performed with the second movable object 15 moved so that it overlaps the top of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The image animation is also performed in the enlarged image display animation shown in Figure 97(G) and the battle animation shown in Figure 97(H). The second movable object 15 has the string "OARO" written on it, composed of multiple characters.

As shown in Figure 97(C), in the initial image presentation, images TG1, TG2, TG3, TG4, and TG5 are displayed, corresponding to the leftmost "O", "A", and "R" among the multiple characters that make up the string "OARO" of the second movable mechanism. Then, as indicated by arrow Y1, image TG1 for "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15. As indicated by arrow Y2, image TG2 for "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15. As indicated by arrow Y3, image TG3 for "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15. As indicated by arrow Y4, image TG4 for "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15. The image TG5 for "R" moves across the display screen 7a toward the "R" on the second movable component 15, as indicated by arrow Y5. Note that the image corresponding to the rightmost "O" in the string "OARO" is not displayed here.

Furthermore, the movement speeds of images TG1 to TG5 may be the same or different. Also, as shown in Figure 97(C), images TG1 to TG5 may move along a straight path or along a curved path that sways gently. Moreover, images TG1 to TG5 may move while rotating. The axis of rotation in this case can be anything, but for example, it could be an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

Here, images TG1 and TG2 correspond to the leftmost "O" in the string "OARO" of the second movable mechanism 15. Similarly, images TG3 and TG4 correspond to the "A" in the string "OARO" of the second movable mechanism 15. In this way, multiple images may be used to correspond to each character that makes up the string of characters in the second movable mechanism 15. For example, three or more images may be associated with each character.

As shown in Figure 97(D), in the mid-stage image presentation, the image TG1 of "O" is closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15 compared to the initial image presentation. The image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a to get even closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "O" is also closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15 compared to the initial image presentation. The image TG2 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a to get even closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y2. In addition, the image TG3 of "A" moves as indicated by arrow Y3 and disappears near the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15 (shown by a dashed line in the figure). For example, image TG3 of "A" shrinks as if being absorbed into the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15, and as it increases in transparency, it disappears. Image TG4 of "A" is closer to the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15 compared to the initial image effect. Image TG4 of "A" moves further along the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y4, to get even closer to the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15. Image TG5 of "R" is closer to the "R" of the second movable mechanism 15 compared to the initial image effect. Image TG5 of "R" moves further along the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y5, to get even closer to the "R" of the second movable mechanism 15.

Next, as shown in Figure 97(E), a chance animation is executed. The chance animation is an animation performed based on the expectation of winning. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed slightly to the left of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG, "Chance," is displayed. Note that the chance animation is not limited to this type of animation; for example, it could also be an audio animation, such as outputting a sound effect.

As shown in Figure 97(F), in the image presentation (later stage), the image TG6 of "O" moves across the display screen 7a towards the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y6. The image TG7 of "O" moves across the display screen 7a towards the leftmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y7. The image TG8 of "A" moves across the display screen 7a towards the "A" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y8. The image TG9 of "R" moves across the display screen 7a towards the "R" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y9. The image TG10 of "O" moves across the display screen 7a towards the rightmost "O" of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y10. Images TG6 to TG10 move towards the corresponding characters on the second movable mechanism 15 and disappear near the characters.

In the later stage of the image presentation, image TG10, corresponding to the rightmost "O" of the string "OARO" on the second movable mechanism 15, is newly displayed and moves across the display screen 7a. In the image presentation, the image corresponding to the string "OARO" on the second movable mechanism 15 is displayed, moves across the display screen 7a, and then disappears. However, compared to the case where the presentation is performed using the image corresponding to the leftmost "O," "A," and "R," the presentation using the image corresponding to "O," "A," "R," and "O" suggests a higher probability of winning. In other words, the corresponding character is determined based on the probability of winning. Therefore, the presentation may be performed using the image corresponding to the "O" of "OARO," or it may be performed using the images corresponding to the "O" and "A" of "OARO."

Furthermore, while image sequences will be executed concurrently in subsequent performances, they are similar to the image sequences in the later stages, and therefore the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 97(G), the enlarged image display effect is executed. This effect displays one of the characters that was the target of the effect, corresponding to "OARO" on the second movable mechanism 15, enlarged and displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, the image UG of "O" is shown. The expected probability of winning may differ depending on the character. The display color of the image UG of "O" is assumed to be red. Possible display colors here include, for example, blue, green, purple, red, and gold. The order of increasing probability of winning is blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in Figure 97(H), a battle sequence is executed. The battle sequence depicts a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. The battle sequence unfolds in the display area of the "O" image UG after it disappears. Winning the battle sequence guarantees a win.

[Specific Image Absorption Effect C]
Figure 98 is a diagram illustrating the specific image absorption effect C.
First, as shown in Figure 98(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 98(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 98(C), (D), and (F), an image animation is performed. The image animation is performed with the second movable object 15 moved so that it overlaps the top of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The image animation is also performed in the subsequent enlarged image display animation (Figure 98(G)) and the display color change animation (Figure 98(H)). The second movable object 15 has the string "OARO" written on it, composed of multiple characters.

As shown in Figure 98(C), in the initial image presentation, image TG1 corresponding to "OA" among the multiple characters that make up the string "OARO" on the second movable mechanism is displayed. Then, as indicated by arrow Y1, image TG1 of "OA" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "OA" on the second movable mechanism 15. Furthermore, in this case, the image of "OA" is larger than the "OA" on the second movable mechanism 15. Note that, similar to the specific image absorption presentation B, the number of "OA" images may be two or more.

As shown in Figure 98(C), image TG1 may move along a straight line or along a curved line, swaying gently. Furthermore, image TG1 may move while rotating. The axis of rotation can be anything, but for example, it could be a direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figure 98(D), in the image presentation (mid-stage), the image TG1 of "OA" moves as indicated by arrow Y1 and disappears near the "OA" of the second movable prop 15 (shown by a dashed line in the figure). For example, the image TG1 of "OA" shrinks as if being absorbed into the "OA" of the second movable prop 15, and disappears as its transparency increases. The image TG1 of "OA" shrinks and becomes smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in Figure 98(E), a chance animation is executed. The chance animation is an animation performed based on the expectation of winning. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed slightly to the left of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "Chance" is displayed. Note that the chance animation is not limited to this type of animation; for example, it could also be an audio animation, such as outputting a sound effect.

As shown in Figure 98(F), in the image presentation (later stage), the image TG2 of "OA" moves across the display screen 7a toward "OA" on the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y2. The image TG3 of "RO" moves across the display screen 7a toward "RO" at the left end of the second movable mechanism 15, as indicated by arrow Y3. Images TG2 and TG3 move toward the corresponding string on the second movable mechanism 15 and disappear near the string.

In the later stage of the image presentation, image TG3, corresponding to "RO" in the string "OARO" on the second movable mechanism 15, is newly displayed and moves across the display screen 7a. In the image presentation, the image corresponding to the string "OARO" on the second movable mechanism 15 is displayed, moves across the display screen 7a, and then disappears. However, the presentation using images corresponding to "OA" and "RO" suggests a higher probability of winning compared to the presentation using the image corresponding to "OA". In other words, the corresponding string is determined based on the probability of winning.

Furthermore, while image sequences will be executed concurrently in subsequent performances, they are similar to the image sequences in the later stages, and therefore the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 98(G), the enlarged image display effect is executed. This effect displays one of the strings that was the target of the effect, corresponding to "OARO" on the second movable mechanism 15, enlarged and at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, the image UG of "OA" is shown. The expected probability of winning may differ depending on the string. The display color of the "OA" image UG is assumed to be blue. Possible display colors here include, for example, blue, green, purple, red, and gold. The order of increasing probability of winning is blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in Figure 98(H), a battle sequence is executed. The battle sequence depicts a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. The battle sequence unfolds in the display area of the "OA" image UG after the "OA" image UG disappears. Winning the battle sequence guarantees a win.

[Example of effect]
The following are examples of the effects of specific image absorption effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character image similar to the characters displayed by the second movable mechanism 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, moved on the display screen 7a to approach the characters of the second movable mechanism 15, and then disappears in the vicinity of the characters of the second movable mechanism 15 (Figures 96(C)(D)(F), 97(C)(D)(F), 98(C)(D)(F)). With this configuration, a performance linked to the second movable mechanism 15 can be realized, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the second movable component 15 corresponds to the "display unit," images TG1 to TG10 correspond to the "specific images," and the image effects correspond to the "specific image effects."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable mechanism 15 displays multiple characters "O", "A", "R", and "O", and the image presentation targets at least one of the characters "O", "A", "R", and "O" (Figures 96(C)(D)(F), 97(C)(D)(F), and 98(C)(D)(F)). This configuration allows for a wide range of presentations in conjunction with the second movable mechanism 15, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of characters in the string "OARO" of the second movable mechanism 15 that are subject to image display is determined based on the expectation of winning. With this configuration, the expectation of winning can be indicated by the display in conjunction with the second movable mechanism 15, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, "winning" corresponds to "advantageous gameplay for the player," and "advantageous gameplay" includes gameplay states that are more advantageous than the normal state (low probability, low base state), such as big wins, small wins, high probability/high base states, and low probability/high base states.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of characters in the string "OARO" of the second movable mechanism 15 that are subject to image display is increased during the variation of the display symbols (Figures 96(F), 97(F), and 98(F)). With this configuration, the expectation of winning can be suggested through the display in conjunction with the second movable mechanism 15, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an enlarged image display effect is performed, which displays an image UG corresponding to one of the characters (strings) that are the target of the image effect among the string "OARO" of the second movable mechanism 15, at the bottom center of the display screen 7a (Figures 96(G), 97(G), and 98(G)). With this configuration, the enlarged display of one of the characters that was the target of the effect can surprise the player and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Note that "Image UG" corresponds to "Compatible Image," and the enlarged image display effect corresponds to "Image Display Effect."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (strings) that are the target of the image presentation from the string "OARO" of the second movable mechanism 15 is determined based on the expectation level of winning (Figures 96(H), 97(G), and 98(G)). With this configuration, the expectation level of winning can be indicated using the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (strings) that are the target of the image presentation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (strings) that are the target of the image presentation among the string "OARO" of the second movable mechanism 15 is changed during the variation (Figure 96(H)). With this configuration, the expectation of winning can be suggested using the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (strings) that are the target of the image presentation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying image UG, a battle sequence is executed instead of image UG (Figures 97(G)(H) and 98(G)(H)). This configuration allows for smoother transitions between sequences, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Variations]
The following shows variations of the specific image absorption effect.
[Variation 1]
In the above example, the image presentation used images of the characters "O", "A", "R", and "O" that make up the string "OARO" on the second movable mechanism 15, or images of the string "OA" and "RO". However, it is not necessary to limit it to such characters. In other words, "symbols displayed by the display unit" include symbols and pictures that have meaning.

[Modified example 2]
In the above example, the second movable mechanism 15 displayed the string "OARO," but multiple display units may be provided, such as a mechanism that displays "O," a mechanism that displays "A," and a mechanism that displays "R." For example, four display units may be provided near the corners of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, the second movable component 15 was configured to move between a retracted position and an extended position, but a configuration using a non-movable display unit is also possible.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect B7-1]
A display device capable of displaying images,
A gaming machine comprising a display unit positioned close to the periphery of the display screen of the aforementioned display device and displaying symbols,
It is possible to perform a specific image effect in which a specific image, which is an image similar to the symbol displayed on the display unit, is displayed on the display screen, is moved on the display screen to approach the symbol on the display unit, and disappears in the vicinity of the symbol on the display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Aspect B7-2]
The gaming machine described in embodiment B7-1,
The display unit displays multiple symbols,
In the aforementioned specific image effect, the effect is performed on at least one of the multiple symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Aspect B7-3]
The gaming machine described in embodiment B7-2,
In the aforementioned specific image presentation, the number of symbols among the plurality of symbols that are the target of the specific image presentation is determined based on the expected degree of transition to a favorable game that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Aspect B7-4]
A gaming machine according to the embodiment B7-2 or embodiment B7-3,
In the aforementioned specific image effect, it is possible to increase the number of symbols among the plurality of symbols that are the target of the specific image effect during the variation of the effect pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Aspect B7-5]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions B7-1 to B7-4,
The device can perform an image display effect in which an enlarged corresponding image, which is an image corresponding to one of the symbols among the plurality of symbols that are the target of the specific image effect, is displayed in a specific area of the display screen of the display device.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Aspect B7-6]
The gaming machine described in embodiment B7-5,
In the aforementioned image display presentation, the display color of the corresponding image is determined based on the expected degree of transition to a game that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Pattern B7-7]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment B7-5 or embodiment B7-6,
In the aforementioned image display effect, it is possible to change the display color of the corresponding image while the effect pattern is changing.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Pattern B7-8]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions from B7-5 to B7-7,
In the aforementioned image display effect, after displaying the corresponding image, it is possible to display a moving image instead of the corresponding image.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The following describes the string decomposition effects A to C using Figures 99 to 101. These string decomposition effects can be executed during the variation effect of the animation symbols. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90. If the command includes an instruction to execute the string decomposition effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[String Decomposition Performance A]
Figure 99 is a diagram illustrating the string decomposition effect A.
First, as shown in Figure 99(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 99(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 99(C), a text display animation is executed. This animation displays a text image on the display screen 7a. Here, the text image MG "Chance!" is displayed, along with a frame image WG surrounding the text image MG.

Next, as shown in Figure 99(D), the border change animation is executed. This animation enlarges the border image WG, which is displayed to match the text image MG. Here, the border image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 99(E) and (F), the character animation is executed. This animation involves the characters "チ", "チャ", "ン", "ス", and "!" that make up the string "チャン！" moving in predetermined directions.

As shown in Figure 99(E), in the first half of the character animation, the character image K1 of "チ" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y1. The character image K2 of "ャ" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y2. The character image K3 of "ン" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y3. The character image K4 of "ス" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y4. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y5.

As shown in Figure 99(F), in the second half of the character animation, in addition to the movement in the first half, each character image K1 to K5 moves further. The character image K1 for "チ" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y1. The character image K2 for "ャ" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y2. The character image K3 for "ン" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y3. The character image K4 for "ス" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y4. The character image K5 for "!" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y5. The character image K5 for "!" has reached the boundary of the frame image WG.

Furthermore, the movement speeds of images K1-K5 may be the same or different. Also, images K1-K5 may move in a straight line or in a curved, swaying motion.

Next, as shown in Figure 99(G), a battle sequence is executed. The battle sequence depicts a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. A win is confirmed if the ally character CRA wins the battle sequence. Conversely, a loss is confirmed if the ally character CRA loses the battle sequence.

Next, as shown in Figure 99(H), a confirmed stop animation (miss) is executed. This animation is characterized by the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopping in a manner that indicates a miss. Here, the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R stop at "5," while the middle symbol 8C stops at "6." Simultaneously with the confirmed stop animation, the corresponding variation icon 9C becomes invisible.

[String decomposition effect B]
Figure 100 is a diagram illustrating the string decomposition effect B.
First, as shown in Figure 100(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 100(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 100(C), a text display animation is executed. This animation displays a text image on the display screen 7a. Here, the text image MG "Chance!" is displayed, along with a frame image WG surrounding the text image MG.

Next, as shown in Figure 100(D), the border change animation is executed. This animation enlarges the border image WG, which is displayed to match the text image MG. Here, the border image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 100(E) and (F), the character animation is executed. This animation involves the characters "チ", "チャ", "ン", "ス", and "!" that make up the string "チャン！" (Chance!) rotating and moving in predetermined directions.

As shown in Figure 100(E), in the first half of the character animation, the character image K1 of "チ" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "チ" rotates counterclockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ャ" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ャ" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "ン" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "ン" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "ス" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y4. The character image K4 for "ス" rotates counterclockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 for "!" moves diagonally downwards and to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y5. The character image K5 for "!" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figure 100(F), in the second half of the character animation, in addition to the movement in the first half of the character animation, each character image K1 to K5 moves further. The character image K1 of "チ" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "チ" rotates counterclockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ャ" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ャ" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "ン" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "ン" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 for "ス" moves diagonally upward and to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y4. The character image K4 for "ス" rotates counterclockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 for "!" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y5. The character image K5 for "!" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 for "!" has reached the boundary of the frame image WG.

Furthermore, the movement speeds of images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. Also, images K1 to K5 may move in a straight line or in a curved, swaying motion. Moreover, the rotation axis of images K1 to K5 is not limited. For example, the rotation axis may be the left-right direction parallel to the display screen 7a, or the up-down direction parallel to the display screen 7a. Alternatively, a rotation axis with a predetermined angle may be set.

Next, as shown in Figure 100(G), a battle sequence is executed. The battle sequence depicts a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. A win is confirmed if the ally character CRA wins the battle sequence. Conversely, a loss is confirmed if the ally character CRA loses the battle sequence.

Next, as shown in Figure 100(H), a confirmed stop animation (miss) is executed. This animation is characterized by the confirmed stop animation where the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a losing pattern. Here, the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R stop at "5," and the middle animation symbol 8C stops at "6." Simultaneously with the confirmed stop animation, the corresponding variation icon 9C becomes invisible.

[String decomposition performance C]
Figure 101 is a diagram illustrating the string decomposition effect C.
First, as shown in Figure 101(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 101(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 101(C), a text display animation is executed. This animation displays a text image on the display screen 7a. Here, the text image MG "Chance!" is displayed, along with a frame image WG surrounding the text image MG. The border of the frame image WG is assumed to be white.

Next, as shown in Figure 101(D), the border change animation is executed. This animation enlarges the border image WG, which is displayed to match the text image MG. Here, the border image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a. In particular, the border of the border image becomes thicker, and the border is displayed in red. The display color of the border image WG indicates the likelihood of winning. For example, the likelihood of winning increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold.

Next, as shown in Figures 101(E) and (F), the character animation is executed. This animation involves the characters "チ", "チャ", "ン", "ス", and "!" that make up the string "チャン！" (Chance!) rotating and moving in predetermined directions.

As shown in Figure 101(E), in the first half of the character animation, the character image K1 of "チ" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "チ" rotates counterclockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ャ" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ャ" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "ン" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "ン" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "ス" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y4. The character image K4 for "ス" rotates counterclockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 for "!" moves diagonally downwards and to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y5. The character image K5 for "!" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figure 101(F), in the second half of the character animation, in addition to the movement in the first half of the character animation, each character image K1 to K5 moves further. The character image K1 of "チ" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "チ" rotates counterclockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ャ" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ャ" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "ン" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "ン" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 for "ス" moves diagonally upward and to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y4. The character image K4 for "ス" rotates counterclockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 for "!" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y5. The character image K5 for "!" rotates clockwise around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 for "!" has reached the boundary of the frame image WG.

Furthermore, the movement speeds of images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. Also, images K1 to K5 may move in a straight line or in a curved, swaying motion. Moreover, the rotation axis of images K1 to K5 is not limited. For example, the rotation axis may be the left-right direction parallel to the display screen 7a, or the up-down direction parallel to the display screen 7a. Alternatively, a rotation axis with a predetermined angle may be set.

Next, as shown in Figure 101(G), a battle sequence is executed. The battle sequence depicts a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. A win is confirmed if the ally character CRA wins the battle sequence. Conversely, a loss is confirmed if the ally character CRA loses the battle sequence.

Next, as shown in Figure 101(H), the confirmed stop animation (win) is executed. The confirmed stop animation (win) is an animation in which the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning pattern. Here, the left animation symbol 8L, the middle animation symbol 8C, and the right animation symbol 8R all stop at "5". Note that simultaneously with the confirmed stop animation, the corresponding variation icon 9C becomes invisible.

[Example of effect]
The following shows an example of the effect of the string decomposition animation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a string display effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 to display the string "Chance!" (Figures 99(C), 100(C), and 101(C)), and then a character composition effect is performed to move the characters "Chi", "Cha", "n", "Su", and "!" that make up the string in predetermined directions (Figures 99(E)(F), 100(E)(F), and 101(E)(F)). With this configuration, the message is more impactful compared to simply displaying a string, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the string "Chance!" corresponds to the "symbol sequence" and "string," the string display animation corresponds to the "first animation," and the characters "チ," "チャ," "ン," "ス," and "！" that make up the string correspond to the "composing symbols" and "composing characters," and the constituent character animation corresponds to the "second animation."

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the characters "チ", "チャ", "ン", "ス", and "!" that make up the string are rotated and moved in predetermined directions (Figures 100(E)(F) and 101(E)(F)). This configuration enhances the message conveyed compared to simply displaying a string of characters, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a frame image WG is displayed surrounding the text string image MG during the text string display effect. With this configuration, the text string image MG is emphasized by the frame image WG, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.
The frame image WG could, for example, be a "speech bubble" indicating that it contains a character's dialogue.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, before executing the character composition animation, a frame line change animation is performed to expand the boundary of the frame image WG to the periphery of the display screen 7a (Figures 99(D), 100(D), and 101(D)). This configuration increases the likelihood that the player will focus on the next character composition animation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. The frame line change animation is included in the "second animation".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character composition display, the character "!" that makes up the string reaches the boundary of the frame image WG (Figures 99(F), 100(F), and 101(F)). With this configuration, the character composition display becomes more dynamic, which can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Variations]
The following shows variations of the string decomposition effect.
[Variation 1]
The above was an example of displaying the string "Chance!", but it is not limited to such strings. A "string of symbols" includes symbols such as marks and pictures that have meaning.

[Modified example 2]
In the above example, the characters "チ", "チャ", "ン", "ス", and "！" that make up the string were rotated around a rotation axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a, but they can be rotated around any axis. In that case, it is conceivable to model the characters "チ", "チャ", "ン", "ス", and "！" as three-dimensional models.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Pattern B8-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display device capable of displaying images,
A first performance that displays a sequence of symbols on the display screen of the aforementioned display device,
A second performance is possible, in which the constituent symbols constituting the sequence of symbols displayed in the first performance are moved in predetermined directions.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Appearance B8-2]
The gaming machine described in the form B8-1,
The aforementioned sequence of symbols is a string, and the aforementioned constituent symbols are constituent characters.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Appearance B8-3]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment B8-1 or embodiment B8-2,
In the second performance described above, the constituent symbols are moved while being rotated.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Pattern B8-4]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions B8-1 to B8-3,
In the first performance, the sequence of symbols is displayed, and a frame image surrounding the sequence of symbols is also displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Pattern B8-5]
The gaming machine described in the B8-4 description,
In the second production described above, after the frame image is deformed, the constituent symbols are moved.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Pattern B8-6]
A gaming machine as described in Actual B8-4 or Actual B8-5,
In the second production described above, at least a portion of the constituent symbols reaches the boundary of the frame image.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Pattern B8-7]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment B8-4 or embodiment B8-6,
The display color of the aforementioned frame image indicates the likelihood of transitioning to a favorable game state that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process in Figure 28, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0) during the low probability state (normal state), the game transitions to playtime (low probability time reduction state). This playtime continues until the special symbol variations reach 700 times. In the case of a 2R jackpot, two rounds of gameplay are played at the first large prize slot 30. In this case, in one round of gameplay, the first large prize slot 30 closes when 10 game balls enter it, and 10 game balls are dispensed when 1 game ball enters the first large prize slot 30. In other words, 100 game balls are dispensed in one round of gameplay (if there are no over-entries). Therefore, the number of game balls that can be dispensed in a 2R jackpot is 200 if there are no over-entries.
The following jackpot game count display animations A to C may appear when one of the two types of 2R jackpots is won.

The following describes the jackpot game count display effects A to C using Figures 102 to 104. This jackpot game count display is executed during the reel spinning effect in the normal state, time-saving state (low probability, low base state), or probability variation state (high probability, high base state). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the jackpot game count display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Big Win Game Count Display Effect A]
Figure 102 is a diagram illustrating the jackpot game count display animation A. The jackpot game count display animation A in Figure 102 is an animation performed during the same variation of special symbols. In the jackpot game count display animation A, as shown in Figure 102(A), first, a decorative symbol variation animation is performed, followed by a reach animation. In this reach animation, on the display screen 7a, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and decorative symbol 8C is rapidly varied vertically to form a reach state. In addition, in this reach animation, the variation count display XI6 is displayed near the bottom left of the display screen 7a. This variation count display XI6 represents the number of variations of the special symbols since the end of the previous jackpot. Also, although the hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, they are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 102(B), a special jackpot notification sequence is performed. In this sequence, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a 2R jackpot symbol. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification sequence, decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop displaying as the number 7, and decorative symbol 8C stops displaying a special symbol (a symbol with a triangle inside a circle). The special symbol displayed on decorative symbol 8C indicates a 2R jackpot. Furthermore, the spin count display XI6 continues to be displayed during the special jackpot notification sequence.

Next, as shown in Figure 102(C), the jackpot game animation A is performed. In this jackpot game animation A, on the display screen 7a, the acquired game ball count display XI1 is displayed on the right, the count display XI2 is displayed approximately in the lower center, and the count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left to the center. The acquired game ball count display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired during the jackpot game (round game) (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 represents the count-up method count and is represented by an integer of 0 or more in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game animation A, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows "0" for the acquired balls, and the count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. The count target indication display XI3 suggests the target count value (the final possible count value) for count display XI2. It displays "Aim for count 20!", indicating that the target value for count display XI2 is "20". Note that in this jackpot game animation A, the display of the number of spins XI6 is removed.

Next, as shown in Figure 102(D), the jackpot game animation B is performed. In this jackpot game animation B, the display screen 7a continuously displays the acquired game ball count display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target indication display XI3. The count display XI2 is larger than in the jackpot game animation A. Also, in this jackpot game animation B, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired payout as "100", and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count in the count display XI2 also increases. Specifically, when the number of acquired game balls displayed in the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count displayed in the count display XI2 increases by "1", and when the number of acquired game balls increases by "100", the count displayed in the count display XI2 increases by "10". In other words, when one round of gameplay (10 balls entering the first large prize slot 30) is completed, the count display XI2 increases by "10". In the jackpot gameplay animation B, the acquired game ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the first round of gameplay. In this case, the acquired game ball count display XI1 does not include game balls obtained by entering the first large prize slot 30 in excess of 10.

Next, as shown in Figure 102(E), the jackpot game animation C is performed. In this jackpot game animation C, the display screen 7a continuously displays the acquired game ball count display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target indication display XI3. The count display XI2 is larger than in the jackpot game animation B. Also, in this jackpot game animation C, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired payout as "200", and the count display XI2 shows "20" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count in the count display XI2 also increases. Specifically, when the number of acquired game balls displayed in the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count displayed in the count display XI2 increases by "1", and when the number of acquired game balls increases by "100", the count displayed in the count display XI2 increases by "10". In other words, when one round of gameplay (10 balls entering the first large prize slot 30) is completed, the count display XI2 increases by "10". In the jackpot gameplay animation C, the acquired game ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the second round of gameplay. In this case, the acquired game ball count display XI1 does not include game balls obtained by entering the first large prize slot 30 in excess of 10.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if this jackpot is a 2R probability-increasing jackpot, the following jackpot game animation D will be performed. If this jackpot is a 2R latent probability-increasing jackpot, the following jackpot game animation E will be performed.

If the jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game performance D will be performed as shown in Figure 102(F). In this jackpot game performance D, the Super Speed Mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This Super Speed Mode suggestion image XI4 is labeled "Entering Super Speed Mode" and is an image that suggests the display mode after the jackpot will be Super Speed Mode, or more specifically, an image that suggests the game state after the jackpot is a probability variation state.
Subsequently, on display screen 7a, a performance based on the Super Speed Mode is displayed, that is, a performance that suggests the game is in a probability variation state.

If the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game performance E will be performed as shown in Figure 102(G). In this jackpot game performance E, the display screen 7a will show the Yururi Mode suggestion image XI5. This Yururi Mode suggestion image XI5 is labeled "Entering Yururi Mode" and is an image that suggests the display mode after the jackpot will be Yururi Mode, and more specifically, it is an image that suggests the game state after the jackpot is a latent probability variation state.
Subsequently, on display screen 7a, a performance based on the relaxed mode is displayed, that is, a performance that suggests that the game is in a hidden probability variation state.

[Big Win Game Count Display Animation B]
Figure 103 is a diagram illustrating the jackpot game count display animation B. The jackpot game count display animation B in Figure 103 is an animation performed during the same variation of special symbols. In the jackpot game count display animation B, as shown in Figure 103(A), first, a decorative symbol variation animation is performed, followed by a reach animation. In this reach animation, on the display screen 7a, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and decorative symbol 8C is rapidly varied vertically to form a reach state. In addition, in this reach animation, the variation count display XI6 is displayed near the bottom left of the display screen 7a. This variation count display XI6 represents the number of variations of the special symbols since the end of the previous jackpot. Also, although the hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, they are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 103(B), a special jackpot notification sequence is performed. In this sequence, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a 2R jackpot symbol. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification sequence, decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop displaying as the number 7, and decorative symbol 8C stops displaying a special symbol (a symbol with a triangle inside a circle). The special symbol displayed on decorative symbol 8C indicates a 2R jackpot. Furthermore, the spin count display XI6 continues to be displayed during the special jackpot notification sequence.

Next, as shown in Figure 103(C), the jackpot game animation A is performed. In this jackpot game animation A, on the display screen 7a, the acquired game ball count display XI1 is displayed on the right, the count display XI2 is displayed approximately in the lower center, and the count target indication display XI3 is displayed from the left to the center. The acquired game ball count display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired during the jackpot game (round game) (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 represents a countdown and is represented by an integer of 0 or more in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game animation A, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows "0" for the acquired balls, and the count display XI2 shows "20" in a hexagonal frame. The count target indication display XI3 suggests the target count value (the final possible count value) for count display XI2. It displays "Aim for count 0!", indicating that the target value for count display XI2 is "0". Note that in this jackpot game animation A, the display of the number of spins XI6 is removed.

Next, as shown in Figure 103(D), the jackpot game animation B is performed. In this jackpot game animation B, the display screen 7a continuously displays the acquired game ball count display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target indication display XI3. The count display XI2 is larger than in the jackpot game animation A. Also, in this jackpot game animation B, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired payout as "100", and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count in the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired game balls displayed in the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count displayed in the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired game balls increases by "100", the count displayed in the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In other words, when one round of gameplay (10 balls entering the first large prize slot 30) is completed, the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In the jackpot gameplay animation B, the acquired game ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the first round of gameplay. In this case, the acquired game ball count display XI1 does not include game balls obtained by entering the first large prize slot 30 in excess of 10.

Next, as shown in Figure 103(E), the jackpot game animation C is performed. In this jackpot game animation C, the display screen 7a continuously displays the acquired game ball count display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target indication display XI3. The count display XI2 is larger than in the jackpot game animation B. Also, in this jackpot game animation C, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired payout as "200", and the count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count in the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired game balls displayed in the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count displayed in the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired game balls increases by "100", the count displayed in the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In other words, when one round of gameplay (10 balls entering the first large prize slot 30) is completed, the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In the jackpot gameplay animation C, the acquired game ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the second round of gameplay. In this case, the acquired game ball count display XI1 does not include game balls obtained by entering the first large prize slot 30 in excess of 10.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if this jackpot is a 2R probability-increasing jackpot, the following jackpot game animation D will be performed. If this jackpot is a 2R latent probability-increasing jackpot, the following jackpot game animation E will be performed.

If the jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game performance D will be performed as shown in Figure 103(F). In this jackpot game performance D, the Super Speed Mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This Super Speed Mode suggestion image XI4 is labeled "Entering Super Speed Mode" and is an image that suggests the display mode after the jackpot will be Super Speed Mode, or more specifically, an image that suggests the game state after the jackpot is a probability variation state.
Subsequently, on display screen 7a, a performance based on the Super Speed Mode is displayed, that is, a performance that suggests the game is in a probability variation state.

If the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game performance E will be performed as shown in Figure 103(G). In this jackpot game performance E, the display screen 7a will show the Yururi Mode suggestion image XI5. This Yururi Mode suggestion image XI5 is labeled "Entering Yururi Mode" and is an image that suggests the display mode after the jackpot will be Yururi Mode, and more specifically, it is an image that suggests the game state after the jackpot is a latent probability variation state.
Subsequently, on display screen 7a, a performance based on the relaxed mode is displayed, that is, a performance that suggests that the game is in a hidden probability variation state.

[Big Win Game Count Display Effect C]
Figure 104 is a diagram illustrating the jackpot game count display animation C. The jackpot game count display animation C in Figure 104 is an animation performed during the same variation of special symbols. In the jackpot game count display animation C, as shown in Figure 104(A), first, a decorative symbol variation animation is performed, followed by a reach animation. In this reach animation, on the display screen 7a, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and decorative symbol 8C is rapidly varied vertically to form a reach state. In addition, in this reach animation, the variation count display XI6 is displayed near the bottom left of the display screen 7a. This variation count display XI6 represents the number of variations of the special symbols since the end of the previous jackpot. Also, although the hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, they are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in Figure 104(B), a special jackpot notification sequence is performed. In this sequence, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a 2R jackpot symbol. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification sequence, decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop displaying as the number 7, and decorative symbol 8C stops displaying a special symbol (a symbol with a triangle inside a circle). The special symbol displayed on decorative symbol 8C indicates a 2R jackpot. Furthermore, the spin count display XI6 continues to be displayed during the special jackpot notification sequence.

Next, as shown in Figure 104(C), the jackpot game animation A is performed. In this jackpot game animation A, on the display screen 7a, the acquired game ball count display XI1 is displayed on the right, the count display XI2 is displayed near the bottom center, the count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left to the center, and the expectation level suggestion effect image XI7 is displayed at the top. The acquired game ball count display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired during the jackpot game (round game) (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 represents a countdown and is represented by an integer of 0 or more in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game animation A, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows "0" for the acquired balls, and the count display XI2 shows "20" in a hexagonal frame. The count target indication display XI3 suggests the target count value (the final possible count value) for count display XI2. It displays "Aim for count 0!", indicating that the target value for count display XI2 is "0". Note that in this jackpot game animation A, the display of the number of spins XI6 is removed.

Furthermore, the expectation level indication effect image XI7 is an image that indicates the expectation level of the jackpot in the special jackpot notification演出 (special jackpot notification effect) being a 2R probability variation jackpot, and the expectation level is indicated by the color of the effect. When the effect color is blue, the expectation level of a 2R probability variation jackpot is the lowest; when the effect color is yellow, the expectation level of a 2R probability variation jackpot is higher than blue; when the effect color is green, the expectation level of a 2R probability variation jackpot is higher than yellow; when the effect color is purple, the expectation level of a 2R probability variation jackpot is higher than green; and when the effect color is red, the expectation level of a 2R probability variation jackpot is the highest.
In this jackpot game animation A, the expected value indication effect image XI7 has a blue effect color.

Next, as shown in Figure 104(D), the jackpot game animation B is performed. In this jackpot game animation B, the display screen 7a continuously displays the acquired game ball count display XI1, the count display XI2, the count target suggestion display XI3, and the expectation level suggestion effect image XI7. The count display XI2 is larger than in the jackpot game animation A. Also, in this jackpot game animation B, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired payout as "100", and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count in the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired game balls displayed in the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count displayed in the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired game balls increases by "100", the count displayed in the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In other words, when one round of gameplay (10 balls entering the first large prize slot 30) is completed, the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In the jackpot gameplay演出 B, the acquired game ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the first round of gameplay. In this case, the acquired game ball count display XI1 does not include game balls obtained by entering the first large prize slot 30 in excess of 10. Also, the expectation level indication effect image XI7 changes from blue to green, indicating that the expectation level for a 2R probability variation jackpot has increased.

Next, as shown in Figure 104(E), the jackpot game animation C is performed. In this jackpot game animation C, the display screen 7a continuously displays the acquired game ball count display XI1, the count display XI2, the count target suggestion display XI3, and the expectation level suggestion effect image XI7. The count display XI2 is larger than in the jackpot game animation B. Also, in this jackpot game animation C, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired payout as "200", and the count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count in the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired game balls displayed in the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count displayed in the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired game balls increases by "100", the count displayed in the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In other words, when one round of gameplay (10 balls entering the first large prize slot 30) is completed, the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In the jackpot gameplay animation C, the acquired game ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the second round of gameplay. In this case, the acquired game ball count display XI1 does not include game balls obtained by entering the first large prize slot 30 in excess of 10. Also, the expectation level indication effect image XI7 changes from green to red, indicating that the expectation level for a 2R probability variation jackpot has reached its peak.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if the current jackpot is a 2R probability-increasing jackpot, the following jackpot game animation D will be performed. If the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability-increasing jackpot, the following jackpot game animation E will be performed.

If the jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game performance D will be performed as shown in Figure 104(F). In this jackpot game performance D, the Super Speed Mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This Super Speed Mode suggestion image XI4 is labeled "Entering Super Speed Mode" and is an image that suggests the display mode after the jackpot will be Super Speed Mode, or more specifically, an image that suggests the game state after the jackpot is a probability variation state.
Subsequently, on display screen 7a, a performance based on the Super Speed Mode is displayed, that is, a performance that suggests the game is in a probability variation state.

If the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game performance E will be performed as shown in Figure 104 (G). In this jackpot game performance E, the display screen 7a will show the Yururi Mode suggestion image XI5. This Yururi Mode suggestion image XI5 is labeled "Entering Yururi Mode" and is an image that suggests the display mode after the jackpot will be Yururi Mode, and more specifically, it is an image that suggests the game state after the jackpot is a latent probability variation state.
Subsequently, on display screen 7a, a performance based on the relaxed mode is displayed, that is, a performance that suggests that the game is in a hidden probability variation state.

[Variations]
In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, the acquired game ball count display XI1 does not include game balls obtained by entering the first large prize slot 30 in quantities of 10 or more. However, it is not limited to this, and the acquired game ball count display XI1 may include game balls obtained by entering the first large prize slot 30 in quantities of 10 or more.
In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display animations A to C, jackpot game animations A to E are performed in the case of a special jackpot, i.e., a 2R jackpot, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, the above-mentioned jackpot game count display animations A to C are not performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the jackpot game animations in the above-mentioned jackpot game count display animations A to C may also be performed in the case of a 16R jackpot.

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, during a jackpot game, the acquired game ball count display XI1, which shows the number of game balls acquired during the jackpot game, and the count display XI2, which shows the count, are displayed, and then the count display XI2 changes in accordance with the change in the acquired game ball count display XI1. With this configuration, as the jackpot game (round game) progresses (as it is played), the count display XI2 also progresses, so the anticipation that the mode announced at the end of the jackpot game will be the Super Speed Mode can be gradually increased, and the relatively boring jackpot game (round game) can be made more exciting. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, the number of acquired game balls display XI1 does not change based on game balls acquired by entering other winning slots besides the first winning slot 30, but only based on game balls acquired through entry into the first winning slot 30. With this configuration, the count display XI2 is clearly linked to entry into the first winning slot 30, making it easier for players to recognize the progress of the jackpot game (round game). This gradually builds anticipation for the mode announced at the end of the jackpot game being the Super Speed Mode, thus enhancing the excitement of the relatively boring jackpot game (round game). As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, before the jackpot game effect (i.e., during the reach effect or special jackpot notification effect), the number of spins of the special symbols, XI6, is displayed. This configuration allows the player's anticipation of a jackpot to gradually increase the longer they play, further enhancing the excitement of the subsequent jackpot game effect (round game). As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, before the jackpot game effect (i.e., during the reach effect or special jackpot notification effect), the spin count display XI6, which shows the number of spins of the special symbols, is displayed, and then reset (cleared) during the jackpot game effect. This configuration allows the expectation of a jackpot to gradually increase the longer the player has been playing without a win, and the reset provides a sense of relief upon winning, further enhancing the excitement of the subsequent jackpot game effect (round game). As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, during the jackpot game effect, after changing the count display XI2 in accordance with the change in the acquired game ball display XI1, at the end of the jackpot game, if it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, an image XI4 suggesting the Super Speed Mode is displayed, indicating that the game state after the jackpot is a probability variation state. If it is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot, an image XI5 suggesting the Relaxed Mode is displayed, indicating that the game state after the jackpot is a time-saving state (low probability, high base state). With this configuration, the acquired game ball display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed during the jackpot game, and at the end of the jackpot game, the Super Speed Mode suggestion image XI4 or the Mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed. As a result, the player can recognize the next mode before their excitement from the acquired game ball display XI1 and count display XI2 cools down, and they can greatly enjoy the effects during the relatively boring jackpot game. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect I-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect described above is an effect that, during a jackpot game, displays the number of game media acquired, which represents the number of game media acquired through the jackpot game, and displays a count, which represents the count.
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect and is an effect that changes the count display in accordance with the change in the number of acquired game media displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect I-2]
The gaming machine described in Embodiment I-1,
In the second display presentation described above, the display of acquired game media does not change depending on the game media acquired by entering an entry point other than the big prize entry point during a jackpot game, but changes depending on the acquisition of game media based on entering the big prize entry point.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect I-3]
The gaming machine described in Embodiment I-2,
In some cases, a third display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The third display effect is performed before the first display effect and is an effect that displays the number of times the special symbol has changed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect I-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment I-3,
The display of the number of variations in the third display effect is erased before the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect I-5]
The gaming machine described in Actual I-4,
In the case of a jackpot, the aforementioned gaming machine selects one jackpot from among a plurality of jackpots, including a first jackpot and a second jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot.
In some cases, a fourth display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a fifth display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect when the jackpot is the first jackpot, and displays the first display.
The fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect when the jackpot is a second jackpot, and displays a second display that is different from the first display.
The second display indicates a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process in Figure 28, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0) during the low probability state (normal state), the game transitions to a playtime state (low probability time reduction state). This playtime state continues until the special symbol variations reach 700 times.

The double timer display effects A to C are described below using Figures 105 to 107. These double timer display effects are executed during the reel spinning animation in the normal state, time-saving state (low probability, low base state), or probability variation state (high probability, high base state). Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the double timer display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Double Timer Display Effect A]
Figure 105 is a diagram illustrating the double timer display effect A. The double timer display effect A in Figure 105 is an effect that occurs with the same variation of special symbols. In the double timer display effect A, as shown in Figure 105(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. Also, a hold icon 9A and a variation icon 9C are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. The color of the hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C at this time is white. The color of the hold icon 9A or variation icon 9C indicates the probability of winning a jackpot. In this case, if the icon is white, the probability of winning a jackpot is the lowest; if it is yellow, the probability of winning a jackpot is the third highest; if it is green, the probability of winning a jackpot is the second highest; and if it is red, the probability of winning a jackpot is the highest.

Next, as shown in Figure 105(B), the first timer display animation is performed. In this first timer display animation, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 represents a count-up (timer operation) with a longer time interval than the second timer display XJ2 described later; specifically, it represents a count-up every 15 seconds. The timer value is displayed within a rectangular frame of the first timer display XJ1. At this time, as shown in Figure 105(B), the first timer display XJ1 displays "00:00," representing a timer value of 0 seconds, and the frame is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and reappears when the count-up occurs. Note that the first timer display XJ1 can, for example, represent a count-up at intervals longer than 1 second.

Next, as shown in Figure 105(C), the second timer display animation is performed. In this second timer display animation, the second timer display XJ2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display animation, the first timer display XJ1 disappears. This second timer display XJ2 represents a count-up (timer operation) at a shorter time interval than the first timer display XJ1 described above; specifically, it represents a count-up every second. At this time, as shown in Figure 105(C), the second timer display XJ2 displays "0," indicating a timer value of 0 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a after this display. Note that the second timer display XJ2 can, for example, represent a count-up at intervals of 1 second or less.

Next, as shown in Figure 105(D), the first timer appearance animation is performed. In this first timer appearance animation, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts up every second, and its timer value is "10," while the first timer display XJ1 counts up every 15 seconds, and its timer value is "15:00."

Next, as shown in Figure 105(E), the first timer mode change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and enlarges on the surface of the display screen 7a, while the color of its frame changes from blue to green, red, etc. However, it is not limited to this; the first timer display XJ1 may also rotate the display screen 7a from the front to the back, change the font of the timer value, or move.

Next, as shown in Figure 105(F), the first timer disappearance effect is performed. During this first timer disappearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in Figure 105(G), the time-up animation A is performed. In this time-up animation A, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 reappears approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the first timer display XJ1 changes its mode as in the first timer mode change animation described above. Also, in this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 becomes "30:00" (30 seconds), and the time-up occurs. The first timer display XJ1 is then erased after the mode change. At this time, the second timer display XJ2 shows a timer value of "25" (25 seconds).

Next, as shown in Figure 105(H), Chance Up演出 A is performed. This Chance Up演出 A is triggered when the first timer display XJ1 times up. On the display screen 7a, Chance Up Image XJ3 is displayed in the position where the first timer display XJ1 was previously displayed, and the reserve icon 9A changes from blue to green (hatched area in the figure). This change in reserve indicates an increased probability of a jackpot in the spin corresponding to the changed reserve icon 9A. Chance Up Image XJ3 is an image that suggests an increased probability of a jackpot, and in Figure 105(H), it is labeled "Chance."

Next, as shown in Figure 105(I), the time-up animation B is performed. In this time-up animation B, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. In this case, the timer value of the second timer display XJ2 reaches "30" (30 seconds), indicating that time has run out.

Next, as shown in Figure 105(J), Chance Up演出 B is performed. This Chance Up演出 B is triggered when the second timer display XJ2 time runs out. Chance Up Image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the reserve icon 9A changes from green to red (cross-hatched area in the figure). This reserve change indicates that the probability of a big win in the variation corresponding to the changed reserve icon 9A has increased even further than during Chance Up演出 A. In Figure 105(J), Chance Up Image XJ3 is labeled "Super Hot," suggesting an even higher probability of a big win than during Chance Up演出 A.

[Double Timer Display Effect B]
Figure 106 is a diagram illustrating the double timer display effect B. The double timer display effect B in Figure 106 is an effect that occurs with the same variation of special symbols. In the double timer display effect B, as shown in Figure 106(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. Also, a hold icon 9A and a variation icon 9C are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. The color of the hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C at this time is white. The color of the hold icon 9A or variation icon 9C indicates the probability of winning a jackpot. In this case, if the icon is white, the probability of winning a jackpot is the lowest; if it is yellow, the probability of winning a jackpot is the third highest; if it is green, the probability of winning a jackpot is the second highest; and if it is red, the probability of winning a jackpot is the highest.

Next, as shown in Figure 106(B), the first timer display animation is performed. In this first timer display animation, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 represents a countdown (timer operation) with a longer time interval than the second timer display XJ2 described later. Specifically, it displays a timer value that counts down in 20-second increments. The timer value is displayed within a rectangular frame in the first timer display XJ1. At this time, as shown in Figure 106(B), the first timer display XJ1 displays "40:00," representing a timer value of 40 seconds, and the frame is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and reappears during the countdown. Note that the first timer display XJ1 can, for example, represent a countdown with an interval longer than 1 second.

Next, as shown in Figure 106(C), the second timer display animation is performed. In this second timer display animation, the second timer display XJ2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display animation, the first timer display XJ1 disappears. This second timer display XJ2 represents a count-up (timer operation) with a shorter time interval than the first timer display XJ1 described above; specifically, it represents a count-down every second. At this time, as shown in Figure 106(C), the second timer display XJ2 displays "20," representing a timer value of 20 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a after this display. Note that the second timer display XJ2 can, for example, represent a count-down with an interval of less than one second.

Next, as shown in Figure 106(D), the first timer appearance animation is performed. In this first timer appearance animation, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts down every second, and the timer value is "10," while the first timer display XJ1 counts down every 20 seconds, and the timer value is "20:00."

Next, as shown in Figure 106(E), the first timer mode change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and enlarges on the surface of the display screen 7a, while the color of its frame changes from blue to green, red, etc. However, it is not limited to this; the first timer display XJ1 may also rotate the display screen 7a from the front to the back, change the font of the timer value, or move.

Next, as shown in Figure 106(F), the first timer disappearance effect is performed. During this first timer disappearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in Figure 106(G), the time-up animation A is performed. In this time-up animation A, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the timer value becomes "0" (0 seconds), indicating that the timer has finished.

Next, as shown in Figure 106(H), Chance Up演出 A is performed. This Chance Up演出 A is performed when the second timer display XJ2 time runs out. A Chance Up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the reserve icon 9A changes from blue to green (hatched area in the figure). This change in reserve indicates an increased probability of a jackpot in the spin corresponding to the changed reserve icon 9A. Chance Up image XJ3 is an image that suggests an increased probability of a jackpot, and in Figure 106(H), it is labeled "Chance".

Next, as shown in Figure 106(I), the time-up animation B is performed. In this time-up animation B, the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the first timer display XJ1 changes its mode as in the first timer mode change animation described above. Also, in this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 becomes "00:00" (0 seconds), indicating a time-up. The first timer display XJ1 is then erased after the mode change.

Next, as shown in Figure 106(J), Chance Up演出 B is performed. This Chance Up演出 B is triggered when the first timer display XJ1 time runs out. A Chance Up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the reserve icon 9A changes from green to red (cross-hatched area in the figure). This reserve change indicates that the probability of a big win in the variation corresponding to the changed reserve icon 9A has increased even further than during Chance Up演出 A. In Figure 106(J), Chance Up image XJ3 is labeled "Super Hot," suggesting an even higher probability of a big win than during Chance Up演出 A.

[Double Timer Display Effect C]
Figure 107 is a diagram illustrating the double timer display effect C. The double timer display effect C in Figure 107 is an effect that occurs with the same variation of special symbols. In the double timer display effect C, as shown in Figure 107(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. Also, a hold icon 9A and a variation icon 9C are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. The color of the hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C at this time is white. The color of the hold icon 9A or variation icon 9C indicates the probability of winning a jackpot. In this case, if the icon is white, the probability of winning a jackpot is the lowest; if it is yellow, the probability of winning a jackpot is the third highest; if it is green, the probability of winning a jackpot is the second highest; and if it is red, the probability of winning a jackpot is the highest.

Next, as shown in Figure 107(B), the first timer display animation is performed. In this first timer display animation, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 represents a countdown (timer operation) with a longer time interval than the second timer display XJ2 described later; specifically, it represents a countdown every 10 seconds. The timer value is displayed within a rectangular frame of the first timer display XJ1. At this time, as shown in Figure 107(B), the first timer display XJ1 displays "20:00," representing 20 seconds, and the frame is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and reappears during the countdown. Note that the first timer display XJ1 can, for example, represent a countdown with an interval longer than 1 second.

Next, as shown in Figure 107(C), the second timer display animation is performed. During this second timer display animation, the second timer display XJ2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display animation, the first timer display XJ1 disappears. This second timer display XJ2 represents a count-up (timer operation) with a shorter time interval than the first timer display XJ1 described above; specifically, it represents a count-down every second. At this time, as shown in Figure 107(C), the second timer display XJ2 displays "20," representing 20 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a after this display. Note that the second timer display XJ2 can, for example, represent a count-down with an interval of less than one second.

Next, as shown in Figure 107(D), the first timer appearance animation is performed. In this first timer appearance animation, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts down every second and shows "10," while the first timer display XJ1 counts down every 10 seconds and shows "10:00." In other words, the timer values of the first timer display XJ1 and the second timer display XJ2 are the same.

Next, as shown in Figure 107(E), a first timer mode change animation is performed. In this first timer mode change animation, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and enlarges on the surface of the display screen 7a, while the color of its frame changes from blue to green, red, etc. However, it is not limited to this; the first timer display XJ1 may also rotate the display screen 7a from the front to the back, change the font of the timer value, or move.

Next, as shown in Figure 107(F), the first timer disappearance effect is performed. During this first timer disappearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in Figure 107(G), a time-up animation is performed. During this time-up animation, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is displayed approximately in the center. In this case, the first timer display XJ1 shows a timer value of "00:00" (0 seconds), indicating a time-up, and the second timer display XJ2 also shows a timer value of "0" (0 seconds), indicating a timer-up. At this time, the first timer display XJ1 undergoes a mode change animation as described above. The first timer display XJ1 is then erased after the mode change.

Next, as shown in Figure 107(H), a chance-up animation is performed. This chance-up animation occurs when the first timer display XJ1 and the second timer display XJ2 time out. A chance-up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the reserve icon 9A changes from blue to red (cross-hatched area in the figure). This change in reserve indicates a significant increase in the probability of a jackpot in the spin corresponding to the changed reserve icon 9A. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image that suggests an increased probability of a jackpot, and in Figure 107(H), it is labeled "Super Hot," indicating a significant increase in the probability of a jackpot.

In the double timer display effects A to C described above, the appearance of the second timer display XJ2 does not change. However, a configuration in which the appearance of the second timer display XJ2 changes is also acceptable. For example, the second timer display XJ2 may enlarge, shrink, change color, rotate, or display effects.

[Example of effect]
In the double timer display effects A to C described above, within the same fluctuation, a first timer display XJ1 is performed at a relatively long time interval (20 seconds in double timer display effect B), displaying timer operation (count-up or count-down display), and a second timer display XJ2 is performed at a relatively short time interval (0.01 seconds). With this configuration, the two timer displays can be experienced on different time axes, adding a sense of thrill and surprise to the timer display and improving the enjoyment of the timer effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the double timer display effects A to C described above, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed at the timing of the timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display) during the first timer mode change effect, and is displayed larger than the second timer display XJ2. This configuration makes the first timer display XJ1 memorable to the player, making it easier for the player to recognize the two timer displays representing different time axes, and thus attracting the player's interest in the two different timer displays. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the double timer display effects A to C described above, the first timer display XJ1 undergoes a predetermined mode change at the timing of the timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). This configuration allows the change in the mode of the first timer display XJ1 to make a lasting impression on the player, making it easier for the player to recognize the two different time axis timer displays and thus attracting the player's interest in the two different timer displays. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the double timer display effects A to C described above, the first timer display XJ1 rotates at the timing of the timer operation display (count-up or count-down display). This configuration allows the rotation of the first timer display XJ1 to make a strong impression on the player, making it easier for the player to recognize the two different time axis timer displays and attracting their interest. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the double timer display effects A to C described above, the first timer display XJ1 changes color at the timing of the timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). This configuration allows the color change of the first timer display XJ1 to make a strong impression on the player, making it easier for the player to recognize the two different time axis timer displays and attracting the player's interest. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect XJ-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect is a first timer display effect that displays timer operation at relatively long time intervals,
The second display effect is a second timer display that displays timer operation at relatively short time intervals.
A combination of the first and second display effects may be performed.
The aforementioned combination performance is characterized in that the first display performance and the second display performance are performed in the same variation.
[Concept XJ-2]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XJ-1,
In the aforementioned combination display, the first timer display of the first display display is displayed larger than the second timer display at the timing of the timer operation display.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Prototype XJ-3]
The gaming machine described in the form XJ-2,
In the aforementioned combination performance, the first timer display of the first display performance undergoes a predetermined change in mode at the timing of the timer operation display.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Fire XJ-4]
The gaming machine described in the form XJ-3,
In the aforementioned combination presentation, the first timer display of the first display presentation rotates as the predetermined mode change at the timing when the timer operation display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XJ-5]
A gaming machine as described in Actual XJ-3 or Actual XJ-4,
In the aforementioned combination presentation, the first timer display of the first display presentation changes color as a predetermined change in form at the timing when the timer operation display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment described above, when a jackpot is hit, the game state after the jackpot can be either a probability variation game state (high probability, high base state) or a time-saving game state (low probability, high base state). In both the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state, when the number of special symbol variations reaches 100, the game transitions to the normal game state.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 may be provided with the following three jackpots.
1. Jackpot K1: After a big win, the game state becomes a probability variation game state, and when the number of special symbol variations reaches the first predetermined number, it transitions back to the normal game state.
2. Jackpot K2: After a big win, the game state becomes a probability variation game state, and when the number of special symbol variations reaches the second specified number, it transitions back to the normal game state.
3. After a big win, the game state becomes a probability variation game state, and when the number of special symbol spins reaches the first specified number, it transitions to a time-saving game state, and further, when the number of special symbol spins reaches the second specified number, it transitions to a normal game state. This is Big Win K3.
Jackpots K1 to K3 are selected with a predetermined probability when a jackpot is hit.

The final screen display animation A described below represents the display animation after a jackpot game based on jackpot K1, the final screen display animation B represents the display animation after a jackpot game based on jackpot K2, and the final screen display animation C represents the display animation after a jackpot game based on jackpot K3.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first specified number of times is set to 100, and the second specified number of times is set to 200. However, it is not limited to this, and the first specified number of times may be any number as long as it is less than the second specified number of times. The second specified number of times may be any number as long as it is greater than the first specified number of times.
Furthermore, the normal game state is a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player, and is therefore also called the disadvantageous game state. The time-saving game state and the probability-changing game state are relatively advantageous game states for the player, and are therefore collectively referred to as the advantageous game state.

The final screen display effects A to C are described below using Figures 108 to 110. These final screen display effects are executed during the reel spinning effect of decorative symbols in the normal state, time-saving state (low probability, low base state), or probability variation state (high probability, high base state). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the final screen display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Final screen display effect A]
Figure 108 is a diagram illustrating the final screen display effect A. This final screen display effect A includes a probability variation game effect, a result information display effect, and a normal game effect. The probability variation game effect is a display effect for the variation when there are 5 remaining special symbol variations until the first predetermined number of variations in the probability variation game state (high probability high base state) entered after a big win K1. The result information display effect is a display effect for the variation when the first predetermined number of variations (100 times) is reached. The normal game effect is a display effect for the variation when the game transitions to the normal game state. In this result information display effect A, the hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the diagram.

In the final screen display animation A, after a big win K1, a probability variation game animation is performed as shown in Figure 108(A). In this probability variation game animation, on display screen 7a, the right-hand shooting suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, the probability variation suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, the remaining probability variation count display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, the variation animation of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed approximately in the center, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the bottom. The right-hand shooting suggestion display XK1 is a display that prompts the player to shoot to the right. The probability variation suggestion display XK2 is a display that indicates the game state is a probability variation game state. The remaining probability variation count display XK3 is a display that indicates how many more times the probability variation game state will continue. This number represents the number of times the special symbols have varied. In Figure 108(A), since there are 5 remaining special symbol variations until the first predetermined number of spins, the remaining number of spins display XK3 shows "5 spins remaining".

Next, after a big win K1, when the first predetermined number of spins (100 spins) is reached, a result information display animation is performed, as shown in Figure 108(B). In this result information display animation, result information display XK4 is displayed on display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 contains information that represents the result of the game state during the current winning streak. "Winning streak" refers to the period after a big win (also called the first big win) in the normal game state, when the game enters a probability variation game state or a time reduction game state, and then returns to the normal game state (excluding the time during a big win game). For example, "6 consecutive wins" means that six big wins, including the first big win, have occurred between the time of the first big win and the time of returning to the normal game state (excluding the time during a big win game). Furthermore, the information representing the results of the gameplay during a winning streak includes: information on the number of balls won during the winning streak (indicated as "Winning" in the Result Information Display XK4); information on the number of winning streaks (indicated as "Number of Wins" in the Result Information Display XK4); information on the average time taken to win a jackpot during a winning streak (indicated as "Average Time" in the Result Information Display XK4); and rank information (indicated as "Rank" in the Result Information Display XK4). For example, if the number of winning streaks was 6 and the time taken to win these 6 jackpots was 15 minutes, the average time would be 2 minutes and 30 seconds. Also, the rank information increases in proportion to the number of balls won and the number of winning streaks. In the Result Information Display XK4 of Figure 108 (B), the information on the number of balls won is "Winning: 5312 balls", the information on the number of winning streaks is "Number of Wins: 6", the information on the average time is "Average Time: 2 minutes 30 seconds", and the rank information is "Rank: A". Furthermore, the XK1 indicator suggesting right-hand play continues to be displayed during the results information display.

Next, when the game enters normal gameplay mode, the normal gameplay animation is performed as shown in Figure 108(C). In this normal gameplay animation, the right-hand play indication XK1 is removed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change.

[Final screen display effect B]
Figure 109 is a diagram illustrating the final screen display effect B. This final screen display effect B includes the probability variation game effect A, the result information display effect A, the advantageous game state continuation effect, the probability variation game effect B, the result information display effect B, and the normal game effect. The probability variation game performance A is a display performance that occurs when there are 5 special symbol spins remaining until the first predetermined number of spins in the probability variation game state (high probability high base state) entered after a big win K2, the result information display performance A is a display performance during the spin when the first predetermined number of spins (100 spins) is reached, the advantageous game state continuation performance is a display performance during the spin when the first predetermined number of spins (100 spins) is reached and is a display performance that occurs after the result information display performance A, the probability variation game performance B is a display performance that occurs when there are 3 special symbol spins remaining until the second predetermined number of spins in the probability variation game state, the result information display performance B is a display performance that occurs during the spin when the second predetermined number of spins is reached in the probability variation game state, and the normal game performance is a display performance that occurs during the spin when the game transitions to the normal game state.In this final screen display performance B, the hold icon 9A and spin icon 9C are displayed on display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

In the final screen display animation B, during the probability variation game state after a big win K2, the probability variation game animation A is performed as shown in Figure 109(A). In this probability variation game animation A, on display screen 7a, the right-hand shooting suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, the probability variation suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, the remaining probability variation count display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, the variation animation of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed approximately in the center, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the bottom. The right-hand shooting suggestion display XK1 is a display that prompts the player to shoot to the right. The probability variation suggestion display XK2 is a display that indicates the game state is a probability variation game state. The remaining probability variation count display XK3 is a display that indicates how many more times the probability variation game state will continue. This number represents the number of times the special symbols have varied. In Figure 109(A), since there are 5 remaining special symbol variations until the first predetermined number of spins, the remaining number of spins display XK3 shows "5 spins remaining".

Next, after a big win K2, when the first predetermined number of spins (100 spins) is reached, the result information display animation A is performed, as shown in Figure 109(B). In this result information display animation A, the result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 contains information that represents the result of the game during the current winning streak. "Winning streak" refers to the period after a big win (also called the first big win) in the normal game state, when the game enters a probability variation game state or a time reduction game state, and then returns to the normal game state (excluding the big win game). For example, "6 consecutive wins" means that six big wins, including the first big win, have occurred between the first big win and the return to the normal game state (excluding the big win game). Furthermore, the information representing the results of a winning streak includes: information on the number of balls won during the winning streak (indicated as "Winning" in the Result Information Display XK4); information on the number of winning streaks (indicated as "Number of Wins" in the Result Information Display XK4); information on the average time it took to win a jackpot during the winning streak (indicated as "Average Time" in the Result Information Display XK4); and information on the rank (indicated as "Rank" in the Result Information Display XK4). For example, if the number of winning streaks was 6 and the time spent to win the jackpot 6 times was 15 minutes, the average time would be 2 minutes and 30 seconds. Also, the rank information increases in proportion to the number of balls won and the number of winning streaks. In the Result Information Display XK4 of Figure 109 (B), the information on the number of balls won is "Winning: 5312 balls", the information on the number of winning streaks is "Number of Wins: 6 times", the information on the average time is "Average Time: 2 minutes 30 seconds", and the information on the rank is "Rank: A". Furthermore, the XK1 indicator suggesting right-hand play continues to be displayed during the results information display.

Next, after the first predetermined number of spins (100 spins) in the probability variation state and after the result information display animation A has finished, the advantageous game state continuation animation is performed, as shown in Figure 109(C). In this advantageous game state continuation animation, a state indication display XK5, suggesting that the game is in an advantageous game state (in this case, a probability variation state), is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. In Figure 109(C), the state indication display XK5 reads "Advantageous game state continued!". Note that the right-hand shooting indication display XK1 continues to be displayed during the advantageous game state continuation display animation.

Next, the probability variation game state continues, and the probability variation game state演出 B is performed, as shown in Figure 109(D). In this probability variation game state演出 B, on the display screen 7a, the right-hand shooting indication XK1 is continuously displayed in the upper left, the probability variation indication XK2 is displayed in the upper right, the probability variation remaining count indication XK3 is displayed in the lower right, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are rotated in the approximate center, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the bottom. In Figure 109(D), since there are 3 rotations of the special symbols remaining until the second predetermined number of rotations, the probability variation remaining count indication XK3 shows "3 rotations remaining".

Next, when the game reaches the second predetermined number of spins in the probability variation game state, the result information display animation B is performed, as shown in Figure 109(E). In this result information display animation B, the result information display XK6 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK6 contains information representing the result of the game during the current winning streak. In addition, the information representing the result of the game during the winning streak in the result information display XK6 includes, similar to the result information display XK4, information representing the number of balls obtained during the winning streak (indicated as "obtained" in the result information display XK4), information representing the number of winning streaks (indicated as "number of winning streaks" in the result information display XK4), average time information representing the average time until a jackpot is obtained during the winning streak (indicated as "average time" in the result information display XK4), and rank information representing a predetermined rank (indicated as "rank" in the result information display XK4). In Figure 109(E), the result information display XK6 shows the acquired balls as "Acquired: 10,000 balls," the number of consecutive wins as "Number of consecutive wins: 12," the average time as "Average time: 2 minutes 22 seconds," and the rank as "Rank: S." Furthermore, the right-hand play suggestion display XK1 continues to be displayed during the result information display animation.

Next, when the game enters a normal game state, the normal game animation is performed, as shown in Figure 109(F). In this normal game animation, the right-hand play indication XK1 is removed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change.

[Final screen display effect C]
Figure 110 is a diagram illustrating the final screen display effect C. This final screen display effect C includes a probability variation game effect, a result information display effect A, a favorable game state continuation effect, a time reduction game effect, a result information display effect B, and a normal game effect. The probability variation game performance is a display performance that occurs when there are 5 special symbol spins remaining until the first predetermined number of spins in the probability variation game state (high probability high base state) entered after a big win K3; the result information display performance A is a display performance during the spin when the first predetermined number of spins (100 spins) is reached; the advantageous game state continuation performance is a display performance that occurs during the spin when the first predetermined number of spins (100 spins) is reached and is performed after the result information display performance A; the time reduction game performance is a display performance that occurs when there are 10 special symbol spins remaining until the second predetermined number of spins in the time reduction game state that is entered after the first predetermined number of spins; the result information display performance B is a display performance that occurs during the spin when the second predetermined number of spins is reached in the time reduction game state; and the normal game performance is a display performance that occurs during the spin when transitioning to the normal game state. In this final screen display performance C, the hold icon 9A and spin icon 9C are displayed on display screen 7a, but are omitted in the diagram.

In the final screen display animation C, after a big win K3, a probability variation game animation is performed as shown in Figure 110(A). In this probability variation game animation, on display screen 7a, the right-hand shooting suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, the probability variation suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, the remaining probability variation count display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, the variation animation of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed approximately in the center, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the bottom. The right-hand shooting suggestion display XK1 is a display that prompts the player to shoot to the right. The probability variation suggestion display XK2 is a display that indicates the game state is a probability variation game state. The remaining probability variation count display XK3 is a display that indicates how many more times the probability variation game state will continue. This number represents the number of times the special symbols have varied. In Figure 110(A), since there are 5 remaining special symbol variations until the first predetermined number of spins, the remaining number of spins display XK3 shows "5 spins remaining".

Next, after a big win K3, when the first predetermined number of spins (100 spins) is reached, the result information display animation A is performed, as shown in Figure 110(B). In this result information display animation A, the result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 contains information that represents the result of the game state during the current winning streak. "Winning streak" refers to the period after a big win (also called the first big win) in the normal game state, when the game enters a probability variation game state or a time reduction game state, and then returns to the normal game state (excluding the time during a big win game). For example, "6 consecutive wins" means that six big wins, including the first big win, have occurred between the time of the first big win and the time of returning to the normal game state (excluding the time during a big win game). Furthermore, the information representing the results of the gameplay during a winning streak includes: information on the number of balls won during the winning streak (indicated as "Winning" in the Result Information Display XK4); information on the number of winning streaks (indicated as "Number of Wins" in the Result Information Display XK4); information on the average time taken to win a jackpot during a winning streak (indicated as "Average Time" in the Result Information Display XK4); and rank information (indicated as "Rank" in the Result Information Display XK4). For example, if the number of winning streaks was 6 and the time taken to win these 6 jackpots was 15 minutes, the average time would be 2 minutes and 30 seconds. Also, the rank information increases in proportion to the number of balls won and the number of winning streaks. In the Result Information Display XK4 of Figure 110(B), the information on the number of balls won is "Winning: 5312 balls", the information on the number of winning streaks is "Number of Wins: 6", the information on the average time is "Average Time: 2 minutes 30 seconds", and the rank information is "Rank: A". Furthermore, the XK1 indicator suggesting right-hand play continues to be displayed during the results information display.

Next, after the first set number of fluctuations (100 times) and the completion of the result information display animation A, the advantageous game state continuation animation is performed, as shown in Figure 110(C). In this advantageous game state continuation animation, a state indication display XK7, suggesting that the game is in an advantageous game state (in this case, a time-saving game state), is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. In Figure 110(C), the state indication display XK7 reads, "Advantageous game state continued! Time-saving game state entered." Note that the right-hand play indication display XK1 continues to be displayed during the advantageous game state continuation display animation.

Next, when the game enters a time-saving mode and there are 10 spins remaining until the second set of spins, a time-saving game animation is performed, as shown in Figure 110(D). In this time-saving game animation, on the display screen 7a, the right-hand spin indication XK1 continues to be displayed in the upper left, the time-saving indication XK8 is displayed in the upper right, the remaining time-saving spins display XK9 is displayed in the lower right, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R spin animations are performed approximately in the center, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the bottom. In Figure 110(D), since there are 10 spins remaining for the special symbols until the second set of spins, the remaining time-saving spins display XK9 shows "10 spins remaining".

Next, when the game reaches the second predetermined number of spins in the probability variation game state, the result information display animation B is performed, as shown in Figure 110(E). In this result information display animation B, the result information display XK10 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK10 contains information representing the result of the game during the current winning streak. In addition, the information representing the result of the game during the winning streak in the result information display XK10, similar to the result information display XK4, includes acquired payout information (indicated as "acquired" in the result information display XK4) representing the number of payouts acquired during the winning streak, winning streak count information (indicated as "winning streak count" in the result information display XK4) representing the number of winning streaks, average time information (indicated as "average time" in the result information display XK4) representing the average time until a jackpot is acquired during the winning streak, and rank information (indicated as "rank" in the result information display XK4) representing a predetermined rank. In Figure 110(E), the result information display XK6 shows the acquired balls as "Acquired: 10,000 balls," the number of consecutive wins as "Number of consecutive wins: 12," the average time as "Average time: 2 minutes 22 seconds," and the rank as "Rank: S." Furthermore, the right-hand play suggestion display XK1 continues to be displayed during the result information display animation.

Next, when the game enters a normal game state, the normal game animation is performed, as shown in Figure 110(F). In this normal game animation, the right-hand play indication XK1 is removed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change.

In the final screen display sequences B and C described above, even though the result information display sequence A is performed and result information display XK4 is shown, the game does not return to the normal game state, and the advantageous game state continues. Furthermore, game information such as jackpots and acquired balls during the advantageous game state after result information display XK4 is included in the information representing the results of the game during consecutive wins in result information display XK6 and result information display XK10. For example, in the final screen display sequence B described above, if the acquired balls information shown in result information display XK4 represents 6000 balls, and in the advantageous game state after the display of result information display XK4, a jackpot is hit and an additional 1000 balls are acquired, and after the jackpot game, the special symbols are changed, leading to the display of result information display XK4 or result information display XK6, then the acquired balls information shown in result information display XK4 or result information display XK6 will represent 7000 balls.

[Variations]
In the final screen display sequences A to C described above, if the game enters a normal game state (normal game state) and reaches the third specified number of rounds, it may be configured to transition to a time-saving game state. In this case, the game information such as big wins and acquired balls during this time-saving game state may be included in the result information displayed afterward, which will show the results of the game during the winning streak.

[Example of effect]
In the final screen display sequences B to C described above, when the game state is a relatively advantageous game state for the player (probability variation game state, time reduction game state), a display indicating that the advantageous game state will end and the game state will transition to a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player (normal game state) is shown based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a first predetermined value (for example, 100 times). This display shows result information XK4, which represents the result of a jackpot game during a winning streak, and then displays indicating that the game state is still advantageous (state indication display XK5 and probability variation indication display XK2, or state indication display XK7 and time reduction game state indication display XK8). With this configuration, even if result information display XK4, which indicates a transition to a disadvantageous game state, is displayed, the advantageous game state may continue afterward. Therefore, even if result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can maintain hope for the continuation of the advantageous game state and maintain a high level of interest in the progress of the display sequences until the game actually transitions to the normal game state. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the final screen display C described above, when the game state is a probability variation game state, based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a first predetermined value, a result information display XK4 is shown, indicating that the probability variation game state is ending and the game is transitioning to a normal game state. This result information display shows the outcome of the jackpot game during the consecutive wins. Subsequently, a state indication display XK7 is shown, indicating that the game is in a time-saving game state. With this configuration, even if the result information display XK4, which indicates a transition to a normal game state, is displayed, the game may still enter a time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can maintain hope for the continuation of the time-saving game state, and can maintain a high level of interest in the progress of the display effects until the game actually transitions to a normal game state. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the final screen display animation C described above, despite the display of result information XK4, the state indication display XK7 is displayed, and then the game state transitions to a time-saving game state. Based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a second predetermined value (for example, 200), the result information display XK10, which represents the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive wins, is displayed. That is, even if the result information display XK4, which suggests a transition to the normal game state, is displayed, the state indication display XK7 is displayed, and the game continues into a time-saving game state. From there, the number of special symbol variations reaches the second predetermined value, and the result information display XK10 is displayed. With this configuration, even if the first result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can maintain hope for the time-saving game state until the second result information display XK10 is displayed, and during that time, the player can be kept highly interested in the display animations. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the final screen display animation C described above, despite the display of result information XK4, the state indication display XK7 is displayed, and then the game state transitions to a time-saving game state. Based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a second predetermined value (for example, 200), the result information display XK10, which represents the result of the jackpot game during the winning streak, is displayed, and the game state changes from a time-saving game state to a normal game state. In other words, even if the result information display XK4, which indicates a transition to a normal game state, is displayed, the state indication display XK7 is displayed, and the game state continues to be a time-saving game state. From there, the number of special symbol variations reaches a second predetermined value, the result information display XK10 is displayed, and the game state changes from a time-saving game state to a normal game state. With this configuration, even if the first result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can maintain hope for a time-saving game state until they actually enter a normal game state, and during that time, the player can be kept highly interested in the display animations. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the final screen display sequences B and C described above, the result information display XK4 and the state indication display XK7 each include information representing the number of consecutive wins and the number of balls acquired, respectively. This configuration allows the player to be notified of both the number of consecutive wins and the number of balls acquired at once, thereby giving the player a sense of accomplishment from achieving consecutive wins. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Pattern XK-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple display effects,
The aforementioned gaming machine allows the player to play in one of several game states, which includes a first game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player and a second game state that is relatively favorable to the player.
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect is a display that, when the game state is the second game state, indicates that the second game state will end and the game will transition to the first game state based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a first predetermined value, and displays first result information that represents the result of a jackpot game during a winning streak.
The second display effect is an effect that displays a state indication that suggests the game is in the second game state,
A combination of the first and second display effects may be performed.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the first display performance is performed, followed by the second display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XK-2]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XK-1,
The second game state is either a probability variation game state or a time reduction game state.
In the aforementioned combination performance, in the first display performance, when the game state is the probability variation game state, a first result information display is made that indicates the probability variation game state will end and the game will transition to the first game state, based on the number of special symbol variations reaching the first predetermined value, and thereafter, in the second display performance, a state indication display is made that indicates the time reduction game state is in place.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Pattern XK-3]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XK-2,
In the aforementioned combination presentation, after the state indication display is performed in the second display presentation, the game state transitions to the time-saving game state, and then, based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a second predetermined value, a second result information display is performed, representing the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive wins.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Condition XK-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XK-3,
In the aforementioned combination presentation, after the second result information display is performed, the game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the first game state.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Pattern XK-5]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XK-4,
The first result information display and the second result information display each include information representing the number of consecutive wins and information representing the number of game tokens acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The following describes the promotion/reserve chain animations A to C using Figures 111 to 113. A characteristic feature of these promotion/reserve chain animations is the promotion animation (with reserve chain) that is performed after a win is announced. In this embodiment, animations during a big win are also included in the promotion/reserve chain animation. The promotion animation (with reserve chain) is characterized by announcing that there is a winning reserve among the first special symbol reserves (hereinafter also referred to as "reserve chain").

[Promotion Reserve Consecutive Performance A]
Figure 111 is a diagram illustrating the promotion/retention sequence A.
First, as shown in Figure 111(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 111(B), the win notification animation is executed. The win notification animation is an animation that notifies the player that a win has occurred through the patterns of the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left animation symbol 8L, the middle animation symbol 8C, and the right animation symbol 8R are all "4". This suggests a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing jackpot". Note that, unlike the confirmed stop animation, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporarily stopped state during the win notification animation. Here, too, the three reserve icons 9A and the corresponding variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, it is assumed that there is a winning reserve among the first special symbol reserves corresponding to the reserve icon 9A.

Next, as shown in Figure 111(C), a sword operation prompting animation is executed. This animation encourages the player to operate the sword component 65. Here, a sword image KG, resembling the sword component 65, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG with the text "Press it in" is displayed. If the player operates the sword component 65 at this point, the next animation will be executed. Even if the player does not operate the sword component 65, the next animation will be executed after the effective time for operating the sword component 65 has elapsed.

Next, as shown in Figure 111(D), the upgrade animation (with consecutive wins) is executed. In the upgrade animation (with consecutive wins), the first movable mechanism 14 moves (advances) from its retracted position towards the right edge of the display screen 7a and stops at its advanced position in the center of the front of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a is then divided into a left and right screen by the first movable mechanism 14. Here, on the left screen, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as "7". This means that what was previously announced as a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing jackpot" has been upgraded to a "16RV-passing jackpot". Also, on the right screen, the message image MG, which is "V", is displayed. This indicates a consecutive win. At this point, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed state, and the next animation is executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 111(E), the jackpot payout sequence A is executed. The jackpot payout sequence A is a sequence that processes the jackpot from the previous spin (hereinafter also referred to as "the jackpot"). Here, the first movable mechanism 14 remains stationary in its forward position at the center of the front of the display screen 7a. Then, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left screen, and the number of rounds for the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left corner of the left screen. Here, the round display RH shows "1R". This round display continues from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is processed, the next sequence is executed. Here, the message image MG with the letter "V" is displayed on the right screen.

Next, as shown in Figure 111(F), the movable object movement animation is performed. The movable object movement animation is an animation in which the first movable object 14, which was stationary at the front center of the display screen 7a, slowly moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. As the first movable object 14 moves, the area of the right side of the screen expands. On this right side of the screen, instead of the message display MG of "V", the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7". This means that the consecutive wins are "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". Note that the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may not be displayed at the start of the movement of the first movable object 14, but may be displayed when the first movable object 14 has moved to a position close to the left edge of the display screen 7a, for example, to give the player anticipation regarding the type of jackpot. The first movable component 14 returns to its retracted position and comes to a stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 111(G), the jackpot payout animation B is executed. Jackpot payout animation B is an animation that handles the consecutive wins. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left. Here, the round display RH shows "1R". This round display continues from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is paid out, the next animation is executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 111(H), a status notification animation is executed. This animation notifies the game state. Here, the message image MG, "It's still going!", is displayed. This means that from the next spin, the game will enter a probability variation state (high probability, high base state).

[Promotion Reserve Consecutive Performance B]
Figure 112 is a diagram illustrating the promotion/retention sequence B.
First, as shown in Figure 112(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 112(B), the win notification animation is executed. The win notification animation is an animation that notifies the player that a win has occurred through the patterns of the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left animation symbol 8L, the middle animation symbol 8C, and the right animation symbol 8R are all "4". This suggests a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing jackpot". Note that, unlike the confirmed stop animation, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporarily stopped state during the win notification animation. Here, too, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, it is assumed that there is a winning reserve in the first special symbol reserve corresponding to the reserve icon 9A.

Next, as shown in Figure 112(C), a sword operation prompting animation is executed. This animation encourages the player to operate the sword component 65. Here, a sword image KG, resembling the sword component 65, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG with the text "Press it in" is displayed. If the player operates the sword component 65 at this point, the next animation will be executed. Even if the player does not operate the sword component 65, the next animation will be executed after the effective time for operating the sword component 65 has elapsed.

Next, as shown in Figure 112(D), the upgrade animation (with consecutive wins) is executed. During the upgrade animation (with consecutive wins), the first movable mechanism 14 moves (advances) from its retracted position towards the right edge of the display screen 7a and stops at its advanced position in the center of the front of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a is then divided into a left and right screen by the first movable mechanism 14. Here, the left screen displays a message image MG1 that reads "MAX Jackpot." This indicates that what was previously reported as a "16R (effectively 13R) Jackpot not expected to pass V" has been upgraded to a "16RV expected to pass jackpot." The right screen also displays a message image MG2 that reads "MAX Jackpot." This indicates a consecutive win and also indicates that it is a "16RV expected to pass jackpot." At this point, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (not shown) stop in a confirmed state, and the next animation is executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 112(E), the jackpot payout animation A is executed. Jackpot payout animation A is the animation for paying out the jackpot. Here, the first movable mechanism 14 remains stationary in its forward position at the center of the front of the display screen 7a. Then, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left screen, and the number of rounds for the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left corner of the left screen. Here, the round display RH shows "1R". This round display continues from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is paid out, the next animation is executed. Here, the message image MG2, "MAX Jackpot," is displayed on the right screen.

Next, as shown in Figure 112(F), the movable object movement animation is executed. This animation involves the first movable object 14, which was stationary in the central forward position of the display screen 7a, slowly moving towards the left side of the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. As the first movable object 14 moves, the area of the right-hand screen expands. As the right-hand screen expands, the message image MG2, displaying "MAX Jackpot," is enlarged and displayed. The first movable object 14 then returns to its retracted position and comes to a stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 112(G), the jackpot payout animation B is executed. Jackpot payout animation B is an animation that handles the consecutive wins. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left. Here, the round display RH shows "1R". This round display continues from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is paid out, the next animation is executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 112(H), a status notification animation is executed. This animation notifies the game's current state. Here, the message image MG, "It's still going!", is displayed. This means that the game will enter a probability variation state (high probability, high base state) from the next spin.

[Promotion Reserve Consecutive Performance C]
Figure 113 is a diagram illustrating the promotion/retention sequence C.
First, as shown in Figure 113(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 113(B), the win notification animation is executed. The win notification animation is an animation that notifies the player that a win has occurred through the patterns of the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left animation symbol 8L, the middle animation symbol 8C, and the right animation symbol 8R are all "4". This suggests a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing jackpot". Note that, unlike the confirmed stop animation, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporarily stopped state during the win notification animation. Here, too, the three reserve icons 9A and the corresponding variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, it is assumed that there is a winning reserve among the first special symbol reserves corresponding to the reserve icon 9A.

Next, as shown in Figure 113(C), a sword operation prompting animation is executed. This animation encourages the player to operate the sword component 65. Here, a sword image KG, resembling the sword component 65, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG with the text "Press it in" is displayed. If the player operates the sword component 65 at this point, the next animation will be executed. Even if the player does not operate the sword component 65, the next animation will be executed after the effective time for operating the sword component 65 has elapsed.

Next, as shown in Figure 113(D), the upgrade animation (with consecutive wins) is executed. During the upgrade animation (with consecutive wins), the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the left animation symbol 8L, the middle animation symbol 8C, and the right animation symbol 8R are all "7". This means that what was previously announced as a "16R (effectively 13R) non-V passing jackpot" has been upgraded to a "16RV passing jackpot". Also, a message image MG saying "777 next time" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This indicates a consecutive win and also indicates that it is a "16RV passing jackpot". At this point, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed state, and the next animation is executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 113(E), the first half of the jackpot payout sequence A is executed. The first half of the sequence for paying out the jackpot is the first part of the sequence. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and round balls RB, indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game, are displayed on both the left and right sides of the ally character CRA. Specifically, 16 round balls RB are displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. This indicates that the jackpot is 16 rounds. Also, 16 round balls RB are displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. This indicates that the win in the first special symbol hold is 16 rounds.

Next, as shown in Figure 113(F), the second half of the jackpot payout sequence A is executed. The second half of the jackpot payout sequence A is the latter part of the sequence that handles the payout. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and round balls RB, indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game, are displayed to the left and right of the ally character CRA. In the jackpot payout sequence A, an "X" mark is placed on the round ball RB to the left of the ally character CRA each time a round is completed. When all 16 round balls RB to the left of the ally character CRA have "X" marks, the jackpot is completed, and the next sequence is executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 113(G), the jackpot payout animation B is executed. Jackpot payout animation B is an animation that processes the remaining reserved spins. Jackpot payout animation B is executed immediately after the screen of jackpot payout animation A. During jackpot payout animation B, an "X" mark is placed on the round ball RB to the right of the ally character CRA each time a round is consumed. When all 16 round balls RB to the right of the ally character CRA are marked with an "X," the winning spin in the first special symbol reserve is consumed, and the next animation is executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 113(H), a status notification animation is executed. This animation notifies the game state. Here, the message image MG, "It's still going!", is displayed. This means that from the next spin, the game will enter a probability variation state (high probability, high base state).

[Example of effect]
The following shows an example of the effect of the string decomposition animation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if a player wins a "16RV scheduled jackpot," it is possible to perform an upgrade animation that first makes it appear as if the player has won a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot," and then announces that they have won a "16RV scheduled jackpot." Furthermore, in the upgrade animation, if a consecutive win occurs, the player is notified that it is a consecutive win (Figures 111(D), 112(D), and 113(D)). This configuration can surprise and delight the player, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, a "16R (effectively 13R) non-V-passing jackpot" corresponds to "First Advantageous Game," a "16R V-passing jackpot" corresponds to "Second Advantageous Game," an upgrade animation (with consecutive reserves) corresponds to an "upgrade animation," a first special symbol reserve corresponds to "reserve memory," and the information announced in the upgrade animation (with consecutive reserves) corresponds to "winning information."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the upgrade animation (with consecutive wins), only the fact that it is a consecutive win is announced (Figure 111(D)). With this configuration, since the type of jackpot is unknown at the stage of the upgrade animation (with consecutive wins), it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the upgrade animation (with consecutive reserved balls), the player is notified that it is a consecutive reserved ball, and also whether it is a "jackpot scheduled to pass 16RV" or a "jackpot scheduled to not pass 16R (effectively 13R)V" (Figures 112(D) and 113(D)). With this configuration, the type of jackpot is known at the stage of the upgrade animation (with consecutive reserved balls), which can give the player a sense of happiness and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a sword operation promotion effect is performed, and when the player pushes in the sword member 65, an upgrade effect (with a reserve consecutive win) is performed (Figures 111(C)(D), 112(C)(D), and 113(C)(D)). With this configuration, the player is more likely to have expectations when pushing in the sword member 65, which can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the upgrade to "16RV scheduled jackpot" is shown on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the fact that it is a consecutive win is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a (Figures 111(D) and 112(D)). Furthermore, the upgrade to "16RV scheduled jackpot" is shown in the center of the display screen 7a, and the fact that it is a consecutive win is shown in the lower center of the display screen 7a (Figure 113(D)). With this configuration, the notification of the upgrade and the consecutive win is shown in parallel on the display screen 7a, which can improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the promotion/reserve chain animations A and B, the left area of display screen 7a corresponds to the "first area," and the right area of display screen 7a corresponds to the "second area." Furthermore, in the promotion/reserve chain animation C, the central part of display screen 7a corresponds to the "first area," and the lower central part of display screen 7a corresponds to the "second area."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are separated by the first movable mechanism 14 (Figures 111(D)(E)(F), 112(D)(E)(F)). With this configuration, the information on the display screen 7a is organized, and the movement of the first movable mechanism 14 can surprise the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. The first movable mechanism 14 corresponds to the "movable mechanism".

[Variations]
The following shows variations of the promotion/hold sequence animation.
[Variation 1]
The above configuration involved performing an upgrade animation (with consecutive wins) before the big win, but it is also acceptable to perform the upgrade animation (with consecutive wins) during the big win.

[Modified example 2]
The above describes how to perform a sword operation promotion animation to have the user operate the sword component 65, but it may also be possible to have the user operate the animation button 63.

[Modification 3]
The above example assumes that there are consecutive reserved events in the promotion sequence. However, if there are no consecutive reserved events, it is possible to display a message image such as "Too bad" on the right side of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figures 111(D) and 112(D). The same applies to Figure 113(D).
Alternatively, if there is no pending win sequence, the presence or absence of a pending win sequence may not be shown, and for example, the first movable mechanism 14 may not be moved, and only the upgrade sequence may be performed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
The above was an example of a consecutive win with the first special symbol held, but the same can be done with a consecutive win with the second special symbol held.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine that is capable of holding back the winning lottery, which is triggered when a ball enters a designated ball entry point, and when the lottery is performed and the player wins, it executes a game that is advantageous to the player,
The aforementioned advantageous game includes a first advantageous game and a second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game.
If the player wins the second advantageous game, it is possible to perform an upgrade animation that first makes it appear as if the player has won the first advantageous game, and then announces that the player has won the second advantageous game.
In the aforementioned promotion sequence, if there is a reserved memory in the reserved memory indicating a win in the lottery at the time the promotion sequence is executed, a notification sequence can be executed to announce the winning information based on that win.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Cause C4-2]
The gaming machine described in Actual C4-1,
The aforementioned winning information is information indicating that there is a winning reserved memory among the reserved memories.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Cause C4-3]
The gaming machine described in Actual C4-1,
The aforementioned winning information is information indicating that there is a winning reserved memory in the reserved memory, and that the winner was selected from either the first advantageous game or the second advantageous game.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Fire C4-4]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions C4-1 to C4-3,
It also includes a control panel that can be operated by the player,
In the aforementioned promotion sequence, at the timing of the operation of the control unit, the promotion to the second advantageous game is announced, and the winning information is also announced.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Fire C4-5]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions from C4-1 to C4-4,
It also includes a display device capable of displaying images,
In the aforementioned upgrade animation, the upgrade to the second advantageous game is announced in the first area of the display screen of the display device, and the winning information is announced in the second area of the display screen of the display device.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Fire C4-6]
The gaming machine described in Actual C4-5,
It is further equipped with movable parts that can be moved,
In the aforementioned promotion sequence, the first region and the second region are separated by the movable mechanism.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The operation instruction display effects A to C are described below using Figures 114 to 116. These operation instruction display effects are executed during the variation of decorative patterns, etc. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation instruction display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or on the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Operation instruction display performance A]
Figure 114 is a diagram illustrating the operation instruction display effect A. The operation instruction display effect displays an operation prompting image to prompt the player to operate the control device, then the operation prompting image is removed when the control device is operated, and the operation prompting image is displayed again when the operation of the control device is stopped (canceled). In operation instruction display effect A, first, as shown in Figure 114(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a, and then the reach state is reached. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stop at "3" and become "3↓3". After that, a special effect start image BKH is displayed to announce that a battle effect as a special reach effect has started. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

As shown in Figure 114(B), when the special reach animation begins, the "3" on the left decorative symbol 8L shrinks and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. The "3" on the right decorative symbol 8R shrinks and moves toward the upper right of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. In the center of the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB, the button image BTN, and the operation prompt image RND are displayed. The button image BTN is an image that mimics at least a part of the appearance of the animation button 63. The operation prompt image RND includes an arrow image indicating the direction of operation (downward) for the button image BTN and the text image "Rapid Press," prompting the player to operate (continuously press) the animation button 63. Here, in response to the player's operation (rapid pressing) of the animation button 63, a video of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fighting is displayed.

When the player operates (repeatedly presses) the performance button 63, the button image BTN and the operation prompt image RND disappear, as shown in Figure 114(C). This is because the player is operating the button, and therefore prompt images are no longer needed. This allows for more battle footage to be shown.

If the player stops operating (repeatedly pressing) the performance button 63 while the battle video is being displayed, the button image BTN and the operation prompt image RND will be displayed again, as shown in Figure 114(D). This prompts the player to operate (continuously press) the performance button 63 again. At this time, the progress of the video showing the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB may be interrupted or may continue as usual.

When the player operates (repeatedly presses) the performance button 63 again, the button image BTN and the operation prompt image RND disappear again, as shown in Figure 114(E). At this point, the interrupted battle video may resume.

Figure 114(F) shows the climax of a battle sequence that will be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, the display screen 7a shows the disabled operation image SMK and the button image BTN. The disabled operation image SMK is an image that informs the player that the sequence button 63 is disabled. The button image BTN has an "X" superimposed on it, indicating that the operation is disabled. In this state, the climax of the battle sequence proceeds.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 114(G), selected images ST1 and ST2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the disabled image SMK and the button image BTN with an "×" mark remain displayed. Selected images STG1 and STG2 are images containing multiple options that can be selected by the player through the operation of the control device. In this case, they include the first selected image STG1, labeled "rapid-fire (punch)," and the second selected image STG2, labeled "long press (kick)." At this time, since the operation of the effect button 63 is disabled, no corresponding visual change occurs on the display screen 7a even if the player operates it.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 114(H), after a predetermined time has elapsed, the disabled image SMK and the button image BTN with an "×" disappear. Once these displays disappear, the performance button 63 becomes operational, allowing the user to select either the first selected image STG1 or the second selected image STG2. In this example, the first selected image STG1 is selected, and its display color has changed.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 114(I), the display of the unselected second selection image STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 remains. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 114(J), the button image BTN, the validity period image TBI, and the operation prompt image RND are displayed. The validity period image TBI is a meter image that represents the validity period of operation of the performance button 63, and is a so-called timer bar that indicates the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation prompt image RND includes an arrow image that represents the direction of operation (downward) for the button image BTN and an image of the words "Rapid Fire," prompting the player to operate (rapidly fire) the performance button 63. This operation prompt image RND corresponds to the selected content of the selection images STG1 and STG2. Here, since the first selection image STG1, which is represented as "Rapid Fire (Punch)," is selected, "Rapid Fire" is displayed. If the second selection image STG2, labeled "Long Press (Kick)," is selected, the prompt image RND will display "Long Press." In other words, the prompt image RND is the selection result image representing the selected option from the choices in the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 114(K), an animation is performed in which the allied character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB. This animation is performed regardless of whether the player repeatedly presses the animation button 63. This signals a jackpot. Then, as shown in Figure 114(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop and display in the "333" jackpot configuration.

[Operation instruction display performance B]
Figure 115 is a diagram illustrating the operation instruction display effect B. The operation instruction display effect displays an operation prompting image to prompt the player to operate the control device, then the operation prompting image is removed when the control device is operated, and the operation prompting image is displayed again when the operation of the control device is stopped. Figures 115(A) to (D) of operation instruction display effect B are the same as Figures 114(B) to (E) of operation instruction display effect A. That is, Figure 115(A) is executed after Figure 114(A) of operation instruction display effect A.

Figure 115(E) shows the climax of the battle sequence. At this time, if the player is operating the sequence button 63 (for example, repeatedly pressing it), the display screen 7a will show the disabled input image SMK and the button image BTN. The disabled input image SMK informs the player that the sequence button 63 is disabled. The button image BTN has an "X" superimposed on it, indicating that the operation is disabled. In this state, the climax of the battle sequence proceeds.

When the player stops operating the performance button 63 (for example, by repeatedly pressing it), the invalid operation image SMK and the button image BTN with an "X" disappear, as shown in Figure 115(F). This is because, since the player is no longer operating the buttons, there is no need for an image to indicate that the operation is invalid. This allows for a longer viewing of the climax portion of the battle video.

If the player operates the performance button 63 again (for example, by repeatedly pressing it), the disabled image SMK and the button image BTN with an "X" will be displayed again, as shown in Figure 115(G). In this state, the climax of the battle sequence will proceed.

If the player stops operating the performance button 63 (for example, by repeatedly pressing it), the disabled operation image SMK and the button image BTN with an "x" disappear, as shown in Figure 115(H). In other words, when the player operates the performance button 63, the disabled operation image SMK and the button image BTN with an "x" are displayed, and when the player stops operating the performance button 63, these displays disappear.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 115(I), selected images ST1 and ST2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the disabled image SMK and the button image BTN with an "×" are not displayed. Selected images STG1 and STG2 are images containing multiple options that can be selected by the player through the operation of the control device. In this case, they include the first selected image STG1, labeled "rapid punch," and the second selected image STG2, labeled "long press (kick)." By operating the effect button 63, it becomes possible to select either the first selected image STG1 or the second selected image STG2. At this point, the display color of the selected image changes.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, the disabled image SMK and the button image BTN with an "×" mark will be displayed, as shown in Figure 115(J). This disables the operation of the performance button 63, preventing the selection of the first selected image STG1 and the second selected image STG2 from being changed.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 115(K), the display of the unselected second selection image STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 remains. Then, as shown in Figure 115(L), the button image BTN, the validity period image TBI, and the operation prompt image RND are displayed. The validity period image TBI is a meter image that represents the validity period of operation of the performance button 63, and is a so-called timer bar that shows the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation prompt image RND includes an arrow image that represents the direction of operation (downward) for the button image BTN and an image of the words "Rapid Fire," prompting the player to operate (rapidly fire) the performance button 63. This operation prompt image RND corresponds to the selected content of the selection images STG1 and STG2. Here, since the first selection image STG1, which is represented as "Rapid Fire (Punch)," is selected, "Rapid Fire" is displayed. If the second selection image STG2, labeled "Long Press (Kick)," is selected, "Long Press" will be displayed. In other words, the operation prompt image RND is the selection result image representing the selected option from the choices between the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2.

Figure 115(L) is the same as Figure 114(J) of Operation Instruction Display Effects A. After Figure 115(L), the same effects as Figures 114(K) and 114(L) of Operation Instruction Display Effects A are executed.

[Operation instruction display performance C]
Figure 116 is a diagram illustrating the operation instruction display effect C. The operation instruction display effect displays an operation prompting image to prompt the player to operate the control device, then the operation prompting image is turned off when the control device is operated, and the operation prompting image is turned back on when the operation of the control device is stopped. Figure 116(A) of operation instruction display effect C is the same as Figure 114(A) of operation instruction display effect A. That is, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a, it enters a reach state. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stop at "3" and become "3↓3". After that, a special effect start image BKH is displayed to announce that a battle effect as a special reach effect has started.

As shown in Figure 116(B), when the special reach animation begins, the "3" on the left decorative symbol 8L shrinks and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. The "3" on the right decorative symbol 8R shrinks and moves toward the upper right of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. In the center of the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB, the meter image MG, the button image BTN, and the operation prompt image RND are displayed. The meter image MG shows the amount of energy required for the ally character CRA to unleash a special move. The object represented by the meter image MG can be set to any object. The button image BTN is an image that mimics at least a part of the appearance of the select button 68. The operation prompt image RND includes the text image "Press and hold to charge," prompting the player to operate (press and hold) the select button 68. Here, the color of the top button of the four select buttons 68, represented by button image BTN, changes, informing the player to press the top button. When the player long-presses the top button of select button 68, the meter in meter image MG is charged, triggering a special effect.

When the player long-presses the upper button of the select button 68, the button image BTN and the operation prompt image RND disappear, as shown in Figure 116(C). This is because the player is performing the operation, and therefore prompt images are no longer needed. This allows for more battle footage to be shown. Furthermore, long-pressing the upper button of the rect button 68 triggers an animation where the energy in the meter image MG is charged.

When the battle video is displayed and the player stops holding down the up button of the select button 68, the button image BTN and the operation prompt image RND are displayed again, as shown in Figure 116(D). This prompts the player to hold down the up button of the select button 68 again. At this time, an effect showing the energy of the meter image MG decreasing may be executed.

When the player presses and holds the upper button of the select button 68 again, the button image BTN and the operation prompt image RND disappear again, as shown in Figure 116(E). At this time, the energy of the meter image MG increases again (is charged), and this effect is executed.

Figure 116(F) shows the climax of a battle sequence that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed. When the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed and held, the display screen 7a shows the disabled operation image SMK and the button image BTN. The disabled operation image SMK informs the player that the select button 68 is disabled. The button image BTN displays an overlaid "×" image, indicating that the operation is disabled. In this state, the climax of the battle sequence proceeds.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 116(G), after a predetermined time has elapsed, the disabled image SMK and the button image BTN with an "×" disappear, and the selection images ST1 and ST2, the button image BTN, and the selection prompt image NTK are displayed. The selection images STG1 and STG2 are images containing multiple selectable options for the player; in this case, they include the first selection image STG1, labeled "rapid punch," and the second selection image STG2, labeled "long press (kick)."

The button image BTN, as previously described, is an image that mimics at least a part of the appearance of the select button 68. Here, the left and right buttons of the four buttons represented by the button image BTN change color, informing the player to press either the left or right button. The selection prompt image NTK includes the text "Select," prompting the player to select either the first selection image STG1 or the second selection image STG2 by operating the left and right buttons of the select button 68. Operating the left and right buttons of the select button 68 allows the player to select either the first selection image STG1 or the second selection image STG2. Here, the first selection image STG1 is selected, and the display color of the second selection image STG2 has changed.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 116(H), the display of the unselected second selection image STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 remains. The button image BTN and the selection prompt image NTK are maintained. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 116(I), the displays of the button image BTN and the selection prompt image NTK disappear. In this state, if the player operates the select button 68, as shown in Figure 116(J), the operation invalidation image SMK and the button image BTN with an "×" are displayed. This informs the player that operation of the select button 68 is invalid during this period.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 116(K), an animation is performed in which the allied character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB. Then, as shown in Figure 116(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop and are displayed in the "323" losing pattern.

[Example of effect]
The following are examples of the effects of the operation instruction display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 114(B) to (E), a first effect can be performed in which, after displaying an operation prompting image RND that prompts the player to operate the operating means, the display of the operation prompting image is turned off when the operating means is operated, and the operation prompting image RND is displayed again when the operation of the operating means is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with novel effects that are unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 115 and 116.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 114(F) and 114(G), after the first effect, when the operating means is being operated, a second effect can be performed which displays an operation invalidation image SMK indicating that at least one of the operations of the operating means is invalid. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel effects unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 115 and 116.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 114(G), in the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which, while the operation invalidation image SMK is displayed, selection images STG1 and STG2, which include multiple options that can be selected by the player by operating the operation means, are displayed to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with novel and unprecedented performances, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 115 and 116.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 114(J), in the second presentation, when the selection images STG1 and STG2 are displayed, if the player selects one of the multiple options included in the selection images STG1 and STG2, a selection result image (operation prompt image RND) representing the selected option is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel presentation unlike anything before, thereby improving the level of enjoyment. The same applies to Figure 115.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 114(B) and (D), the first presentation displays an operation prompt image RND along with an operation means image BTN that mimics at least a part of the appearance of the operation means. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain players with novel and unprecedented presentations, thereby improving their enjoyment. The same applies to Figures 115 and 116.

[Variations]
The following shows variations in the operation instruction display.
[Variation 1]
In the operation instruction display effect A, the operation invalidation image SMK is displayed during the climax portion of the battle effect shown in Figures 114(F) and (G), regardless of whether the effect button 63 is being operated or not. However, the operation invalidation image SMK may be configured to be displayed only when the effect button 63 is being operated and not displayed when the effect button 63 is not being operated.

[Modified example 2]
In operation instruction display effects A and B, when the disabled operation image SMK is displayed, all operations of the effect button 63 may be disabled, or only a specific operation (e.g., rapid pressing) may be disabled while other operations (e.g., long press) are enabled. Similarly, in operation instruction display effect C, when the disabled operation image SMK is displayed, all four buttons of the select button 68 may be disabled, or only a specific button (e.g., up/down buttons) may be disabled while other operations (e.g., left/right buttons) are enabled.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
◇[Aspect A22-1]
A means of operation that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
One of the aforementioned multiple types of images is an operation-promoting image that prompts the player to operate the operation means,
A first effect can be performed which, after displaying the operation prompt image, the operation prompt image is turned off when the operation means is operated, and the operation prompt image is displayed again when the operation of the operation means is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A22-2]
The gaming machine described in aspect A22-1,
One of the aforementioned multiple types of images is an operation invalidation image that indicates that at least one of the operations of the operating means is invalid,
After the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which the operation invalidation image is displayed when the operation means is being operated.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A22-3]
The gaming machine described in aspect A22-2,
One of the aforementioned multiple types of images is a selection image that includes multiple options that can be selected by the player through the operation of the control means.
In the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which the selected image is displayed while the disabled image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A22-4]
The gaming machine described in aspect A22-3,
In the second presentation described above, when the selection image is displayed, if the player selects one of the multiple options included in the selection image, a selection result image representing the selected option is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
◇[Aspect A22-5]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions A22-1 to A22-3,
One of the aforementioned multiple types of images is an image of an operating means that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the operating means,
In the first presentation, the operation prompt image is displayed along with the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The following describes the special button display effects A to C using Figures 117 to 119. These special button display effects are executed during standby mode (when the demo screen is displayed and the player is not playing) or during the variation of decorative symbols. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the special button display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a select button 68. This select button 68 is a cross-shaped button with buttons on the up, down, left, and right sides. Each of the up, down, left, and right buttons on the select button 68 can independently receive input from the player. That is, the sub-control board 90 can independently detect the player's input (pressing) from each of the up, down, left, and right buttons on the select button 68 via the select button detection switch 68a.

[Button Special Display Effect A]
Figure 117 is a diagram illustrating button special display effect A. Button special display effect A in Figure 117 includes a standby effect, a decorative pattern change effect, a mode change effect, and a change-prohibition effect. The decorative pattern change effect, mode change effect, and change-prohibition effect, other than the standby effect, are effects that occur in the same spin. In these effects that occur in the same spin, other than the standby effect, the hold icon 9A and the spin icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the diagram.

In the special button display animation A, a standby animation is first performed, as shown in Figure 117(A). This standby animation is performed when the player has not operated the handle 60 for a predetermined period of time, that is, when the display screen 7a is showing a predetermined demonstration screen, and the player presses the select button 68 or the animation button 63. The standby animation displays the mode suggestion image XL1, the select button image XL4, the select button corresponding image XL4A, the animation button image XL5, and the animation button corresponding image XL5A.

Mode suggestion image XL1 is an image that suggests one display mode. Select button image XL4 is an image that mimics the select button 68 and prompts the user to operate the select button 68. Select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed to the right of select button image XL4 and is labeled "Select". Select button corresponding image XL4A suggests that the display mode can be selected by operating the select button 68. Performance button image XL5 is an image that mimics the performance button 63 and prompts the user to operate the performance button 63. Performance button corresponding image XL5A is displayed to the right of performance button image XL5 and is labeled "Confirm". Performance button corresponding image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode is confirmed by operating the performance button 63. In the example in Figure 117(A), mode suggestion image XL1 shows "Mode B" selected.

During the waiting period, when the player launches a game ball and it enters the first start port 20, the special symbol variation begins, and a decorative symbol variation effect is performed as shown in Figure 117(B). In this decorative symbol variation effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and vary vertically. Also, during the decorative symbol variation effect, a mode indication image XL1 and a select button image XL4 are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode indication image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode indication image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4; that is, the mode indication image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the up button of the cross-shaped button on the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in Figure 117(C), a mode change animation is performed. In this mode change animation, the mode indication image XL1 remains associated with the select button image XL4. Furthermore, in this mode change animation, the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68, thereby changing the display mode of the mode indication image XL1, even while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example in Figure 117(C), the mode indication image XL1 is changed to "Mode C". When the display mode of the mode indication image XL1 changes to Mode B, the display mode on the display screen 7a also changes to Mode B.

Next, as shown in Figure 117(D), a change-restriction effect is executed. In this change-restriction effect, a mode change restriction image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode indication image XL1 and the select button image XL4. The mode change restriction image XL6 is represented by a faint, dark "X" mark in a rectangle, indicating that the mode indication image XL1 cannot be changed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change ends). In other words, the mode change restriction image XL6 indicates that input from the select button 68 will be disabled for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change ends).
After that, a reach animation is performed, either a losing or winning symbol is displayed, and then the winning game animation is performed.

Furthermore, while the mode indication image XL1 and select button image XL4 are displayed in each of the above-mentioned standby animations, decorative pattern variation animations, mode change animations, and non-changeable animations, their appearance may differ in each animation. For example, the size, color, and shape of the mode indication image XL1 in the standby animation may differ from those in the decorative pattern variation animation.

[Button Special Display Effect B]
Figure 118 is a diagram illustrating button special display effect B. Button special display effect B in Figure 118 includes a standby effect, a decorative pattern change effect, a mode change effect, a language change effect, an auto button change effect, and an unchangeable effect. The decorative pattern change effect, mode change effect, language change effect, auto button change effect, and unchangeable effect, other than the standby effect, are effects that occur in the same variation. In these effects that occur in the same variation, other than the standby effect, the hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the diagram.

In button special display effect B, a standby effect is first performed as shown in Figure 118(A). This standby effect is performed when the player has not operated the handle 60 for a predetermined period of time, that is, when the display screen 7a is showing a predetermined demonstration screen, and the player presses the select button 68 or the effect button 63. The standby effect displays the mode indication image XL1, the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, the language indication image XL3, the select button image XL4, the select button corresponding image XL4A, the effect button image XL5, and the effect button corresponding image XL5A.

Mode indication image XL1 is an image that indicates one display mode. Button auto presence/absence indication image XL2 is an image that indicates whether the button auto mode is ON or OFF, which automatically presses the performance button 63 without the user having to press it when a button image prompting the user to press the performance button 63 appears on the display screen 7a. Language indication image XL3 is an image that indicates the language used in the display performance on the display screen 7a. For example, if the language indication image XL3 shows "English" as the language, the language mode is English, and the display performance on the display screen 7a uses English partially or entirely. Select button image XL4 is an image that mimics the select button 68 and prompts the user to operate the select button 68. Select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed to the right of the select button image XL4 and is labeled "Select". Select button corresponding image XL4A indicates that the display mode, the presence or absence of button auto mode, and the language mode can be selected by operating the select button 68. The effect button image XL5 is an image that mimics the effect button 63 and prompts the user to operate the effect button 63. The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed to the right of the effect button image XL5 and is labeled "Confirm". The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that operating the effect button 63 determines the selected display mode, whether or not to enable button auto mode, and the language mode. In the example in Figure 118(A), the mode suggestion image XL1 indicates that "Mode B" is selected, the button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2 indicates that "Auto ON" is selected, and the language suggestion image XL3 indicates that "Japanese" is selected.

When the player fires a game ball during the waiting period and the ball enters the first start port 20, the special symbols begin to change, and a decorative symbol change animation is performed as shown in Figure 118(B). In this decorative symbol change animation, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and change in the vertical direction. Also, in the decorative symbol change animation, a mode suggestion image XL1, a button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2, a language suggestion image XL3, and a select button image XL4 are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are displayed so as to correspond to the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the up button of the cross button on the select button image XL4. Furthermore, the button auto-enabled/disabled indicator image XL2 is displayed to the left of the select button image XL4; that is, the button auto-enabled/disabled indicator image XL2 is displayed to correspond to the left button on the directional pad of the select button image XL4. The language indicator image XL3 is displayed below the select button image XL4; that is, the language indicator image XL3 is displayed to correspond to the down button on the directional pad of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in Figure 118(C), a mode change animation is performed. In this mode change animation, the mode indication image XL1, the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, and the language indication image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Furthermore, in the mode change animation, the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68, which changes the display mode in the mode indication image XL1, even while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example in Figure 118(C), the mode indication image XL1 is changed to "Mode C". When the display mode in the mode indication image XL1 changes to Mode B, the display mode on the display screen 7a also changes to Mode B.

Next, as shown in Figure 118(D), a language change animation is performed. In this language change animation, the mode indication image XL1, the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, and the language indication image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Furthermore, in this language change animation, the language mode in the language indication image XL3 changes even while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, when the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68. In the example in Figure 118(D), the language mode of the language indication image XL3 is changed to "Chinese". When the language in the language indication image XL3 is changed to Chinese, the language displayed on the display screen 7a becomes Chinese.

Next, as shown in Figure 118(E), an auto-button change animation is performed. In this auto-button change animation, the mode indication image XL1, the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, and the language indication image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Furthermore, in the auto-button change animation, the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68, which changes the button auto-mode in the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, even while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example in Figure 118(E), the button auto-on/off indication image XL2 shows the button auto-mode changed from ON to OFF, displaying "Auto OFF". When the button auto-mode in the button auto-on/off indication image XL2 is changed to Auto OFF, the animation button 63 is considered to have been operated even without being operated, and the operation of the animation button 63 becomes effective.

Next, as shown in Figure 118(F), a change-blocking effect is executed. In this change-blocking effect, a mode change-blocking image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The mode change-blocking image XL6 is represented as a dark rectangle with an "X" mark, indicating that the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2, or the language suggestion image XL3 cannot be changed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change is complete). In other words, the mode change-blocking image XL6 indicates that input from the select button 68 will be disabled for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change is complete).
After that, a reach animation is performed, either a losing or winning symbol is displayed, and then the winning game animation is performed.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned standby animations, decorative pattern change animations, mode change animations, language change animations, auto button change animations, and non-changeable animations, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto/non-presence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4 are displayed, but their appearance may differ in each animation. For example, the size, color, and shape of the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby animation may differ from those in the decorative pattern change animation.

[Button Special Display Effect C]
Figure 119 is a diagram illustrating the button special display effect C. The button special display effect C in Figure 119 includes the standby effect, decorative symbol variation effect, mode change effect, language change effect, auto button change effect, unchangeable effect, and super reach effects A to D. The decorative symbol variation effect, mode change effect, language change effect, auto button change effect, unchangeable effect, and super reach effects A to D, other than the standby effect, are effects that occur in the same spin. In these effects that occur in the same spin, other than the standby effect, the hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the diagram.

In the special button display effect C, a standby effect is first performed as shown in Figure 119(A). This standby effect is performed when the player has not operated the handle 60 for a predetermined period of time, that is, when the display screen 7a is showing a predetermined demonstration screen, and the player presses the select button 68 or the effect button 63. The standby effect displays the following: mode indication image XL1, button auto-on/off indication image XL2, language indication image XL3, select button image XL4, select button corresponding image XL4A, effect button image XL5, and effect button corresponding image XL5A.

Mode indication image XL1 is an image that indicates one display mode. Button auto presence/absence indication image XL2 is an image that indicates whether the button auto mode is ON or OFF, which automatically presses the performance button 63 without the user having to press it when a button image prompting the user to press the performance button 63 appears on the display screen 7a. Language indication image XL3 is an image that indicates the language used in the display performance on the display screen 7a. For example, if the language indication image XL3 shows "English" as the language, the language mode is English, and the display performance on the display screen 7a uses English partially or entirely. Select button image XL4 is an image that mimics the select button 68 and prompts the user to operate the select button 68. Select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed to the right of the select button image XL4 and is labeled "Select". Select button corresponding image XL4A indicates that the display mode, the presence or absence of button auto mode, and the language mode can be selected by operating the select button 68. The effect button image XL5 is an image that mimics the effect button 63 and prompts the user to operate the effect button 63. The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed to the right of the effect button image XL5 and is labeled "Confirm". The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that operating the effect button 63 determines the selected display mode, whether or not to enable button auto mode, and the language mode. In the example in Figure 119(A), the mode suggestion image XL1 indicates that "Mode B" is selected, the button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2 indicates that "Auto ON" is selected, and the language suggestion image XL3 indicates that "Japanese" is selected.

When the player fires a game ball during the waiting period and the ball enters the first start port 20, the special symbols begin to change, and a decorative symbol change animation is performed as shown in Figure 119(B). In this decorative symbol change animation, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and change in the vertical direction. In addition, in the decorative symbol change animation, a mode suggestion image XL1, a button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2, a language suggestion image XL3, and a select button image XL4 are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are displayed so as to correspond to the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the up button of the cross button on the select button image XL4. Furthermore, the button auto-enabled/disabled indicator image XL2 is displayed to the left of the select button image XL4; that is, the button auto-enabled/disabled indicator image XL2 is displayed to correspond to the left button on the directional pad of the select button image XL4. The language indicator image XL3 is displayed below the select button image XL4; that is, the language indicator image XL3 is displayed to correspond to the down button on the directional pad of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in Figure 119(C), a mode change animation is performed. In this mode change animation, the mode indication image XL1, the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, and the language indication image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Furthermore, in the mode change animation, the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68, which changes the display mode in the mode indication image XL1, even while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example in Figure 119(C), the mode indication image XL1 is changed to "Mode C". When the display mode in the mode indication image XL1 changes to Mode B, the display mode on the display screen 7a also changes to Mode B.

Next, as shown in Figure 119(D), a language change animation is performed. In this language change animation, the mode indication image XL1, the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, and the language indication image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Furthermore, in this language change animation, the language mode in the language indication image XL3 changes even while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, when the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68. In the example in Figure 119(D), the language mode of the language indication image XL3 is changed to "Chinese". When the language in the language indication image XL3 is changed to Chinese, the language displayed on the display screen 7a becomes Chinese.

Next, as shown in Figure 119(E), an auto-button change animation is performed. In this auto-button change animation, the mode indication image XL1, the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, and the language indication image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Furthermore, in the auto-button change animation, the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68, which changes the button auto-mode in the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, even while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example in Figure 119(E), the button auto-on/off indication image XL2 shows the button auto-mode changed from ON to OFF, displaying "Auto OFF". When the button auto-mode in the button auto-on/off indication image XL2 is changed to Auto OFF, the animation button 63 is considered to have been operated even without being operated, and the operation of the animation button 63 becomes effective.

Next, as shown in Figure 119(F), a change-blocking animation is executed. In this animation, a mode change-blocking image XL6 is displayed, obscuring the mode indication image XL1, the button auto-enabled/disabled indication image XL2, the language indication image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The mode change-blocking image XL6 is represented by a faint, dark "X" mark within a rectangle, indicating that changes to the mode indication image XL1, the button auto-enabled/disabled indication image XL2, or the language indication image XL3 cannot be made for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change ends). In other words, the mode change-blocking image XL6 indicates that input from the select button 68 will be disabled for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change ends).

Next, as shown in Figure 119(G), Super Reach演出 A is performed. In this Super Reach演出 A, with the mode change disabled image XL6 continuously displayed, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the 7 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C rapidly changes, forming a reach state, and the演出 button image XL7 is displayed. This演出 button image XL7 is an image that mimics the演出 button 63 and prompts the player to operate (press) the演出 button 63.

Next, as shown in Figure 119(H), Super Reach演出 B is performed. In Super Reach演出 B, the non-mode change image XL6 is displayed, and the reach state with decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continues. When the player presses the performance button 63, the chance-up image XL8 is displayed. This chance-up image XL8 indicates an increased chance of winning the jackpot and is labeled "Super Hot."

Next, as shown in Figure 119(I), the Super Reach演出 C is performed. In this Super Reach演出 C, the mode change-prohibition image XL6 is displayed, and the reach state with decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continues, and the Select Button image XL9 is displayed. This Select Button image XL9 is an image that mimics the Select Button 68 and prompts the player to operate (press) the Select Button 68.

Next, as shown in Figure 119(J), the Super Reach演出 D is performed. In this Super Reach演出 D, while the non-mode changeable image XL6 is displayed, the player can operate any of the up, down, left, or right buttons on the Select Button 68, causing the jackpot symbol 7 to be displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.
After that, a jackpot game animation will be performed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned standby animation, decorative symbol variation animation, mode change animation, language change animation, auto button change animation, non-changeable animation, and each of the Super Reach animations A to D, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4 are displayed, but their appearance may differ in each animation. For example, the size, color, and shape of the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby animation may differ from those in the decorative symbol variation animation.

[Variations]
In the special button display effects B to C described above, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may overlap with the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4, and the mode change disabled image XL6. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be positioned behind the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4, and the mode change disabled image XL6.
In the above-mentioned special button display effects B to C, a hold display representing the number of holds and a lottery result display representing the display result of the special symbols may be displayed in association with the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto-on/off suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4. This hold display may consist only of numbers representing the number of holds. Furthermore, this lottery result display may be displayed in the same arrangement as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "777", the lottery result display will also be "777".

[Example of effect]
In the special button display effects A to C described above, during the mode change effect, when the display mode is changed while the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4 are displayed in association, the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed to the mode suggestion image XL1 of the corresponding display mode. With this configuration, even when changing the display mode, the mode suggestion image XL1 is associated with the select button image XL4, so the player can easily recognize that they should use the select button image XL4 to change the mode suggestion image XL1, and can quickly change to the appropriate display mode. As a result, the change of display mode can be made smoother, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the special button display effects A to C described above, as shown in the "unchangeable" effect, there is a period after the display mode has been changed during which the display mode cannot be changed again. This configuration prevents the player from being distracted by changing the display mode, allowing them to concentrate on the display effects on screen 7a. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the special button display effects A to C described above, a mode change effect is followed by a mode change restriction effect. During this effect, the mode change restriction image XL6 is displayed superimposed on the mode suggestion image XL1. This configuration allows the player to quickly recognize that the display mode cannot be changed, and thus concentrate on the display effects on screen 7a without attempting to change the display mode. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the special button display effects B to C described above, when the mode indication image XL1 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4, the language indication image XL3 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4. With this configuration, even when changing the language indication image XL3, since the language indication image XL3 is associated with the select button image XL4, the player can easily recognize that they only need to use the select button image XL4 to change the language indication image XL3, and can quickly switch to the appropriate display mode. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly, improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the special button display effects B to C described above, when the mode indication image XL1 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4, the button auto-on/off indication image XL2 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4. With this configuration, even when changing the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, since XL2 is associated with the select button image XL4, the player can easily recognize that they only need to use the select button image XL4 to change the button auto-on/off indication image XL2, and can quickly switch to the desired display mode. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly, improving the enjoyment of the game.

The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect XL-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing multiple display effects and an operating means capable of operation,
The display means is capable of executing one of a plurality of display modes,
The display mode can be changed by operating the control unit.
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display presentation is a presentation that displays a display mode suggestion image that suggests one display mode and an operating means image representing the operating unit in association with each other.
The second display effect is an effect that, when changing the display mode from the first display mode to the second display mode, changes the display mode suggestion image that suggests the first display mode to the display mode suggestion image that suggests the second display mode.
A combination of the first and second display effects may be performed.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the second display performance is performed while the first display performance is being performed during the variation of the special symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XL-2]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XL-1,
After the second display effect in the aforementioned combination effect is performed, there is a period during which the display mode cannot be changed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XL-3]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XL-2,
In some cases, a third display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The third display effect is an effect that displays a display mode change disabled image during the period when the display mode cannot be changed, indicating that the display mode cannot be changed.
The aforementioned combination effect may include the third display effect.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the third display performance is performed after the second display performance, and the image of the display mode that cannot be changed in the third display performance is displayed so as to overlap with the display mode suggestion image.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XL-4]
The gaming machine described in embodiment XL-3,
In some cases, a fourth display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The fourth display effect is a display effect that associates a language suggestion image that suggests the language to be used in the display with the operation means image,
The aforementioned combination effect may include the fourth display effect.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed when the first display performance is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XL-5]
A gaming machine according to the embodiment XL-3 or embodiment XL-4,
In some cases, a fifth display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The fifth display effect is an effect that displays an auto-operation image of the operation means, which suggests that the operation of the operation means is automatic, in association with the image of the operation means.
The aforementioned combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the aforementioned combination performance, the fifth display performance is performed when the first display performance is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The following describes the activation/deactivation indicators A to C for the effect buttons, using Figures 120 to 122. In Figures 120 to 122, some of the various movable components arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for clarity in the drawings.

This effect button enable/disable display effect is performed during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols. Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the effect button enable/disable display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and changes the position and illumination pattern of the second movable mechanism 15 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain the effect button enable/disable display effect A, then the effect button enable/disable display effect B, and finally the effect button enable/disable display effect C, in that order.

[Effect Button Enable/Disable Indicator Effect A]
The effect button enable/disable indicator effect A will be explained with reference to Figure 120. Figure 120 is a diagram illustrating the effect button enable/disable indicator effect A. The effect button enable/disable indicator effect A is performed during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in Figure 120(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with three vertically elongated rectangular areas (i.e., three equally spaced areas dividing the display screen 7a into columns) as variable display areas for three decorative patterns (also called "variable decorative pattern areas"). The variable display of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins with a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top of each variable display area toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the 3D image moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L starts its variation animation (variation display) with the reel rotating from the upper part of the left variation display area to the lower part of the left variation display area 8. The middle decorative symbol 8C starts its variation animation (variation display) with the reel rotating from the upper part of the middle variation display area to the lower part of the middle variation display area. The right decorative symbol 8R starts its variation animation (variation display) with the reel rotating from the upper part of the right variation display area to the lower part of the right variation display area. The vertical distance of the left variation display area, the middle variation display area, and the right variation display area are all the same. Furthermore, the horizontal distance of the left variation display area, the middle variation display area, and the right variation display area are all the same.

In the variation animations (displays) for each decorative symbol, the reels rotate in the following order: 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → ...

Of the numbers "1" through "9," the odd-numbered numbers ("1," "3," "5," and "9") are bright red, while the even-numbered numbers ("2," "4," "6," and "8") are bright blue, and "7" is yellow (gold). The size of each number from "1" to "9" is standard, with a vertical distance approximately one-third of the vertical distance of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area), and a horizontal distance approximately half of the horizontal distance of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). Furthermore, the numbers "1" through "9" are formed using a specially created typeface (a uniquely created special typeface) that differs from existing typefaces (commonly available typefaces) such as Kaisho, Gothic, and Mincho.

When the decorative pattern's variation effect (variable display) begins, the previously stationary decorative pattern gradually increases in speed, changing from opaque to semi-transparent, and then rapidly changes in display mode. This allows the background image, positioned behind the decorative pattern, to be visible through the rapidly changing semi-transparent pattern. Just before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changing from semi-transparent back to opaque, and is displayed as either temporarily stopped or fully stopped (temporarily stopped, then fully stopped). In the temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction. Multiple background images are available, and the background image switches as needed.

Furthermore, a horizontally elongated rectangular sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and corresponding smaller left decorative patterns, a small middle decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark shade) or a color close to dark (for example, deep green)) and does not change to any other color. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned on the upper right side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the right-variable display area which is the variation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the right decorative symbol 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing it from obstructing the KSZ. Furthermore, even if other visual effects appear, these effects are positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing them from obstructing the KSZ. In short, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not obscured by the right decorative symbol 8R or other visual effects.

The small decorative patterns are numerical patterns, and their font differs from that of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, a Mincho font). They are unified in a single color with high contrast to the single color background image of the sub-variation area KSZ (for example, a light color (yellow or white)), and do not change to other colors. The small decorative patterns are positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and remain opaque at all times. They do not become semi-transparent even when variation begins, and they do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbols do not exhibit a variable display effect (variable display) when the reels rotate. Instead, the variable display effect (variable display) is achieved by displaying number symbols of the same size and opaque appearance in the same display position.

When the variation effect (variation display) using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R begins, a variation effect (variation display) using the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also begins in the sub-variation area KSZ. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop displaying, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also all stop displaying.

Even if one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of temporary stop (for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol and a reach is formed), the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all continue to exhibit a variable animation (variation display). Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol continues; even if the right decorative symbol 8R is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small right decorative symbol continues; and simultaneously with the display of stop animations for the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all also display a stop animation.

Furthermore, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop and do not line up, resulting in a loss, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or they may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, if the left decorative symbol 8L stops at the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C at the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R at the number "3", the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "1", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "2", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "3", or the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "5", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "6", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a win occurs due to them aligning to the same symbol, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol will align to match the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

As part of the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the currently fluctuating left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R is displayed (placed) on the fluctuation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area for the first special symbol hold is provided in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the fluctuation display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (base image)) are available, each capable of displaying (placing) a hold icon 9A, allowing for a maximum of four hold icons 9A to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad overlap with the central variable display area, which is the variable area of the central decorative symbol 8C. However, because the central decorative symbol 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not obstructed by the central decorative symbol 8C. However, if other performance images appear, and the other performance images are located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will not be obstructed by the other performance images. However, if the other performance images are located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will be obstructed by the other performance images.

Since the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are located on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, they overlap with the left variable display area, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. However, because the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L. However, if other visual effects appear, and the other visual effects are positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the other visual effects. However, if the other visual effects are positioned in front of the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad will be obstructed by the other visual effects.

Thus, among the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variation display area, which is the variation area of the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad overlap with the left variation display area, which is the variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Therefore, the hold display area as the first special symbol hold, consisting of the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, is positioned across the middle variation display area and the left variation display area.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first to third hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three hold icons that have not been consumed and are still stockpiled. Note that the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, opposite the aforementioned sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), is a horizontally elongated rectangular display area HS, which displays the number of reserved balls (numbers) for the first special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 and the second special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21. The vertical distance of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are the same, and the horizontal distance of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are the same. In other words, the shape of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are identical.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the hold count display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to other colors. Although the hold count display area HS is located in the upper left of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the left variation display area, which is the variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the hold count display area HS is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing it from obstructing it. Furthermore, even if other animation images appear, they are positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing them from obstructing it.

The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are displayed in a different font (for example, Gothic font) than the font of the small decorative symbols, and are set to a different solid color with high contrast to the solid color background image of the reservation number display area HS, and do not change to any other color. The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the reservation number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21 is displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reservation number display area HS, and are always displayed spaced apart from each other. These numbers, displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, are less likely to be confused with the various background and decorative images displayed on screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved ball count display area HS is not obscured by other visual effects. The blue color indicating the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright blue used for the even-numbered symbols "2," "4," "6," and "8." The red color indicating the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright red used for the odd-numbered symbols (excluding "7"), such as "1," "3," "5," and "9."

To briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the different probability of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, among the four icons—a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability. Furthermore, the probability of winning is set to increase in the following order for the smiling sphere icon: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning).

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all begin their variation animation (variation display) simultaneously. As shown in Figure 120(A), the left decorative symbol 8L begins its variation animation (variation display) from top to bottom within the left variation display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C begins its variation animation (variation display) from top to bottom within the left variation display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R begins its variation animation (variation display) from top to bottom within the left variation display area.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 120(B), the left decorative symbol 8L, which displays the left variable display area from top to bottom, temporarily stops at the center of the left variable display area with the number "1" and moves slowly and gently in small increments in the vertical direction. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R, which displays the right variable display area from top to bottom, temporarily stops at the center of the right variable display area with the number "1" and moves slowly and gently in small increments in the vertical direction. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become the same symbol (in this case, the number "1"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C continues to display the middle variable display area from top to bottom.

Once a reach is formed and the effect button enable/disable display effect A is initiated, as shown in Figure 120(C), the flashing light FL enters the display screen 7a from the lower edge outside the screen, passes towards the right edge of the screen, and exits to the right edge outside the screen. It then enters the display screen 7a again from the upper edge outside the screen, stops near the center of the screen, and explodes. Although the aforementioned sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, because the sub-variation area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer, even if a portion of the flashing light FL passes through the sub-variation area KSZ, a portion of the flashing light FL remains covered by the sub-variation area KSZ.

When the flashing light (FL) stops near the center of the display screen 7a and explodes, as shown in Figure 120(D), the effect button image BTN, which mimics the effect button 63, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as an unclear image (a blurry image (an image that is out of focus)). Even if the player presses the effect button 63 during the period when the effect button image BTN is displayed as an unclear image (a blurry image (an image that is out of focus)), it will not have any effect on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period when the effect button image BTN is displayed as an unclear image (a blurry image (an image that is out of focus)) is a period when the press operation of the effect button 63 is disabled, and the effect button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode where it is an unclear image (a blurry image (an image that is out of focus)). Furthermore, in the "Effect Button Enabled/Disabled" display effect A, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an unclear image (a blurry image (an image that is out of focus)) is referred to as the "Operation Disabled Display Mode."

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 120(E), the performance button image BTN, which was in an inactive display state, switches to a clear image (a focused image). During the period when the performance button image BTN is displayed as this clear image (a focused image), if the player presses the performance button 63, an ally character CRA, which suggests development into a battle performance with a predetermined high probability of winning, may appear on the display screen 7a, and the player's pressing of the performance button 63 may affect the performance displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period when the performance button image BTN is displayed as a clear image (a focused image) is the period when pressing the performance button 63 is enabled, and the performance button image BTN is displayed in an active display state as a clear image (a focused image). In the "Enabling/Disabling Button" display animation A, the display mode in which the animation button image BTN is displayed as a clear image (a focused image) is referred to as the "Operation Enabled Display Mode."

Subsequently, the effect button image BTN is displayed while the operation is still in the enabled display state, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is in the middle of the variation effect (variation display), also disappears from the display screen 7a. However, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and their corresponding small left decorative symbols, small middle decorative symbols, and small right decorative symbols continues without being temporarily stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 120(F), the second movable component 15 moves from a stationary position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, toward the center position of the display screen 7a (advance position), and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the second movable component 15 has moved to the advance position and stopped, the second movable component 15 covers the performance button image BTN, making the lower part of the performance button image BTN visible. In other words, the second movable component 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN. Even when the second movable component 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation-enabled display mode (that is, even when the second movable component 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the active display mode of the performance button image BTN continues). Of course, even if the second movable component 15 covers a portion of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN remains displayed in an operational enabled state. Therefore, the player's pressing of the effect button 63 may affect the effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its extended position to its retracted position (home position), and as shown in Figure 120(G), the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the active operation display mode. Of course, even when the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its extended position to its retracted position (home position), the performance button image BTN remains displayed in the active operation display mode, so the player's pressing of the performance button 63 may affect the performance displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the player presses the performance button 63 while the performance button image BTN is displayed in the operation enabled display state, and the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its advanced position to its retracted position (home position), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again in a temporarily stopped state, the performance button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is in the middle of the variation performance (variation display), is displayed again, and the performance button enabled/disabled display performance A ends.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 120(H), when the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the central variable display area), the battle sequence begins, as shown in Figure 120(I). In the battle sequence, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This sequence is designed to have a high probability of resulting in a big win. During the battle sequence, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a again, and the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. In the battle sequence, within the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation sequences (variation displays) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and their corresponding smaller left decorative symbols, small middle decorative symbols, and small right decorative symbols continue without any temporary stop displays. Furthermore, in the reserve count display area HS, the first special symbol reserve and the second special symbol reserve are displayed as reserve counts (numbers).

In the battle sequence, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB is defeated, as shown in Figure 120(J), the left decorative symbol 8L displays the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C displays the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R displays the number "1", all stopping at the same time (confirmation display). However, since the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do not line up with the same symbol (in this case, the number "1"), it is a miss. At this point, the current variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A, which was displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, moves to the current variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, and the variation sequence (variation display) using the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begins.

Furthermore, in the battle sequence, if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will stop and display as the same symbol, resulting in a jackpot, and the jackpot game (jackpot sequence) will then begin. Once a jackpot is confirmed, the current spin display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A will be displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the current spin icon 9C will no longer be displayed after the spin ends.

Furthermore, in Figure 120(H), the ally character CRA was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium-variation display area). However, if the ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium-variation display area), as shown in Figure 120(J), the left decorative symbol 8L will display the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C will display the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R will display the number "1", stopping at the same time (confirmation display). Since the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R do not line up as the same symbol (in this case, the number "1"), the result will be a loss. In other words, in Figure 120(H), if the ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium-variation display area), the battle sequence will not proceed, and the result will be a loss.

Furthermore, in Figures 120(E) to (G), the effect button image BTN was a clear image (a focused image). However, the effect button image BTN could also be in a state of bright color emission (for example, white light emission). The bright color emission could be arranged in the order of white → blue → red → yellow to indicate the likelihood of a win. This would increase the variety of effects produced by the bright color emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Effect Button Enable/Disable Indicator Effect B]
Next, the effect button enable/disable indicator effect B will be explained with reference to Figure 121. Figure 121 is a diagram illustrating the effect button enable/disable indicator effect B. The effect button enable/disable indicator effect B is performed during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in Figure 121(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with three vertically elongated rectangular areas (i.e., three equally spaced areas dividing the display screen 7a into columns) as variable display areas for three decorative patterns (also called "variable decorative pattern areas"). The variable display of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins with a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top of each variable display area toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the 3D image moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L starts its variation animation (variation display) with the reel rotating from the upper part of the left variation display area to the lower part of the left variation display area 8. The middle decorative symbol 8C starts its variation animation (variation display) with the reel rotating from the upper part of the middle variation display area to the lower part of the middle variation display area. The right decorative symbol 8R starts its variation animation (variation display) with the reel rotating from the upper part of the right variation display area to the lower part of the right variation display area. The vertical distance of the left variation display area, the middle variation display area, and the right variation display area are all the same. Furthermore, the horizontal distance of the left variation display area, the middle variation display area, and the right variation display area are all the same.

In the variation animations (variation displays) for each decorative symbol, the reels rotate in the following order: 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → ...

Of the numbers "1" through "9," the odd-numbered numbers (1, 3, 5, and 9), excluding "7," are bright red. The even-numbered numbers (2, 4, 6, and 8) are bright blue, and "7" is yellow (gold). The size of each number from "1" to "9" is standard, with a vertical distance approximately one-third of the vertical distance of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area), and a horizontal distance approximately half of the horizontal distance of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). Furthermore, the numbers "1" through "9" are formed using a specially created typeface (a uniquely created special typeface) that differs from existing typefaces (commonly available typefaces) such as Kaisho, Gothic, and Mincho.

When the decorative pattern's variation effect (variable display) begins, the previously stationary decorative pattern gradually increases in speed, changing from opaque to semi-transparent, and then rapidly changes in display mode. This allows the background image, positioned behind the decorative pattern, to be visible through the rapidly changing semi-transparent pattern. Just before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changing from semi-transparent back to opaque, and is displayed as either temporarily stopped or fully stopped (temporarily stopped, then fully stopped). In the temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction. Multiple background images are available, and the background image switches as needed.

Furthermore, a horizontally elongated rectangular sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and corresponding smaller left decorative patterns, a small middle decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark shade) or a color close to dark (for example, deep green)) and does not change to any other color. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned on the upper right side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the right-variable display area which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R, the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the right decorative symbol 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing it from obstructing the sub-variable area KSZ. Furthermore, even if other visual effects appear, these effects are positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing them from obstructing it. In short, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not obscured by the right decorative symbol 8R or other visual effects.

The small decorative patterns are numerical patterns, and their font differs from that of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, a Mincho font). They are unified in a single color with high contrast to the single color background image of the sub-variation area KSZ (for example, a light color (yellow or white)), and do not change to other colors. The small decorative patterns are positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and remain opaque at all times. They do not become semi-transparent even when variation begins, and they do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbols do not exhibit a variable display effect (variable display) when the reels rotate. Instead, the variable display effect (variable display) is achieved by displaying number symbols of the same size and opaque appearance in the same display position.

When the variation effect (variation display) using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R begins, a variation effect (variation display) using the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also begins in the sub-variation area KSZ. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop displaying, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also all stop displaying.

Even if one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of temporary stop (for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol and a reach is formed), the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all continue to exhibit a variable animation (variation display). Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol continues; even if the right decorative symbol 8R is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small right decorative symbol continues; and simultaneously with the display of stop animations for the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all also display a stop animation.

Furthermore, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop and do not line up, resulting in a loss, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or they may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, if the left decorative symbol 8L stops at the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C at the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R at the number "3", the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "1", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "2", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "3", or the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "5", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "6", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a win occurs due to them aligning to the same symbol, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol will align to match the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

As part of the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the currently fluctuating left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R is displayed (placed) on the fluctuation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area for the first special symbol hold is provided in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the fluctuation display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (base image)) are available, each capable of displaying (placing) a hold icon 9A, allowing for a maximum of four hold icons 9A to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad overlap with the central variable display area, which is the variable area of the central decorative symbol 8C. However, because the central decorative symbol 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not obstructed by the central decorative symbol 8C. However, if other performance images appear, and if the other performance images are located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will not be obstructed by the other performance images. However, if the other performance images are located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will be obstructed by the other performance images.

Since the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are located on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, they overlap with the left variable display area, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. However, because the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L. However, if other visual effects appear, and the other visual effects are positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the other visual effects. However, if the other visual effects are positioned in front of the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad will be obstructed by the other visual effects.

Thus, among the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variation display area, which is the variation area of the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad overlap with the left variation display area, which is the variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Therefore, the hold display area as the first special symbol hold, consisting of the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, is positioned across the middle variation display area and the left variation display area.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first to third hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three hold icons that have not been consumed and are still stockpiled. Note that the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, opposite the aforementioned sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), is a horizontally elongated rectangular display area HS, which displays the number of reserved balls (numbers) for the first special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 and the second special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21. The vertical distance of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are the same, and the horizontal distance of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are the same. In other words, the shape of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are identical.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the hold count display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to other colors. Although the hold count display area HS is located in the upper left of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the left variation display area, which is the variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the hold count display area HS is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing it from obstructing it. Furthermore, even if other animation images appear, they are positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing them from obstructing it.

The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are displayed in a different font (for example, Gothic font) than the font of the small decorative symbols, and are set to a different solid color with high contrast to the solid color background image of the reservation number display area HS, and do not change to any other color. The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the reservation number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21 is displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reservation number display area HS, and are always displayed spaced apart from each other. These numbers, displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, are less likely to be confused with the various background and decorative images displayed on screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved ball count display area HS is not obscured by other visual effects. The blue color indicating the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright blue used for the even-numbered symbols "2," "4," "6," and "8." The red color indicating the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright red used for the odd-numbered symbols (excluding "7"), such as "1," "3," "5," and "9."

To briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the different probability of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, among the four icons—a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability. Furthermore, the probability of winning is set to increase in the following order for the smiling sphere icon: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning).

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all begin their variation animation (variation display) simultaneously. As shown in Figure 121(A), the left decorative symbol 8L begins its variation animation (variation display) from top to bottom within the left variation display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C begins its variation animation (variation display) from top to bottom within the left variation display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R begins its variation animation (variation display) from top to bottom within the left variation display area.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 121(B), the white spherical variable icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. The left decorative symbol 8L, which displays the variable display area from top to bottom, temporarily stops at the center of the left variable display area with the number "5" and moves slowly and gently in small increments vertically. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R, which displays the variable display area from top to bottom, temporarily stops at the center of the right variable display area with the number "5" and moves slowly and gently in small increments vertically. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become the same symbol (in this case, the number "5"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C continues to display the variable display area from top to bottom.

When a reach is formed and the effect button enable/disable display effect B starts, as shown in Figure 121(C), the effect button image BTN, which mimics the effect button 63, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in an active display mode that emits bright light (for example, white light). At this time, the effect button image BTN is displayed positioned in front of the central decorative symbol 8C, and furthermore, a rapid-fire image MG that tells the player to repeatedly press the effect button 63 is displayed in front of the central decorative symbol 8C and is displayed to the upper right of the effect button image BTN. During the period when the effect button image BTN is displayed in this bright-lighting active display mode, if the player presses the effect button 63, an ally character CRA that suggests development to a battle effect with a predetermined high probability of winning may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a, and the player's pressing of the effect button 63 may affect the effects displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period during which the performance button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode with bright illumination is the period during which the press operation of the performance button 63 is enabled. In the performance button enable/disable display effect B, the display mode in which the performance button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode with bright illumination is referred to as the "operation enabled display mode."

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 121(D), the performance button image BTN, which was in the operation-enabled display mode, switches to an inactive display mode that emits a dark light (for example, dark gray). Even if the player presses the performance button 63 during the period when the performance button image BTN is displayed in this dark-lighted inactive display mode, it will not have any effect on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period when the performance button image BTN is displayed in the dark-lighted inactive display mode is a period during which pressing the performance button 63 is invalid. Note that in the performance button enable/disable display mode B, the display mode in which the performance button image BTN is displayed in the dark-lighted inactive display mode is referred to as the "operation-disabled display mode."

Subsequently, the performance button image BTN is displayed while the operation is still in the disabled display state, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is in the middle of the variation performance (variation display), also disappears from the display screen 7a. However, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation performance (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and their corresponding small left decorative symbols, small middle decorative symbols, and small right decorative symbols continues without being temporarily stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 121(E), a background image with seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second movable mechanism 15 moves from a stationary position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the second movable mechanism 15 has moved to the advance position and stopped, the second movable mechanism 15 covers the performance button image BTN, making the lower part of the performance button image BTN visible. In other words, the second movable mechanism 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN. Even when the second movable mechanism 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the disabled operation display mode. Of course, even if the second movable mechanism 15 covers a portion of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN remains displayed in an inoperable display state, and therefore, pressing the performance button 63 by the player does not affect the performance displayed on the display screen 7a in any way. The rainbow image is a special background image that informs (suggests) the player that a jackpot has been confirmed.

Subsequently, the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its extended position to its retracted position (home position), and as shown in Figure 121(F), the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the disabled state. Of course, even when the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its extended position to its retracted position (home position), the performance button image BTN remains displayed in the disabled state, so the player's pressing of the performance button 63 has no effect on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the player presses the performance button 63 while the performance button image BTN is displayed in the operation enabled display state, and the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its advanced position to its retracted position (home position), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again in a temporarily stopped state, the performance button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is in the middle of the variation performance (variation display), is displayed again, and the performance button enabled/disabled display performance B ends.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 121(G), when the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the central variable display area), the battle sequence begins, as shown in Figure 121(H). In the battle sequence, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This sequence is designed to have a high probability of resulting in a big win. During the battle sequence, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a again, and the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. In the battle sequence, within the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation sequences (variation displays) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and their corresponding smaller left decorative symbols, small middle decorative symbols, and small right decorative symbols continue without any temporary stop displays. Furthermore, in the reserve count display area HS, the first special symbol reserve and the second special symbol reserve are displayed as reserve counts (numbers).

In the battle sequence, as shown in Figure 121(I), when the winged ally character CRA is prominently displayed on the display screen 7a, ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB loses. As shown in Figure 121(J), the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R stop displaying the same symbol (in this case, the number "5"), resulting in a jackpot, after which the jackpot game (jackpot sequence) begins. Once a jackpot is confirmed, the current spin display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the current spin icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the spin. Furthermore, although the aforementioned sub-variable area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of display screen 7a, even if a portion of the wings of the winged ally character CRA overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ in Figure 121(I), the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer, resulting in a state where a portion of CRA's wings are covered by the sub-variable area KSZ. Also, although the aforementioned reserved count display area HS is provided on the upper left side of display screen 7a, even if the winged ally character CRA moves and a portion of its wings overlaps with the reserved count display area HS, the reserved count display area HS is positioned closest to the viewer, resulting in a state where a portion of CRA's wings are covered by the reserved count display area HS.

In the battle sequence, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will stop and display (confirm display) at the same time. However, since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R do not line up as the same symbol (in this case, the number "5"), it is a miss. At this time, the current variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A will be displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C will not be displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad will move to the current variation display position 9Cd and become the variation icon 9C, and the variation sequence (variation display) using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will begin.

Furthermore, if the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in Figure 121(E), and if the ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the middle variable display area) in Figure 121(G), then the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will stop and be displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will not line up as the same symbol (in this case, the number "5"), the result will be a loss. In other words, if the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in Figure 121(E), and if the ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the middle variable display area) in Figure 121(G), the battle sequence will not proceed, and the result will be a loss.

Furthermore, in Figure 121(C), the effect button image BTN was shown as white with bright illumination. However, it may also be possible to indicate the probability of winning by changing the illumination in the order of white → blue → red → yellow. This would increase the variety of effects that can be achieved through the bright illumination of the effect button image BTN.

[Effect button enable/disable display effect C]
Next, the effect button enable/disable display effect C will be explained with reference to Figure 122. Figure 122 is a diagram illustrating the effect button enable/disable display effect C. The effect button enable/disable display effect C is performed based on the change in the hold icon due to the pre-read effect.

First, as shown in Figure 122(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with three vertically elongated rectangular areas (i.e., three equally spaced areas dividing the display screen 7a into columns) as variable display areas for three decorative patterns (also called "variable decorative pattern areas"). The variable display of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins with a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top of each variable display area toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the 3D image moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L starts its variation animation (variation display) with the reel rotating from the upper part of the left variation display area to the lower part of the left variation display area 8. The middle decorative symbol 8C starts its variation animation (variation display) with the reel rotating from the upper part of the middle variation display area to the lower part of the middle variation display area. The right decorative symbol 8R starts its variation animation (variation display) with the reel rotating from the upper part of the right variation display area to the lower part of the right variation display area. The vertical distance of the left variation display area, the middle variation display area, and the right variation display area are all the same. Furthermore, the horizontal distance of the left variation display area, the middle variation display area, and the right variation display area are all the same.

In the variation animations (displays) for each decorative symbol, the reels rotate in the following order: 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → ...

Of the numbers "1" through "9," the odd-numbered numbers ("1," "3," "5," and "9") are bright red, while the even-numbered numbers ("2," "4," "6," and "8") are bright blue, and "7" is yellow (gold). The size of each number from "1" to "9" is standard, with a vertical distance approximately one-third of the vertical distance of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area), and a horizontal distance approximately half of the horizontal distance of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). Furthermore, the numbers "1" through "9" are formed using a specially created typeface (a uniquely created special typeface) that differs from existing typefaces (commonly available typefaces) such as Kaisho, Gothic, and Mincho.

When the decorative pattern's variation effect (variation display) begins, the previously stationary decorative pattern gradually increases in speed from a slow motion, changing from opaque to semi-transparent, and then rapidly changing. This allows the background image, positioned behind the decorative pattern, to be visible through the rapidly changing semi-transparent pattern. Just before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changing from semi-transparent back to opaque, and is displayed as either temporarily stopped or fully stopped (temporarily stopped, then fully stopped). In the temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction. Multiple background images are available, and they switch as needed.

Furthermore, a horizontally elongated rectangular sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and corresponding smaller left decorative patterns, a small middle decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark shade) or a color close to dark (for example, deep green)) and does not change to any other color. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned on the upper right side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the right-variable display area which is the variation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the right decorative symbol 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing it from obstructing the KSZ. Furthermore, even if other visual effects appear, these effects are positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ, preventing them from obstructing the KSZ. In short, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not obscured by the right decorative symbol 8R or other visual effects.

The small decorative patterns are numerical patterns, and their font differs from that of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, a Mincho font). They are unified in a single color with high contrast to the single color background image of the sub-variation area KSZ (for example, a light color (yellow or white)), and do not change to other colors. The small decorative patterns are positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and remain opaque at all times. They do not become semi-transparent even when variation begins, and they do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbols do not exhibit a variable display effect (variable display) when the reels rotate. Instead, the variable display effect (variable display) is achieved by displaying number symbols of the same size and opaque appearance in the same display position.

When the variation effect (variation display) using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R begins, a variation effect (variation display) using the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also begins in the sub-variation area KSZ. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop displaying, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol also all stop displaying.

Even if one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of temporary stop (for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol and a reach is formed), the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all continue to exhibit a variable animation (variation display). Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol continues; even if the right decorative symbol 8R is in a temporary stop, the variable animation (variation display) of the small right decorative symbol continues; and simultaneously with the display of stop animations for the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol all also display a stop animation.

Furthermore, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop and do not line up, resulting in a loss, the small left decorative symbol, small middle decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or they may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, if the left decorative symbol 8L stops at the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C at the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R at the number "3", the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "1", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "2", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "3", or the small left decorative symbol may stop at the number "5", the small middle decorative symbol at the number "6", and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a win occurs due to them aligning to the same symbol, the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol will align to match the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

As part of the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the currently fluctuating left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R is displayed (placed) on the fluctuation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area for the first special symbol hold is provided in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the fluctuation display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (base image)) are available, each capable of displaying (placing) a hold icon 9A, allowing for a maximum of four hold icons 9A to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad overlap with the central variable display area, which is the variable area of the central decorative symbol 8C. However, because the central decorative symbol 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not obstructed by the central decorative symbol 8C. However, if other performance images appear, and if the other performance images are located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will not be obstructed by the other performance images. However, if the other performance images are located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad will be obstructed by the other performance images.

Since the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are located on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, they overlap with the left variable display area, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. However, because the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L. However, if other visual effects appear, and the other visual effects are positioned behind the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad are not obstructed by the other visual effects. However, if the other visual effects are positioned in front of the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad will be obstructed by the other visual effects.

Thus, among the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variation display area, which is the variation area of the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the second to fourth hold display positions 9Ad overlap with the left variation display area, which is the variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Therefore, the hold display area as the first special symbol hold, consisting of the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad, is positioned across the middle variation display area and the left variation display area.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first to third hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three hold icons that have not been consumed and are still stockpiled. Note that the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, opposite the aforementioned sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), is a horizontally elongated rectangular display area HS, which displays the number of reserved balls (numbers) for the first special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 and the second special symbol reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21. The vertical distance of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are the same, and the horizontal distance of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are the same. In other words, the shape of the display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are identical.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the hold count display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to other colors. Although the hold count display area HS is located in the upper left of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the left variation display area, which is the variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the hold count display area HS is positioned closest to the viewer. This ensures that the left decorative symbol 8L is positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing it from obstructing it. Furthermore, even if other animation images appear, they are positioned behind the hold count display area HS, preventing them from obstructing it.

The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are displayed in a different font (for example, Gothic font) than the font of the small decorative symbols, and are set to a different solid color with high contrast to the solid color background image of the reservation number display area HS, and do not change to any other color. The number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (reservation number (number)) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (reservation number (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the reservation number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21 is displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reservation number display area HS, and are always displayed spaced apart from each other. These numbers, displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, are less likely to be confused with the various background and decorative images displayed on screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved ball count display area HS is not obscured by other visual effects. The blue color indicating the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright blue used for the even-numbered symbols "2," "4," "6," and "8." The red color indicating the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is a different (but similar) color to the bright red used for the odd-numbered symbols (excluding "7"), such as "1," "3," "5," and "9."

To briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the different probability of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, among the four icons—a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability. Furthermore, the probability of winning is set to increase in the following order for the smiling sphere icon: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning).

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all begin their variation animation (variation display) simultaneously. As shown in Figure 122(A), the left decorative symbol 8L begins its variation animation (variation display) from top to bottom within the left variation display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C begins its variation animation (variation display) from top to bottom within the left variation display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R begins its variation animation (variation display) from top to bottom within the left variation display area.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 122(B), the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A, and when the performance button enable/disable display performance C is initiated, the performance button image BTN, which mimics the performance button 63, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in an inactive display mode, emitting a dark light (for example, dark gray). In other words, the performance button enable/disable display performance C is initiated based on the fact that the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad has changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A due to the pre-read performance. Although the performance button image BTN displayed in this inactive display mode is positioned behind the central decorative symbol 8C, the performance button image BTN can be seen through the semi-transparent central decorative symbol 8C during the variation performance (variation display). The performance button 63 can display (make appear) an ally character CRA on the display screen 7a, which suggests development into a battle performance with a predetermined high probability of winning. During the period when the performance button image BTN is displayed in this dimly lit, inactive display mode, even if the player presses the performance button 63, it will not have any effect on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period when the performance button image BTN is displayed in this dimly lit, inactive display mode is a period during which pressing the performance button 63 is disabled. Note that in the performance button enable/disable display mode C, the display mode in which the performance button image BTN is displayed in this dimly lit, inactive display mode is referred to as the "operation disabled display mode."

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 122(C), the left decorative symbol 8L, which displays the left variable display area from top to bottom, temporarily stops at the center of the left variable display area with the number "1" and moves slowly and in small increments in the vertical direction. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R, which displays the right variable display area from top to bottom, temporarily stops at the center of the right variable display area with the number "3" and moves slowly and in small increments in the vertical direction. Then, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which displays the middle variable display area from top to bottom, temporarily stops at the center of the middle variable display area with the number "2". At this point, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop (confirm display) at the same time and do not line up as the same symbol, resulting in a loss. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the variable. Furthermore, the BTN (button image) will continue to be displayed in its disabled state.

Subsequently, the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C (at this time, the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad). As shown in Figure 122(D), when the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, the effect button image BTN, which mimics the effect button 63, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in an active display mode that emits bright light (for example, white light). During the period when the performance button image BTN is displayed as a brightly emitting active display mode, if the player presses the performance button 63, the ally character CRA, which suggests development into a battle performance with a predetermined high probability of winning, may appear on the display screen 7a. The player's press of the performance button 63 may also affect the performance displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period during which the performance button image BTN is displayed as a brightly emitting active display mode is the period during which pressing the performance button 63 is enabled. In the performance button enable/disable display performance C, the display mode in which the performance button image BTN is displayed as a brightly emitting active display mode is referred to as the "operation enabled display mode."

Even when the performance button image BTN switches from the disabled display mode to the enabled display mode, the performance button image BTN remains positioned behind the central decorative symbol 8C. However, it remains visible through the semi-transparent central decorative symbol 8C during the variable performance (variable display).

Subsequently, the left decorative symbol 8L, which displays the left variable display area from top to bottom, temporarily stops at the center of the left variable display area with the number "7" and moves slowly and gently in small increments vertically. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R, which displays the right variable display area from top to bottom, temporarily stops at the center of the right variable display area with the number "7" and moves slowly and gently in small increments vertically. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become the same symbol (in this case, the number "7"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C continues to display the middle variable display area from top to bottom. Note that the performance button image BTN remains displayed in the active operation display mode.

When a reach is formed, as shown in Figure 122(E), the performance button image BTN is displayed in front of the central decorative symbol 8C. Furthermore, the rapid-fire image MG, which informs the player to repeatedly press the performance button 63, is displayed in front of the central decorative symbol 8C, above and to the right of the performance button image BTN.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 122(F), the performance button image BTN, which was in the operation-enabled display mode, switches back to the operation-disabled display mode. Then, the performance button image BTN remains displayed in the operation-disabled display mode, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is in the middle of the variation performance (variation display), also disappears from the display screen 7a. However, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation performance (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and their corresponding small left decorative symbols, small middle decorative symbols, and small right decorative symbols continues without being temporarily stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 122(G), a background image with seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a. The second movable mechanism 15 moves from a stationary position (home position) above the image display device 7 towards the front (forward) of the display screen 7a and towards the center of the display screen 7a (advance position), and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the second movable mechanism 15 has moved to the advance position and stopped, the second movable mechanism 15 covers the performance button image BTN, making the lower part of the performance button image BTN visible. In other words, the second movable mechanism 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN. Even when the second movable mechanism 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the disabled operation display mode. Of course, even if the second movable mechanism 15 covers a portion of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN remains displayed in an inoperable display state, and therefore, pressing the performance button 63 by the player does not affect the performance displayed on the display screen 7a in any way. The rainbow image is a special background image that informs (suggests) the player that a jackpot has been confirmed.

Subsequently, the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its extended position to its retracted position (home position), and as shown in Figure 122(H), the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the disabled state. Of course, even when the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its extended position to its retracted position (home position), the performance button image BTN remains displayed in the disabled state, so the player's pressing of the performance button 63 has no effect on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the player presses the performance button 63 while the performance button image BTN is displayed in the operation enabled display state, and the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its advanced position to its retracted position (home position), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again in a temporarily stopped state, the performance button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is in the middle of the variation performance (variation display), is displayed again, and the performance button enabled/disabled display performance C ends.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 122(I), when a winged ally character CRA, unlike the normal ally character CRA, suddenly appears and is displayed prominently in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the central variable display area), as shown in Figure 122(J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R stop and display the same symbol (in this case, the number "7"), resulting in a jackpot, and then the jackpot game (jackpot animation) begins. In other words, when a winged ally character CRA, unlike the normal ally character CRA, suddenly appears, the jackpot result is displayed without the battle animation starting.

When a jackpot is confirmed, the corresponding variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed after the variation ends. Although the aforementioned sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, even if a portion of the wings of the winged ally character CRA overlaps with the sub-variation area KSZ in Figure 122(I), the sub-variation area KSZ is positioned closest to the viewer, so a portion of the wings of the winged ally character CRA is covered by the sub-variation area KSZ. Furthermore, although the aforementioned hold count display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, even if the winged ally character CRA moves and a portion of its wings overlaps with the hold count display area HS, the hold count display area HS is positioned closest to the viewer, so a portion of the wings of the winged ally character CRA is covered by the hold count display area HS.

In Figure 122(I), the winged ally character CRA suddenly appears on the display screen 7a without being displayed prominently. When the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium variation display area), a battle sequence begins. In the battle sequence, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This sequence is designed to have a high probability of resulting in a big win. During the battle sequence, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a again, and the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. In the battle sequence, within the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation sequences (variation displays) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and their corresponding smaller left decorative symbols, small middle decorative symbols, and small right decorative symbols continue without any temporary stop displays. Furthermore, in the reserve count display area HS, the first special symbol reserve and the second special symbol reserve are displayed as reserve counts (numbers).

In the battle sequence, if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R stop and display the same symbol (in this case, the number "7"), resulting in a jackpot, and the jackpot game (jackpot sequence) then begins. Once a jackpot is confirmed, the current spin display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the current spin icon 9C is not displayed after the end of the spin. On the other hand, in the battle sequence, if the ally character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R stop and display at the same timing (confirmation display), but the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R do not line up as the same symbol (in this case, the number "7"), resulting in a loss. At this point, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable change. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect (variable display) using the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R begins.

Furthermore, if the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in Figure 122(G), and if the winged ally character CRA does not suddenly appear and be displayed prominently on the display screen 7a in Figure 122(I), then the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R will stop and be displayed (confirmed) at the same time. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R do not line up as the same symbol (in this case, the number "7"), the result will be a loss. In other words, if the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in Figure 122(G), and if the winged ally character CRA is not displayed on the display screen 7a in Figure 122(I), the battle sequence will not proceed, and the result will be a loss.

In Figures 122(D) and (E), the effect button image BTN was shown as white with bright illumination. However, it may be possible to indicate the probability of winning by changing the illumination color in the order of white → blue → red → yellow. This would increase the variety of effects that can be achieved through the bright illumination of the effect button image BTN.

[Example of effect]
The following shows examples of the effects of the effect button enable/disable display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the performance button enabled/disabled display performance A in Figure 120, the performance button enabled/disabled display performance B in Figure 121, and the performance button enabled/disabled display performance C in Figure 122, the machine is equipped with a performance button 63 (operating means) that can be operated by the player, an image display device 7 (display means) that can display multiple types of images, and a second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) that can move to a predetermined position in front of the image display device 7 (display means). When the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the extended position while a performance button image BTN (operating means image) that mimics the performance button 63 (operating means) is displayed, a first performance (Figure 120(F) in performance button enabled/disabled display performance A, Figure 121(E) in performance button enabled/disabled display performance B, and Figure 122(G) in performance button enabled/disabled display performance C) can be executed in which the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) and the performance button image BTN (operating means image) overlap in the front-to-back direction. With this configuration, when the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the extended position while the effect button image BTN (operating means image), which mimics the effect button 63 (operating means), is displayed, the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) covers the effect button image BTN (operating means image). This creates a sense of incongruity for the player, as the effect button image BTN (operating means image), which prompts the player to operate the effect button 63 (operating means), is deliberately covered by the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body). As a result, this kind of incongruity can be offered to the player as a novel and unprecedented effect. Therefore, the level of enjoyment can be increased.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the effect button enabled/disabled display effect A in Figure 120, the effect button enabled/disabled display effect B in Figure 121, and the effect button enabled/disabled display effect C in Figure 122 (Figure 120(F) for the effect button enabled/disabled display effect A, Figure 121(E) for the effect button enabled/disabled display effect B, and Figure 122(G) for the effect button enabled/disabled display effect C), when the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the extended position, the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) can cover a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image). With this configuration, although the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) covers the performance button image BTN (operation means image), the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) does not completely cover and conceal the entire performance button image BTN (operation means image). Instead, a part of the performance button image BTN (operation means image) is deliberately made visible. Therefore, the presence of the performance button image BTN (operation means image) can contribute to making the player anticipate the development of other performances.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the effect button enabled/disabled display effect A in Figure 120, the effect button enabled/disabled display effect B in Figure 121, and the effect button enabled/disabled display effect C in Figure 122 (Figure 120(G) for effect button enabled/disabled display effect A, Figure 121(F) for effect button enabled/disabled display effect B, and Figure 122(H) for effect button enabled/disabled display effect C), the display of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) can continue even when the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) has moved from the extended position to the retracted position. With this configuration, the display of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) continues even when the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) has moved from the extended position to the retracted position, making the presence of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) seem more unnatural.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the performance button enable/disable display performance A in Figure 120, the performance button enable/disable display performance B in Figure 121, and the performance button enable/disable display performance C in Figure 122, the image display device 7 (display means) is capable of displaying a variety of images, specifically the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns), and the first performance (performance button enable/disable display performance A progresses from Figure 120(F) to Figure 120(G)) During the performance, in the performance button enable/disable display performance B, during the performance progressing from Figure 121(D) to Figure 121(E), and in the performance button enable/disable display performance C, during the performance progressing from Figure 122(F) to Figure 122(G), it is possible to hide the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (multiple decorative symbols) during the variation performance (variation display) before the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) begins to move from the retracted position to the advanced position. With this configuration, by the time the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) begins to move from the retracted position to the extended position, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (multiple decorative symbols) during the variation effect (variation display) are already hidden, while the display of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) continues. This naturally directs the player's gaze to the effect button image BTN (operation means image), thereby drawing attention to the effect button image BTN (operation means image). As a result, it is possible to create an effect that is visually striking and unnatural, where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (multiple decorative symbols) during the variation effect (variation display) are absent, while the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is present.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first performance in the performance button enable/disable display performance C in Figure 122 (Figures 122(B) to (H) in the performance button enable/disable display performance C) can be executed across the variation display (multiple variation displays) of the variation icon 9C made by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (multiple decorative symbols) and the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad. With this configuration, since the performance button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed across multiple variation displays, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the presence of the performance button image BTN (operation means image).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the effect button enabled/disabled display effect B in Figure 121 and the effect button enabled/disabled display effect C in Figure 122 (Figure 121(D) in the effect button enabled/disabled display effect B, and Figure 122(F) in the effect button enabled/disabled display effect C), the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) can be switched from an operation enabled display mode that suggests that the operation of the effect button 63 (operation means) is enabled to an operation disabled display mode that suggests that the operation of the effect button 63 (operation means) is disabled, before the time comes when the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) starts to move. With this configuration, by the time the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) begins to move from the retracted position to the extended position, the display mode of the performance button image BTN (operation means image) switches from the operation enabled display mode to the operation disabled display mode, and the performance button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed. This contributes to giving the player a sense of anticipation that the performance will progress to another effect.

[Variations]
The following shows variations of the effect button enable/disable display effect.
[Variation 1]
In the performance button enable/disable display animation A in Figure 120, the performance button enable/disable display animation B in Figure 121, and the performance button enable/disable display animation C in Figure 122, the animation was performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 20. In other words, it was performed in the so-called left-handed playing state. However, it may also be performed based on the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 21. In other words, it may also be performed in the so-called right-handed playing state.

[Modified example 2]
In the effect button enable/disable display effect A in Figure 120, the effect button enable/disable display effect B in Figure 121, and the effect button enable/disable display effect C in Figure 122, when the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the extended position, the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) can cover a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image). In other words, a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image), which mimics the effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player, is covered by the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) that has advanced to the extended position. However, a select button 68 may be used instead of the effect button 63. In this case, a select button image (operation means image) mimicking the select button 68 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the select button image (operation means image) corresponding to at least one of the up, right, down, and left buttons of the select button 68 may be covered by the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) that has advanced to the extended position.

[Modification 3]
In the enabled/disabled button display animation A in Figure 120, the enabled/disabled button display animation B in Figure 121, and the enabled/disabled button display animation C in Figure 122, the animation button image BTN (operation means image) was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). However, as long as a part of the animation button image BTN is visible due to the operation of the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body), it may be displayed in a position other than the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means).

[Modification 4]
In the performance button enable/disable display performance A in Figure 120, the performance button enable/disable display performance B in Figure 121, and the performance button enable/disable display performance C in Figure 122, the image may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) such that a part of the performance button image BTN is covered by an arm member that moves the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) back and forth between a retracted position and an extended position.

[Modified example 5]
In the effect button enabled/disabled display effect A in Figure 120, the effect button enabled/disabled display effect B in Figure 121, and the effect button enabled/disabled display effect C in Figure 122, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) had already switched from the operation enabled display mode to the operation disabled display mode by the time the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) began to move from the retracted position to the extended position. However, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) may also be configured to switch from the operation enabled display mode to the operation disabled display mode when the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stops and then the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops. At this time, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C continues. Furthermore, if the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same timing, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) may also be configured to switch from the operation enabled display mode to the operation disabled display mode when they temporarily stop. At this time, the variation effect (variation display) of the central decorative pattern 8C continues.

[Modification 6]
In the performance button enable/disable display performance A in Figure 120, the performance button enable/disable display performance B in Figure 121, and the performance button enable/disable display performance C in Figure 122, the performance button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) in the state of operation enabled, and when the player presses the performance button 63, an ally character CRA that suggests development to a battle performance with a predetermined high probability of winning may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a. However, when the player presses the performance button 63, instead of the ally character CRA that suggests development to a battle performance, the second movable mechanism 15 (movable body) may move from a stationary position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). In this case, when the second movable mechanism 15 moves to the extended position and stops, the second movable mechanism 15 covers the performance button image BTN, making the lower part of the performance button image BTN visible. In other words, the second movable mechanism 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN. Even when the second movable mechanism 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation-enabled display mode. After that, the second movable mechanism 15 returns from the extended position to the retracted position (home position), and the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation-enabled display mode.

[Variation 7]
In the animation button enable/disable display animation C shown in Figure 122, the animation button enable/disable display animation C is performed based on the fact that the white spherical reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad has changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserve icon 9A due to a pre-read animation. Furthermore, it was assumed that the reserve icon 9A is displayed at the first to third reserve display positions 9Ad, but not at the fourth reserve display position 9Ad, and that no game balls enter the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 during the decorative pattern variation animation (variation display). However, instead, the animation button enable/disable display animation C may be performed based on the fact that the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserve icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserve display position 9Ad due to a pre-read animation when a game ball enters the first start port 20 during the variation animation (variation display) by the said variation icon 9C and the reserve icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserve display position 9Ad. In this case, if the performance button enable/disable display performance C is started during the current variation performance (variation display) by the variation icon 9C, the hold icon 9A at the fourth hold display position 9Ad will then become the variation icon 9C, and the performance button enable/disable display performance C will continue to be performed even during the variation performance (variation display). Thus, the performance button enable/disable display performance C can be performed across multiple variation displays by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol (multiple decorative symbols). When the performance button enable/disable display performance C is started, as shown in Figures 122(B) to (E), the performance button image BTN remains positioned behind the middle decorative symbol 8C until the middle decorative symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, but the performance button image BTN can be seen through the semi-transparent middle decorative symbol 8C during the variation performance (variation display).

[Variation 8]
In the performance button enable/disable display performance C shown in Figure 122, the performance button image BTN is performed based on the fact that the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad has changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A due to a pre-read performance. However, regardless of the pre-read performance, the start of the performance button enable/disable display performance C may be determined by a lottery process on the sub-control board 90 itself during a variation performance (variation display) by any of the variation icons 9C, and the performance button enable/disable display performance C may be performed over a predetermined number of variation displays (for example, 2 to 10 times). In this case, when the performance button enable/disable display performance C is started, as shown in Figures 122(B) to (E), the performance button image BTN remains positioned behind the central decorative symbol 8C until the central decorative symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, but the performance button image BTN can be seen through the semi-transparent central decorative symbol 8C during the variation performance (variation display).

[Modified example 9]
In the button enable/disable display animation A in Figure 120, the button enable/disable display animation B in Figure 121, and the button enable/disable display animation C in Figure 122, some of the described animations may not be included, and other animations may be added.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
◇[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine comprising an operating means that can be operated by a player, a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images, and a movable body that can move to a predetermined position in front of the display means,
When the movable body moves from the retracted position to the extended position while an image of the operating means, which mimics the aforementioned operating means, is displayed, a first effect can be performed in which the movable body and the image of the operating means overlap in the front-to-back direction.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine described in embodiment D3-1,
The first performance is such that when the movable body moves from the retracted position to the extended position, the movable body covers a part of the image of the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect D3-3]
A gaming machine according to embodiment D3-1 or embodiment D3-2,
The first performance continues to display the operating means image even when the movable body has moved from the extended position to the retracted position.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect D3-4]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions D3-1 to D3-3,
The display means is capable of displaying multiple decorative patterns from among the multiple types of images in a variable manner.
The first effect involves hiding the multiple decorative patterns that are being displayed in a variable state before the movable body begins to move from the retracted position to the extended position.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine described in embodiment D3-4,
The first performance described above can be executed across multiple variations of the multiple decorative patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect D3-6]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions D3-1 to D3-5,
The first performance involves switching the display mode of the operating means image from an operation-enabled display mode, which suggests that the operation of the operating means is enabled, to an operation-disabled display mode, which suggests that the operation of the operating means is disabled, before the time comes when the movable body begins to move.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The automated operation effects A to C are described below using Figures 123 to 125. These automated operation effects can be executed during the variation effect of the animation symbols. Specifically, the image control microcontroller 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the automated operation effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Automated operation performance A]
Figure 123 is a diagram illustrating automated operation animation A.
In automated operation animation A, even if the player does not press the animation button 63, the animation is performed as if the animation button 63 had been pressed.

First, as shown in Figure 123(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first, second, and third memory areas of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 123(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 123(C), an action prompting animation is executed. This animation encourages the player to operate the animation button 63. Here, a button image BG, resembling the animation button 63, is displayed, along with a message image MG that reads "Press." In this case, the pressing surface (top surface) of the button image BG is white (the normal color). Note that this button image BG represents the animation button 63 in an unpressed state (with the protruding portion enlarged). If the player operates the animation button 63 in this state, the operation of the animation button 63 will be invalidated.

Next, as shown in Figure 123(D), the initial animation display sequence is executed. In the initial animation sequence, the game ball image KG enters the frame from the upper right of the display screen 7a, and then moves toward the pressable surface (top surface) indicated by the button image BG, as shown by arrow Y. At this time, the message image MG, "Press," is displayed. The game ball image KG is white (normal color).

Next, as shown in Figure 123(E), the animation display sequence (mid-stage) is executed. During the animation display sequence (mid-stage), the game ball image KG collides with the pressable surface (upper surface) shown on the button image BG. Then, as indicated by arrow Y, it bounces off the pressable surface (upper surface) of the button image BG and moves towards the upper left of the display screen 7a. The button image BG shows the state where the animation button 63 has been pressed (the protruding portion is reduced) due to the collision with the game ball image KG. At this time, the message image MG, which reads "Press," is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 123(F), the animation display effect (later stage) is executed. In the animation display effect (later stage), the game ball image KG moves towards the upper left of the display screen 7a and exits the frame. At this time, the button image BG shows the state where the effect button 63 is not pressed (the protruding part is enlarged). The message image MG, which reads "Press," is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 123(G), the win confirmation animation is executed. This animation notifies the player that a win has been confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, surrounded by a rainbow-colored effect. This allows the player to know that they have won before the animation symbols display matching numbers.

Next, as shown in Figure 123(H), the confirmed stop animation (winning) is executed. The confirmed stop animation (winning) is an animation where the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all appear as the same number and stop. Here, the left animation symbol 8L, the middle animation symbol 8C, and the right animation symbol 8R all stop at "5".

The decision of whether or not to execute the animation display sequence (Figures 123(D) to (F)) after the operation-prompting sequence (Figure 123(C)) is stored as setting information in the sub-RAM 94 of the gaming machine 1. This setting information is configured to be set using, for example, the select button 68. Of course, it may also be configured to be set using the sequence button 63 or the sword component 65. Specifically, pressing a predetermined key on the select button 68 switches the animation display sequence on and off. That is, when the animation display sequence is on, the animation display sequences shown in Figures 123(D) to (F) are executed. Operation automation sequence A is an example where the animation display sequence is on. On the other hand, when the animation display sequence is off, the win confirmation sequence in Figure 123(G) is executed after the operation-prompting sequence in Figure 123(C). In this case, the player's press of the sequence button 63 during the operation-prompting sequence in Figure 123(C) becomes effective.

[Operation automation performance B]
Figure 124 is a diagram illustrating automated operation animation B.
In automated operation animation B, even if the player does not press the animation button 63, the predetermined animation is performed as if the animation button 63 had been pressed. This is an example where the animated image display animation is turned on, similar to automated operation animation A described above.

First, as shown in Figure 124(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first, second, and third memory areas of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively. In particular, the image T1 labeled "Automatic" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the animation display animation is being executed (the same applies to (B) to (H) below).

Next, as shown in Figure 124(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 124(C), an action prompting animation is executed. This animation encourages the player to operate the animation button 63. Here, a button image BG, resembling the animation button 63, is displayed, along with a message image MG that reads "Press." In this image, the pressing surface (top) of the button image BG is shown in red. Note that this button image BG represents the animation button 63 in an unpressed state (where the protruding portion is enlarged). If the player operates the animation button 63 in this state, the operation of the animation button 63 will be invalidated.

Next, as shown in Figure 124(D), the initial animation display sequence is executed. In the initial animation sequence, the game ball image KG enters the frame from the upper right of the display screen 7a, and then moves toward the pressable surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG, as shown by arrow Y. At this time, the message image MG, which reads "Press," is displayed. The game ball image KG is red.

Next, as shown in Figure 124(E), the animation display sequence (mid-stage) is executed. In the animation display sequence (mid-stage), the game ball image KG collides with the pressable surface (upper surface) shown on the button image BG. Then, as indicated by arrow Y, it bounces off the pressable surface (upper surface) shown on the button image BG and moves towards the upper left of the display screen 7a. Here, the button image BG shows the state where the animation button 63 has been pressed (the protruding portion is reduced) due to the collision with the game ball image KG. At this time, the message image MG, which reads "Press," is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 124(F), the animation display effect (later stage) is executed. In the animation display effect (later stage), the game ball image KG moves towards the upper left of the display screen 7a and exits the frame. At this time, the button image BG is in the state where the effect button 63 is not pressed (the protruding portion is enlarged).

Next, as shown in Figure 124(G), the win confirmation animation is executed. This animation notifies the player that a win has been confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, surrounded by a rainbow-colored effect. This allows the player to know that they have won before the animation symbols display matching numbers.

Next, as shown in Figure 124(H), the confirmed stop animation (winning) is executed. The confirmed stop animation (winning) is an animation where the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop at the same number. Here, the left animation symbol 8L, the middle animation symbol 8C, and the right animation symbol 8R all stop at "5".

In automated operation animation B, the image T1 labeled "Automatic" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, making it clear that the animated image display animation is being executed. Furthermore, the button surface (top) shown in the button image BG, and the game ball image KG were "red." The display colors of the button surface and game ball image are set based on the probability of winning. For example, the probability of winning increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → gold. Therefore, automated operation animation B has a higher probability of winning compared to automated operation animation A.

[Operation automation production C]
Figures 125(A) to (D) are diagrams illustrating the automated operation effect C.
Operation automation effect C is an example where the animation display effect is turned on according to the settings, but there is a right-hand shooting instruction. When there is a right-hand shooting instruction (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), the animation display effect is not executed.

First, as shown in Figure 125(A), the variation start animation is executed. The variation start animation is an animation in which the animation symbols begin to vary. Here, the animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to vary and are shown varying rapidly. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserve icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserve and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three reserve icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserve correspond to the first, second, and third memory areas of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b, respectively. In particular, the image T2 labeled "Manual" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the animation display animation will not be executed (the same applies to (B) to (D) below). The display screen 7a shows "Right-Handed Shooting" in the lower left corner (the same applies to (B) to (D) below).

Next, as shown in Figure 125(B), the reach formation animation is executed. The reach formation animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same value. Here, both the left animation symbol 8L and the right animation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5". The middle animation symbol 8C is rapidly changing. Here as well, the three reserve icons 9B corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 125(C), an action prompting animation is executed. This animation encourages the player to operate the animation button 63. Here, a button image BG, resembling the animation button 63, is displayed, along with a message image MG that reads "Press." In this case, the pressing surface (top surface) of the button image BG is white. Note that this button image BG represents the animation button 63 in an unpressed state (where the protruding portion is enlarged).

Next, as shown in Figure 125(D), a confirmed stop animation (miss) is executed. This animation is where the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R result in a "miss" and the reels stop. Here, the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R stop at "5," and the middle symbol 8C stops at "6."

In automated operation animation C, the image T2 labeled "Manual" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, making it clear that the animated image display animation will not be executed.

The above animated image display effect involved the game ball image KG colliding with the button image BG, triggering a single operation of the button indicated by the button image BG. Alternatively, animated image display effects corresponding to various button 63 operations may be implemented.

Figures 125(E) and 125(F) show the animation display effect corresponding to the "long press" of the effect button 63.
As shown in Figure 125(E), the animated image display effect (long press 1) is executed. The animated image display effect (long press 1) is an effect in which a large game ball image KG enters the frame from the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves toward the pressed surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG, as shown by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 125(F), the animated image display effect (long press 2) is executed. The animated image display effect (long press 2) is an effect in which a large game ball image KG comes into contact with the pressing surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG and stops. At this time, the pressing of the game ball image KG causes the button image BG to appear as if it has been pressed (the protruding portion is reduced).

Figures 125(G) and 125(H) show the animation display effect corresponding to the "repeated pressing" of the effect button 63.
As shown in Figure 125(G), the animated image display effect (rapid-fire 1) is executed. The animated image display effect (rapid-fire 1) is an effect in which the game ball image KG enters the frame from the top center of the display screen and moves toward the pressed surface (top surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG, as shown by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 125(H), the animated image display effect (rapid-fire 2) is executed. The animated image display effect (rapid-fire 2) is an effect in which the game ball image KG collides with the button-pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG and bounces back. At this time, the collision of the game ball image KG causes the button image BG to appear as if the effect button 63 has been pressed (the protruding portion is reduced).

Subsequently, the animation image display sequence (rapid press 1) in Figure 125(G) and the animation image display sequence (rapid press 2) in Figure 125(H) are executed alternately, causing repeated collisions of the game ball image KG with the pressed surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG.

[Example of effect]
The following are examples of the effects of automated operation effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG that mimics the performance button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and an action prompting performance is executed to encourage the player to operate the performance button 63 (Figures 123(C), 124(C), and 125(C)). After that, an animation image showing the button image BG being operated is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and then a winning confirmation performance is executed as if the performance button 63 had been operated (Figures 123(D), (E), (F), (G), and 124(D), (E), (F), (G)). With this configuration, the operation of the performance button 63 can be automated, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation unit," the button image BG corresponds to the "operation unit image," the operation prompt effect corresponds to the "first effect," the animated image display effect corresponds to the "second effect," and the win confirmation effect corresponds to the "predetermined effect."
The control unit only needs to be operable by the player, and may be a sword member 65 or a select button 68.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an animated image display effect is executed based on setting information set externally. With this configuration, the player can automate the operation of the effect button 63 by setting the setting information using, for example, the select button 68, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, even if the animation display effect is turned on according to the setting information, the animation display effect will not be executed if there is a right-hand shooting instruction (high probability high base state, low probability high base state). With this configuration, in certain cases the player can be made to operate the effect button 63, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the animated image display effect is executed, the image T1 labeled "Automatic" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen (Figures 124(A) to (H)). This configuration makes it easier to understand when the animated image display effect is being executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. The image T1 labeled "Automatic" corresponds to the "first mode of display indicating that the permitted period is in effect."

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if the animated image display effect is not executed, the "Manual" image T2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen (Figures 125(A) to (D)). This configuration makes it easier to understand that the animated image display effect is not being executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. The "Manual" image T2 corresponds to the "second form of display indicating that it is a prohibited period."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when an animated image display effect is executed, the player's operation of the effect button 63 in the operation prompt effect is invalidated. With this configuration, the animated image display effect is executed regardless of whether the player operates the effect button 63 or not, and the predetermined effect is executed as if the effect button 63 had been operated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Variations]
The following shows variations of the automated operation animation.
[Variation 1]
In the above example, the display colors of both the button image BG and the game ball image KG were changed based on the expected probability of winning.
In contrast, the display color of at least one of the button image BG and the game ball image KG may be changed based on the expectation of winning. Furthermore, not limited to the display color, the display manner of at least one of the button image BG and the game ball image KG may also be changed based on the expectation of winning. For example, it is conceivable to display a more elaborate button image BG compared to the normal button image BG.

[Modified example 2]
As described above, even if the animation display effect was turned on according to the settings, the animation display effect would not be executed if there was a right-hand shooting instruction (high probability high base state, low probability high base state).
The conditions under which the animation display effect is not executed are not limited to these. For example, within a single spin, the animation display effect may be executed when the effect button 63 is operated during an intermediate chance-up effect, but not when the effect button 63 is operated during the final decisive effect.

[Modification 3]
In the above example, images T1 and T2, labeled "Automatic" and "Manual," were displayed to indicate whether the animation display effect was executed or not. Any image can be used to indicate whether the animation display effect is executed or not. It could be labeled "Auto" or "Manual," or it could be a symbol corresponding to automatic or manual. Furthermore, since the goal is simply to indicate whether the animation display effect is executed or not, an image could be displayed only when the animation display effect is executed, and no image could be displayed when the animation display effect is not executed.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect D4-1]
A display device for displaying images,
It is equipped with an operating unit that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined effects based on the operation of the aforementioned control unit,
A first presentation involves displaying an image of the control unit, which mimics the control unit, on the display device, prompting the player to operate the control unit.
After the first performance, the second performance is performed, in which an image of the operation unit showing the operated mode is displayed on the display device, and then the predetermined performance is executed as if the operation unit had been operated.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Concept D4-2]
The gaming machine described in embodiment D4-1,
Whether or not to execute the second effect is determined based on configuration information set externally.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Concept D4-3]
The gaming machine described in embodiment D4-2,
Regardless of the aforementioned setting information, the execution of the second effect is prohibited during a specific period.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Fire D4-4]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions D4-1 to D4-3,
During the permitted period in which the execution of the second performance is permitted, the display device shows the first form indicating that it is the permitted period.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Condition D4-5]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions D4-1 to D4-4,
During the prohibited period in which the execution of the second performance is prohibited, the display device will show a second type of display indicating that it is the prohibited period.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Concept D4-6]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions D4-1 to D4-5,
During the permitted period in which the execution of the second performance is permitted, any operation of the control unit by the player during the first performance is invalid.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Concept D4-7]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions D4-1 to D4-6,
In the first performance, after waiting for a predetermined time for the player to operate the control unit, if the player does not operate the control unit, the second performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The relationship between the first movable mechanism 14 and the frame-movable mechanism 69 will be explained below using Figure 126, and the double mechanism effects A and B will be explained using Figures 127 and 128. In Figures 127 and 128, the display effects on the display screen 7a are shown on the left, and the relationship between the frame-movable mechanism 69 and the handle 60 is shown on the right. This double mechanism effect is executed during the variation of decorative symbols in the normal state, time-saving state (low probability, low base state), or probability variation state (high probability, high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the double mechanism effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

Figure 126 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the first movable component 14 and the frame movable component 69. Figure 126(A) describes the first movable component 14, and Figure 126(B) describes the frame movable component 69.
As shown in Figure 126(A), when the first movable component 14 is in motion, it moves to the right (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) from the retracted position located on the left side of the display screen 7a to the extended position.
The first movable component 14 is positioned within the frame space (see Figure 1) formed by the game machine frame 50 and the game board 2.

The handle 60 of the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a button XMM. This button XMM has a button detection switch (not shown) and is connected to the main control board 80 via a launch control circuit 111 and a payout control board 110. When the button XMM is operated, the main control board 80 transmits the button operation information to the sub-control board 90. This allows the display screen 7a to display a button image that mimics the button XMM, and a button effect is performed in which a predetermined display effect is performed when the button XMM is operated. On the handle 60, the button XMM is operated, for example, by the player pressing the button XMM to the right with their right thumb. Therefore, the direction of operation of the button XMM is to the right, as shown in the figure.
As shown in Figure 126(B), the movable frame mechanism 69 is composed of a left member and a right member. When the movable frame mechanism 69 is in the retracted position, the left member and the right member of the movable frame mechanism 69 are positioned to sandwich the handle 60. That is, the left member of the movable frame mechanism 69 is positioned on the extension of the line opposite to the operating direction (right direction) of button XMM (left direction) relative to button XMM, and the right member of the movable frame mechanism 69 is positioned on the extension of the line in the operating direction (right direction) of button XMM.
When the movable frame component 69 moves to the extended position, it moves toward the handle 60, as shown in Figure 126(B). Specifically, the movable frame component 69 located to the left of the handle 60 moves to the right, and the movable frame component 69 located to the right of the handle 60 moves to the left. Figure 49 shows the state when the movable frame component 69 has moved to the extended position.
When the player is holding the handle 60 and touching the button XMM, the movable frame mechanism 69 moves to its advanced position so that it touches the player's hand.
Furthermore, when the first movable mechanism 14 and the frame movable mechanism 69 perform a movement effect, the direction of operation of button XMM, the direction of movement of the first movable mechanism 14, and the direction of movement of the frame movable mechanism 69 on the left side of the handle 60 are the same.

[Double Special Effect Performance A]
Figure 127 is a diagram illustrating the double gimmick effect A. The double gimmick effect A in Figure 127 is an effect that occurs when the special symbols change in the same way. In the double gimmick effect A, as shown in the left diagram of Figure 127(A), a decorative symbol change effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol change effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Also, in the decorative symbol change effect, as shown in the right diagram of Figure 127(A), the player is holding the handle 60, and the movable frame gimmick 69 is in the retracted position. In this state, the movable frame gimmick 69 is not in contact with the player. Note that in the special decorative symbol change effect, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in the left-hand diagram of Figure 127(B), a reach animation is performed. In this reach animation, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the 7 symbol, and decorative symbol 8C rapidly changes, forming a reach state in the upper left of the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is displayed prominently near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, during the reach animation, as shown in the right-hand diagram of Figure 127(B), the player is holding the handle 60, and the movable frame mechanism 69 is in a retracted position. When the reach state is reached, the player may frequently operate button XMM in the direction of operation (right) in anticipation of the appearance of a chance-up animation. In this state, the movable frame mechanism 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left-hand diagram of Figure 127(C), a mechanism movement effect is performed. In this mechanism movement effect, the first movable mechanism 14 moves across the display screen 7a from a retracted position on the left side of the screen 7a to an extended position. During the mechanism movement effect, as shown in the right-hand diagram of Figure 127(C), while the player is holding the handle 60, or while the player is holding the handle 60 and operating button XMM, the frame-movable mechanism 69 moves from the retracted position to the extended position. Specifically, the frame-movable mechanism 69 on the left side moves to the right, and the frame-movable mechanism 69 on the right side moves to the left. As a result, the frame-movable mechanism 69 on the left side contacts the player's thumb, etc., and the frame-movable mechanism 69 on the right side contacts the player's little finger, etc.

Next, as shown in the left-hand diagram of Figure 127(D), the jackpot symbol display animation is performed. In this jackpot symbol display animation, the first movable mechanism 14 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position (the first movable mechanism 14 moves to the left), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction, with the jackpot symbol 7 being displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This linked animation is the same as the mechanism linked animations A to C as shown in Figures 66 to 68. Also, in the jackpot symbol display animation, as shown in the right-hand diagram of Figure 127(D), the frame movable mechanism 69 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position, and contact with the player is released.
After that, a jackpot game animation will be performed.

[Double Special Feature Production B]
Figure 128 is a diagram illustrating the double gimmick effect B. The double gimmick effect B in Figure 128 is an effect that occurs with the same variation of special symbols. In the double gimmick effect B, as shown in the left diagram of Figure 128(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed first. In this decorative symbol variation effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Also, in the decorative symbol variation effect, as shown in the right diagram of Figure 128(A), the player is holding the handle 60, and the movable frame gimmick 69 is in the retracted position. In this state, the movable frame gimmick 69 is not in contact with the player. Note that in the special decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the diagram.

Next, as shown in the left-hand diagram of Figure 128(B), a reach animation is performed. In this reach animation, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the 7 symbol, and a reach state is formed in the upper left of the display screen 7a, with decorative symbol 8C rapidly changing. The ally character CRA is displayed prominently near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, during the reach animation, as shown in the right-hand diagram of Figure 128(B), the player is holding the handle 60, and the movable frame mechanism 69 is in a retracted position. When the reach state is reached, the player may frequently operate button XMM in the direction of operation (right) in anticipation of the appearance of a chance-up animation. In this state, the movable frame mechanism 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left-hand diagram of Figure 128(C), button operation instruction presentation A is performed. In this presentation A, button operation instruction image XM1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This image XM1 represents the entire gaming machine 1 and also suggests the positional relationship of button XMM to the gaming machine 1. Specifically, button operation instruction image XM1 suggests that button XMM is located at the position indicated by the arrow (the position marked "Here"). Furthermore, button operation instruction image XM1 suggests the positional relationship between the first movable mechanism 14 and button XMM. Button operation instruction image XM1 may also be a diagram representing the entire gaming machine 1. Also, in button operation instruction presentation A, as shown in the right-hand diagram of Figure 128(C), the player is holding the handle 60, and the frame movable mechanism 69 is in the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable mechanism 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left-hand diagram of Figure 128(D), button operation instruction presentation B is performed. In this button operation instruction presentation B, button operation instruction image XM2 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction image XM2 represents the area around the handle 60 and the movable frame mechanism 69, and also suggests the positional relationship between the handle 60 and the movable frame mechanism 69. Furthermore, button operation instruction image XM2 displays the words "PUSH the arrow" and an arrow, indicating the position of button XMM on the handle 60, and is an image intended to prompt the player to press (operate) button XMM. In other words, button operation instruction image XM2 is a diagram that represents a zoomed-in view of the actual button XMM. Also, in button operation instruction presentation B, as shown in the right-hand diagram of Figure 128(D), the player is holding the handle 60, and the movable frame mechanism 69 is in the retracted position. The player, after viewing the button operation instruction image XM2, grips the handle 60 and presses button XMM. In this state, the movable frame mechanism 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left-hand diagram of Figure 128(E), a mechanism movement effect is performed. In this mechanism movement effect, the first movable mechanism 14 moves across the display screen 7a from a retracted position on the left side of the screen 7a to an extended position. During the mechanism movement effect, as shown in the right-hand diagram of Figure 128(E), while the player is holding the handle 60, or while the player is holding the handle 60 and operating button XMM, the frame-movable mechanism 69 moves from the retracted position to the extended position. Specifically, the frame-movable mechanism 69 on the left side moves to the right, and the frame-movable mechanism 69 on the right side moves to the left. As a result, the frame-movable mechanism 69 on the left side contacts the player's thumb, etc., and the frame-movable mechanism 69 on the right side contacts the player's little finger, etc.

Next, as shown in the left-hand diagram of Figure 128(F), the jackpot symbol display animation is performed. In this jackpot symbol display animation, the first movable mechanism 14 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position (the first movable mechanism 14 moves to the left), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction, with the jackpot symbol 7 being displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This linked animation is the same as the mechanism linked animations A to C as shown in Figures 66 to 68. Also, in the jackpot symbol display animation, as shown in the right-hand diagram of Figure 128(F), the frame movable mechanism 69 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position, and contact with the player is released.
After that, a jackpot game animation will be performed.

[Variations]
In the double mechanical device effects A and B described above, a movable frame mechanical device 69 was used as a movable mechanical device outside the frame in the mechanical device movement effect, but this is not the only option. For example, the left and right members of the movable frame mechanical device 69 may be arranged so as to sandwich the effect button 63.
In the double feature effects A and B described above, the movement of the first movable feature 14 and the frame movable feature 69 occurred regardless of whether the player operated the button XMM. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the movement of the first movable feature 14 and the frame movable feature 69 may be made based on the player operating the button XMM.

[Example of effect]
In the double-feature effect A and B described above, the first movable feature 14, which is positioned within the frame, is in motion when the frame-movable feature 69, which is positioned outside the frame, is in motion. With this configuration, the first movable feature 14 and the frame-movable feature 69 can be used to create a feature effect that gives a sense of depth in an instant, and surprises can be efficiently provided to the player in a short amount of time. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the double-feature effect A and B described above, the movement of the first movable feature 14 positioned within the frame and the movement of the frame-moving feature 69 positioned outside the frame each indicate a jackpot. After the mechanism movement effect, in which both the first movable feature 14 and the frame-moving feature 69 move, the jackpot symbol display effect is performed. This configuration allows for a momentary sense of depth in the mechanism effect using the first movable feature 14 and the frame-moving feature 69, followed by the highly anticipated jackpot symbol display effect, thus providing the player with a great sense of satisfaction. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the double-feature effect A and B described above, the first movable feature 14 positioned within the frame and the frame-movable feature 69 positioned outside the frame both move in a predetermined direction (to the right in this embodiment) during the feature movement effect. This configuration allows for the creation of a sense of unity in addition to depth through the two movable features. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button XMM on the handle 60 is used for display effects and effects using movable parts, and can be operated by the player by applying force in the operating direction (right). Furthermore, the movable frame part 69 (left-side member) is positioned on the extension of the opposite direction (left) to the operating direction (right) relative to the button XMM. In the double part effects A and B described above, when the movable part effect is performed while the player is touching the button XMM to apply force in the operating direction, the movable frame part 69 moves in the direction of movement, causing the movable frame part 69 to touch the player. With this configuration, the player can enjoy the effects not only visually but also physically, maximizing the excitement of the movable part effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the double-feature effect A and B described above, the movable frame feature 69 is made of a softer material than the first movable feature 14. This configuration helps prevent injuries to the player and encourages them to enjoy the game. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
[Aspect XM-1]
A gaming machine comprising a gaming machine frame, a gaming board, a first movable member, and a second movable member, capable of performing multiple effects,
The first movable member is positioned in the space within the frame formed by the game machine frame and the game board.
The second movable member is positioned in the space outside the frame, outside the space inside the frame.
In some cases, the first type of performance may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple performances.
In some cases, a second type of performance may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple performances.
The first effect is an effect that moves the first movable member,
The second effect described above is an effect that moves the second movable member,
A combination of the first and second effects may be performed.
In the aforementioned combination performance, the second performance is performed while the first performance is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Pattern XM-2]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XM-1,
It further includes a display means capable of executing display effects,
In some cases, a third type of performance may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple performances.
The third effect is an effect in which a jackpot symbol is displayed on the display means,
The aforementioned combination performance may include the third performance,
In the aforementioned combination performance, the movement of the first movable member in the first performance and the movement of the second movable member in the second performance each indicate a jackpot, and the third performance is performed after the first and second performances have been performed.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Aspect XM-3]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XM-2,
In the aforementioned combination performance, the first movable member in the first performance and the second movable member in the second performance both move in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Fire XM-4]
A gaming machine as described in embodiment XM-3,
The game further includes an operating mechanism that can be operated by the player applying force in a predetermined direction.
The second movable member is positioned on an extension line in the opposite direction to the operating direction with respect to the operating means.
In the aforementioned combination performance, if the second performance is performed when the player is touching the operating means to apply force in the operating direction, the second movable member moves in the predetermined direction so that the second movable member touches the player.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.
[Concept XM-5]
The gaming machine described in the XM-4 configuration,
The second movable member in the second performance is made of a softer material than the first movable member in the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

The following describes the movable member contact effects A to C using Figures 129 to 131. In Figures 129 to 131, various movable components arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for clarity in the drawings.

This movable member contact effect can be performed during the fluctuation. That is, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a command that includes an instruction to perform a movable member contact effect) and operates the first movable mechanism 14 and the second movable mechanism 15 provided on the game board 2, or operates the protruding part 603, which will be described later, provided on the handle 60 located at the lower right end of the front frame 53, or operates the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, which will be described later, provided on the front frame 53 above, below, to the left and right of the handle 60 located at the lower right end of the front frame 53. The lamp control board 107 controls the electrical drive source (e.g., a motor) that operates the first movable component 14 and the electrical drive source (e.g., a motor) that operates the second movable component 15, as well as the electrical drive source (e.g., a motor or solenoid) that operates the protruding portion 603 and the electrical drive sources (e.g., a motor or solenoid) that operate the movable frame parts 69a to 69d.

Here, we will first explain movable member contact effect A, then movable member contact effect B, and finally movable member contact effect C, in that order.

[Movable Member Contact Demonstration A]
The movable member contact effect A will be explained with reference to Figure 129. Figure 129 is a diagram illustrating the movable member contact effect A. The movable member contact effect A can be performed during the fluctuation. Note that in Figure 129, the touch switch 114 that detects contact with the handle 60, the firing volume 115 that detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60, etc., have been omitted.

First, as described above, the handle 60 is positioned at the lower right end of the front frame 53. As shown in Figures 129(A) and (B), the handle 60 is configured with a resin annular operating lever 601 rotatably mounted between a resin cylindrical handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602. The operating lever 601 is formed in an annular shape, and three finger-grip protrusions 601a are integrally formed on its outer circumferential surface. By placing the player's fingers between these three finger-grip protrusions 601a, the fingers can easily grip the lever 601 when rotating it, making rotation easier.

The handle base is made of a colored, opaque (e.g., white) resin, the operating lever 601 is made of a colored, opaque (e.g., black, or the same color as the handle base (e.g., white)) resin, and the front cover 602 is made of a colorless, transparent resin. An inner lens is provided at the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate with multiple full-color LEDs mounted on it is provided behind the inner lens. The inner lens and decorative substrate have through holes formed in the portions corresponding to the ribs 602aa (described later), which are larger than the outer circumference of the ribs 602aa. In other words, the inner lens and decorative substrate are designed not to interfere with the protruding portion 603 (described later).

The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, making it difficult to perceive the presence of the decorative substrate located behind it. Therefore, even when all the multiple full-color LEDs on the decorative substrate are switched off, these LEDs remain difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or semi-transparent.

When multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, causing the front cover 602 to emit light. This allows the illumination pattern of the front cover 602 to be changed depending on the illumination pattern of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate.

The operation of the handle 60 begins with the player gripping the handle 60 from the front, placing their fingers between the three finger-holding protrusions 601a. As the player rotates the operating lever 601 clockwise, the amount of rotation increases, increasing the launch force of the game balls. The launching device 112 then launches the game balls towards the game area 3, which is partitioned on the game board 2, with a launch force commensurate with the amount of rotation. When the player releases the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, the handle 60 rotates counterclockwise due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown), and the launch force of the game balls decreases. Furthermore, if the player continues to release the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, or if the player removes their palm from the handle 60, the operating lever 601 will return to its original position due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) attached to the handle 60, and the launch of the game balls will stop.

Multiple elongated holes 602a are provided radially on the spherical surface of the spherical shell-shaped front cover 602, with their longitudinal directions facing outward along the same circumference (in this case, there are 12 elongated holes 602a). Ribs 602aa are formed on the circumferential surface of the elongated holes 602a, protruding by a predetermined distance (approximately 10 mm in this embodiment) toward the inner space (depth direction) of the front cover 602, resulting in a smooth inner circumferential surface of the elongated holes 602a.

Within the internal space between the front cover 602 and the operating lever 601, protrusions 603 are provided corresponding to each elongated hole 602a, moving in the front-rear direction along the inner circumferential surface of the elongated hole 602a from the internal space of the front cover 602. Furthermore, a front-rear movement mechanism 604 is provided, which includes an electrical drive source (e.g., a motor or solenoid) for moving the protrusions 603 in the front-rear direction along the inner circumferential surface of the elongated hole 602a. In addition to the electrical drive source, the front-rear movement mechanism 604 includes, for example, a reduction gear to decelerate the motor's rotation when the electrical drive source is a motor, a motion conversion mechanism to convert the motor's rotational motion (reduced rotational motion) into linear motion of the protrusions 603, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the solenoid plunger to the linear motion of the protrusions 603 when the electrical drive source is a solenoid, and furthermore, a return spring, a contact spring constituting an overload prevention mechanism, etc., in addition to these mechanisms.

The protruding portion 603 can reciprocate between a retracted position (home position) and an extended position, and is formed from a flexible, opaque (e.g., red) material. As described above, the front cover 602 has an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate with multiple full-color LEDs mounted on it is provided behind the inner lens. However, even if the emission pattern of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate can change the emission pattern of the front cover 602, the emission pattern of the protruding portion 603 cannot be changed because it is opaque (e.g., red).

Multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate begin emitting light in a predetermined pattern before the timing of the activation of the protrusion 603 (the timing when the operation mode of the protrusion 603 begins) (for example, 5 seconds before the timing of the activation of the protrusion 603), and continue to emit light throughout the period until the operation of the protrusion 603 ends. In other words, the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate serve as a visual cue for the activation of the protrusion 603. The predetermined lighting patterns include blue, green, red, purple, golden (yellow), and rainbow colors, with the probability of winning increasing in the order of blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow colors (high probability of winning). In other words, the probability of winning due to the activation of the protrusion 603 can be indicated by the lighting patterns of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, which are housed inside the front cover 602.

When the protrusion 603 is positioned in the retracted position (home position), the front surface of the protrusion 603 is positioned on the inner circumferential surface of the elongated hole 602a. Specifically, it is recessed in depth by a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, half the length of the rib 602aa (5 mm)) from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 in the depth direction (Figure 129(A)). In other words, even when the player grips the handle 60 by wrapping their palm around it from the front and places their fingers between the three finger-holding protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is positioned in the retracted position (home position), so the player's palm does not come into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603 at all. Furthermore, since the protrusion 603 is subjected to the biasing force of a return spring, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring.

In contrast, when the protrusion 603 is positioned in the extended position, it protrudes through the elongated hole 602a from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 by a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, a maximum of approximately 10 mm) (Figure 129(B)). That is, when the player grips the handle 60 with their palm wrapped around it from the front, and places their fingers between the three finger-holding protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is in the extended position, causing the player's palm to contact the tip of the protrusion 603. Even if the player's palm contacts the tip of the protrusion 603, an overload prevention mechanism is provided in the forward/backward movement mechanism 604 to prevent overloading. This mechanism prevents the tip of the protrusion 603 in contact with the player's palm from moving further (preventing it from pulling the player's palm away from the handle 60). This overload prevention mechanism primarily consists of a contact spring.

The operation modes of the protruding parts 603 include: Operation mode 1, where all protruding parts 603 move simultaneously from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then simultaneously return to the retracted position (home position); Operation mode 2, where one protruding part 603 moves sequentially in a clockwise direction from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then returns to the retracted position (home position); and Operation mode 3, where one protruding part 603 moves sequentially in a counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then returns to the retracted position (home position). Examples of the operation modes include: 3. Operation mode 4, where the protrusions 603 move from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position so that a wave-like pattern is formed from three to four protrusions 603 and the wave propagates sequentially in a clockwise direction, and then returns to the retracted position (home position); and 5, where the protrusions 603 move from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position so that a wave-like pattern is formed from three to four protrusions 603 and the wave propagates sequentially in a counterclockwise direction, and then returns to the retracted position (home position).

Next, the timing at which the protrusion 603 is activated (the timing at which the operation mode of the protrusion 603 begins) will be explained. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern of the 3D image, the middle decorative pattern of the 3D image, and the right decorative pattern of the 3D image are displayed in a display mode in which a reel rotates from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative patterns begins, the stopped decorative patterns move slowly (at a low speed) in a display mode in which they float upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words, after the stop display of the decorative patterns is released, the decorative patterns are displayed in a state in which they are about to move), and then they move downwards, gradually increasing in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and becoming a display mode in which they vary at high speed. As a result, the background image placed behind the decorative patterns can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as either temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction. There are multiple background images for displaying the changing decorative pattern, and one of these background images is selected automatically.

As part of the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the fluctuating icons 9C corresponding to the currently fluctuating left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed (placed) on the fluctuating display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area for the first special symbol hold is provided in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the fluctuating display position 9Cd. Within this hold display area, four hold display positions 9A (above the rectangular image (base image)) are available for display (placement) of hold icons 9A, allowing for a maximum of four hold icons 9A to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9A are arranged linearly along the lower edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the fluctuating display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9A both have a rectangular shape, but their sizes may be the same or different. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9A have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is larger than the size of the hold display position 9A (horizontal distance dimension) (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to allow distinction between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9A.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad, and no reserve icons are displayed at the second to fourth reserve display positions 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical reserve icon that has not been consumed and is still in stock. The following explanation assumes that no more game balls enter the first and second start ports 20 and 21 from this point onward.

To briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the different probability of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, among the six icons—a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon is the second highest, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest, the red spherical icon is the fourth highest, the blue spherical icon is the fifth highest, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

The decorative symbols begin to change (the display changes), then the left decorative symbol temporarily stops at the number "2" and moves slowly and gently up and down. The right decorative symbol then temporarily stops at the number "2" and moves slowly and gently up and down. The left and right decorative symbols then become identical (in this case, the number "2"), forming a winning combination. At this point, the middle decorative symbol continues to change (the display changes).

Next, when the battle sequence begins, allied characters appear from the right side of screen 7a, enemy characters appear from the left side of screen 7a, and a battle sequence unfolds in the center of screen 7a between the allied and enemy characters. The battle sequence is designed to have a high probability of resulting in a big win. During the battle sequence, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols disappear from screen 7a.

In the battle sequence, if the allied character wins and the enemy character loses, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display the same symbol (confirmation display), resulting in a win, and the winning game (win sequence) begins. Once a win is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon the end of the spin. Conversely, in the battle sequence, if the allied character loses and the enemy character wins, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display the same symbol (confirmation display), but they do not line up as the same symbol, resulting in a loss. In this case, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon the end of the spin.

During a battle sequence where allied and enemy characters are fighting, when the allied character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a button image resembling the performance button 63 is displayed near the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and a message image that says "Press repeatedly!" prompting the player to press the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image. The probability of winning increases in the order of "Press!" → "Press repeatedly!" → "Hold down!". In addition, a downward-pointing arrow image is displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and this arrow image repeatedly moves back and forth in the vertical direction, so that the arrow image can also prompt the player to press the performance button 63 (by pressing the press button part of the performance button 63 downwards). The button images, message images, and arrow images disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the performance button 63, or they disappear from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) if the player does not press the performance button 63.

When the performance button 63 is pressed, or when the performance button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 129(C), a first premium background image having seven colors (the so-called "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable mechanism 15 provided on the game board 2 moves from a stationary position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has elapsed, the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its advance position to its retreat position (home position), and a special victory background image indicating the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, shrinking as it moves away in the depth direction, and flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, resulting in an explosion. Subsequently, a special win background image indicating a win is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display as the same symbol (in this case, the number "2").

When the second movable component 15, located on the game board 2, starts moving from its stationary position (home position) above the image display device 7 towards the front (forward) position of the display screen 7a (advance position) of the image display device 7, the operation mode 1 of the protruding portion 603 provided on the handle 60 located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 is initiated.

In other words, the operation of the second movable mechanism 15 on the game board 2 and the operation of the protruding part 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 will be linked, causing both to begin moving in conjunction.

Specifically, when the second movable component 15 starts moving forward (to the front of the display screen 7a, which is in front of the display screen 7a and is in the center of the display screen 7a (the advanced position) from a stationary position above the image display device 7 (home position), the protruding portion 603 starts moving forward (to the advanced position) from the retracted position (home position). When the second movable component 15 stops at the advanced position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protruding portion 603 also stops at the advanced position for a predetermined time. After the predetermined time has elapsed, when the second movable component 15 starts moving back from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the protruding portion 603 also starts moving back from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, the operation mode of the protruding portion 603 was set to operation mode 1, but of course, any of operation modes 2 to 5 may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protruding portion 603. In operation modes 2 to 5, the second movable component 15 moves from a stationary position (home position) above the image display device 7 towards the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then returns to the retracted position (home position), operating continuously throughout the operation period of the second movable component.

Specifically, in operation mode 2 of the protruding part 603, during the operation period of the second movable mechanism, one protruding part 603 moves sequentially clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again, and when the operation period of the second movable mechanism has elapsed, all protruding parts 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 3 of the protruding part 603, during the operation period of the second movable mechanism, one protruding part 603 moves sequentially counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again, and when the operation period of the second movable mechanism has elapsed, all protruding parts 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 4 of the protruding part 603, during the operation period of the second movable mechanism... During the operation period, the protrusions 603 move from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then back to the retracted position (home position) in a continuous motion, forming a wave pattern from three to four protrusions 603 and propagating sequentially in a clockwise direction. Once the second movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, all protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 5 of the protrusions 603, during the second movable mechanism operation period, the protrusions 603 move from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then back to the retracted position (home position) in a continuous motion, forming a wave pattern from three to four protrusions 603 and propagating sequentially in a counterclockwise direction. Once the second movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, all protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position).

As shown in Figure 129(C), when the performance button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the performance button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image with seven colors (the so-called "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the operation mode 1 of the protruding part 603, located on the lower right end of the front frame 53, is started in conjunction with the operation of the second movable mechanism 15 provided on the game board 2. However, instead of the second movable mechanism 15, the operation mode 1 of the protruding part 603 may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable mechanism 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the performance button 63 is pressed, or when the performance button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 129(D), a second premium background image (the so-called "second rainbow background image"), which is different from the first premium background image having seven colors as a background image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable mechanism 14 provided on the game board 2 moves from a stationary position (home position) to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and moves back and forth repeatedly in small increments in the left-right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has elapsed, the first movable mechanism 14 returns from its advance position to its retreat position (home position), and a special victory background image indicating the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, shrinks as it moves away in the depth direction, and flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, resulting in an explosion. Subsequently, a special win background image indicating a win is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display as the same symbol (in this case, the number "2").

When the first movable component 14, located on the game board 2, starts moving from its stationary position (home position) to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, towards the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, the operation mode 1 of the protruding portion 603 provided on the handle 60 located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 is initiated.

In other words, the operation of the first movable mechanism 14 on the game board 2 and the operation of the protruding part 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 will be linked, causing both to begin moving in conjunction.

Specifically, when the first movable component 14 starts moving forward (moving) from a stationary position (home position) to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the protruding portion 603 starts moving forward (moving) from the home position to the advance position. Then, in conjunction with the first movable component 14 repeatedly moving back and forth in small increments in the left-right direction at the advance position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protruding portion 603 stops at the advance position for a predetermined time. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the first movable component 14 starts moving back from the advance position to the home position, and in conjunction with this, the protruding portion 603 starts moving back from the advance position to the home position.

Here, the operation mode of the protruding portion 603 was set to operation mode 1, but of course, any of operation modes 2 to 5 may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protruding portion 603. In operation modes 2 to 5, the first movable component 14 moves from a stationary position (home position) to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, towards the center position (advance position), and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again. This operation is performed continuously throughout the operation period of the first movable component.

Specifically, in operation mode 2 of the protruding part 603, during the first movable mechanism operation period, one protruding part 603 moves sequentially clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then returns to the retracted position (home position) in sequence, and when the first movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, all protruding parts 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 3 of the protruding part 603, during the first movable mechanism operation period, one protruding part 603 moves sequentially counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then returns to the retracted position (home position) in sequence, and when the first movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, all protruding parts 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 4 of the protruding part 603, during the first movable mechanism operation... During the operation period, the protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then back to the retracted position (home position) in a continuous motion, forming a wave pattern from three to four protrusions 603 and propagating sequentially in a clockwise direction. Once the first movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, all protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 5 of the protrusions 603, during the first movable mechanism operation period, the protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then back to the retracted position (home position) in a continuous motion, forming a wave pattern from three to four protrusions 603 and propagating sequentially in a counterclockwise direction. Once the first movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, all protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position).

In the above-described embodiment, as mentioned above, the protruding portion 603 is subjected to the biasing force of the return spring. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the protruding portion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring. Furthermore, the protruding portion 603 will not extend to the extended position unless it is at the timing when the protruding portion 603 is activated (the timing when the operation mode of the protruding portion 603 is started). For this reason, even if a player who is about to start playing or an employee of the gaming hall disinfects the handle 60 with alcohol, they cannot disinfect the protruding portion 603 with alcohol. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a demo performance for customers is being played, the protruding portion 603 is in the extended position, and when the demo performance for customers is finished, the protruding portion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position). During a demonstration for customers, when the protruding part 603 is extended to its extended position, if a player or an employee of the arcade touches the handle 60, the protruding part 603 is returned to its retracted position (home position) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the player or employee touched the handle 60 (for example, approximately 5 seconds, which is enough time to disinfect the protruding part 603 with alcohol).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as mentioned above, the protruding portion 603 is subjected to the biasing force of the return spring. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the protruding portion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring. However, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the protruding portion 603 may be moved to the extended position by the biasing force of the return spring. In this case, for example, staff members of a gaming establishment can disinfect the protruding portion 603 with alcohol before starting business or after ending business, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on (when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off).

[Movable Member Contact Demonstration B]
Next, the movable member contact effect B will be explained with reference to Figure 130. Figure 130 is a diagram illustrating the movable member contact effect B. The movable member contact effect B can be performed during the fluctuation. Note that in Figure 130, the touch switch 114 that detects contact with the handle 60, the firing volume 115 that detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60, etc., have been omitted.

First, as described above, the handle 60 is positioned at the lower right end of the front frame 53. As shown in Figures 130(A) and (B), the handle 60 is configured with a resin annular operating lever 601 rotatably mounted between a resin cylindrical handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602. The operating lever 601 is formed in an annular shape, and three finger-grip protrusions 601a are integrally formed on its outer circumferential surface. By placing the player's fingers between these three finger-grip protrusions 601a, the fingers can easily grip the lever 601 during rotation, making it easier to operate the lever.

The handle base is made of a colored, opaque (e.g., white) resin, the operating lever 601 is made of a colored, opaque (e.g., black, or the same color as the handle base (e.g., white)) resin, and the front cover 602 is made of a colorless, transparent resin. An inner lens is provided at the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate with multiple full-color LEDs mounted on it is provided behind the inner lens. The inner lens and decorative substrate have through holes that are larger than the outer circumference of the ribs 602aa in the portions corresponding to the ribs 602aa described later. In other words, the inner lens and decorative substrate are designed not to interfere with the protruding portion 603 described later.

The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, making it difficult to perceive the presence of the decorative substrate located behind it. Therefore, even when all the multiple full-color LEDs on the decorative substrate are switched off, these LEDs remain difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or semi-transparent.

When multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, causing the front cover 602 to emit light. This allows the illumination pattern of the front cover 602 to be changed depending on the illumination pattern of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate.

The operation of the handle 60 begins with the player gripping the handle 60 from the front, placing their fingers between the three finger-holding protrusions 601a. As the player rotates the operating lever 601 clockwise, the amount of rotation increases, increasing the launch force of the game balls. The launching device 112 then launches the game balls towards the game area 3, which is partitioned on the game board 2, with a launch force commensurate with the amount of rotation. When the player releases the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, the handle 60 rotates counterclockwise due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown), and the launch force of the game balls decreases. Furthermore, if the player continues to release the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, or if the player removes their palm from the handle 60, the operating lever 601 will return to its original position due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) attached to the handle 60, and the launch of the game balls will stop.

A large hole 602a is provided in the center of the spherical surface of the spherical shell-shaped front cover 602. Ribs 602aa are formed on the circumferential surface of the hole 602a, protruding by a predetermined distance (approximately 10 mm in this embodiment) toward the inner space (depth direction) of the front cover 602, resulting in a smooth inner circumferential surface of the hole 602a.

The internal space between the front cover 602 and the operating lever 601 is provided with a projection 603 that moves in the front-rear direction along the inner circumferential surface of the hole 602a from the internal space of the front cover 602. Furthermore, a front-rear movement mechanism 604 is provided, which includes an electrical drive source (e.g., a motor or solenoid) for moving the projection 603 in the front-rear direction along the inner circumferential surface of the hole 602a. In addition to the electrical drive source, the front-rear movement mechanism 604 includes, for example, a reduction gear to decelerate the motor's rotation when the electrical drive source is a motor, a motion conversion mechanism to convert the motor's rotational motion (reduced rotational motion) into linear motion of the projection 603, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the solenoid plunger to the linear motion of the projection 603 when the electrical drive source is a solenoid, and furthermore, a return spring, a contact spring constituting an overload prevention mechanism, etc., in addition to these mechanisms.

The protruding portion 603 can reciprocate between a retracted position (home position) and an extended position, and is formed from a flexible, opaque (e.g., red) material. As described above, the front cover 602 has an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate with multiple full-color LEDs mounted on it is provided behind the inner lens. However, even if the emission pattern of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate can change the emission pattern of the front cover 602, the emission pattern of the protruding portion 603 cannot be changed because it is opaque (e.g., red).

Multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate begin emitting light in a predetermined pattern before the timing of the activation of the protrusion 603 (the timing when the operation mode of the protrusion 603 begins) (for example, 5 seconds before the timing of the activation of the protrusion 603), and continue to emit light throughout the period until the operation of the protrusion 603 ends. In other words, the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate serve as a visual cue for the activation of the protrusion 603. The predetermined lighting patterns include blue, green, red, purple, golden (yellow), and rainbow colors, with the probability of winning increasing in the order of blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow colors (high probability of winning). In other words, the probability of winning due to the activation of the protrusion 603 can be indicated by the lighting patterns of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, which are housed inside the front cover 602.

When the protrusion 603 is positioned in the retracted position (home position), the front surface of the protrusion 603 is positioned on the inner circumferential surface of the hole 602a. Specifically, it is recessed in depth by a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, half the length of the rib 602aa (5 mm)) from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 in the depth direction (Figure 130(A)). This means that even when the player grips the handle 60 with their palm wrapped around the front and their fingers rest between the three finger-holding protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is in the retracted position (home position), preventing any contact between the player's palm and the tip of the protrusion 603. Furthermore, because the protrusion 603 is subjected to the biasing force of a return spring, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring.

In contrast, when the protrusion 603 is positioned in the extended position, it protrudes through the hole 602a from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 by a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, a maximum of approximately 10 mm) (Figure 130(B)). That is, when the player grips the handle 60 with their palm wrapped around it from the front, and places their fingers between the three finger-holding protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is in the extended position, causing the player's palm to contact the tip of the protrusion 603. Even if the player's palm contacts the tip of the protrusion 603, an overload prevention mechanism is provided in the forward/backward movement mechanism 604 to prevent overloading. This mechanism prevents the tip of the protrusion 603 in contact with the player's palm from moving further (preventing it from pulling the player's palm away from the handle 60). This overload prevention mechanism primarily consists of a contact spring.

One possible operation of the protruding portion 603 is for it to move from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then return to the retracted position (home position). Using this operation mode, for example, it is possible to achieve operation in which the protruding portion 603 maintains a protruding state in the extended position for a predetermined time, operation in which the protruding portion 603 intermittently protrudes to the extended position, or operation in which the protruding portion 603 continuously protrudes to the extended position and retracts to the retracted position (home position), similar to a piston motion.

Next, the timing at which the protrusion 603 is activated (the timing at which the operation mode of the protrusion 603 begins) will be explained. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern of the 3D image, the middle decorative pattern of the 3D image, and the right decorative pattern of the 3D image are displayed in a display mode in which a reel rotates from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative patterns begins, the stopped decorative patterns move slowly (at a low speed) in a display mode in which they float upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words, after the stop display of the decorative patterns is released, the decorative patterns are displayed in a state in which they are about to move), and then they move downwards, gradually increasing in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and becoming a display mode in which they vary at high speed. As a result, the background image placed behind the decorative patterns can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as either temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction. There are multiple background images for displaying the changing decorative pattern, and one of these background images is selected automatically.

As part of the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the fluctuating icons 9C corresponding to the currently fluctuating left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed (placed) on the fluctuating display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area for the first special symbol hold is provided in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the fluctuating display position 9Cd. Within this hold display area, four hold display positions 9A (above the rectangular image (base image)) are available for display (placement) of hold icons 9A, allowing for a maximum of four hold icons 9A to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9A are arranged linearly along the lower edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the fluctuating display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of the first hold display position 9A, the second hold display position 9A, the third hold display position 9A, and the fourth hold display position 9A.

The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9A both have a rectangular shape, but their sizes may be the same or different. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9A have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is larger than the size of the hold display position 9A (horizontal distance dimension) (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to allow distinction between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9A.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad, and no reserve icons are displayed at the second to fourth reserve display positions 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical reserve icon that has not been consumed and is still in stock. The following explanation assumes that no more game balls enter the first and second start ports 20 and 21 from this point onward.

To briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the different probability of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, among the six icons—a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon is the second highest, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest, the red spherical icon is the fourth highest, the blue spherical icon is the fifth highest, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

The decorative symbols begin to change (the display changes), then the left decorative symbol temporarily stops at the number "3" and moves slowly and gently up and down. The right decorative symbol then temporarily stops at the number "3" and moves slowly and gently up and down. The left and right decorative symbols then become identical (in this case, the number "3"), forming a winning combination. At this point, the middle decorative symbol continues to change (the display changes).

Next, when the battle sequence begins, allied characters appear from the right side of screen 7a, enemy characters appear from the left side of screen 7a, and a battle sequence unfolds in the center of screen 7a between the allied and enemy characters. The battle sequence is designed to have a high probability of resulting in a big win. During the battle sequence, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols disappear from screen 7a.

In the battle sequence, if the allied character wins and the enemy character loses, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display the same symbol (confirmation display), resulting in a win, and the winning game (win sequence) begins. Once a win is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon the end of the spin. Conversely, in the battle sequence, if the allied character loses and the enemy character wins, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display the same symbol (confirmation display), but they do not line up as the same symbol, resulting in a loss. In this case, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon the end of the spin.

During a battle sequence where allied and enemy characters are fighting, when the allied character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a button image resembling the performance button 63 is displayed near the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and a message image that says "Press and hold!" prompting the player to press the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image. The probability of winning increases in the order of "Press!" → "Press and hold!". In addition, a downward-pointing arrow image is displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and this arrow image repeatedly moves back and forth in the vertical direction, so that the arrow image can also prompt the player to press the performance button 63 (by pressing the press button part of the performance button 63 downwards). The button image, message image, and arrow image disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the performance button 63, or disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) if the player does not press the performance button 63.

When the performance button 63 is pressed, or when the performance button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 130(C), a first premium background image having seven colors (the so-called "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable mechanism 15 provided on the game board 2 moves from a stationary position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has elapsed, the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its advance position to its retreat position (home position), and a special victory background image indicating the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, shrinking as it moves away in the depth direction, and flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, resulting in an explosion. Subsequently, a special win background image indicating a win is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display as the same symbol (in this case, the number "3").

When the second movable component 15, located on the game board 2, starts moving from its stationary position (home position) above the image display device 7 towards the front (forward) position of the display screen 7a (advance position) of the image display device 7, the protruding portion 603 provided on the handle 60, located at the lower right end of the front frame 53, begins to operate.

In other words, the operation of the second movable mechanism 15 on the game board 2 and the operation of the protruding part 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 will be linked, causing both to begin moving in conjunction.

Specifically, when the second movable component 15 starts moving forward (to the front of the display screen 7a, which is in front of the display screen 7a and is in the center of the display screen 7a (the advanced position) from a stationary position above the image display device 7 (home position), the protruding portion 603 starts moving forward (to the advanced position) from the retracted position (home position). When the second movable component 15 stops at the advanced position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protruding portion 603 also stops at the advanced position for a predetermined time. After the predetermined time has elapsed, when the second movable component 15 starts moving back from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the protruding portion 603 also starts moving back from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position).

In this example, the operation of the protruding part 603 involved it moving from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position, stopping for a predetermined period, and then returning to the retracted position (home position). However, other operation modes are also possible. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protruding part 603. In other operation modes, the second movable component 15 moves from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 towards the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, towards the center of the display screen 7a (extended position), and then continuously operates throughout the operation period of the second movable component until it returns to the retracted position (home position).

Specifically, during the operation period of the second movable mechanism, the protruding portion 603 intermittently extends to the extended position (the protruding portion 603 repeatedly moves back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the extended position intermittently, rather than continuously). After the operation period of the second movable mechanism has elapsed, the protruding portion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position). Alternatively, during the operation period of the second movable mechanism, the protruding portion 603 continuously extends to the extended position and retracts to the retracted position (home position) like a piston (the protruding portion 603 repeatedly moves back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the extended position). After the operation period of the second movable mechanism has elapsed, the protruding portion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position).

As shown in Figure 130(C), when the performance button 63 is pressed, or when the performance button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a first premium background image with seven colors (the so-called "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the operation mode of the protruding part 603 provided on the handle 60 located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 (the protruding part 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position)) is started in conjunction with the operation of the second movable mechanism 15 provided on the game board 2. However, instead of the second movable mechanism 15, the operation mode of the protruding part 603 may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable mechanism 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the performance button 63 is pressed, or when the performance button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 130(D), a second premium background image (the so-called "second rainbow background image"), which is different from the first premium background image having seven colors as a background image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable mechanism 14 provided on the game board 2 moves from a stationary position (home position) to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and moves back and forth repeatedly in small increments in the left-right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has elapsed, the first movable mechanism 14 returns from its advance position to its retreat position (home position), and a special victory background image indicating the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, shrinks as it moves away in the depth direction, and flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, resulting in an explosion. Subsequently, a special win background image indicating a win is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display as the same symbol (in this case, the number "3").

When the first movable component 14, located on the game board 2, starts moving from its stationary position (home position) to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, towards the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, the protruding portion 603 provided on the handle 60, located at the lower right end of the front frame 53, begins to operate.

In other words, the operation of the first movable mechanism 14 on the game board 2 and the operation of the protruding part 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 will be linked, causing both to begin moving in conjunction.

Specifically, when the first movable component 14 starts moving forward (moving) from a stationary position (home position) to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the protruding portion 603 starts moving forward (moving) from the home position to the advance position. Then, in conjunction with the first movable component 14 repeatedly moving back and forth in small increments in the left-right direction at the advance position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protruding portion 603 stops at the advance position for a predetermined time. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the first movable component 14 starts moving back from the advance position to the home position, and in conjunction with this, the protruding portion 603 starts moving back from the advance position to the home position.

In this example, the operation of the protruding part 603 involved it moving from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position, stopping for a predetermined period, and then returning to the retracted position (home position). However, other operation modes are also possible. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protruding part 603. In other operation modes, the first movable component 14 moves from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7, towards the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then continuously moves until it returns to the retracted position (home position) for the duration of the first movable component's operation.

Specifically, during the first movable mechanism operation period, the protruding part 603 intermittently protrudes (the protruding part 603 repeatedly moves back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the extended position, but intermittently, rather than continuously). After the first movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, the protruding part 603 returns to the retracted position (home position). Alternatively, during the first movable mechanism operation period, the protruding part 603 may continuously protrude and retract, similar to a piston motion (the protruding part 603 repeatedly moves back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the extended position). After the first movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, the protruding part 603 returns to the retracted position (home position).

In the above-described embodiment, as mentioned above, the protruding portion 603 is subjected to the biasing force of the return spring. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the protruding portion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring. Furthermore, the protruding portion 603 will not extend to the extended position unless it is at the timing when the protruding portion 603 is activated (the timing when the operation mode of the protruding portion 603 is started). For this reason, even if a player who is about to start playing or an employee of the gaming hall disinfects the handle 60 with alcohol, they cannot disinfect the protruding portion 603 with alcohol. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a demo performance for customers is being played, the protruding portion 603 is in the extended position, and when the demo performance for customers is finished, the protruding portion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position). During a demonstration for customers, when the protruding part 603 is extended to its extended position, if a player or an employee of the arcade touches the handle 60, the protruding part 603 is returned to its retracted position (home position) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the player or employee touched the handle 60 (for example, approximately 5 seconds, which is enough time to disinfect the protruding part 603 with alcohol).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as mentioned above, the protruding portion 603 is subjected to the biasing force of the return spring. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the protruding portion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring. However, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the protruding portion 603 may be moved to the extended position by the biasing force of the return spring. In this case, for example, staff members of a gaming establishment can disinfect the protruding portion 603 with alcohol before starting business or after ending business, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on (when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off).

[Movable Member Contact Demonstration C]
Next, the movable member contact effect C will be explained with reference to Figure 131. Figure 131 is a diagram illustrating the movable member contact effect C. The movable member contact effect C can be performed during the fluctuation. Note that in Figure 131, the touch switch 114 that detects contact with the handle 60, the firing volume 115 that detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60, etc., have been omitted.

First, as described above, the handle 60 is positioned at the lower right end of the front frame 53. As shown in Figures 131(A) and (B), the handle 60 is configured with a resin annular operating lever 601 rotatably mounted between a resin cylindrical handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602. The operating lever 601 is formed in an annular shape, and three finger-grip protrusions 601a are integrally formed on its outer circumferential surface. By placing the player's fingers between these three finger-grip protrusions 601a, the fingers can easily grip the protrusions 601a when rotating the operating lever 601, making rotation easier.

The handle base is made of a colored, opaque (e.g., white) resin, the operating lever 601 is made of a colored, opaque (e.g., black, or the same color as the handle base (e.g., white)) resin, and the front cover 602 is made of a colorless, transparent resin. An inner lens is provided at the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative circuit board with multiple full-color LEDs mounted on it is provided behind the inner lens.

The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, making it difficult to perceive the presence of the decorative substrate located behind it. Therefore, even when all the multiple full-color LEDs on the decorative substrate are switched off, these LEDs remain difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or semi-transparent.

When multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, causing the front cover 602 to emit light. This allows the illumination pattern of the front cover 602 to be changed depending on the illumination pattern of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate.

The operation of the handle 60 begins with the player gripping the handle 60 from the front, placing their fingers between the three finger-holding protrusions 601a. As the player rotates the operating lever 601 clockwise, the amount of rotation increases, increasing the launch force of the game balls. The launching device 112 then launches the game balls towards the game area 3, which is partitioned on the game board 2, with a launch force commensurate with the amount of rotation. When the player releases the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, the handle 60 rotates counterclockwise due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown), and the launch force of the game balls decreases. Furthermore, if the player continues to release the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, or if the player removes their palm from the handle 60, the operating lever 601 will return to its original position due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) attached to the handle 60, and the launch of the game balls will stop.

The front frame 53 surrounding the handle 60 (i.e., around the handle 60) is provided with movable frame elements 69a to 69d. In other words, the movable frame elements 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60. While Figure 1 showed that the right and left sides of the handle 60 had movable frame elements 69 (also called movable frame components 69), here the movable frame elements 69a to 69d are formed in the shape of flower petals surrounding the handle 60.

The front frame 53 is equipped with a rotational movement mechanism 534 that includes not only frame movable bodies 69a to 69d formed in the shape of flower petals, but also an electrical drive source (e.g., a motor or solenoid) for rotating the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d between a bud state and a blooming state. In addition to the electrical drive source, the rotational movement mechanism 534 includes, for example, a reduction gear to decelerate the motor's rotation when the electrical drive source is a motor, a motion conversion mechanism to convert the motor's rotational motion (the rotational motion after decelerating the motor's rotation) into the rotational motion of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the solenoid plunger to the rotational motion of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d when the electrical drive source is a solenoid, and furthermore, a return spring, a contact spring constituting an overload prevention mechanism, etc., in addition to these mechanisms.

The movable frame members 69a to 69d are capable of reciprocating between a retracted position (home position) and an extended position, and are each formed from a flexible, opaque (e.g., red) material. As described above, the front cover 602 has an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate with multiple full-color LEDs mounted on it is provided behind the inner lens. However, even if the emission pattern of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate could be changed to alter the emission pattern of the front cover 602, the movable frame members 69a to 69d are provided separately from the handle 60 on the front frame 53, and furthermore, because the movable frame members 69a to 69d are opaque (e.g., red), it is not possible to change the emission pattern of the movable frame members 69a to 69d.

Multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board begin emitting light in a predetermined pattern before the frame movable parts 69a to 69d are activated (for example, 5 seconds before the frame movable parts 69a to 69d are activated), and continue emitting light for the duration until the frame movable parts 69a to 69d are activated. In other words, the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board serve as a visual cue to the activation of the frame movable parts 69a to 69d. The predetermined lighting patterns include blue, green, red, purple, golden (yellow), and rainbow colors, with the probability of winning increasing in the order of blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow colors (high probability of winning). In other words, the expected probability of a win, based on the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, which are provided separately on the front frame 53 from the handle 60, can be indicated by the light emission patterns of multiple full-color LEDs mounted on a decorative substrate housed inside the front cover 602 of the handle 60.

When the movable frame members 69a to 69d are positioned in the retracted position (home position), they are in the open state (state shown in Figure 131(A)). Even when the player grips the handle 60 with their palm wrapped around the front and places their fingers between the three finger-holding protrusions 601a, the movable frame members 69a to 69d are in the open state, so the back of the player's hand and fingers do not come into contact with the inner surface of the movable frame members 69a to 69d. Furthermore, because the movable frame members 69a to 69d are subject to the biasing force of a return spring, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the movable frame members 69a to 69d are returned to the open state by the biasing force of the return spring.

In contrast, when the movable frame members 69a to 69d are positioned in the extended position, they are positioned in a bud state (the state shown in Figure 131(B)). When the player grips the handle 60 with their palm wrapped around it from the front and places their fingers between the three finger-holding protrusions 601a, the movable frame members 69a to 69d are positioned in a bud state, so the back of the player's hand and fingers are covered by the movable frame members 69a to 69d and come into contact with the inner circumferential surface of the movable frame members 69a to 69d. Even if the back of the player's hand and fingers come into contact with the inner circumferential surface of the movable frame members 69a to 69d, an overload prevention mechanism is provided in the rotating movement mechanism 534 to prevent the rotating movement mechanism 534 from becoming overloaded. This mechanism prevents the inner circumferential surface of the movable frame members 69a to 69d that are in contact with the back of the player's hand and fingers from further compressing the back of the player's hand and fingers. This overload protection mechanism is primarily composed of contact springs.

One mode of operation for the movable frame members 69a to 69d is to move from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then return to the retracted position (home position). Using this mode of operation, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the movable frame members 69a to 69d protrude to the extended position for a predetermined time and maintain the bud state, or to realize an operation in which the movable frame members 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the extended position and maintain the bud state, or to realize an operation in which the movable frame members 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the extended position to maintain the bud state or retract to the retracted position (home position) and maintain the bloom state, and of the movable frame members 69a to 69d, first the left movable frame member 69c, the upper movable frame member 69a, the right movable frame member 69d, and then the lower The movable frame members 69a to 69d can move clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position in the order of frame movable member 69b, then 69c, then 69b, then 69d, and then 69a, and after that, all frame movable members 69a to 69d can simultaneously return to the retracted position (home position). Alternatively, the movable frame members 69a to 69d can move counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position in the order of frame movable member 69c, then 69b, then 69d, then 69a, and after that, all frame movable members 69a to 69d can simultaneously return to the retracted position (home position).

Next, we will explain the timing at which the movable frame members 69a to 69d are activated (the timing at which the operation mode of the movable frame members 69a to 69d begins). First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern of the 3D image, the middle decorative pattern of the 3D image, and the right decorative pattern of the 3D image are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative patterns begins, the stopped decorative patterns move slowly (at a low speed) in a display mode in which they float upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words, after the stopped display of the decorative patterns is released, the decorative patterns are displayed in a manner in which they are about to move), and then they move downwards, gradually increasing in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and becoming a display mode in which they vary at high speed. This allows the background image, positioned behind the decorative pattern, to be visible through the rapidly changing, semi-transparent decorative pattern. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from semi-transparent to opaque again, and is displayed as either temporarily stopped or fully stopped (temporarily stopped, then fully stopped). When temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern moves slowly and subtly in the vertical direction. Multiple background images are available for displaying the changing decorative pattern, and one of these images is selected automatically.

As part of the consumption of the first special symbol hold, the fluctuating icons 9C corresponding to the currently fluctuating left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed (placed) on the fluctuating display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area for the first special symbol hold is provided in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the fluctuating display position 9Cd. Within this hold display area, four hold display positions 9A (above the rectangular image (base image)) are available for display (placement) of hold icons 9A, allowing for a maximum of four hold icons 9A to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9A are arranged linearly along the lower edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the fluctuating display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of the first hold display position 9A, the second hold display position 9A, the third hold display position 9A, and the fourth hold display position 9A.

The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9A both have a rectangular shape, but their sizes may be the same or different. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9A have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is larger than the size of the hold display position 9A (horizontal distance dimension) (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to allow distinction between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9A.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad, and no reserve icons are displayed at the second to fourth reserve display positions 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical reserve icon that has not been consumed and is still in stock. The following explanation assumes that no more game balls enter the first and second start ports 20 and 21 from this point onward.

To briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the different probability of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, among the six icons—a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon is the second highest, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest, the red spherical icon is the fourth highest, the blue spherical icon is the fifth highest, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

The decorative symbols begin to change (the display changes), then the left decorative symbol temporarily stops at the number "8" and moves slowly and gently up and down. The right decorative symbol then temporarily stops at the number "8" and moves slowly and gently up and down. Finally, the left and right decorative symbols become identical (in this case, the number "8"), forming a winning combination. At this point, the middle decorative symbol continues to change (the display changes).

Next, when the battle sequence begins, allied characters appear from the right side of screen 7a, enemy characters appear from the left side of screen 7a, and a battle sequence unfolds in the center of screen 7a between the allied and enemy characters. The battle sequence is designed to have a high probability of resulting in a big win. During the battle sequence, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols disappear from screen 7a.

In the battle sequence, if the allied character wins and the enemy character loses, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display the same symbol (confirmation display), resulting in a win, and the winning game (win sequence) begins. Once a win is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon the end of the spin. Conversely, in the battle sequence, if the allied character loses and the enemy character wins, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display the same symbol (confirmation display), but they do not line up as the same symbol, resulting in a loss. In this case, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon the end of the spin.

During a battle sequence where allied and enemy characters are fighting, when the allied character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a button image resembling the performance button 63 is displayed near the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and a message image that says "Press repeatedly!" prompting the player to press the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image. The probability of winning increases in the order of "Press!" → "Press repeatedly!" → "Hold down!". In addition, a downward-pointing arrow image is displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and this arrow image repeatedly moves back and forth in the vertical direction, so that the arrow image can also prompt the player to press the performance button 63 (by pressing the press button part of the performance button 63 downwards). The button image, message image, and arrow image disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the performance button 63, or disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) if the player does not press the performance button 63.

When the performance button 63 is pressed, or when the performance button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 131(C), a first premium background image having seven colors (the so-called "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable mechanism 15 provided on the game board 2 moves from a stationary position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has elapsed, the second movable mechanism 15 returns from its advance position to its retreat position (home position), and a special victory background image indicating the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, shrinking as it moves away in the depth direction, and flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, resulting in an explosion. Subsequently, a special win background image indicating a win is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display as the same symbol (in this case, the number "8").

When the second movable component 15, installed on the game board 2, starts moving from a stationary position above the image display device 7 (home position) towards the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position), the movement of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d installed on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 begins in conjunction with this movement.

In other words, the operation of the second movable mechanism 15 on the game board 2 and the operation of the frame movable parts 69a to 69d, which are separately installed on the front frame 53 from the handle 60, will be linked and begin to move accordingly.

Specifically, when the second movable component 15 starts moving forward (to the front of the display screen 7a, which is in front of the display screen 7a and is in the center of the display screen 7a (the advanced position) from a stationary position above the image display device 7 (home position), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d start moving forward (to the advanced position) from the home position. When the second movable component 15 stops at the advanced position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d stop at the advanced position for a predetermined time, entering a bud state. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the second movable component 15 starts moving back from the advanced position to the home position, and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d start moving back from the advanced position to the home position.

Here, the operating mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d was such that they moved from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position, stopped for a predetermined period of time, and then returned to the retracted position (home position). Of course, other operating modes are also possible. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operating mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. In other operating modes, the second movable component 15 moves from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, toward the center position of the display screen 7a (extended position), and then continues to operate continuously for the duration of the second movable component's operation until it returns to the retracted position (home position).

Specifically, during the operation period of the second movable mechanism, the frame movable parts 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the extended position to create a bud state (the frame movable parts 69a to 69d repeatedly move back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the extended position intermittently, rather than continuously). After the operation period of the second movable mechanism has elapsed, the frame movable parts 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position), or during the operation period of the second movable mechanism, the frame movable parts 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the extended position to create a bud state or retract to the retracted position (home position) to create a bloom state (the frame movable parts 69a to 69d repeatedly move back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the extended position continuously). After the operation period of the second movable mechanism has elapsed, the frame movable parts 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position). Alternatively, during the operation period of the second movable mechanism, the movable frame units 69a to 69d move clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position in the following order: first the left movable frame unit 69c, then the upper movable frame unit 69a, then the right movable frame unit 69d, and finally the lower movable frame unit 69b. Once the operation period of the second movable mechanism has elapsed, all the movable frame units 69a to 69d simultaneously return to the retracted position (home position). Or, during the operation period of the second movable mechanism, the movable frame units 69a to 69d move counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position in the following order: first the left movable frame unit 69c, then the lower movable frame unit 69b, then the right movable frame unit 69d, and finally the upper movable frame unit 69a. Once the operation period of the second movable mechanism has elapsed, all the movable frame units 69a to 69d simultaneously return to the retracted position (home position).

As shown in Figure 131(C), when the performance button 63 is pressed, or when the performance button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a first premium background image with seven colors (the so-called "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the movement of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 (the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position, stop for a predetermined period of time, and then return to the retracted position (home position)) is initiated in conjunction with the operation of the second movable mechanism 15 provided on the game board 2. However, instead of the second movable mechanism 15, the movement of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be initiated in conjunction with the operation of the first movable mechanism 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the performance button 63 is pressed, or when the performance button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 131(D), a second premium background image (the so-called "second rainbow background image"), which is different from the first premium background image having seven colors as a background image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable mechanism 14 provided on the game board 2 moves from a stationary position (home position) to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and moves back and forth repeatedly in small increments in the left-right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has elapsed, the first movable mechanism 14 returns from its advance position to its retreat position (home position), and a special victory background image indicating the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, shrinks as it moves away in the depth direction, and flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, resulting in an explosion. Subsequently, a special win background image indicating a win is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stop and display as the same symbol (in this case, the number "8").

When the first movable component 14, installed on the game board 2, starts moving from a stationary position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 towards the front (forward) position of the display screen 7a (advance position) of the image display device 7, the movement of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d installed on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 begins in conjunction with this movement.

In other words, the operation of the first movable mechanism 14 on the game board 2 and the operation of the frame movable parts 69a to 69d, which are separately installed on the front frame 53 and located on the handle 60, will be linked and begin to move accordingly.

Specifically, when the first movable component 14 starts moving from a stationary position (home position) to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, the movable frame members 69a to 69d start moving from the home position toward the advance position. Then, in conjunction with the first movable component 14 repeatedly moving back and forth in small increments in the left-right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the movable frame members 69a to 69d stop at the advance position for a predetermined time, becoming bud-like. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the first movable component 14 starts moving back from the advance position to the home position, and in conjunction with this, the movable frame members 69a to 69d start moving back from the advance position to the home position.

Here, the operation mode of the movable frame units 69a to 69d was such that they moved from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position, stopped for a predetermined period of time, and then returned to the retracted position (home position). Of course, other operation modes are also possible. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the movable frame units 69a to 69d. In other operation modes, the first movable component 14 moves from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7, towards the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, towards the center position of the display screen 7a (extended position), and then continues to operate continuously for the duration of the first movable component's operation until it returns to the retracted position (home position).

Specifically, during the first movable mechanism operation period, the movable frame members 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the extended position to create a bud state (the movable frame members 69a to 69d repeatedly move back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the extended position intermittently, rather than continuously). After the first movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, the movable frame members 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position), or during the first movable mechanism operation period, the movable frame members 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the extended position to create a bud state or retract to the retracted position (home position) to create a bloom state (the movable frame members 69a to 69d repeatedly move back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the extended position). After the first movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, the movable frame members 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position). Alternatively, during the first movable mechanism operation period, the movable frame units 69a to 69d move clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position in the following order: first the left movable frame unit 69c, then the upper movable frame unit 69a, then the right movable frame unit 69d, and finally the lower movable frame unit 69b. Once the first movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, all movable frame units 69a to 69d simultaneously return to the retracted position (home position). Alternatively, during the first movable mechanism operation period, the movable frame units 69a to 69d move counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position in the following order: first the left movable frame unit 69c, then the lower movable frame unit 69b, then the right movable frame unit 69d, and finally the upper movable frame unit 69a. Once the first movable mechanism operation period has elapsed, all movable frame units 69a to 69d simultaneously return to the retracted position (home position).

In the above-described embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame movable parts 69a to 69d are subjected to the biasing force of the return springs. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the frame movable parts 69a to 69d are returned to their open state by the biasing force of the return springs. This allows players who are about to start playing, or staff members of the gaming establishment, to disinfect the handle 60 with alcohol, as well as the frame movable parts 69a to 69d.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as described above, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are subjected to the biasing force of the return springs. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are returned to the bloomed state by the biasing force of the return springs. However, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be moved to the extended position by the biasing force of the return springs to the budded state. Even with this configuration, as described above, even if the player's hand back or fingers come into contact with the inner circumferential surface of the movable frame members 69a to 69d, the rotational movement mechanism 534 is not overloaded. This is because the rotational movement mechanism 534 is equipped with an overload prevention mechanism that prevents the inner circumferential surface of the movable frame members 69a to 69d, which are in contact with the player's hand back or fingers, from further compressing the player's hand back or fingers. Therefore, even if a player about to start playing, or an employee of the gaming hall, inserts their fingers into the contact area between the handle 60 and the movable frame members 69a to 69d to disinfect the handle 60 with alcohol, the inner circumferential surface of the handle 60 and the movable frame members 69a to 69d can be disinfected with alcohol against the biasing force of the contact spring that constitutes the overload prevention mechanism.

[Example of effect]
The following shows examples of the effects of the movable member contact effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact performance A in Figure 129 and the movable member contact performance B in Figure 130, the machine is equipped with a handle 60 (operating means) that can be operated by the player, and has a movable protrusion 603 (movable member) that is operated by an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid. When the protrusion 603 (movable member) is activated and starts to move, a first performance (Figure 129(B) in the movable member contact performance A, and Figure 130(B) in the movable member contact performance B) can be performed in which the protrusion 603 (movable member) can come into contact with the hand of the player operating the handle 60 (operating means). With this configuration, even if movable parts such as the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 installed on the game board in the conventional way start to move, these movable parts do not come into contact with the player at all. However, when the player grips the handle 60 (operating means) with their palm wrapped around the front and the protruding part 603 (movable part) starts to move, the player's hand suddenly comes into contact with the protruding part 603. This provides the player with a novel and unprecedented experience of contact between the protruding part 603 (movable part) and the player. Therefore, the level of enjoyment can be increased.
Furthermore, in the movable member contact performance C shown in Figure 131, the machine is equipped with a handle 60 (operating means) that can be operated by the player, and has movable frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) that are operated by an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid. When the movable frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are operated and start to move, a first performance (Figure 131(B) in the movable member contact performance C) can be performed in which the movable frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) can come into contact with the hand of the player operating the handle 60 (operating means). With this configuration, even if movable parts such as the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 installed on the game board in the conventional way start to move, these movable parts do not come into contact with the player at all. However, when the movable frame parts 69a to 69d (movable parts) start to move while the player is gripping the handle 60 (operating means) with their palm wrapped around the front, the player's hand suddenly comes into contact with the movable frame parts 69a to 69d (movable parts). This provides the player with a novel and unprecedented experience of contact between the movable frame parts 69a to 69d (movable parts) and the player. Therefore, the level of enjoyment can be increased.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A in Figure 129 and the movable member contact effect B in Figure 130, the handle 60 (operating means) and the protruding part 603 (movable member), or in the movable member contact effect C in Figure 131, the handle 60 (operating means) and the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are provided on the front frame 53 side of the gaming machine 1. With this configuration, the player can directly touch the movable member, which can contribute to increasing the player's motivation to play.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A in Figure 129 and the movable member contact effect B in Figure 130, the protruding part 603 (movable member) is provided inside the handle 60 (operating means), making it difficult for it to come into contact with the player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means) in the retracted position (home position) (first position), and allowing it to come into contact with the player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means) in the extended position (second position). With this configuration, it is possible to control whether the protruding part 603 (movable member) is in contact with the player's hand or not. By shifting the control from a state where the protruding part 603 (movable member) is not in contact with the player's hand to a state where it is in contact, it is possible to create an impactful effect that surprises the player (creates a sense of tension).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect C shown in Figure 131, the movable frame members 69a to 69d (movable members) are provided outside the handle 60 (operating means), and do not cover the player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means) in the retracted position (home position) (first position), but cover the player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means) in the extended position (second position). With this configuration, it is possible to control whether the movable frame members 69a to 69d (movable members) are in contact with the player's hand or not. By transitioning the control from a state where the movable frame members 69a to 69d (movable members) are not in contact with the player's hand to a state where they are in contact, it is possible to create an impactful effect that surprises the player (adds tension).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a game board 2 is provided that can be seen through an opening formed in the center of the front frame 53. The game board 2 is provided with a first movable component 14 (game board side movable member) and a second movable component 15 (game board side movable member). For example, in the movable component contact effect A in Figure 129 and the movable component contact effect B in Figure 130, the first effect can start moving in conjunction with the operation of a protrusion 603 (movable member) provided on the front frame 53 side and the operation of the first movable component 14 (game board side movable member) and the second movable component 15 (game board side movable member) provided on the game board 2 (Figures 129(C) and (D) for the movable component contact effect A, and Figures 130(C) and (D) for the movable component contact effect B). With this configuration, even when the movable member on the game board, as in the conventional method, is activated, it is possible to surprise the player. However, by linking the operation of the protrusion 603 (movable member) provided on the front frame 53 with the operation of the first movable mechanism 14 (movable member on the game board) and the second movable mechanism 15 (movable member on the game board) provided on the game board 2, it is possible to surprise the player more (create more tension) and realize a novel presentation compared to when only the movable member on the game board, as in the conventional method, is activated.
Furthermore, in the movable member contact effect C shown in Figure 131, the first effect can be initiated in conjunction with the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) provided on the front frame 53 side and the operation of the first movable mechanism 14 (movable member on the game board side) and the second movable mechanism 15 (movable member on the game board side) provided on the game board 2 (Figures 131(C) and (D) for the movable member contact effect C). With this configuration, even when the movable members on the game board, as in the conventional method, were activated, it was possible to surprise the player. However, by linking the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) provided on the front frame 53 side with the operation of the first movable mechanism 14 (movable member on the game board) and the second movable mechanism 15 (movable member on the game board) provided on the game board 2, it is possible to surprise the player more (create more tension) and realize a novel presentation compared to when only the movable members on the game board, as in the conventional method, are activated.

[Variations]
The following shows a modified example of the movable member contact effect.
[Variation 1]
In the movable member contact animation A in Figure 129, the movable member contact animation B in Figure 130, and the movable member contact animation C in Figure 131, the animation was performed based on the game ball entering the first start opening 20. In other words, it was performed in the so-called left-handed playing state. However, it may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second start opening 21. In other words, it may also be performed in the so-called right-handed playing state.

[Modified example 2]
In the movable member contact effect A in Figure 129 and the movable member contact effect B in Figure 130, when the protruding part 603 (movable member) is activated and starts to move, the protruding part 603 (movable member) can come into contact with the hand of the player operating the handle 60 (operating means). Also, in the movable member contact effect C in Figure 131, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are activated and start to move, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) can come into contact with the hand of the player operating the handle 60 (operating means). However, instead of such movable members, something that represents the world view of the effects unfolded in the game machine 1 may be used. For example, it may be an item or part of an item held by a character, or a part of a character (e.g., wings, fangs, claws, fingers, scales, etc.).

[Modification 3]
In the movable member contact effect A in Figure 129 and the movable member contact effect B in Figure 130, when the protruding part 603 (movable member) is activated and starts to move, the protruding part 603 (movable member) can come into contact with the hand of the player operating the handle 60 (operating means). Also, in the movable member contact effect C in Figure 131, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are activated and start to move, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) can come into contact with the hand of the player operating the handle 60 (operating means). However, instead of such movable members, a colorless, transparent resin capsule that is divided into left and right halves may be provided to cover the effect button 63, and the left and right capsules, which are divided and movable, may be used as movable members.

Specifically, the left and right capsules are located on the front frame 53. When the left and right capsules are retracted to a home position covering the performance button 63, the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule are in surface contact and joined together on a vertical line passing through the center of the performance button 63. When the left and right capsules are extended to an advance position that opens the performance button 63, the left capsule moves horizontally to the left of the vertical line passing through the center of the performance button 63, causing its right end to move significantly away from the left end of the performance button 63. Furthermore, the right capsule moves horizontally to the right of the vertical line passing through the center of the performance button 63, causing its left end to move significantly away from the right end of the performance button 63.

The front frame 53 is equipped with a rotational movement mechanism that includes an electrical drive source (e.g., a motor or solenoid) for retracting the left and right capsules to their retracted position (home position) and extending them to their extended position, in addition to the electrical drive source. The rotational movement mechanism also includes, for example, a reduction gear to decelerate the motor's rotation and a motion conversion mechanism to convert the motor's rotational motion (reduced rotational motion) into the parallel movement motion of the left and right capsules when the electrical drive source is a motor; a mechanism to transmit the linear motion of the solenoid plunger to the parallel movement motion of the left and right capsules when the electrical drive source is a solenoid; and, in addition to these mechanisms, a return spring and contact springs constituting an overload prevention mechanism.

When the left and right capsules are positioned in their retracted (home) positions, they cover the performance button 63. Even if a player attempts to press the performance button 63, the left and right capsules prevent this. Furthermore, because the left and right capsules are subjected to the biasing force of a return spring, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during gameplay and the power is cut off, the biasing force of the return spring causes the left and right capsules to retract to their retracted (home) positions, covering the performance button 63.

In contrast, when the left and right capsules are positioned in their advance positions, they are positioned to open the performance button 63. In this state, the player can press the performance button 63 without being blocked by the left and right capsules. Furthermore, to prevent overloading of the rotational movement mechanism even if the player's hand comes into contact with the right edge of the left capsule or the left edge of the right capsule when pressing the performance button 63, an overload prevention mechanism is provided in the rotational movement mechanism. This mechanism allows the right edge of the left capsule and the left edge of the right capsule, which are in contact with the player's hand, to move in parallel to prevent further pressure on the player's hand. This overload prevention mechanism primarily consists of a contact spring.

The left and right capsules can operate in a manner where they move from the retracted position (home position) to the extended position and then return to the retracted position (home position). Using this operation, it is possible to, for example, achieve an operation where the left and right capsules move to the extended position for a predetermined time, maintaining the state in which the performance button 63 is open; or an operation where the left and right capsules intermittently move to the extended position, opening the performance button 63; or an operation where the left and right capsules continuously move to the extended position, opening the performance button 63, or retract to the retracted position (home position), closing the performance button 63.

When the left and right capsules begin to operate, if the player is pressing the performance button 63 (e.g., repeatedly pressing or holding it), the left and right capsules move to their retracted position (home position), which may cause the player's hands to come into contact with the right edge of the left capsule and the left edge of the right capsule. Therefore, unlike conventional game boards where the movable member on the game board never touches the player, when the left and right capsules move to their extended position and the performance button 63 is released, and the player is pressing the performance button 63, the left and right capsules begin to move to their retracted position (home position). This suddenly causes the player's hands to come into contact with the right edge of the left capsule and the left edge of the right capsule. This provides the player with a novel and unprecedented experience of contact between the left and right capsules (movable members) and the player. Therefore, the entertainment value can be enhanced.

[Modification 4]
In the movable member contact effect A in Figure 129 and the movable member contact effect B in Figure 130, the protruding portion 603 was formed from a flexible material that was colored and opaque (for example, red). However, the protruding portion 603 may also be formed from a colored (monochromatic or multicolored) translucent flexible material, or from a colorless and transparent flexible material. In this case, a decorative substrate for the protruding portion that causes the protruding portion 603 to light up is housed inside the handle 60. Multiple full-color LEDs are mounted on the decorative substrate for the protruding portion, and the protruding portion 603 lights up when the full-color LEDs light up. In other words, the light-emitting pattern of the protruding portion 603 can be changed by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protruding portion. In addition, an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape is provided on the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602 of the handle 60, and a decorative substrate with multiple full-color LEDs mounted on it is provided behind the inner lens. Therefore, a partition plate is formed inside the handle 60 to prevent interference (mutual influence) between the light emitted by multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protruding part and the light emitted by multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed inside the front cover 602. In addition, a light guide member is provided at the lower end of the protruding part 603. When light emitted by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protruding part enters the lower end of the light guide member, it enters the lower end of the protruding part 603 via the upper end of the light guide member and exits from the upper end of the protruding part 603, causing the upper end of the protruding part 603 and the surrounding side surfaces (the front surface of the protruding part 603 and its surrounding side surfaces) to emit light.
Furthermore, in the movable member contact effect C shown in Figure 131, the movable frame members 69a to 69d were formed from a flexible material that was colored opaque (for example, red). However, the movable frame members 69a to 69d may also be formed from a flexible material that is colored (monochromatic or multicolored), translucent, or a flexible material that is colorless and transparent. In this case, a decorative substrate for the protruding part that causes the movable frame members 69a to 69d to emit light is housed inside the front frame 53. Multiple full-color LEDs are mounted on the decorative substrate for the protruding part, and the movable frame members 69a to 69d emit light when the full-color LEDs emit light. In other words, the light emission pattern of the movable frame members 69a to 69d can be changed by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protruding part. Although an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape is provided on the frontmost side of the handle 60, which is housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate with multiple full-color LEDs mounted on it is provided behind the inner lens, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are provided separately from the handle 60 on the front frame 53, so the light emitted by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protruding part on the front frame 53 side does not interfere with (does not affect each other) the light emitted by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed inside the front cover 602 on the handle 60 side.

[Modified example 5]
In the movable member contact effect C shown in Figure 131, the movable frame members 69a to 69d were provided on the front frame 53 on the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the handle 60 (i.e., around the handle 60). In other words, the movable frame members 69a to 69d were provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60. These movable frame members 69a to 69d were formed with the motif of flower petals surrounding the handle 60. However, one or both of the movable frame members 69 (also called movable frame parts 69), which are movable gimmicks, on the right and left sides of the handle 60 as shown in Figure 1 may be activated. In this way, when the player is gripping the handle 60 (operating means) with their palm wrapped around it from the front, the player's hand can suddenly come into contact with the movable frame member 69 (movable frame part 69), thus providing the player with a novel and unprecedented effect of contact between the movable frame member 69 (movable frame part 69) and the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification 6]
In the movable member contact effect A in Figure 129, the movable member contact effect B in Figure 130, and the movable member contact effect C in Figure 131, some of the effects described may not be included, or other effects may be added.

[Example of configuration]
The following aspects can be realized in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
◇[Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player,
It has a movable member that is operated by an electrical drive source,
When the movable member is activated and begins to move, a first performance is performed in which the movable member can come into contact with the hand of the player operating the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine described in embodiment D6-1,
The operating means and the movable member are provided on the front frame side of the gaming machine.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect D6-3]
A gaming machine according to embodiment D6-1 or embodiment D6-2,
The movable member is provided inside the operating means, and in the first position it is difficult for the player's hand operating the operating means to come into contact with it, and in the second position it is possible for the player's hand operating the operating means to come into contact with it.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect D6-4]
A gaming machine according to embodiment D6-1 or embodiment D6-2,
The movable member is provided outside the operating means and, in the first position, does not cover the player's hand operating the operating means, and in the second position, covers the player's hand operating the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

◇[Aspect D6-5]
A gaming machine described in any one of the descriptions D6-2 to D6-4,
The front frame is equipped with a game board that can be seen through an opening formed in the center of the front frame,
The aforementioned game board is provided with a game board side movable member,
The first performance is characterized in that the operation of the movable member and the operation of the movable member on the game board side begin to move in conjunction with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

[Other variations]
In the various display effects described above, configurations that do not include some of the effects, or that include effects other than those described above, are also acceptable.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment was described using a pachinko machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a slot machine or other revolving gaming machine, an arrangement ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine instead of a pachinko machine. If the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming tokens.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the player operates the performance button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68. However, the machine is not limited to these, and a lever or trigger may also be used as the player's operating part. Furthermore, in the display effects of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effects may be executed using a button image representing the performance button 63. Alternatively, the display effects may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65, or using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment was a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for dispensing balls, but it is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called sealed-type gaming machine, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses a display device (main display screen 7a, sub-display screen 64, etc.) to perform various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form a single display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described examples of effects and/or variations may be combined.
Furthermore, although the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effects that are performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, or the display effects that are performed on the sub-display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

The embodiments described above have been explained based on the embodiments and modifications described above. However, the embodiments described above are for the purpose of facilitating understanding of the embodiments and do not limit them. The embodiments may be modified and improved without departing from their spirit or the scope of the claims, and equivalent embodiments are included.

1... Gaming machine 3... Gaming area 5... Panel lamps 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reserved image (reserved icon)
9C...The pending image (pending icon)
14...First movable mechanism 15...Second movable mechanism 17...Large prize opening start gate 20...First start gate (first ball entry gate)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64...Sub-display screen 69...Movable frame mechanism 66...Frame lamp 81...Microcontroller for game control 91...Microcontroller for effect control 101...Microcontroller for image control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
In some cases, a second display effect may be performed as one of the aforementioned multiple display effects.
The first display effect is an effect in which a first timer display in which a numerical value is displayed in a first manner,
The second display effect is an effect in which a second timer display is shown in which a numerical value is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner ,
The first display effect and the second display effect are performed during the same variation effect.
The update rate of the smallest digit of the number displayed in the first timer display is different from the update rate of the smallest digit of the number displayed in the second timer display.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.